Author(s) Naval Postgraduate School (U.S.)

Title Catalogue 1977-1978

Publisher Monterey, California. Naval Postgraduate School

Issue Date 1977

URL http://hdl.handle.net/10945/31688

This document was downloaded on May 22, 2013 at 14:29:51

CATALOGUE 1977-1978

NAVAL POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL ; MONTEREY . CALIFORNIA

MISSION

The Secretary of the Navy has defined the mission of the Naval Post- graduate School as follows:

"To conduct and direct the Advanced Education of commissioned officers, and to provide such other technical and professional instruction as may be prescribed to meet he needs of the Naval Service; and in support of the foregoing, to foster and encourage a program of research in order to sustain academic excellence." CALENDAR

CALENDAR FOR 1977-78 ACADEMIC YEAR JANUARY JULY

1 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 9 10 11 1? 13 14 IS 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 16 17 It 19 20 21 22 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 1977 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 30 31 31 FEBRUARY AUGUST Registration Monday, 27 June 12 3 4 5 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Fourth of July (holiday) Monday, 4 July 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 14 15 17 18 13 14 15 16 17 It 19 16 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Summer Quarter begins Tuesday, 5 July 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 28 29 30 31 Refresher Course begins Monday, 15 August MARCH September

Labor Day (holiday) Monday, 5 September 1 2 3 12 3 4 5 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Examination Week for Summer Quarter 19-22 September 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Summer Quarter ends Thursday, 22 September 25 26 27 28 29 30 27 28 29 30 31 OCTOBER APRIL Graduation Thursday, 22 September • M T w t r 1 • t m t r • 1 Registration 26 September 1 2 Monday, 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Fall Quarter 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 begins Monday, 3 October 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 27 29 30 Columbus Day (holiday) Monday, 10 October 24 25 26 28 30 31 Veterans Day (holiday) Monday, 24 October MAY NOVEMBER

Thanksgiving Day (holiday) Thursday, 24 November 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 12 3 4 5 8 9 10 11 12 U 14 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Examination Week for Fall Quarter 16-20 December 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 13 14 15 It 17 18 19 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Fall Quarter ends Tuesday, 20 December 29 30 31 . . 27 28 29 30 JUNE DECEMBER Graduation Monday, 19 December I M T W T r • • m t m T r •

12 3 4 1 2 3 Christmas (holiday) Monday, 26 December 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 26 27 28 29 30 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

1978

JANUARY 3 January 12 3 4 5 6 7 Registration Tuesday, 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 15 16 17 18 19 ?0 21 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Winter Quarter begins Monday, 9 January 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 29 30 31 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Washington's Birthday (holiday) Monday, 20 February FEBRUARY 30 31 AUGUST Refresher Course begins Tuesday, 21 February m t m t r • t M t m T r t 12 3 4 Registration Monday, 27 March 3 4 5 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Examination Week for Winter Quarter 27-30 March 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 26 27 28 Winter Quarter ends Thursday, 30 March 27 28 29 30 31 SEPTEMBER Graduation Thursday, 30 March

12 3 4 Spring Quarter begins Monday, 3 April 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Memorial (holiday) Monday, 29 May 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Day 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 26 27 28 29 30 31 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Examination Week for Spring Quarter 19-22 June OCTOBER Spring Quarter ends Thursday, 22 June

1 12 3 4 5 6 7 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 June 8 9 10 II 12 13 14 Graduation Thursday, 22 12 13 14 15 9 10 II 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Registration Monday, 3 July 27 28 29 23 24 25 26 29 30 31 30 NOVEMBER Fourth of July (holiday) Tuesday, 4 July MAY < M T W T r 1 Summer Quarter begins Monday, 10 July 12 3 4 12 3 4 5 6 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Refresher Course begins Monday, 14 August 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 19 20 21 22 21 24 25 Labor Day (holiday) Monday, 4 September 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 26 27 28 29 30 28 29 30 31 DECEMBER Registration Monday, 25 September JUNE • H Examination Week for Summer Quarter 25-28 September

1 2 3 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 10 II 12 13 14 15 16 Summer Quarter ends Thursday, 28 September 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Graduation Thursday, 28 September 25 26 27 28 29 30 Fall Quarter begins Monday, 2 October Superintendent Isham Wiseman Linder B.S., U.S. Naval Academy, 1946 M.S.E.E., Naval Postgraduate School, 1956

Ph.D., University of California at Berkeley, 1961

Academic Dean Jack Raymond Borsting B.A., Oregon State University, 1951; M.A., University of Oregon, 1952; Ph.D., 1959 STAFF

BOARD OF ADVISORS

The NPS Board of Advisors is a distinguished group of civilian educators, business and professional men. The Board visits the campus periodically to examine educational pro- grams, recommend improvements and discuss plans and problems with the Superinten- dent. Present members are:

Rear Admiral William A. Brockett, USN (Ret), Past President, Webb Institute of Naval Architecture

Dr. Kermit O. Hanson, Dean, School and Graduate School of Business Administration, University of Washington

Dr. Gerald J. Lieberman, Associate Dean of the School of Humanities & Sciences, Stanford University Dr. Hans M. Mark, Director, NASA Ames Research Center Admiral Frederick H. Michaelis, USN, Chief of Naval Material, Navy Department Dr. Russell R. O'Neill, Dean, School of Engineering and Applied Sciences, University of California at Los Angeles

Dr. William J. Perry, President, Electromagnetic Systems Laboratory

Dr. Percy A. Pierre, Dean, School of Engineering, Howard University

Dr. David S. Potter, Vice President, Environmental Activities Staff, General Motors Corporation

Admiral James S. Russell, USN (Ret) (Board Chairman), Consultant, Boeing Aircraft The Honorable Bob Wilson, House of Representatives, Washington, D.C.

SUPERINTENDENTS STAFF

DIRECTOR OF PROGRAMS, JOSEPH MICHAEL BARRON, Captain, U.S. Navy; B.S., Naval Postgraduate School, 1962; M.S., George Washington Univ., 1972. DIRECTOR OF MILITARY OPERATIONS AND LOGISTICS, DEMPSEY BUT LER, JR., Captain, U.S. Navy; B.S., U.S. Naval Academy, 1949; B.S., Naval Postgraduate School, 1963; M.S. in Aeroelectronics, 1964. DEAN OF EDUCATIONAL DEVELOPMENT and EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR,

OFFICE OF CONTINUING EDUCATION, WALTER MAX WOODS: B.S. , Kan sas State Teachers College, 1951; M.S., Univ. of Oregon, 1957; Ph.D., Stanford Univ., 1961. DEAN OF RESEARCH and DEAN OF SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING, ROBERT ROSS FOSSUM: B.S., Univ. of Idaho, 1951; M.S., Univ. of Oregon, 1956; Ph.D., Oregon State Univ., 1969. DEAN OF ACADEMIC PLANNING and DEAN OF INFORMATION AND POL- ICY SCIENCES, DAVID ALAN SCHRADY: B.S., Case Institute of Technology, 1961; M.S., 1963; Ph.D., 1965. DEAN OF ACADEMIC ADMINISTRATION, ABRAHAM SHEINGOLD; B.S, Col lege of the City of New York, 1936; M.S., 1937. REGISTRAR, EDITH JEAN WARRINER; B.A., Occidental College, 1947. DISTINGUISHED ALUMNI

DISTINGUISHED ALUMNI

Among those who have completed a naval postgraduate school curriculum who attained flag (USN) or gen- eral (USMC) rank on the active list are the following: (The asterisk (*) indicates those on active list as of 1 October 1976).

Admiral Walter F. Boone Vice Admiral George F. Hussey, Jr. Admiral Arleigh A. Burke Vice Admiral Thomas B. Inglis Admiral Maurice E. Curts Vice Admiral Andrew M. Jackson, Jr. Admiral Robert L. Dennison Vice Admiral Albert E. Jarrell Admiral Donald B. Duncan Lieutenant General Clayton C. Jerome Admiral Cato D. Glover, Jr. Vice Admiral Robert T.S. Keith Admiral Roscoe F. Good Vice Admiral Ingolf N. Kiland Admiral Charles D. Griffin Vice Admiral Jerome H. King, Jr. Admiral Byron H. Hanlon Vice Admiral Harold O. Larson Admiral Ephraim P. Holmes Vice Admiral Kent L. Lee* Admiral Frederick H. Michaelis* Vice Admiral Ruthven E. Libby Admiral Albert G. Noble Vice Admiral Vernon L. Lowrance Admiral Alfred M. Pride Vice Admiral William J. Marshall Admiral James C. Richardson Vice Admiral Charles B. Martell Admiral Horacio Rivero, Jr. Vice Admiral Kleber S. Masterson Admiral James S. Russell Vice Admiral Ralph E. McShane Admiral Ulysses S. G. Sharp, Jr. Vice Admiral Charles L. Melson Admiral John H. Sides Vice Admiral Marion E. Murphy Admiral Felix B. Stump Vice Admiral Lloyd M. Mustin Admiral Alfred G. Ward Vice Admiral Frank O'Beirne Admiral John M. Will Vice Admiral Francis P. Old ce Admiral Robert E. Adamson, Jr.* Vice Admiral Howard E. Orem ce Admiral Parker B. Armstrong* Vice Admiral Harvey E. Overesch ce Admiral Frederick L. Ashworth Vice Admiral Edward N. Parker ce Admiral Harold D. Baker Vice Admiral Raymond E. Peet ce Admiral Wallace M. Beakley Vice Admiral Forrest S. Petersen* ce Admiral George F. Beardsley Vice Admiral Charles A. Pownall ce Admiral Frank E. Beatty Vice Admiral Thomas C. Ragan ce Admiral Fred G. Bennett Vice Admiral Lawson P. Ramage ce Admiral Charles T. Booth, II Vice Admiral William L. Rees ce Admiral Harold G. Bowen, Jr. Vice Admiral Robert H. Rice ce Admiral John L. Boyes* Vice Admiral Hyman G. Rickover* ce Admiral Carleton F. Bryant Vice Admiral Rufus E. Rose ce Admiral William M. Callaghan Vice Admiral Richard W. Ruble ce Admiral John H. Carson Vice Admiral Theodore D. Ruddock, Jr. ce Admiral Ralph W. Christie Vice Admiral Lorenzo S. Sabin, Jr. ce Admiral John B. Colwell Vice Admiral Harry Sanders ce Admiral Thomas F. Connolly Vice Admiral Walter G. Schindler ce Admiral Glenn B. Davis Vice Admiral William A. Schoech ce Admiral Vincent P. Depoix Vice Admiral Harry E. Sears ce Admiral Harold T. Deutermann Vice Admiral Thomas G.W. Settle ce Admiral Glynn R. Donaho Vice Admiral Wallace B. Short ce Admiral Irving T. Duke Vice Admiral William R. Smedberg, III ce Admiral Clarence E. Ekstrom Vice Admiral Chester C. Smith

ce Admiral Albert J. Fay Vice Admiral John V. Smith ce Admiral Emmet P. Forrestel Vice Admiral Roland N. Smoot ce Admiral Laurence H. Frost Lieutenant General Edward W. Snedeker ce Admiral William E. Gentner, Jr. Vice Admiral Selden B. Spangler ce Admiral Arthur R. Gralla Vice Admiral Thomas M. Stokes ce Admiral Elton W. Grenfell Vice Admiral John Sylvester ce Admiral Robert W. Hayler Vice Admiral George C. Towner ce Admiral Truman J. Hedding Vice Admiral Robert L. Townsend ce Admiral Edwin B. Hooper Vice Admiral Aurelius B. Vosseller DISTINGUISHED ALUMNI

Vice Adm ral Thomas J. Walker, III Rear Admiral Jose M. Cabanillas Vice Adm ral Edward C. Waller, III* Rear Admiral William M. Callaghan, Jr Vice Adm ral James D. Watkins* Rear Admiral Joseph W. Callahan Vice Adm ral Charles E. Weakley Rear Admiral Lucien Capone, Jr.* Vice Adm ral Charles Wellborn, Jr. Rear Admiral Harold A. Carlisle Vice Adm ral Ralph Weymouth Rear Admiral Milton O. Carlson Vice Adm ral Ralph E. Wilson Rear Admiral Albert S. Carter Rear Adm ral William C. Abhau Rear Admiral Edward W. Carter, III* Rear Adm ral Charles Adair Rear Admiral Worrall R. Carter Rear Adm ral John W. Ailes, III Rear Admiral Gordon L. Caswell

Rear Adm ral Herbert S. Ainsworth Rear Admiral Charles J. Cater Rear Adm ral Frank Akers Rear Admiral Robert W. Cavenagh Rear Adm ral David N. Altwegg* Rear Admiral Leonard C. Chamberlin Rear Adm ral John H. Alvis Rear Admiral Lawrence C. Chambers* Rear Adm ral Charles C. Anderson Rear Admiral Lester S. Chambers Rear Adm ral Herbert H. Anderson Rear Admiral Lucius H. Chappell Rear Adm ral Roy G. Anderson Rear Admiral John D. Chase* Rear Adm ral William L. Anderson Rear Admiral Kenan C. Childers, Jr. Rear Adm ral Burton H. Andrews Rear Admiral William P. Chilton Rear Adm ral Erasmus W. Armentrout, Rear Admiral Ernest E. Christensen

Rear Adm ral Henry J. Armstrong Rear Admiral Thomas J. Christman Rear Adm ral Henry D. Arnold* Rear Admiral Karl J. Christoph

Major General George C. Axtell, Jr. Rear Admiral Albert H. Clancy, Jr. Rear Adm ral Lee Baggett, Jr.* Rear Admiral David H. Clark Rear Adm ral Watson O. Bailey Rear Admiral Henry G. Clark Rear Adm ral William B. Bailey Rear Admiral Jeane R. Clark Rear Adm ral Fred E. Bakutis Rear Admiral Neal W. Clements* Rear Adm ral Nathaniel C. Barker Rear Admiral Leonidas D. Coates, Jr. Rear Adm ral Richard W. Bates Rear Admiral Joe B. Cochran Rear Adm ral Robert L. Baughan, Jr. Brigadier General Harold L. Coffman* Rear Adm ral Fred H. Baughman* Rear Admiral James E. Cohn Rear Adm ral John K. Beling Rear Admiral Philip P. Cole Rear Adm ral David B. Bell Rear Admiral William M. Cole Rear Adm ral Allan A. Bergner Rear Admiral Byran W. Compton, Jr.* Rear Adm ral Philip A. Beshany Rear Admiral Warren M. Cone* Rear Adm ral Abel T. Bidwell Rear Admiral Robert C. Conolly, II*

Rear Adm ral Karl J. Bierderman Rear Admiral Murray C. Cook*

Major General Arthur F. Binney Rear Admiral Samual M. Cooley, Jr. Rear Adm ral Horace V. Bird Rear Admiral Joshua W. Cooper Rear Adm ral Worthington S. Bitler Rear Admiral Frank W. Corley, Jr.*

Brigadier General Herbert J. Blaha* Rear Admiral John T. Corwin Rear Adm ral Earnest Blake Rear Admiral John T. Coughlin* Rear Adm ral Calvin M. Bolster Rear Admiral Stanley T. Counts* Rear Adm ral William A. Bowers Rear Admiral Roy T. Cowdrey Rear Adm ral Selman S. Bowling Rear Admiral Donald V. Cox Rear Adm ral Frank A. Braisted Rear Admiral Richard S. Craighill Rear Adm ral Boynton L. Braun Rear Admiral John S. Crenshaw Brigadier General George R. Brier* Rear Admiral Samuel H. Crittenden, Jr. Rear Adm ral Edward S. Briggs* Rear Admiral Robert E. Cronin

Rear Adm ral Harold M. Briggs Rear Admiral Gordon J. Crosby Rear Adm ral William A. Brockett Rear Admiral John E. Dacey

Rear Adm ral Robert Brodie, Jr. Rear Admiral Anthony L. Danis Rear Adm ral Clarence Broussard Rear Admiral James A. Dare Rear Adm ral Bert F. Brown Rear Admiral Lawrence R. Daspit Rear Adm ral Henry C. Bruton Rear Admiral Cabell S. Davis, Jr.* Rear Adm ral William C. Bryson Rear Admiral James W. Davis

Rear Adm ral Charles A. Buchanan Rear Admiral John B. Davis, Jr. Rear Adm ral William H. Buracker Rear Admiral Ranson K. Davis Rear Adm ral Raymond W. Burk Rear Admiral Kenneth V. Dawson Rear Adm ral Sherman E. Borroughs Rear Admiral Dwight H. Day DISTINGUISHED ALUMNI

Rear Adm ral George H. Debaun Rear Admira James C. Guillot Rear Adm ral Tyler F. Dedman* Rear Admira William A. Gureck* Rear Adm ral Walter Dedrick Rear Admira Frank S. Haak* Rear Adm ral Ernest W. Dobie, Jr. Rear Admira Frederic S. Habecker Rear Adm ral Frank R. Dodge Rear Admira Wesley M. Hague Rear Adm ral Joseph E. Dodson Rear Admira Stanley M. Haight Rear Adm ral Oscar H. Dodson Rear Admira Hamilton Hains Rear Adm ral Marshall E. Dornin Rear Admira Grover B.H. Hall Rear Adm ral Jack S. Dorsey Rear Admira George G. Halvorson Rear Adm ral Wallace R. Dowd, Jr.* Rear Admira DeWitt C.E. Hamberger Rear Adm ral Willard M. Downes Rear Admira William M. Harnish Rear Adm ral Clayton R. Dudley Rear Admira Harold S. Harnly Rear Adm ral Clifford H. Duerfeldt Rear Admira William L. Harris, Jr.* Rear Adm ral Robert F. Dunn* Rear Admira Lloyd Harrison Rear Adm ral Henry E. Eccles Rear Admira Clarence N. Hart* Rear Adm ral Edward H. Eckelmeyer, Jr. Rear Admira Robert S. Hatcher Rear Adm ral Claude P. Ekas, Jr.* Rear Admira Valery Havard, Jr. Rear Adm ral Donald T. Eller Rear Admira Hugh E. Haven Rear Adm ral Robert B. Ellis Rear Admira Kenneth G. Haynes* Rear Adm ral Paul H. Engel* Rear Admira William R. Headden Rear Adm ral Gordon S. Everett Rear Admira Vincent P. Healey Rear Adm ral Marvin P. Evenson Rear Admira George L. Heath Rear Adm ral Delmer S. Fahrney Rear Admira Ralph R. Hedges* Rear Adm ral Edward J. Fahy Rear Admira Paul R. Heineman Rear Adm ral James M. Farrin, Jr. Rear Admira Guy B. Helmick Rear Adm ral Emerson E. Fawkes Rear Admira William P. Hepburn Rear Adm ral James M. Fernald Rear Admira Lee R. Herring Rear Adm ral William E. Ferrall Rear Admira Edwin W. Herron Rear Adm ral Clifford A. Fines Rear Admira Clarence A. Hill Rear Adm ral Lee W. Fisher* Rear Admira Wellington T. Hines Rear Adm ral Francis J. Fitzpatrick Rear Admira William L. Hinkle* Rear Adm ral Morton K. Fleming, Jr. Rear Admira Charles M.E. Hoffman Rear Adm ral William B. Fletcher, Jr. Rear Admira Carleton C. Hoffner Rear Adm ral William O. Floyd Rear Admira James H. Hogg Rear Adm ral Eugene B. Fluckey Rear Admira James B. Hogle Rear Adm ral Thomas J. Flynn Rear Admira M. Staser Holcomb* Rear Adm ral Robert J. Foley Rear Admira George A. Holderness, Jr. Rear Adm ral Edward C. Forsyth Rear Admira Paul A. Holmberg Rear Adm ral James H. Foxgrover* Rear Admira Carl C. Holmquist Rear Adm ral John E. Fradd Rear Admira Leroy V. Honsinger Rear Adm ral George K. Fraser Rear Admira Lewis A. Hopkins Rear Adm ral Frederick R. Furth Rear Admira Charles F. Home, Jr. Rear Adm ral Walter D. Gaddis Rear Admira Martin P. Hottel Rear Adm ral Daniel V. Gallery Rear Admira Herbert S. Howard Rear Adm ral Robert K. Geiger* Rear Admira Hamilton W. Howe Rear Adm ral Paul C. Gibbons, Jr.* Rear Admira Miles H. Hubbard

Rear Adm ral Donald T. Giles Rear Admira Lester J. Hudson Rear Adm ral Fillmore B. Gilkeson Rear Admira Harry Hull Rear Adm ral John A. Glick Rear Admira Harry R. Hummer, Jr. Rear Adm ral Robert O. Glover Rear Admira George P. Hunter Rear Adm ral William B. Goggins Rear Admira William D. Irvin Rear Adm ral Robert B. Goldman Rear Admira Joseph A. Jaap

Rear Adm ral Alexander S. Goodfellow, Jr. Major Genera 1 Samuel S. Jack Rear Adm ral Willard K. Goodney Rear Admira David H. Jackson Rear Adm ral Roy W.M. Graham Rear Admira Jack M. James Rear Adm ral Etheridge Grant Rear Admira Ralph K. James Rear Adm ral Alfred M. Granum Rear Admira Joseph F. Jelley, Jr. Rear Adm ral Norman K. Green* Rear Admira George E. Jessen* Rear Adm ral Orville F. Gregor Rear Admira Frank L. Johnson Rear Adm ral Bradford E. Grow Rear Admira Harry D. Johnston DISTINGUISHED ALUMNI

Rear Admira Horace B. Jones Rear Admira Fran McKee* Rear Admira Allen R. Joyce Rear Admira Logal McKee Rear Admira William W. Juvenal Rear Admira James E. McKenna* Rear Admira Benjamin Katz Rear Admira William R. McKinney Rear Admira Bruce Keener, III* Rear Admira John B. McLean Rear Admira Thomas J. Kelly Rear Admira Philip S. McManus Rear Admira John D. Kelsey Rear Admira James A. McNally Rear Admira Cecil J. Kempf* Rear Admira Robert W. McNitt

Rear Admira Marvin G. Kennedy Rear Admira Francis J. Mee Rear Admira John S. Kern* Rear Admira John L. Melgaard Rear Admira Thomas J. Kilcline* Rear Admira Robert E. Melling

Rear Admira Thomas S. King, Jr. Rear Admira Wm. K. Mendenhall, Jr. Rear Admira Robert E. Kirksey* Rear Admira Joseph Metcalf, III* Rear Admira Thomas B. Klakring Rear Admira Jeffrey C. Metzel, Jr.* Rear Admira William M. Klee Rear Admira Wayne E. Meyer* Rear Admira Arthur K. Knoizen* Rear Admira! Roderick O. Middleton Rear Admira Denys W. Knoll Major General John H. Miller Rear Admira Theodore H. Kobey Rear Admira George H. Miller Rear Admira Leland S. Kollmorgan* Rear Admira Rupert S. Miller Rear Admira Edgar P. Kranzfelder Rear Admira Robert G. Mills Rear Admira William E. Kuntz Rear Admira Clinton A. Misson Rear Admira Thomas R. Kurtz, Jr. Rear Admira Chauncey Moore Rear Admira David Lambert Rear Admira Michael U. Moore

Major General Frank H. Lamson-Scribner Rear Admira Robert L. Moore, Jr. Rear Admira George A. Lange Rear Admira Henry G. Moran Rear Admira Richard A. Larkin Rear Admira Armand M. Morgan Rear Admira Robert E. Laub Rear Admira James B. Morin*

Rear Admira Martin J. Lawrence Rear Admira Robert W. Morse Rear Admira Frank C. Layne Rear Admira Thomas H. Morton Rear Admira William H. Leahy Rear Admira Douglas E. Mow* Rear Admira Paul F. Lee Rear Admira William E. Mullan Rear Admira Wilson D. Leggett, Jr. Rear Admira Allen P. Mullinnix Rear Admira William E. Lemos Rear Admira Albert C. Murdaugh Rear Admira John C. Lester Rear Admira Charles D. Murphey

Rear Admira Joseph S. Lillard Rear Admira John W. Murphy, Jr. Rear Admira Isham W. Linder* Rear Admira James D. Murray, Jr.* Rear Admira Orlin L. Livdahl Rear Admira Richard E. Myers Rear Admira William H. Livingston Rear Admira Gordon R. Nagler* Rear Admira Theodore C. Lonnquest Rear Admira Oliver F. Naquin

Rear Admira Almon E. Loomis Rear Admira Frederick J. Nelson

Rear Admira Wayne R. Loud Major Geneira 1 Noah C. New Rear Admira Charles H. Lyman, III Rear Admira Charles A. Nicholson, II Rear Admira Duncan C. MacMillan Rear Admira William R.D. Nickelson, Jr.

Rear Admira Charles J. Maguire Rear Admira Philip Niekum, Jr. Rear Admira Joseph B. Maher Rear Admira Hugh R. Nieman, Jr. Rear Admira Robert C. Mandeville, Jr.* Rear Admira William Nivison* Rear Admira Francis F. Manganaro* Rear Admira Emmet O'Beirne Rear Admira Harry C. Mason Rear Admira Timothy J. O'Brien

Rear Admira Bob O. Mathews Rear Admira Edward J. O'Donnell Rear Admira William S. Maxwell Rear Admira Eliot Olsen Rear Admira Brian McCauley Rear Admira William H. Organ Rear Admira Thomas R. McClellan Rear Admira James B. Osborn Rear Admira Melvyn H. McCoy Rear Admira William W. Outerbridge Rear Admira Francis C. B. McCune Rear Admira Thomas B. Owen Major General Keith B. McCutcheon Rear Admira Samuel H. Packer, II* Rear Admira Eugene F. McDaniel Rear Admira James R. Pahl Rear Admira William T. McGarry Rear Admira Roger W. Paine Rear Admira John B. McGovern Rear Admira Edward E. Pare Rear Admira Donald McGregor Rear Admira Charles W. Parker Rear Admira Harry H. Mcllhenny Rear Admira Goldsborough S. Patrick DISTINGUISHED ALUMNI

Rear Admira John B. Pearson, Jr. Rear Admiral James H. Smith, Jr. Rear Admira John H. Pedersen Rear Admiral Levering Smith* Rear Admira Henry S. Persons Rear Admiral Robert H. Smith Rear Admira Carl J. Pfingstag Rear Admiral Russell S. Smith Rear Admira Neill Phillips Rear Admiral Stirling P. Smith Rear Admira Richard H. Phillips Rear Admiral William R. Smith, III Rear Admira Ben B. Pickett Rear Admiral John A. Snackenberg Rear Admira Paul E. Pihl Rear Admiral Joseph E. Snyder, Jr.* Rear Admira Frank L. Pinney, Jr. Rear Admiral Roy D. Snyder, Jr.* Rear Admira Donald T. Poe Rear Admiral Robert H. Speck Rear Admira Karl F. Poehlmann Rear Admiral Paul H. Speer* Rear Admira Frank H. Price Rear Admiral Roger E. Spreen Rear Admira Walter H. Price Rear Admiral George B.H. Stallings

Rear Admira William M. Pugh, II Rear Admiral Frederick C. Stelter, Jr. Rear Admira Schuyler N. Pyne Rear Admiral Edward C. Stephan Rear Admira Alston Ramsay Rear Admiral Earl E. Stone Rear Admira William T. Rassieur Rear Admiral Hubert E. Strange Rear Admira Charles F. Rauch, Jr.* Rear Admiral Charles W. Styer Rear Admira Ralph W. Rawson Brigadier General Lawrence F. Sullivan* Rear Admira Harry L. Reiter, Jr. Rear Admiral Robert L. Swart Rear Admira Thomas H. Replogle* Rear Admiral Sayre A. Swartzrauber* Rear Admira James R.Z. Reynolds Rear Admiral John D. Sweeney Rear Admira Joseph E. Rice Rear Admiral William E. Sweeney Rear Admira Alvin F. Richardson Rear Admiral James B. Sykes Rear Admira Robert E. Riera Rear Admiral Frank R. Talbot Rear Admira Basil N. Rittenhouse, Jr. Rear Admiral Arthur H. Taylor Rear Admira Charles W. Rixey* Rear Admiral Edwin A. Taylor Rear Admira James M. Robinson Rear Admiral Edward M. Thompson Rear Admira Walter F. Rodee Rear Admiral John M. Tierney Rear Admira William K. Romoser Rear Admiral Ernest E. Tissot, Jr.* Rear Admira John B. Rooney Rear Admiral Rutledge B. Tompkins Rear Admira William H. Rowden* Rear Admiral Theodore A. Torgerson Rear Admira Gordon Rowe Rear Admiral Arnold E. True Rear Admira Donald Royce Rear Admiral Samuel M. Tucker Rear Admira Edward A. Ruckner Rear Admiral David M. Tyree

Rear Admira Thomas J. Rudden, Jr. Rear Admiral Archibald E. Uehlinger Rear Admira Merrill H. Sappington* Rear Admiral Frank Virden Rear Admira Ben W. Sarver Rear Admiral Ernest S. Vonkleeck, Jr. Rear Admira Edwin S. Schanze Rear Admiral John R. Wadleigh

Rear Admira Raymond J. Schneider Rear Admiral Delos E. Wait Rear Admira Malcolm F. Schoeffel Rear Admiral George H. Wales Rear Admira Albert B. Scoles Rear Admiral Edward K. Walker Rear Admira James H. Scott* Rear Admiral Kenneth C. Wallace Rear Admira John A. Scott Rear Admiral Robert L. Walters* Rear Admira Roger F. Scott Rear Admiral Audley L. Warburton Rear Admira Kenneth P. Sears* Rear Admiral Frederick B. Warder Rear Admira Leslie H. Sell Rear Admiral William B. Warick Rear Admira Ernest R. Seymour* Rear Admiral William W. Warlick Rear Admira John N. Shaffer Rear Admiral John R. Waterman Rear Admira Louis D. Sharp, Jr. Rear Admiral Robert W. Watkins*

Rear Admira Andrew G. Shepard Rear Admiral Odale D. Waters, Jr. Rear Admira Tazewell T. Shepard, Jr. Rear Admiral David A. Webster Rear Admira George B. Shick, Jr.* Rear Admiral John F. Wegforth Major General Philip D. Shutler* Rear Admiral Daniel K. Weitzenfeld Rear Admira William B. Sieglaff Rear Admiral Oscar A. Weller Rear Admira William Sihler Rear Admiral Albert A. Wellings Rear Admira George A. Sinclair Rear Admiral Robert H. Wertheim* Rear Admira Carol C. Smith, Jr.* Rear Admiral Thomas R. Weschler Rear Admira Gordan H. Smith* Rear Admiral Charles D. Wheelock

Rear Admira Harry Smith Rear Admiral Walter J. Whipple DISTINGUISHED ALUMNI

Rear Admiral David C. White Rear Admiral Robert W. Wood Rear Admiral William J. Whiteside Rear Admiral Mark W. Woods Rear Admiral Edwin R. Wilkinson Rear Admiral Edward L. Woodyard Rear Admiral Delbert F. Williamson Rear Admiral Earl P. Yates Rear Admiral Emile R. Winterhaler Rear Admiral Elmer E. Yeomans Rear Admiral Frederick S. Withington Rear Admiral Rupert M. Zimmerli Rear Admiral Narvin O. Wittman

SELECTEES

Rear Admiral Edwin Barrineau* Rear Admiral Jack F. O'Hara* Rear Admiral Robert W. Carius* Rear Admiral Charles O. Prindle*

Rear Admiral Karl J. Christoph, Jr.* Rear Admiral Conrad J. Rorie* Rear Admiral Henry J. Davis, Jr.* Rear Admiral William G. Sizemore' Rear Admiral Crawford, A. Easterling 11 Rear Admiral Thomas M. Ward, Jr. Rear Admiral Warren C. Hamm, Jr.* Rear Admiral Grover M. Yowell* Rear Admiral Paul A. Lautermilch, Jr. Rear Admiral William M. Zobel*

10 GENERAL INFORMATION

HISTORY

The Naval Postgraduate School is in its Postgraduate School was officially estab- 69th year of providing advanced educa- lished on the West Coast on 22 December tion for commissioned officers of the 1951. Five years later the Navy Manag- United States Navy. When it was estab- ment School joined the General Line lished at Annapolis on 9 June 1909, only School as a component of the Post- ten officers made up the class, three pro- graduate School, and for the first time a fessors formed the faculty, and marine Bachelor of Science curriculum was of- engineering was the only curriculum. It fered to selected officers who had not was called the Postgraduate Department completed their undergraduate education. of the U.S. Naval Academy. A further need for baccalaureate courses The school suspended operations dur- resulted in the inauguration of the ing World War I. When classes resumed Bachelor of Arts curriculum in 1961. in 1919, mechanical and electrical en- A year later the Chief of Naval Person- gineering were added to the course of in- nel authorized a major internal reorgani- struction. Later, ordnance engineering, zation of the school. The management, radio engineering, aerological engineer- engineering and general line schools ing and aeronautical engineering were in- merged, in effect making the Naval Post- troduced as the Navy continued to recog- graduate School a naval university, un- nize its need for officers with technical ified in policy, procedure and purpose. knowledge. The postgraduate department In addition to its Naval officer stu- was renamed the United States Naval dents, the School has, since 1947, been Postgraduate School, but still operated as enrolling officers from the United States a part of the Naval Academy. Army, Air Force, Coast Guard and In 1927 the General Line Curriculum Marine Corps as well as Military officers was established to provide instruction from Allied countries. These officers which would acquaint junior line officers have constituted about 25% of the student with modern developments within the body for many years. Effective in 1975, Navy, and to broaden their professional civilian employees of the United States knowledge for future command at sea. It Government have started to be enrolled as remained an integral part of the school regular students. until World War II, when the general line Since 1946 the School has awarded students returned to the fleet. Enrollment 6,017 bachelor's degrees, 7,701 master's in the other curricula continued to in- degrees, 235 engineer's degrees, and 84 crease during the war years as the school doctoral degrees. At the present time the grew to meet the needs of the Navy . After total emphasis is on graduate level pro- the 1945 armistice, the Navy began plans grams. to move the Postgraduate School away from Annapolis and to improve its profes- sional status. The post-war period also ORGANIZATION AND FUNCTIONS saw the General Line School re- established, this time at Newport, Rhode The Superintendent of the Postgraduate Island, and at Monterey, California. Be- School is a rear admiral of the line of the tween 1945 and 1948, Congress estab- Navy. His principal assistants are a lished the school as a separate activity Provost/Academic Dean who is the senior under its own superintendent, created the member of the civilian faculty; and two office of academic dean, granted the sup- captains of the line — a Director of Pro- erintendent the authority to award the grams, and a Director of Military Opera- bachelor's, master's, and doctor's de- tions and Logistics. grees, and approved Monterey as the fu- The academic programs and direct ture home of the school. supporting functions are administered and After purchasing the former Del Monte operated through a unique organization Hotel and surrounding acreage, the Naval composed of Curricular Offices and

II GENERAL INFORMATION

Academic Departments. The former are Programs, the Dean of Information and staffed by naval officers and civilian fac- Policy Sciences, and the Dean of Science ulty members whose primary functions and Engineering who collaborate to share are threefold: (1) academic counseling jointly the responsibilities for planning, and military supervision of officer stu- conduct and administration of the several dents; (2) curriculum development and educational programs. management to insure attainment of pro- The close tie between elements of this fessional and academic objectives; and dual organization is further typified by the (3) liaison with curricular sponsor repre- Academic Associates. These are indi- sentatives. Officer students in each cur- vidual civilian faculty members appointed ricula group pursue similar or closely re- by the Academic Dean to work closely lated curricula. with the Curricular Officers in the devel- opment and continuing monitoring of cur- Officer students are grouped into the fol- ricula — the Navy's needs being the re- lowing curricular program areas: sponsibility of the Curricular Officer, and academic soundness being the responsi- Administrative Science bility of the Academic Associate. Aeronautical Engineering Logistic service support is rendered by Computer Technology conventional departments such as Supply Electronics and Communications and Public Works grouped organization- Environmental Sciences ally under a Director of Military Opera- Naval Engineering tions and Logistics. Certain other officers Naval Intelligence/National such as the Comptroller and Civilian Per- Security Affairs sonnel Officer are directly responsible to Operations Research/Systems the Superintendent in a slightly modified Analysis but typical naval staff organization. Weapons Engineering/ASW

The teaching functions of classroom FACILITIES and laboratory instruction and thesis supervision are accomplished by a faculty The Naval Postgraduate School is lo- the of which is organized into eleven academic cated within City Monterey, and departments and two interdisciplinary only a mile east of the downtown business groups: area and the city's Fishermen's Wharf. The site of the School is the former luxury Administrative Sciences Del Monte Hotel of pre- World War II Aeronautics days. The beautifully landscaped campus ASW Group contains most of the academic and admin- Computer Science istration buildings within the main Electrical Engineering grounds. There is an adjacent beach area Electronic Warfare Group for research and a nearby laboratory and Mathematics recreation area. The total campus covers Mechanical Engineering approximately 600 acres. Meteorology The Superintendent and central ad- National Security Affairs ministrative officers, along with other Oceanography service functions, are located in Operations Research Herrmann Hall, the most prominent Physics and Chemistry building on the campus because of its Spanish architecture. Over five-sixths of the teaching staff Most of the academic classrooms, lab- are civilians of varying professional rank oratories, and offices are located in and the remainder military officers. Spanagel, Bullard, Halligan, Root and The Academic Program organization Ingersoll Halls. The newest building is described is supervised by the Director of the 400,000 volume Dudley Knox Li-

12 .

GENERAL INFORMATION

brary which was completed early in 1972. grounds, bowling lanes, driving range, Adjacent to the main academic buildings archery range, and gymnasium. Included is King Hall, a large lecture hall used to in the many activities which participate in seat the student body, faculty, and staff competition off campus are Ladies Golf when occasions require. Association, Mens Golf Association, Soccer Club, Rugby Club, Lacross Club, STUDENT AND DEPENDENT Ski Club, Karate Club, Tennis Club, and INFORMATION basketball and softball teams. The School also has a very active Military Amateur Monterey Peninsula and the cities of Radio Station and a Navy Flying Club. Monterey, Carmel, Pacific Grove, and Personnel assigned to the Postgraduate Seaside, all within 5 miles of the School, School have a very active Sailing Associ- provide community support for the of- ation open to sponsors and their depen- ficers of the Postgraduate School dents as well as members of the faculty. LaMesa Village, located 3 miles from Sailing conditions are among the finest on the School, consists of former Wherry the West Coast with excellent weather Housing, Capehart Housing and Town- prevailing from February through houses. There are a total of 877 units of November. The School's recreation de- public quarters for officer students. An partment schedules the 3 Shields Class elementary school is located within the Racing Sloops, 2 Santana-22s and 1 Co- housing area. Limited housing for single lumbia 22 on a first-come first-served students is available in the BOQ located basis. Classes for beginners and advanced on the main campus in Herrmann Hall. sailing enthusiasts are conducted twice a Student services include a campus year, following the January and July in- branch of Bank of America, Navy- puts. The School works closely with civi- Federal Credit Union, U.S. Post Office, lian yacht clubs to coordinate many sail- Student Mail Center, Navy Exchange and ing events throughout the year and, in ad- a child care center. A large commissary is dition, hosts the annual Navy West Coast located at Fort Ord and is available to Match racing championships. Navy personnel. Medical facilities include a Dispen- sary, supported by the U.S. Army Hospi- TEXTBOOKS tal at Fort Ord (7 miles away), and the U.S. Navy Hospital at Oakland (120 The Naval Postgraduate School oper- miles away). A Dental Clinic is located in ates a bookstore under the Navy Ex- Herrmann Hall. change system. It stocks all required The center of campus social activity is textbooks and related school supplies. the Commissioned Officers and Faculty Students are required to purchase their Club, located in the old hotel building. books either from the school or local There are many beautifully appointed bookstores, or from other students. rooms, just as they were at the turn of the Prospective students desiring a copy of century, including a ballroom and Open the Postgraduate School Catalogue may Mess. Two beautiful chapels are located request one by sending a check for $1.35 on the main campus. to: Naval Exchange Bookstore, Naval Student wives and wives of allied of- Postgraduate School, Monterey, Califor- ficers are active in the Officer Student nia 93940. Wives Club, the International Wives Club, as well as a Little Theater group ADMISSIONS PROCEDURES which puts on three productions a year. Recreational facilities include a swim- U.S. NAVAL OFFICERS ming pool, an 18-hole golf course, put- ting green, tennis courts, ping pong and U.S. Navy officers interested in admis- badminton courts, basketball and volley sion to one of the curricula offered at the ball courts, a softball diamond, picnic Postgraduate School are referred to

13 GENERAL INFORMATION

OPNAV Notice 1520, Subject: Post- They do not need to pursue the curricula graduate Educational Programs, which is designed for officer students as described published annually by the Chief of Naval in this catalogue but instead will deter- Operations. This directive outlines the mine the combination and sequence of various educational programs available courses that will best meet their educa- and indicates the method of submitting tional needs. requests for consideration for each pro- Requests for admission should be in gram. letter form, indicating the academic area A selection board is convened annually of interest and degree intentions, and en- by the Chief of Naval Personnel to select closing official transcripts of all previous officers, based upon professional per- college work. GRE and/or GMAT test formance, academic background, and scores are not required but will be consid- ability, within quotas which reflect the ered when included in the submission. Navy's requirements in the various fields Requests for admission or questions of study available. Officers will be regarding admission procedures should be notified of selection by a BUPERS Notice directed to the Dean of Academic Admin- at the earliest feasible date after the meet- istration, Code 014, Naval Postgraduate ing of the selection board, or by official School, Monterey, CA 93940; or tele- correspondence. phone (408) 646-2392 or Autovon 878- 2392.

OTHER U.S. MILITARY OFFICERS Officers on duty with other branches of service are eligible to attend the Post- TRANSFER OF CREDITS graduate School. They should apply in accordance with the directives promul- Upon entry to the Naval Postgraduate gated by the Department of the Army, School, each student's prior academic Department of the Air Force, Comman- record will be evaluated for possible dant U.S. Marine Corps, or the Com- transfer of credit. A course given here mandant U.S. Coast Guard, as appropri- may be validated when a course covering previ- ate. the same material has been taken ously; no credit is awarded here in this case, but the sutdent is exempt from tak- ALLIED COUNTRY MILITARY OFFICERS ing the course. All graduate level courses Military officers from Allied countries taken after completion of the bac- may be admitted to most curricula. Their calaureate degree may be accepted for admission is subject to availability of credit; graduate level courses certified to quotas assigned to each country. The pro- be in excess of requirements for the bac- cedures for application are contained in calaureate degree and taken in the last OPNAV INSTRUCTION 4950. IE. Cor- term before award of the baccalaureate respondence must be processed through may be accepted for Graduate Credit normal channels; requests from individual under certain circumstances. Students are officers should not be sent directly to the encouraged to seek validation or credit for Naval Postgraduate School. In addition to courses by taking a departmental exami- fluency in English, candidates must nation. This allows the student to utilize satisfy the academic standards for each knowledge gained through self- study, ex- curriculum as described in this catalogue.' perience, or service related courses. As a consequence of its policy on trans- fer of credit, the School requires only 12 CIVILIAN EMPLOYEES quarter hours in residency for the master's OF U.S. GOVERNMENT degree. Questions on transfer credit may Civilian employees of the United States be directed to the Dean of Academic Ad- may be admitted for study upon request ministration by letter or AUTOVON and sponsorship by a federal activity. 878-2391.

14 GENERAL INFORMATION

PREPARATORY COURSES Performance Grade Point V< Excellent A 4 After notification of selection, officers A- 3.7 are encouraged to write to the Superin- B + 3.3 tendent (Code 500), Naval Postgraduate B 3 School, Monterey, CA 93940, for coun- B- 2.7 seling on available self-study mathema- C+ 2.3 tics, physics and other preparatory c 2 courses. Correspondence should indicate c- 1.7 curriculum number, expected entry date D + 1.3 at NPS, and year in which similar courses D 1 were previously taken. Officers are urged Failing X to undertake such a self-study program. Incomplete I — Withdrew Passing W — Withdrew Failing wx Nongraded N — DEGREES, ACCREDITATIONS, Pass P — AND Fail F — ACADEMIC STANDARDS Courses may be designated for P and F grading when approved by the Academic The Superintendent is authorized to Department and the Academic Council. confer Bachelor's, Master's, Engineer's Hours earned by the grade of P shall be or Doctor's degrees in engineering or re- counted toward fulfilling course hours lated fields upon qualified graduates of specified by the degree requirements. the School. This authority is subject to A grade of Incomplete (I), if not re- such regulations as the Secretary of the moved within twelve weeks following the Navy may prescribe, contingent upon due end of the term for which it was received, accreditation from time to time by the ap- will be replaced by the grade "X". Ex- propriate professional authority of the ap- ceptions must be individually approved plicable curricula. Recipients of such de- by the Academic Council. grees must be found qualified by the When the quarter hours value of a Academic Council in accordance with course is multiplied by the quality point prescribed academic standards. number of the student's grade, a quality The Naval Postgraduate School was point value for the student's work in that accredited in 1962 as a full member of the course is obtained. The sum of the quality Western Association of Schools and Col- points for all courses divided by the sum leges. Initial accreditation as an associate of the quarter hour value of all courses member was given in 1955. Specific en- gives a weighted numerical evaluation of gineering curricula have been accredited the student's performance termed the by the Engineers' Council for Profes- Quality Point Rating (QPR). A student sional Development (ECPD) since 1949. achieving a QPR of 3.0 has maintained a The Postgraduate School operates B average in all courses undertaken with a under a quarter system, with each term of proper weight assigned for course hours. instruction lasting 12 weeks. The last Satisfactory academic proficiency at the week of each quarter is set aside for Naval Postgraduate School has been es- examinations. In addition, there are two tablished at a QPR of 2.0 for all courses 2-week recesses during the academic of a curriculum. year, one over Christmas and one during Officer students have no major duties June- July. beyond applying themselves diligently to Students' performance is evaluated on their studies. It is expected that students the basis of a quality point number as- will maintain a high level of scholarship signed to the letter grade achieved in a and develop attributes which are as- course as follows: sociated with a scholar seeking knowl-

15 GENERAL INFORMATION

edge and understanding. Program while carrying a minimum academic load schedules are such that the student should of 12 quarter hours. anticipate spending several hours in eve- ning study each weekday to supplement GRADUATION WITH HONORS. time available for this purpose between The award of the Master of Science de- classes. gree may be made "With Distinction" The courses listed in this Catalogue are when a student completes the degree re- assigned a level of academic credit by the quirements with a minimum of 32-quarter numbers assigned. hours earned in residence and is in the upper 10% of the graduating class. The 0001-0999 No credit award of a Bachelor's degree may be 1000-1999 Lower division credit made "Cum Laude" when a student 2000-2999 Upper division credit completes the degree requirements with a 3000-3999 Upper division or graduate minimum of 60-quarter hours in residence credit and is in the upper 5% of the graduating 4000-4999 Graduate credit class. The two numbers in parenthesis (sepa- rated by a hyphens) following the course SIGMA XI. The Naval Postgraduate title indicate the hours of instruction per School has a Chapter of the Society of the week in classroom and laboratory respec- Sigma Xi, an honorary society founded to tively. Laboratory hours are assigned half recognized excellence in the scientific the value shown in calculating quarter and engineering disciplines. Students hours for the credit value of the course. who have demonstrated marked promise Thus a (3-2) course (having three hours in their research work are considered for recitation and two hours laboratory) will membership each year. The number be assigned credit value of 4 quarter elected is limited only by the quality of hours. the research work done for a graduate de- gree. ACADEMIC HONORS MEWBORN STUDENT RESEARCH PROFESSIONAL SOCIETIES. Stu- AWARD. This award affords recognition dents have the opportunity to attend many for exceptional research talent. It is professional meetings held at the Naval awarded annually to a student in a pro- Postgraduate School. Several local chap- gram of graduate scientific or engineering ters provide for student membership. studies, leading to an advanced degree, These include Eta Kappa Nu, Sigma Xi, whose thesis exhibits sound scholarship Tau Beta Pi, as well as ACM (Associa- and outstanding research ability. tion for Computing Machinery), AIAA (American Institute of Aeronautics and CAPTAIN J.C. WOELFEL AWARD. Astronautics), AMS (American Me- This award is given annually to the terological Society, ASME (American United States Naval Officer student re- Society of Mechanical Engineers), ASNE ceiving an advanced degree in the Naval (American Society of Naval Engineers), Engineering Programs who has demon- IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Elec- strated the most outstanding academic tronics Engineers, Inc.), ORSA (Opera- record, and at the same time possesses tions Research Society of America), and those attributes best exemplifying a Naval the Marine Technology Society. Officer.

DEAN'S LIST. Students who distin- W. RANDOLPH CHURCH AWARD. guish themselves academically are recog- This award is given annually to a student nized at the end of each quarter by being on the basis of his performance in placed on the Dean's List. This recogni- mathematics courses. The criteria for tion is awarded to students who earn a selection will include evidence of initia- Quality Point Rating of 3.65, or higher, tive, scholarly attitude and mathematical

16 GENERAL INFORMATION

maturity. The student need not be a is made on the basis of academic record, mathematics major, nor must he be a performance during the student's experi- graduate at the time of presentation. ence tour, and faculty recommendations. NAVAL ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS ADMIRAL WILLIAM ADGER COMMAND AWARD IN ELEC- MOFFETT AWARD. This award is pre- TRONICS ENGINEERING. This award sented annually to an outstanding will be given semiannually to a Master of graduate of the Aeronautical Engineering Science candidate in the Advanced Elec- curriculum. The award is made on the tronics Engineering Program who has a basis of the student's academic excel- most outstanding academic record and lence, including thesis, and his career po- whose qualities indicate an outstanding tential. military officer. CHIEF OF NAVAL OPERATIONS NAVY LEAGUE OF MONTEREY COMMUNICATIONS AWARD. This AWARD FOR ACADEMIC IM- award is presented semiannually to the PROVEMENT. This award is presented graduate in an advanced communications quarterly to the graduating Navy, Marine degree program achieving an outstanding Corps, or Coast Guard student (less academic record and exhibiting those Ph.D. candidates) who has demonstrated qualities indicative of an outstanding mili- outstanding academic achievement during tary officer. his enrollment at NPS . The award is made primarily on the basis of the student's CHIEF OF NAVAL OPERATIONS academic improvement. COMMUNICATIONS CERTIFICATE. This certificate is presented quarterly to ARMED FORCES COMMUNICA- the Master of Science graduate who TIONS AND ELECTRONICS ASSO- shows the greatest academic improve- CIATION AWARDS. Up to three of ment in a communications curriculum. these awards may be presented each quar- ter to graduates of the Communications CHIEF OF NAVAL OPERATIONS and Engineering Electronics curricula ASW AWARD. This award is given an- who have demonstrated the highest nually to the most outstanding student scholastic achievement. graduating from the antisubmarine war- fare curriculum. NAVAL SEA SYSTEMS COM- MAND AWARD IN NAVAL EN- DIRECTOR OF NAVAL INTELLI- GINEERING. This award affords recog- GENCE GRADUATION AWARD. This nition to a graduate of any curriculum award is presented annually to recognize leading to a Master of Science degree in the most outstanding student in the Naval Mechanical or Electrical Engineering Intelligence curriculum. who has demonstrated academic excel- lence through attainment of a high Qual- NAVAL SEA SYSTEMS COM- ity Point Rating in addition to an out- MAND AWARD IN WEAPONS EN- standing thesis, and who has exhibited GINEERING EXCELLENCE. This leadership potential in the engineering award is given annually to the most out- area. standing officer graduate of the Weapons Systems Engineering curricula. CHIEF OF NAVAL OPERATIONS AWARD FOR EXCELLENCE IN OP- NAVAL UNDERWATER SYSTEMS ERATIONS RESEARCH. This award is AWARD IN SUBMARINE WARFARE presented semiannually to an outstanding SYSTEMS. This award is given annually United States Navy or Marine Corps to the officer student graduate who has graduate of the Operations Research/ demonstrated the greatest contribution in Systems Analysis curriculum. The award the field of submarine warfare systems.

17 GENERAL INFORMATION

CERTIFICATES OF COMPLETION such admission to candidacy shall be made to the Dean of Academic Adminis- Certificates of completion are issued to tration, via the Chairman of the depart- students who complete programs but do ment of the major, subsequent to comple- not qualify for a degree. To establish tion of 50% of a curriculum and prior to eligibility for a Certificate of Completion, completion of 75% of the curriculum. a student must normally maintain an overall QPR of 2.0 or better. a. Students having a Total QPR of 3.00 or greater at the time of ap- plication automatically will be admitted to candidacy. REQUIREMENTS FOR THE b. Students having a Total QPR from MASTER OF ARTS AND MASTER 2.50 to 2.99 inclusive, will re- OF SCIENCE DEGREES quire approval by the Academic Council upon recommendation of 1. The Master's Degree may be the Chairman of the department of awarded for successful completion of a the major for admission to candi- curriculum which has the approval of the dacy. Academic Council as meriting the degree. c. Students having a Total QPR Such curricula shall conform to current below 2.50 will not be admitted to practice in accredited institutions and candidacy for a Master's degree. shall contain a well-defined major. 5. To be eligible for the Master's de- 2. General Postgraduate School gree, the student must attain a minimum minimum requirements for the Master's average quality point rating of 3.00 in all Degree are as follows: of the 4000 and 3000 level courses in his a. 32 quarter hours of graduate level curriculum and either 2.50 in the remain- at credits of which least 12 quarter ing courses or 2.75 in all courses of the hours must be earned on campus. curriculum. b. A thesis or its equivalent is re- quired. If the thesis be waived, at least 8 quarter hours of approved courses 4000-4999 shall be substi- REQUIREMENTS OF THE DEGREE:

tuted for it. ENGINEER c. Departmental requirements for the degree in a specified subject. 1. The Engineer degree may be awarded for successful completion of a leading to 3. Admission to a program curriculum which has the approval of the the Master's degree requires: Academic Council as meriting the degree. a. A baccalaureate degree or the 2. Minimum Postgraduate School re- equivalent. quirements for the degree of Engineer are b. Appropriate undergraduate prepa- as follows: ration for the curriculum to be a. 72 quarter hours of graduate level pursued. If a student enters the courses including at least 30 hours Postgraduate School with in- in courses 4000-4999. adequate undergraduate prepara- b. An acceptable thesis. tion, he will be required to com- c. One academic year in residence. plete the undergraduate prerequi- d. Departmental requirements for the sites in addition to the degree re- degree in a specified Engineering quirements. field. c. A demonstrated academic poten- e. A quality point rating of at least tial for completing the curriculum. 3.00 in all graduate courses in the 4. In order to qualify for a Master's curriculum and either 2.50 in the degree, a student first must be admitted to remaining courses or 2.75 in all candidacy for the degree. Application for courses of the curriculum.

18 GENERAL INFORMATION

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE tion whose purposes are: DOCTOR'S DEGREE "to solicit, receive, and administer contributions and make donations Any program leading to the Doctor of and dispense charitable contrib-

Philosophy or Doctor of Engineering utions . . . and otherwise aid, en- shall require the equivalent of at least courage and support the traditions three academic years of study beyond the of the Naval Postgraduate School baccalaureate level, with at least one academic year being spent at the School. The corporation was formed in De- A requirement for admission is cember 1970, and has since served as a Bachelor's degree that includes the pre- vehicle by which large and small tax- requisites for full graduate status in the exempt gifts have been easily and quickly department of his major study. given to the School. These gifts are all A general outline of a candidate's prog- applied to those needs or purposes which ress through the program is as follows: would otherwise — in these days of se- vere fiscal restraint — be poorly- or not- a. Application to the appropriate de- at-all funded. partment chairman for admission The Rear Admiral John Jay Schieffelin and acceptance. Award for Excellence in Teaching was b. Appointment of the student's Doc- endowed through the Foundation. A toral Committee, which bears re- black granite sculpture, FLIGHT, located sponsibility for the study program in the Dudley Knox Library, was donated and guidance of the research pro- to help publicly honor the recipients of gram. this prestigious and valuable award. c. Inclusion of one or more minors in The Foundation, in cooperation with the study program; for the Doctor the Office of Naval Research, administers of Philosophy at least one foreign the Carl E. Menneken Fellowship for Sci- language. For Doctor of Engineer- entific Research. This annual award of ing, demonstrated proficiency in $1,000 has the dual objectives of further- computer programming is re- ing the progress of engineering and sci- quired, with no foreign language. ence in areas of importance to the Navy d. When study program is essentially and to provide aid to a worthy doctoral complete, administration of the student involved in a research program Qualifying Examination, includ- expected to be of benefit to the Navy. The ing both oral and written parts. award honors the memory of Carl E. e. Admission to candidacy and start Menneken who devoted his career to the of work on Doctoral Dissertation Navy as Professor of Electronics and on a subject approved by the Doc- Dean of Research Administration at the toral Committee. Postgraduate School. f. Upon completion of dissertation Dependents graduating from high and acceptance by Doctoral school while their sponsor is attached to Committee, administration of the Naval Postgraduate School are eligi- final oral examination. ble for scholarships offered by the Naval Upon unanimous recommendation g. Postgraduate School Foundation. These of Doctoral Committee, Academ- scholarships are based entirely on merit, ic Council makes final decision on and are usually awarded in the amount of recommendation for award of the $500 per recipient. degree. The School's Sailing Association owes the majority of its present assets to dona- tions made to the Foundation. Small do- NAVAL POSTGRADUATE nations have also been received from SCHOOL FOUNDATION some "friends of the Library" who wished to create a small but meaningful The Foundation is a non-profit corpora- and useful memorial.

19 GENERAL INFORMATION

The Directors of the corporation are noons in King Hall for students, faculty civilians, except for the Superintendent and staff. Eminently qualified civilian who serves to assure that only gifts ap- and military authorities from a wide range propriate to the School are accepted. of fields and accomplishments will speak Individuals wishing to participate in the on subjects of current and historical inter- work of the Foundation may write to the est in international, government sociolog- Secretary, Naval Postgraduate School, ical, and military affairs. Occasionally Monterey, California 93940. speakers are presented in the evening with wives also invited to attend. The primary SUPERINTENDENT'S purpose of this series is to inform as well GUEST LECTURE PROGRAM as to stimulate and challenge the thinking of the officer students in areas outside of Throughout the Academic Year lec- their immediate academic pursuits. tures will be presented on Tuesday after-

20 CIVILIAN EDUCATION CIVILIAN EDUCATION PROGRAM All civilian employees of the United ing, Electrical Engineering, Systems States government are eligible to enroll in Technology, Applied Science, Anti- the courses, curricula, and degree pro- submarine Warfare, Electronic Warfare, grams of the School. Enrollment is sub- Avionics, and Computer Science. ject only to the approval of the individu- Engineer degree programs and the Doc- al's employing agency for his participa- tor of Engineering degree are available in tion. An individual may enroll in one of Aeronautical, Electrical and Mechanical the regular curricula designed for of- Engineering. ficers, in a specially designed degree pro- The Doctor of Philosophy is given in gram, in a selection of courses making up Physics, Oceanography, Meteorology, a non-degree program, or in a Continuing Operations Research, Aeronautical En- Education course. gineering, Electrical Engineering and Regular Curricula. The School's pro- Mechanical Engineering. grams for officers are designed to meet Non-Degree Programs. Civilian em- the requirements of the services for spe- ployees may desire to pursue a program cific education. Civilian students may for professional advancement without a enter any curriculum at the point at which degree objective. Any of the School's they are qualified and complete the cur- regular courses are available for such ef- riculum along with regular officer stu- forts. For groups of employees from an dents. The available curricula are de- agency, special courses can be offered to scribed later in the catalogue. meet particular requirements, provided Degree Programs. For a civilian stu- the demand is in an area of expertise of dent a program can be designed which the School. leads to the award of a graduate degree Continuing Education. The opportuni- and which meets his educational goals. ties available include short course offer- The program can be designed to meet the ings both on and off campus, as well as degree requirements in a minimal time. A self-instructional courses for credit to be preparatory phase (off-campus), designed taken individually. The Continuing Edu- to minimize the residency requirement, is cation program is given in detail in the developed in consultation with a School following section. advisor and may include courses at a local There are no formal requirements for university, self-study courses from the enrollment in the Continuing Education School, and other appropriate activities. Program or for a non-degree program. The residency phase, usually one year or For admission to a program leading to a less in length, entails completing the graduate degree, the minimum qualifica- course work, passing any required qual- tion is an accredited baccalaureate degree ifying examinations, and starting a thesis with appropriate preparation for the pro- project. The third phase (on or off- posed degree program. The School will campus) involves completion of the thesis require submission of official transcripts project. covering all college work completed to Degree programs are described in the date. In some cases, submission of departmental descriptions. Those avail- Graduate Record Examination Aptitude able include Masters degrees in the areas test scores may be requested. of Naval Intelligence, National Security The point of contact for information Affairs, Operations Research, Financial pertaining to on campus programs and Management, Personnel Management, admission to degree programs is the Dean Systems Acquisition Management, of Academic Administration, Code 014, Communications Management, Com- telephone (408) 646-2392 or Autovon puter Systems Management, Material 878-2392. For information concerning Management, Human Resources Man- continuing education, the contact point is agement, Mathematics, Physics, the Executive Director of Continuing Meteorology, Oceanography, Aeronauti- Education, Code 500, telephone (408) cal Engineering, Mechanical Engineer- 646-2558 or Autovon 878-2558.

21 CONTINUING EDUCATION

CONTINUING EDUCATION PROGRAM

The Naval Postgraduate School Con- Application for enrollment in a self- tinuing Education (NPSCE) Program was study course may be made at any time. established in June 1974 as a means of Applicants may use the appropriate form providing extended educational services contained in the last section of the that will more comprehensively fulfill the NPSCE catalogue or write a letter using school's assigned mission. These ex- the format specified in CNETINST tended services include the offerings of 1520.8. Applications should be for- self-study credit courses off campus; the warded to Superintendent (Code 500), delivery, both on and off campus, of pro- Naval Postgraduate School, via the com- fessionally relevant short courses; and mand holding the applicant's service or expanded educational counseling. The personnel record in accordance with self- study credit course offerings and the CNETINST 1520.8. Self- study courses short course offerings are given in the an- are also available to civilian employees of nual NPSCE catalogues which have wide the Federal government. distribution. CNETINST 1520.8 (29 The Naval Postgraduate School will Aug. 75) is the authenticating instruction provide general educational counseling for the NPSCE program. This program is service to assist officers in planning their administered by the Continuing Educa- educational needs on a timely basis con- tion Office. sistent with Navy requirements and career Selected graduate preparatory courses fields. Inquiries may be addressed to the are delivered off campus in a self-study Office of Continuing Education. self-paced mode for the same academic Commands may apply for the delivery credit as received when taken on campus. of short courses by completing the appro- These self-study courses are delivered to priate form in the NPSCE catalogue. officers at their current duty stations for Courses applied for in this manner wMl, completion during off-duty hours or upon approval, be supported for delivery work/study periods. They have been by the Chief of Naval Education and selected primarily from courses normally Training. taken in the initial phase of curricular Commands with available funds may programs at the Naval Postgraduate also arrange for the delivery on site of School and serve to provide general edu- courses in the NPSCE catalogue or spe- cational upgrading opportunities. More cial short courses to meet specific needs particularly, their completion will reduce on a direct reimbursable basis to the student time required in subsequent NAVPGSCOL. Delivery costs may be fully-funded graduate education pro- obtained from the Continuing Education grams. The delivery of a self-study credit Office. course normally requires the local partici- Special short courses are offered yearly pation of a qualified tutor (e.g., a fellow at the NAVPGSCOL on a tuition-fee officer with requisite graduate education). basis. Tuition fees vary between $200 to Specific information about the Per- $400 per course and must be paid by the sonalized System of Instruction (PSI) student's sponsoring activity. These used to deliver these courses is in the courses are given in response to indi- NPSCE catalogue which may be obtained vidual requests. More information on from the Continuing Education Offipe, these courses is available from the Con- Code 500, Naval Postgraduate School, tinuing Education Office, Naval Post- Monterey, CA 93940, Autovon 878- graduate School, Monterey, California 2558. 93940, or telephone (408) 646-2558 or AUTOVON 878-2558.

22 COMPUTER CENTER

W. R. CHURCH COMPUTER CENTER

STAFF Douglas George Williams, Professor and Director (1961)*; M.A. (Hon- The Naval Postgraduate School was ours), Univ. of Edinburgh, 1954. one of the first educational institutions to use digital computers in its instructional Roger Rene Hilleary, Manager, User and research programs. The first ma- Services (1962); B.A., Pomona Col- chine, an NCR 102A, was installed in lege, 1953; M.S., Naval Postgraduate 1954 and operated by the Department of School, 1970. Mathematics. A central Computer Facil- ity was created in 1960 as an organiza- Edward Norton Ward, Manager, Sys- tional unit separate from the academic tems Programming (1959); B.A., departments. In December, 1969, the Univ. of California at Los Angeles, Facility was renamed the "W. R. Church

1952. Computer Center' ' in memory of Profes- sor Church, Chairman of the Department David Fredric Norman, Manager, Op- of Mathematics (1947-66) who recog- erations (1969). nized very early the value of computers in education and was instrumental in obtain- Maxwell Joseph Feuerman, Manager, ing the first computers at the School. Information Services (1961). The many services of the Center are available to all faculty, staff, and students Lois May Brunner (1961); B.S. Naval of the School for use in connection with Postgraduate School, 1968. instruction, research, or administrative activities. Michael Gary Corcoran (1969); These services are based on an IBM B.A., Univ. of California at Santa 360, Model 67 computer system which Cruz, 1969. was installed in April 1967. The present hardware complement includes two Hans Welter Doelman (1967); B.S., Model 67 processing units; four different Univ. of California at Berkeley, 1956. levels of storage, including 2 million bytes of core, four million bytes on a Richard Eugene Donat (1968); B.S.^ drum, 24 disk drives with 29 million California State Polytechnic Univ., bytes each and 4 drives with 100 million 1967. bytes each, nine magnetic tape units; two high-speed plotters, forty remote hard- Lloyd George Nolan (1971); B.S., copy and video terminals, and an IBM Colorado State Univ., 1968. 2250 Graphical Display Unit. The two processors are identical and can access di- Bernadette Requiro Peavey (1967); rectly, or control, all components of the B.A., Univ. of California at Berkeley, system including core storage modules, 1963. input/output controllers and devices. The resources of the system can be allocated Sharon Dill Raney (1964); B.S., easily to create different operational envi- California State Polytechnic Univ., ronments. 1964. The Center offers users two modes of operational service, viz., batch-process- Kathryn Betty Strutynski (1967); ing (under OS/MVT with HASP) and B.S., Brigham Young Univ., 1953. general-purpose, time-sharing (under CP/CMS). Both operating systems offer a Trinity Arturo Valles (1970); B.S., great variety of programming languages, Univ., 1957. libraries of subroutines and other software

* The year of joining the Postgraduate School is facilities. Language support includes indicated in parentheses. 23 COMPUTER CENTER

FORTRAN IV, WATFOR, Assembler, ing, Mathematics, Operations Research COBOL, APL, PL/1, BASIC, AL- and Administrative Sciences. GOLW, GPSS and SIMSCRIPT. The Center has a staff of 26 people of The School has a heavy commitment to whom 11 are mathematician/program- computers consistent with their .present mers. The professional staff provides a and future role in military operations. All consulting service in applications pro- of the academic curricula have been af- gramming, systems programming and fected by the presence of computers on problem formulation to students and fac- campus. The percentage of active student ulty members. They participate in an ac- and faculty participation in the computer tive research and development program field is at a level probably unequalled at directed primarily towards improving the any other educational institution. All present operational environment or intro- graduate students take at least one course ducing new hardware and software in computer science. They are introduced facilities to users. Current projects in- to the computer early in their curricula at clude work on systems measurement, im- the Naval Postgraduate School and en- provement of operating systems, graphi- couraged to use it in subsequent course cal data processing, time-sharing work and research. facilities, and numerical analysis. The Computer Center supports a wide In 1975 the Center began to provide variety of specialist courses in computer data processing support to the tenant ac- science offered by the Departments of tivity, MARDAC (Manpower Research Computer Science, Electrical Engineer- and Data Analysis Center).

24 LIBRARY

DUDLEY KNOX LIBRARY

STAFF

PAUL SPINKS, Associate Professor and FRANCES EMANUELA MARIA Director of Libraries (1959)*; B.A., STRACHWITZ, Research Reports Univ. of Oklahoma, 1958; M.S., Librarian (1970); B.S., Dominican 1959. College of San Rafael, 1951; M.A., Univ. of Denver, 1968. MARY THERESE BRITT, Assistant Professor and Associate Director of HELEN JEANETTE WALDRON, Head Libraries (1966); B.S., College of St. Cataloging Librarian (1975); B.A., Catherine, 1947. Univ. of Washington, 1937; M.A., Univ. of California at Berkeley, 1951.

PASCO DOMENIC COLLELO, Re- * The year of joining the Postgraduate School is search Reports Librarian (1973); B.S., indicated in parentheses. Brown Univ., 1951; M.A., California State Univ. at San Jose, 1972.

The Dudley Knox Library, a building NOEL WILLIAM JOHNSON, Assistant of 50,000 square feet, was dedicated in Professor and Head Research Reports 1972. The collections housed therein Librarian (1$70); B.A., Univ. of serve the research and instructional needs Nevada, 1949; B.L.S., Univ. of of the community, comprising students, California at Berkeley, 1954. faculty and staff of all departments of the Postgraduate School. They embrace an active collection of 163,000 books, GEORGIA PLUMMER LYKE, Refer- bound periodicals and pamphlets; 10,200 ence Librarian (1952); A. A., Hartnell book and journal volumes in microform; College, 1940. 166,000 research reports in hard copy and 146,000 in microform; and over 1,700 periodicals and other serial publications ROGER McQUEEN MARTIN, Reader currently received. These materials paral- Services Librarian (1974); B.S., Univ. lel the School's curricular fields of en- of Texas, 1949; M.S., Univ. of Texas, gineering, physical science, managerial 1958. sciences, operations research, naval sci- ences, and national security affairs. DIANE SHIRLEY NIXON, Head Ac- The Reader Services Division provides quisitions Librarian (1969); B.A., the open literature sources, such as California State Univ. Fullerton, 1968; books, periodicals and journals, indexes M.S., Univ. of Southern California, and abstracting services, pamphlet mate- 1969. rials and newspapers. It provides access to more than 35 computer data bases in the curricular fields of interest by means LOUIS OVEN, Cataloging Librarian of DIALOG On-Line Information Re- Institute of (1969); B.A., Monterey trieval Service (Lockheed Information Foreign Studies, 1964; M.A., 1968; Systems). It furnishes facilities for mi- M.A., Univ. of California at Berke- croform reading and printing and for re- ley, 1968. production of printed matter. It borrows publications not held in its collections CLEO ELIZABETH PETERSON, Re- from other libraries. search Reports Librarian (1958); The Research Reports and Classified A. A., Red Oak College, 1938. Materials Division is the principal re-

25 LIBRARY pository for research documents received mentation Center in Alexandria, Vir- by the School. It houses the Library's ginia, and thus to provide rapid and effi- classified and unclassified research re- cient access to the 800,000 documents ports in hard copy and microfiche. A ma- held by the Center. chine information storage and retrieval The Christopher Buckley, Jr., Library system that utilizes the School's computer is located on the second floor of the Li- facilities is available for bibliographic brary. It is a collection of some 8,000 searches of research and development volumes pertaining principally to naval documents held by the division. An SDI history and the sea. The establishment of (Selective Dissemination of Information) this collection was made possible by the Service is also available. In addition, the interest and generosity of Mr. Christopher Division is now able to perform, via its Buckley, Pebble Beach, California, who own remote terminal, computer searches began donating books to the School for of the data banks of the Defense Docu- this Library in 1949.

26 CURRICULAR OFFICES

CURRICULAR OFFICES

Organizational Title Code AUTOVON

Administrative Science 36 878-2536 Aeronautical Engineering 31 878-2491 Antisubmarine Warfare 331 878-2116 Computer Technology 37 878-2174 Electronics and Communications 32 878-2056 Environmental Sciences 35 878-2044 Naval Engineering 34 878-2033 Naval Intelligence/National Security Affairs 38 878-2228 Operations Research/Systems Analysis 30 878-2786 Weapons Engineering 33 878-2116

CURRICULA

Normal Cognizant Curriculum Length Normal Curricular Curriculum Number (Months) Convening Dates Office Code

Administrative Science (Material Movement) 813 12-18 July 36 (Procurement Management) 815 12-18 January, July 36 (USMC, USCG, USA and Allied Officers) 817 12-18 January, July 36

(Systems Inventory Management) . . 819 12-18 January, July 36 (Material Management) 827 12-18 January, July 36 (Financial Management) 837 12-18 January, July 36 (Manpower/Personnel Management) 847 12-18 January, July 36

(Human Resources Management) . . . 857 12-18 January, July 36 Aeronautical Engineering 610 18-24 Any Quarter 31 Aeronautical Engineering- Avionics 611 18-24 Any Quarter 31 Air-Ocean Science 373 18-24 Any Quarter 35 Antisubmarine Warfare 525 24 March 331 Command, Control and 3 Communications (C ) 365 18 September Communications Engineering 600 18-27 March, September 32 Computer Science 368 18-21 March, September 37 Computer Systems 367 12-15 March, September 37

Electronic Warfare - Engineering 591 18-27 March, September 32 Electronic Warfare Systems Technology 595 18-24 March 32 Engineering Electronics 590 18-27 March, September 32 Engineering Science 6 March, September Meteorology 372 18-24 Any Quarter 35

27 CURRICULAR OFFICES

National Security Affairs (Middle East, Africa, South Asia) 681 12-24 Any Quarter 38 (Far East, Southeast Asia, Pacific) 682 12-24 Any Quarter 38

(Europe, USSR) - 683 12-24 Any Quarter 38 (International Organizations and Negotiations) 684 12-18 Any Quarter 38 (Strategic Planning) 686 12-18 Any Quarter 38 Naval Engineering 570 18-27 Any Quarter 34 Naval Intelligence 825 18 Any Quarter 38 Oceanography 440 18-24 Any Quarter 35 Operations Research/ Systems Analysis 360 18-24 March, September 30 Systems Acquisition Management .... 816 15-16 March, September 36 Telecommunications Systems 620 15-18 September 32 Underwater Acoustics 535 18-24 September 33 Weapon Systems Science 531 18-24 March (September) 33 Weapon Systems Technology 530 18-24 September (March) 33

28 ADMINISTRATIVE SCIENCE

ADMINISTRATIVE SCIENCE ROBERT WILLIAM SAGEHORN, PROGRAMS Lieutenant Commander, U.S. Navy; CURRICULA NUMBERS 813, Academic Associate for Material 815, 816, 817, 819, Movement (813); B.S., California 827, 837, 847, 857 Maritime Academy, 1959; B.A., Naval Postgraduate School, 1970; M.S., 1975. JAMES THOMAS FLEMING, Jr., JOHN DAVID SENGER, Academic As- Commander, U.S. Navy; Curricular sociate for Manpower/Personnel Man- Officer; B.A., Dartmouth College, agement (847); B.S., Univ. of Illinois, 1955; M.B.A., Univ. of Santa Clara, 1945; M.S., 1948; Ph.D., 1965. 1972. JOSEPH DOMINIC MONZA, Lieuten- OBJECTIVE — Postgraduate educa- ant Commander, U.S. Navy; Assistant tion in the Administrative Science cur- Curricular Officer; B.A., Geneva Col- ricula is designed to increase an officer's lege, 1959; M.S., Management, Naval potential in all assignments throughout Postgraduate School, 1970. his military career, including operational, ALEXANDER CLAYTON CROSBY, technical, managerial and policy-making billets. The interdisciplinary approach, Commander, U.S. Navy, Academic which includes the study of the use of Associate for Procurement (815); quantitative methods in problem solving, B.S., Univ. of California at Berkeley, behavioral and managerial science, eco- 1957; MBA Harvard Univ., 1972. nomics, and financial management, pro- LESLIE DARBYSHIRE, Academic As- vides the officer- student with new ways sociate for Financial Management of coping with problems which will be (837); B.A., Univ. of Bristol, 1950; encountered on subsequent duty assign- D.B.A., Univ. of Washington, 1957. ments. CARSON KAN EOYANG, Academic ADMINISTRATIVE SCIENCE CURRICULA Associate for Human Resources Man- (GROUP MN) agement (857); B.A., Massachusetts

Institute of Technology, 1966; CURRICULUM 813 - Material Move- M.B.A., Harvard Univ., 1968; Ph.D., ment Stanford Univ., 1976. CURRICULUM 815 - Procurement Man- JAMES KERN HARTMAN, Academic agement Associate for Administrative Science CURRICULUM 817 Programs (817); B.S., Massachusetts Allied Officers - Various Management Institute of Technology, 1965; M.S., Options Univ. of Nebraska, 1967; Ph.D., Case U.S. Army - Operations Research/ Western Reserve Univ., 1970. Systems Analysis (Business) U.S. Marine Corps - Defense Systems KLINE, Academic MELVIN BERNARD Analysis Associate for Systems Acquisition U.S. Coast Guard - Management Sci- Management B.S., College of (816); ence the City of New York, 1941; M.S., CURRICULUM 819 - Systems Inventory Stevens Institute of Technology, 1952; Management M.E., Univ. of California at Los CURRICULUM 827 - Material Manage- Angeles, 1959; Ph.D., 1966. ment ALAN WAYNE MCMASTERS, CURRICULUM 837 - Financial Man- Academic Associate for Systems In- agement ventory Management (819) and Mate- CURRICULUM 847 - Manpower/ rial Management (827); B.S., Univ. of Personnel Management California at Berkeley, 1957; M.S., CURRICULUM 857 - Human Resources 1962; Ph.D., 1966. Management

29 ADMINISTRATIVE SCIENCE

OBJECTIVE (SPECIFIC) — to pro- rently ordered into curriculum 817 for a vide graduate level education in the man- tailored Operations Research/Systems agerial skills essential to the professional Analysis Business program. Allied of- development of military officers with di- ficers are ordered into 817 or one of the verse academic backgrounds. Upon suc- other numbered curricula dependent upon cessful completion of the curriculum, the the desires of their sponsoring service. officer will have a sound understanding of Officers successfully completing the pro- the financial processes of major industries gram will be awarded the degree of Mas- in their dealings with the private and pub- ter of Science in Management. In addi- lic sector; an appreciation of capital tion, Naval officers who complete one of budgeting and management of the dollar the approved programs are awarded a resources of the Services; broad knowl- subspecialty billet code (P-code) appro- edge of the inventory and allocation pro- priate to their concentration area. Mat- cesses and the elements of the procure- riculation for all programs occurs semi- ment cycle, including contract adminis- annually in January and July, except for tration; and a deep understanding of indi- Material Movement which convenes only vidual, group, and organizational behav- in July. Matriculation at times other than ior. A graduate of this curriculum is thus January and July may be coordinated be- prepared to understand and make the tween Curricular Officer and Pers 440 on managerial decisions critical to effective a case basis. development and utilization of complex The curricula share a common core of military systems. fundamental and graduate courses, with QUALIFICATIONS FOR ADMIS- specialization occurring as the result of SION — A baccalaureate degree with required and elective graduate courses above average grades is required. Com- and thesis research in the concentration pletion of at least two semesters of col- area. The Fundamentals Program is de- lege mathematics at or above the level of signed to bring all students up to a com- college algebra or trigonometry is consid- mon level before entry into graduate ered to be the minimum mathematical study. This portion of the program varies preparation. Officers who wish to en- in length from zero to two quarters, de- hance their opportunity for selection to pending upon the student's background, any of the Administration Science pro- prior academic work, and time away from grams are strongly encouraged to take academic endeavors. The Graduate Pro- courses in the Fundamentals Program gram requires four quarters to complete. Area through off duty education or Classroom instruction is supplemented through the Naval Postgraduate School by the weekly guest lecturer seminar, MN Office of Continuing Education. 0001, which affords the student an oppor- DESCRIPTION — The curricula noted tunity to participate in the discussions of above are interdisciplinary programs pertinent topics with senior military of- which integrate mathematics, accounting, ficers, business executives, and promi- economics, behavioral science, manage- nent educators. ment theory, operations/systems analysis, Officers from the U.S. Services as well and a subspecialty concentration area into as allied officers start the curriculum with an understanding of the process by which widely varied academic backgrounds and the defense mission is accomplished. complete intellectually demanding Subspecialty concentration areas are courses in many disciplines. Upon entry specified by ordering officers into a spe- into the program, each student's prior cific curriculum number — 813, 815, academic work and related military expe- 819, 827, 837, 847 or 857 for U.S. Navy rience is evaluated by the Curricular Of- officers. USMC and USCG officers are fice. As a result of this evaluation, ordered into 817 for Defense Systems academic credits for courses previously Analysis of Management Science, respec- completed and applicable to the Student's tively, or to one of the other numbered curriculum will be transferred. In addi- curricula. U.S. Army students are cur- tion, validation or credit by examination

30 1

ADMINISTRATIVE SCIENCE

is encouraged where knowledge of the MN 3140 Microeconomic Theory 4-0 material has been acquired by experience or service courses. Through these proce- Accounting: provides the necessary back-

dures, it is expected that, in many cases, ground in basic accounting principles, costing, and the Fundamentals material need not be budgeting. taken at the Naval Postgraduate School. The remaining courses will be pro- MN 2150 Financial Accounting 4-0 grammed with a nominal course load of MN 3161 Managerial Accounting 4-0 16 credit hours per quarter. Fundamental Program Organization/Behavior: provides an introduc- tion to personal/group behavior and the relation- This portion of the program provides ship to organizational management. the necessary background and intellectual tools for successful study in a graduate MN 2106 Individual and Group Behavior .4-0 program in management. The courses MN 3105 Organization and Management .4-0 contained in the Fundamentals Program are considered prerequisites to the four Data Processing: provides an introduction to quarters of graduate work. Credit transfer data processing equipment and provides the stu- and course validation is especially appli- dent with programming skills for use in follow on cable to this area. It is Navy policy to courses. educate officers to the minimum level es- sential for satisfactory performance in CS 2010 Introduction to Computers 2-0 validated billets. In an era of increased CS 2103 Cobol Programming 1-2

manpower costs and reduced budgets, it Graduate Program (813, 815, 817, 819, 827,

is obvious that education costs can be re- 837, 847, 857) duced and billet requirements can be The graduate portion of the curricula consists of satisfied most economically by selecting a common core of required courses, elective and, those officers for postgraduate education in some cases, required courses in the subspe- who can complete program requirements cialization concentration area, at least one free in the minimum time. Officers can en- elective, and thesis research. Any transfer of hance their selectability for Administra- graduate credit which may be applicable can be tive Science Curricula by completing as used to reduce the number of courses in this area. many of the prerequisite courses, or their equivalents, listed in the Fundamentals Required Courses: area, through off duty education or through the NPS Office of Continuing MN 3101 Personnel Management and Labor Education. Relations (Note 1) 4-0 MN 3172 Public Policy Processes fol- The model curriculum includes the {Note 2) 4-0 lowing comprehensive fields: MN 3183 Management Information

Mathematics: provides the quantitative tools Systems 4-0 required for successful pursuit of the remaining PS 321 Statistics (Note 3) 4-0 courses. OS 3212 Operations Research for Management 4-0

3812 Communications in MA 2300 Mathematics for Management . .5-0 MN PS 3005 Probability 3-0 Organizations (Note 4) 2-0 to 4.0 MN 4105 Management Policy 4-0

Note: U.S. Army 817 students follow a different MN 4145 Systems Analysis 4-0 Mathematics program. Note 1: Not required for USMC and U.S. ! Army students. Economics: provides an introduction to eco- Note 2: Not required for Allied students. nomic theory and decision processes. Note 3: Not required for U.S. Army stu- dents.

MN 2031 Economic Decision Making . . .4-0 Note 4: Required of all USN officers.

31 ADMINISTRATIVE SCIENCE

Material Movement (813) Electives

Required Courses - Graduate Program Two from List A, one from List B and one Free Elective. Substitutes with permission of Marine MN 3372 Material Logistics 4-0 Corps Representative and the Curricular Officer

MN 3373 Transportation Management . . .4-0 MN 4373 Transportation Policy 4-0 List A

Electives SM 4304 Seminar in Systems Acquisition 4-0 MN 4152 Decision Making for MN 3124 Analysis of Bureaucracy 4-0 Financial Management MN 4151 Internal Control and Auditing . .4-0 (Note) 4-0 MN 4152 Decision Making for MN 3371 Procurement and Contract Financial Management 4-0 Administration 4-0 MN 4162 Cost Accounting 4-0 MN 3374 Production Management 4-0 MN 4181 Applications of Management MN 3376 Selected Topics in Information Systems 4-0 Logistics 2-0 to 5-0

List B Note - required of all USN Supply Corps Officers MN 3760 Manpower Economics 4-0 Procurement Management (815) MN 4191 Decision Analysis 4-0

MN 4920 Public Expenditure Analysis . . .4-0 Required Courses - Graduate Program MN 4941 Microeconomic Theory and Policy 4-0 SM 3304 Procurement Planning and AS 4613 Theory of Systems Analysis . . .4-0 Contract Negotiation 4-0 SM 3305 Contract Administration 4-0 Management Science (817-USCG) MN 4371 Procurement Policy 4-0 AS 3501 Project Management 4-0 Electives (choice of 6)

Electives OS 3214 Operations Research Methodology 4-0 MN 4152 Decision Making for Financial 3215 Selected Topics in Management (Note) 4-0 MN Management Science 2-0 to 5-0 OA 4614 Cost Estimation 4-0 MN 3645 Investigative Methods of SM 4302 Public Expenditure, Policy Economics I 4-0 & Analysis 4-0 MN 4181 Application of Management MN 3372 Material Logistics 4-0 Information Systems 4-0 MN 4192 Workshop in Management Note: Required of all USN Supply Corps Officers Science 2-0 to 5-0 MN 4193 Selected Topics in Management Defense Systems Analysis (817-USMC) Science 2-0 to 5-0 OA 3604 Linear Programming 4-0 Required Courses - Graduate Program OA-3620 Inventory I 4-0 OA 4634 Games of Strategy 4-0 MN 3371 Procurement and Contract MN 4191 Decision Analysis 4-0 Administration 4-0 OA4651 Search Theory and Detection ..4-0 or SM 3304 Procurement Planning and Contract Negotiation 4-0 Operations Research/Systems Analysis Business

MN 4154 Financial Management in (817-USA) the Navy 4-0 OA 4614 Cost Estimation 4-0

32 ADMINISTRATIVE SCIENCE

MA 2045 Computational Matrix AS 3501 Project Management 4-0 Albegra 3-0 MN 3373 Transportation Management . . .4-0

MA 1100 Calculus and Vector Analysis . .5-2

Note: Required of all USN Supply Corps Officers

Required Courses - Graduate Program

OA 3604 Linear Programming 4-0 Material Management (827) OA 4656 Operations Research of Army Weapons Systems 4-0 Required Courses - Graduate Program PS 3011 Probability and Statistics for MN 3372 Material Logistics Management I 5-0 4-0 PS 3012 Probability and Statistics for MN 3374 Production Management 4-0

Management II 4-0 MN 3371 Procurement and Contract MN 4181 Applications of Management Administration 4-0 Information Systems 4-0 Elective Courses (Supply Corps)

Electives (choice of 3) MN 4152 Decision Making for Financial Management (Note) 4-0 OA 3704 Stochastic Models I 4-0 OA 3620 Inventory. I 4-0 OA 4654 Combat Models 4-0

MN 3373 Transportation Management . . .4-0 MN 3645 Investigative Methods of AS 3501 Project Management 4-0 Economics I 4-0 OA 4614 Cost Estimation 4-0 Note: Required of all USN Supply Corps Officers OA 4631 Nonlinear and Dynamic Programming 4-0 Electives (Aviation Officers)

OA 4633 Networks Flows and Graphs . . .4-0

OA 3620 Inventory I 4-0 OS 3306 Systems Effectiveness Concepts OS 3214 Operations Research and Methods 4-0 Methodology 4-0 OS 4322 Quality Assurance 4-0 OA 3657 Human Factors in Systems AS 3501 Project Management 4-0 Design I 4-0

PS 4510 Selected Topics in Probability Financial Management (837) and Statistics 2-0 to 5-0 MN 4191 Decision Analysis 4-0 Required Courses - Graduate Program

MN 4154 Financial Management in the Systems Inventory Management (819) Navy 4-0 MN 4161 Financial Control Systems 4-0 Required Courses - Graduate Program

Electives MN 3372 Material Logistics 4-0

OA 3620 Inventory I 4-0 MN 3165 Selected Topics in Accounting OA 4622 Seminar in Supply and Financial Systems 4-0 Management 2-0 to 5-0 MN 3251 Accounting Theory and Electives Standards 4-0 MN 4151 Internal Control and MN 4152 Decision Making for Financial Auditing 4-0 Management (Note) 4-0 MN 4152 Decision Making for OA 4621 Inventory II 4-0 Financial Management MN 3371 Procurement Contract and (Note ) 4-0

Administration 4-0 MN 4153 Seminar in Accounting and MN 3374 Production Management 4-0 Control 4-0

33 ADMINISTRATIVE SCIENCE

MN 4162 Cost Accounting 4-0 Electives MN 4165 Selected Topics in Accounting and Financial MN 3121 Leadership and Group Management 4-0 Behavior 4-0 MN 4181 Application for Management MN 3122 Comparative Cultures 4-0 Information Systems 4-0 MN 3111 Personnel Management Processes 4-0 Note: Required of all USN Supply Corps Officers MN 4147 Industrial Relations 4-0

Thesis Research (813, 815, 817, 819, 827, 837,

Manpower/Personnel Management 847, 857): A total of twelve quarter hours are allo- cated over the last for (847) two quarters thesis research. The thesis provides the student with the opportu-

nity to apply graduate education and experience to Required Courses - Graduate Program a challenging problem of interest to his service. MN 3111 Personnel Management Thesis topics must receive the approval of a faculty Processes 4-0 member who acts as the thesis advisor, the MN 3001 Behavioral Research Academic Department Chairman and the Curricu- Methodology 4-0 lar Officer. MN 3124 Analysis of Bureaucracy 4-0 OA 4401 Manpower and Personnel SYSTEMS ACQUISITION MANAGEMENT Models 4-0 CURRICULUM CURRICULUM NUMBER 816 Electives (GROUP SM)

MN 4112 Personnel Selection and OBJECTIVE (SPECIFIC) — to provide graduate Classification 4-0 level education in the fundamental concepts, MN 3760 Manpower Economics 4-0 methodology, and analytical techniques required MN 4115 Personnel Motivation 4-0 for the life cycle management of the planning and MN 4114 Personnel Performance acquisition of defense systems. This curriculum is Evaluation 4-0 designed to meet the military's expanding needs MN 4147 Industrial Relations 4-0 for acquisition management personnel at headquar- MN 3120 Planning and Control 4-0 ters and related activities having system acquisi- OA 4403 Industrial Engineering tion management responsibilities. Requirements QUALIFICATIONS FOR ADMISSION — A Determination 4-0 baccalaureate degree with above-average grades is required. Completion of differential and integral

calculus is considered minimal mathematical prep-

Human Resources Management (857) aration. Undergraduate majors in engineering or physical science are highly desirable, though other

Required Courses - Graduate Program majors may be acceptable if the officer's experi- ence demonstrates acquired technical competence.

MN 3114 Organizational Development I .3-0 DESCRIPTION — The curriculum consists of MN 3115 Human Resource Development .0-4 basic core courses which provide the fundamental MN 3001 Behavioral Research disciplines essential to the acquisition process. Methodology 4-0 Advanced courses are concerned with the structure

MN 4121 Organizational Theory .' .4-0 of acquisition management in the Department of MN 3124 Analysis of Bureaucracy 4-0 Defense and the decisions required of the acquisi- MN 3002 HRM Data Assessment 0-2 tion manager. An appreciation of the forces at

MN 4123 Organization Development II . .3-0 work in industry and within the executive and MN 41 16 Education and Training 4-0 legislative branches of government and how these

MN 3 1 16 HRM Field Work 0-4 forces impact on systems acquisition policies and

MN 3 1 17 Workshop Design 0-4 procedures is presented throughout the program.

34 ADMINISTRATIVE SCIENCE

Elective courses are available to enable the student OS 3203 Survey of Operations Analysis/ to gain additional knowledge in acquisition areas Systems Analysis 4-0 of particular interest. Classroom instruction stres- SM 3306 Systems Effectiveness Concepts ses theoretical concepts as well as real world prob- and Methods 4-0 lems solving through lectures, case studies, prob- MN 4145 Systems Analysis 4-0 lem exercises and computer simulation exercises. Financial Management and Resource Allo- Field trips to industrial and military activities are cation: provides an understanding of government also utilized to reinforce and further develop class- and corporate finance. room concepts.

This curriculum is available to officers from the MN 2150 Financial Accounting 4-0 U. S. military services and allied officers on an MN 3161 Managerial Accounting 4-0 individual case basis. Upon successful completion, MN 3143 Managerial Economics 4-0 graduates are awarded the Master of Science in SM 4302 Public Expenditure Policy & Management, and U.S. Naval officers are also Analysis 4-0 awarded the appropriate subspecialty billet code. Marticulation occurs semiannually in September Life Cycle Management: from program con- and March. Entry at other times may be coordi- ception through acquisition to replacement. nated between Pers 440 and the curricular officer on a case basis. A student's program may not ex- SM 3301 Introduction to Systems ceed six quarters in length. Acquisition 4-0

Classroom instruction is supplemented by the SM 3302 Fundamentals of Project weekly guest lecturer seminar, SM 0001, which Management 4-0 affords the student an opportunity to participate in SM 3304 Procurement Planning and discussions with senior military officers, industry Contract Negotiation 4-0 executives, and officials from governmental agen- SM 3305 Contract Administration 4-0 cies. MN 3374 Production Management 4-0 Upon entry into the program each student's prior SM 4305 Systems Engineering 4-0 academic work and related military experience is Management I evaluated by the Curricular Office. As a result of SM 4306 Systems Engineering 4-0 this evaluation, academic credits for courses pre- Management II viously completed and applicable to the Systems Personnel: introduction to the basic principles

Acquisition Management curriculum will be trans- of effective personnel management in government ferred. In addition, validation or credit by exami- and industry. nation is encouraged where knowledge of the ma- terials has been acquired by experience or service MN 2106 Individual and Group Behavior .4-0 courses. Through these procedures, it is expected SM 3302 Fundamentals of that, in many cases, the background or preparatory Project Management 4-0 material need not be taken at the Naval Post- MN3812 Communications in graduate School. The remaining courses will be Organizations 2-0 to 4-0 programmed with a nominal course load of 16 credit hours per quarter. Electives: provides an opportunity to pursue an

The model curriculum includes the following area in depth. Selection of electives is done in discipline fields: cooperation with the approval of the Curricular Of-

fice. At least one of the available electives must be

Quantitative Methods: provides the tools nec- from the Financial Management area. A list of essary for successful pursuit of the remaining suggested electives follows: courses.

MN 4151 Internal Control and Auditing . .4-0 OS 3201 Fundamentals of Operations MN 4152 Decision Making for Financial Analysis/Systems Management 4-0

Analysis I 4-0 MN 4154 Financial Management in the OS 3202 Fundamentals of Operations Navy 4-0 Analysis/Systems MN 4161 Financial Control Systems 4-0

Analysis II 4-0 MN 4162 Cost Accounting 4-0

35 ADMINISTRATIVE SCIENCE

MN 4181 Application of Management SM 4304 Seminar in Systems Acquisition 4-0 Information Systems 4-0 OA 4322 Quality Assurance 4-0 MN 4147 Industrial Relations 4-0 OS 4703 Reliability, Maintainability MN 3120 Planning and Control 4-0 and Safety of Weapons

MN 4123 Organization Development II . .3-0 Systems 4-0 MN 4371 Procurement Policy 4-0 OA 3657 Human Factors in Systems

Design I 4-0 Thesis Research: Twelve quarter hours are al-

MN 4191 Decision Analysis 4-0 located for thesis research. Emphasis is on military MN 3124 Analysis of Bureaucracy 4-0 applications in the acquisition field. Topics are MN 4942 Structure, Conduct and Per- chosen with the approval of the Thesis Advisor, formance of the Defense the Academic Associate, the Department Chair- Industries 4-0 man and the Curricular Officer.

36 AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING

AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING PROGRAMS CURRICULA NUMBERS 610 AND 611

LEO ALLEN LUKENAS, Commander, have had adequate coverage in the basic U.S. Navy; Curricular Officer; B.S., physical and mathematical sciences. U.S. Naval Academy, 1958; B.S. in INDIRECT INPUT — Officers with a Aeronautical Engineering, Naval baccalaureate who do not meet the re- Postgraduate School, 1965; M.S. in quirements for direct input receive orders Aeronautical Engineering, Princeton to the Engineering Science Curriculum Univ., 1967; M.S. in Management, for one or more quarters to prepare for the Naval Postgraduate School, 1974. Aeronautical Engineering Program. Many high performing naval officers with ROBERT DIEFENDORF ZUCKER, relatively poor undergraduate academic Academic Associate; B.S. in M.E., records show evidence of undeveloped Massachusetts Institute of Technol- academic potential. These officers can ogy, 1946; M.M.E., Univ. of Louis- qualify for graduate programs following preparation in ville, 1958; Ph.D., Univ. of Arizona, Engineering Science. 1966. DESCRIPTION — Over the years Aeronautical Engineering Programs have served the Navy and aviation officers by provide advanced OBJECTIVE — To providing graduate level interdisciplinary knowledge and accelerated professional programs leading to Aero subspecialty aviation development for officers as a codes and several different level cornerstone in their career dealing with academic goals. continuing in all challenges aspects of the Officers enter with varied academic life cycle of naval aircraft and weapons backgrounds and complete intellectually systems. This education enhances per- demanding courses in a wide variety of formance in all duties throughout a naval subjects. In addition, the programs in- career including operational billets, tech- clude completion of an aviation-oriented nical management assignments and thesis project under the personal guidance policy-making positions. of a faculty advisor, award of appropriate QUALIFICATIONS FOR ADMIS- graduate degrees, and, for some, a practi- SION — Naval aviation officers are cal work experience tour at a Navy or selected for Aeronautical Engineering civilian aviation industrial activity. As a Programs on the basis of their profes- result, naval officers develop sound sional performance and potential for ad- graduate level technical ability based on vanced graduate level studies. Normally, general engineering and scientific princi- students receive orders to the curriculum ples, build a new appreciation for con- after completion of their first operational tinuing education, acquire diverse profes- tour and, therefore, have been away from sional knowledge, develop analytical college approximately five years. Since ability for practical problem solving,

! naval aviation officers have many differ- broaden their capacity for original ent academic backgrounds, there are sev- thought, and discover a new personal eral ways to prepare for graduate level confidence that leads to productive studies in Aeronautics. achievements throughout their naval DIRECT INPUT — The entrance re- careers. The curriculum is tuned to Navy quirement is a baccalaureate in engineer- needs and, as a lesser included part, also ing earned with above-average academic satisfies degree requirements established

I performance. This requirement can some- by appropriate academic departments. times be waived for students who have Degrees presently include MSAE, MSAE shown distinctly superior ability in back- and MS Management, Ae.E., D.E., and grounds other than engineering, but who Ph.D.

37 AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING

Included in the preparatory program is officer's background and is programmed for a the study of aeronautics aimed at increas- minimum time consistent with his capability. Each ing professional knowledge in the of- student's academic transcript will be evaluated for ficer's warfare specialty of Naval Avia- possible validation of courses in areas where a suf-

tion and academic preparation for rigor- ficiently strong record of achievement is evident.

ous graduate work. Validation or credit by examination is also possi- Aeronautical Engineering Programs are ble. multi-disciplinary and provide the oppor- Most subject matter in the preparatory program

tunity for aviation warfare specialists to is available for off-campus study through the Con-

study in most areas using general en- tinuing Education Office. All Aero material is gineering and scientific principles as a structured in "mini-courses" of one credit hour cornerstone. each to encourage rapid completion. Each officer

Unrestricted line officers who success- is urged to complete as much of this material as fully complete any of the approved pro- possible before arriving on campus. grams are awarded an aeronautical sub- Individualized instruction in the preparatory specialty billet code and subsequently courses enables officers to enter the program at any may qualify for the promotion-enhancing time. The following courses represent the designation of "Proven Subspecialist" in minimum coverage required for entry into the accordance with the Operational Techni- graduate phase: cal Managerial System (OTMS). Officers desiring to specialize in a technical man- Mathematics Sequence agement career become prime candidates MA 2400 Introduction to Vectors, Ma-

for Aeronautical Engineering Duty in the trices, and Vector Calculus . . .3-0 Restricted Line. Restricted line officers MA 2401 Introduction to Differential receive the same subspecialty billet code Equations and Complex as URL officers, but specialize in techni- Functions 4-1 cal management assignments. CS 2700 FORTRAN Programming 2-2 The URL officer primarily seeks this professional development to enhance his Solids Sequence opportunity for the major career goal of AE 2001 Particle Dynamics 1-0 Aviation Command and may use his edu- AE 2002 Equations of Motion, Systems cation and subspecialty to qualify for the of Particles 1-0 additional career goal of Major Project AE 2003 Rigid Bodies 1-0 Manager for naval aviation weapon sys- AE 2004 Space Kinematics and tems. Officers transferring to the Re- Vibrating Systems 1-0 stricted Line (AED) usually seek career AE2101 Statics and Structural goals of Major Project Manager and Fundamentals 1-0 Command of Naval Air Rework AE 2102 Stress and Strain I 1-0 Facilities, Naval Plant Representative Of- AE 2103 Stress and Strain II 1-0

fices, Naval Laboratories, and RDT&E AE 2104 Bending and Shear in Beams . .1-0 Centers. AE 2 105 Torsion and Buckling 1-0 Numerous well-defined, specialized AE 2106 Energy Theorems in aviation billets in all ranks are available Structural Analysis 1-0 for top quality officers throughout the Naval Material Command and associated Fluids Sequence 2401 Basic Thermodynamics I 1-0 field activities. This sound billet commu- AE Basic Thermodynamics II 1-0 nity provides a viable career progression AE 2402 2403 Basic Fluid Flow 1-0 and, historically, is one reason why Aero AE

to Viscous Flow . .1-0 graduates continue to form successful AE 2404 Introduction 1-0 career patterns. AE 2405 Varying- Area Flow AE 2406 Shocks and Prandtl-Meyer Flow 1-0

Preparatory Phase Flight Dynamics Sequence 2301 Aerodynamic Fundamentals ...1-0 Preparation for graduate study is tailored to each AE

38 AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING

AE 2302 Incompressible Flow 1-0 Thesis Research AE 2303 Thin Airfoils in Plane Flow ... 1-0 AE 2304 Basic Aerodynamics of Wings .1-0 All graduate students complete an aviation 1-0 AE 2305 Aircraft Performance I oriented thesis as one of the most important parts 1-0 AE 2306 Aircraft Performance II of their advanced program. AE 2307 Principles of Static Stability and Control 1-0 Professional Development Courses AE 2308 Dynamic Stability - 1-0 The Classical Modes In addition to the technical courses that form the structure of the graduate program and meet degree Electrical/Electronic Sequence requirements, each student takes courses which are (Curriculum 611 only) particularly relevant to Navy needs and career 4-2 EE 2121 Circuit Fundamentals development. These range from eight to twelve in

. .4-2 EE 2122 Linear Systems Fundamentals number and may be selected in various combina- EE 2211 Electronics Engineering tions of single courses or sequences from areas Fundamentals I 4-2 such as the following: EE 2212 Electronics Engineering Avionics Aviation Safety Fundamentals II 4-3 Computer Science Operations Analysis Material Science Financial Management Laboratory Sequence Systems Reliability Systems Acquisition AE 2811 Aeronautical Laboratories I . . . .0-2 Management

AE 2812 Aeronautical Laboratories II . . .0-2 AE2813 Aeronautical Laboratories III ..0-2 Experience Tours

AE 2814 Aeronautical Laboratories IV . .0-2

All Engineer degree programs include a six-

week practical engineering work experience at a Navy or civilian aviation industrial activity. Nor- Graduate Phase mally, these tours are taken after about one year of graduate course work and are oriented in the gen- into Aeronautical Engineering students accepted eral field of the student's research project. a graduate program complete five quarters of graduate work that includes Departmental re- quirements for the degree of Master of Science in Aeronautical Engineering. Officers demonstrating particularly strong academic performance in the AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING preparatory program may enter a two-year CURRICULUM NUMBER 610 graduate program leading to both the Master of Science in Aeronautical Engineering and the ad- Graduate Study vanced degree of Aeronautical Engineer. Also, a few officers with strong academic performance After the preparatory program, students confirm may complete the Dual Masters Program. In this their selection of specialty area in the Aeronautical program the student completes requirements for Engineering Curriculum. At this point, students the Master of Science in Aeronautical Engineering also select a thesis topic and prepare their graduate and the Master of Science in Management. Dual level program of study in consultation with their Masters graduates are prime candidates for WSAM thesis advisor and the Academic Associate. Suffi- coding in accordance with BUPERS INT 1040.2 cient courses are available for in-depth coverage in series and receive dual subspecialty qualification the following areas: codes. An exceptionally well qualified officer may be selected for the Doctoral program. FLIGHT DYNAMICS includes coverage of the Students who do not enter a graduate program stability and control parameters of a flight vehicle complete a one-year program including the techni- in both pilot-controlled and automatic-controlled cal preparatory courses, professional development modes. Both manned and unmanned vehicles are courses, and studies leading to qualification as an investigated. Topics include automatic landing Aviation Safety Officer. systems, missile control, and optimal design.

39 AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING

In GASDYNAMICS, operation of flight vehi- AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING-AVIONICS

cles in the broad spectrum ranging from hovering CURRICULUM NUMBER 611

flight to hypersonic reentry is investigated, with particular emphasis being placed on the behavior Graduate Study of the gas (air or near-space) in which the vehicle

is operating. Subsonic, transonic, supersonic, After the preparatory program students select a hypersonic, and plasma flows are covered in de- thesis topic and prepare their graduate level pro-

tail. gram of study in consultation with their thesis ad- visor and academic associate. The graduate pro- FLIGHT PROPULSION develops fundamen- gram includes a meld of aeronautical and electrical

tals of fluid dynamics, thermodynamics, and tur- engineering courses. Students select appropriate bomachinery to provide a generalized flight pro- Aeronautical Engineering courses which comple-

pulsion background. Emphasis on thesis work is ment study in the following avionics areas: directed toward turbomachinery or solid propel-

lants. The ELECTRONIC WARFARE sequence in- cludes a comprehensive coverage of electronic For FLIGHT STRUCTURES, a study in depth warfare techniques and systems. Based on an un-

of the mechanics of solids is followed by investiga- derstanding of pulse and CW radar, microwave tions of the behavior of structural components principles and devices, communication principles under conditions of static and dynamic (including and signal analysis methods, the basic jamming, aero-elastic) loads (both steady and non-steady). electronic support and countermeasures techniques Free, forced, and self-excited vibrations; flutter, are studied in the context of current knowledge

gusts, buffet, and stall effects; and wing di- regarding systems that may be used against us. vergence and control reversal are typical of the topical coverage. The COMPUTER SYSTEMS ENGINEERING sequence involves coverage of modern computer The AERO COMPUTER SCIENCE specialty systems as applied to flight vehicles. Included are provides knowledge in depth in computer-flight basic computer principles, digital machines, logic vehicle interface in operation of modern air elements and design, machine organization and weapons systems. Computer technology, capabil- design, man-computer interfaces and interactions

ity, and applications to the flight vehicle and its and engineering applications of computers. Par-

mission are stressed. ticular emphasis is placed on micro-processors.

An AERO SPACE PHYSICS specialty in- The FLIGHT VEHICLE CONTROL sequence cludes the study of electro-optics, electromagnet- includes a comprehensive coverage of control

ics, quantum mechanics, and space and near-space principles underlying the operation of flight vehi- physics. This specialty sequence prepares the cles. Included subjects are linear feedback control

graduate to participate in any of several areas in systems, optimal control methods and the applica- Navy programs involving missile and space tion of statistical and probabilistic methods for op- technology. timal control.

40 ANTISUBMARINE WARFARE

ANTISUBMARINE WARFARE PROGRAM CURRICULUM NUMBER 525

ROBERT CECIL WILLEMS, Lieutenant systems in antisubmarine warfare in- Commander, U.S. Navy; Curricular volves complex man-machine interac-

Officer; B.S., Fort Hays Kansas State tions; it includes sonar, radar, weapon, College, 1965; M.S., Naval Post- communication and information systems graduate School, 1972. and platforms. Therefore, this program is centered around a study of those systems JOHN NORVELL DYER, Academic As- used, and includes extensive breadth in sociate; B.A. Univ. of California at appropriate scientific and technical disci- Berkeley, 1956; Ph.D., 1960. plines. As a culmination of the program, about half of the time in the last six OBJECTIVES — This program is de- months is devoted to an ASW-related signed to: group project or thesis. This provides an — Educate the officer in the fundamen- opportunity to apply the graduate educa- tals of engineering, environmental, and tion and experience to a challenging proj- analytical principles so that he will clearly ect which interfaces with current needs in understand the basic phenomena which the ASW community. affect the capability of the ASW sys- This interdisciplinary, technical pro- tem^) for which he is directly responsi- gram integrates mathematics, physics, ble. acoustics, electrical engineering, — Develop the officer's ability to oceanography, operations analysis, analyze experiences critically and to state human factors, computer science and clearly the nature of problems which are meteorology. Several short projects are associated with ASW systems and opera- incorporated to further integrate the mate- tions. rial presented in lectures and specialized — Educate the officer in the politico- laboratory exercises and to give practice military and decision making environ- in the systems approach. ment involving Soviet naval activities, The academic content divides naturally net threat assessment and the Washington into four major categories. One of these is decision process. the TECHNICAL area, which includes — Educate the officer in the fundamen- the analytical and engineering principles tals of "systems engineering" so that he upon which ASW systems depend. A will be able to translate operational spe- second area is the ENVIRONMENT — cifications into systems parameters, to the ocean and the atmosphere strongly in- measure systems effectiveness and to fluence the operation, performance and view various components of large sys- effectiveness of ASW systems. Still tems in proper perspective. another area is OPERATIONAL USE of — Provide the officer with project- systems — in this category are, for exam- type, practice-oriented experience so that ple, decision theory and performance he will develop his ability to relate fun- evaluation. Finally, HUMAN CHAR- damental concepts directly to ASW oper- ACTERISTICS define an area with ational application. marked effect on ASW system perform- QUALIFICATIONS FOR ADMIS- ance. SION — A baccalaureate degree of Graduates of the ASW program receive equivalent with mathematics through dif- the subspecialty designation XX44 and ferential calculus is required. An addi- return to key operationally-oriented ASW tional qualification is required in that billets ashore and afloat. As their careers selectees will have demonstrated out- progress with the Operational-Techni- standing performance and have served in cal-Managerial System (OTMS) concept at least one ASW related billet. they are prepared to perform in all three DESCRIPTION — The employment of areas, particularly Operations, and will

41 ANTISUBMARINE WARFARE typically qualify for the Additional Qual- Graduate Study ification Designator (AQD) of ASW ex- pert. Graduates are awarded the degree This portion consists of integrated course offer- Master of Science in Systems Technol- ings in the several disciplines related to ASW. ogy- Typical graduate level topics are listed below:

Study project on ASW systems performance Electromagnetic wave propagation Introductory Study Nonacoustic sensor systems The defense decision process and ASW War- This portion of the program is generally pre- fare paratory in nature and some portions of it may be Computation and computer simulation validated by the officer with appropriate opera- Fundamentals of acoustics tional and academic experience. Because of the Underwater acoustics integrated nature of the course work in this cur- Environmental factors in underwater acoustics riculum, however, validation will be certified only Environmental prediction for underwater sound after careful consideration and consultation with propagation the Curricular Officer and Academic Associate. Signals and noise Undergraduate courses are chosen to prepare Signal processing systems students for graduate level work and are selected Search, detection and localization models from the following areas: Combat models and weapons effectiveness Elements of linear algebra, ordinary differen- Decision analysis and data analysis

tial equations, and fourier series Human vigilance performance Vector calculus Systems psychology Partial differential equations and transforms for Intelligence wave propagation Applied probability theory In addition to an ASW-related individual thesis Descriptive statistics and operations research or a group project as the culmination of the pro- models gram, each officer selects a three-course elective Calculation and programming sequence in a specialty area. Examples of such Computer systems areas are Operations Analysis, Underwater Acous- Electronic systems tics, ASW Signal Processing, Human Factors, and Survey of oceanography Nonacoustic Sensors. Throughout the program Threat analysis seminars provide for guest speakers, discussions of Physics of sound in the ocean ASW matters, and other special activities. Meteorology for ASW This program convenes annually in March.

42 C 3 CURRICULUM

3 COMMAND, CONTROL AND COMMUNICATIONS (C ) CURRICULUM CURRICULUM NUMBER 365

OBJECTIVE: To develop professional of the parent Service. A major goal of the expertise and judgment in the area of sys- curriculum is to provide a formal tems integration and to emphasize the op- academic program which will provide the erational aspects of joint command, con- student some capabilities to operate effec- 3 trol and communication (C ) systems. tively in such diverse areas as military Graduating officers will decision making, current and future C 3 systems design, crisis management, the have an understanding of the overall World Wide Military Command Control role of C 3 in the pursuit of national System (WWMCCS), joint military oper- objectives, ations, war games and data base man- possess an adequate background agement. knowledge in the exploitation of basic The command, control and communi- technology, human capabilities and 3 cations (C ) curriculum is considered a 3 joint military operations in current C nominal program structured to the re- systems, quirements of selected officers who have and can outstanding operational performance rec- ords. Individual programs of study can be perform plans and requirements 3 formatted to an individual officer's educa- studies in support of acquiring new C tional background and validation of systems, and courses is highly encouraged. Advanced contribute to crisis management. courses are available in Electronic War- fare Systems, Communications Satellite This program provides an officer the edu- Systems Engineering, Software Systems cational strength to enhance abilities and Development, Real-time Combat Direc- performance leading to an efficient, effec- tion Systems, Campaign Analysis, De- tive and rewarding military career. DESCRIPTION: The Command, Con- fense Resources Allocation, Systems Ac- 3 quisition Management, etc., for qualified trol and Communications (C ) curriculum students. is in the development stage at the time of printing of this catalog. Planning is for Integral to the program will be a the initial student input in September schedule of C 3 related seminar speakers, 1977 with an annual influx of approxi- temporary duty at the Department of De- mately 30 students. Participating students fense Computer Institute (DODCI) for are projected to be at 04-05 levels, and WWMCCS architecture presentations, may include highly qualified senior 03s, and orientation excursions to various C 3 with the Air Force, Navy and Army par- facilities such as CINCPAC headquarters, 3 ticipating equally. The C curriculum is Camp Smith, Hawaii, Strategic Air interdisciplinary in nature composed of Command (SAC) headquarters, Offutt course work from the areas of computer AFB, Nebraska, and the National Mili- science, operations research, administra- tary Command Center (NMCC) Washing- tive science, electrical engineering, and ton, D.C. area. A thesis requirement pro- national security affairs. Graduates of this vides the student an opportunity to select program are expected to be assigned to a scientific topic for investigation and joint duty in C 3 consistent with the needs apply newly acquired knowledge.

43 COMPUTER TECHNOLOGY

COMPUTER TECHNOLOGY PROGRAMS CURRICULA NUMBERS 367 AND 368

WINDOM LAWRENCE ESTES r Com- plication of computer systems in the solu- mander, U.S. Navy; Curricular Of- tion of current military problems provide ficer; B.S. with major in Mathematics, the graduate with the education necessary Naval Postgraduate School, 1963, for productive achievement throughout M.S. in Computer Science, 1970. his future military career. QUALIFICATIONS NORMAN FLOYD SCHNEIDEWIND, FOR ADMIS- SION — A Baccalaureate degree or the Academic Associate for Computer equivalent with above average grades in Systems; B.S.E.E., Univ. of Califor- mathematics is required. Completion of nia at Berkeley, 1951; M.B.A., Univ. differential and integral calculus is con- of Southern California, 1960; sidered minimal preparation. Students M.S.O.R. (Engr), 1970; D.B.A., lacking these quantitative prerequisites 1966. may be acceptable for the program pro- VICTOR MICHAEL POWERS, Aca- viding their undergraduate records and/or demic Associate for Computer Sci- other indicators of success such as the ence; B.S., Univ. of Michigan, 1963; Graduate Record Examination (GRE), M.S.E.E., 1964; Ph.D., 1970. Admission Test for Graduate Schools of THOMAS JOSEPH BATZEL, Lieuten- Business (ATGSB), or Graduate Man- Admission Test indi- ant Commander, U.S. Navy; Assistant agement (GMAT) cate a capability for level Curricular Officer; B.S., U.S. Naval graduate work. Sys- Academy, 1963; M.S. in Computer DESCRIPTION — The Computer Systems Management, Naval Post- tems curriculum is an interdisciplinary graduate School, 1969. program which integrates mathematics, accounting, economics, computer sci- COMPUTER SYSTEMS CURRICULUM ence, behavioral science, and manage- CURRICULUM NUMBER 367 ment techniques into an understanding of (GROUP PL) the technical management of large com- puter centers. Program flexibility is avail- OBJECTIVE — To provide a graduate able to permit a student to pursue, in with the knowledge, skills, and practical depth, a specialization in an area of inter- understanding necessary to evaluate the est to himself and his Service community. changes and advances in the management Completion of the computer systems pro-

l of computers in the Military Services. In gram requires five quarters ( 1 A years) or addition, the graduate possesses the un- less depending on the student's academic derstanding necessary for the critical background, experience and ability. Re- management decisions needed in the quirements for the Master of Science in development and utilization of complex Computer Systems Management are met computer-based military systems. The as an included part of the curricular pro- program is designed to meet the needs of gram. In addition, Naval officers will be the Military Services for a technically awarded the appropriate subspecialty qualified officer with the managerial code upon successful completion of the skills essential to the successful im- program. plementation and effective utilization of Normal input for the Computer Sys- computer based systems in military opera- tems curriculum is in September and tions. Application of classroom theory to March; however, on a case basis students the management of current computers and may commence their program in January computer systems are stressed throughout or July through prior preparation and the curriculum. The modern computer careful coordination with the Curricular facilities and on-going research in the ap- Office.

44 1

COMPUTER TECHNOLOGY

The typical student at the Naval Post- MN 3143 Managerial Economics 4-0 graduate School is returning to a formal MN 3170 Defense Resource Allocation ..4-0 academic program after several years of operational military duty. Since the needs Computer Fundamentals: provides the basics of the military service often dictate that an of computer hardware, software, and systems. officer's graduate work is in a field dif- CS 3010 Computing Devices and ferent from his undergraduate major, the Systems 3-0 five quarter program includes a certain CS 3020 Program Development: Struc- amount of introductory material in the

ture, Design and Languages . .3-4 first quarter as a foundation for graduate

CS 3030 Operating Systems Structures . .5-0 study in Computer Systems. This intro- CS 4200 Systems Analysis ductory work is designed to bring all stu- and Design 4-0 dents up to a common level. Upon entry CS 4300 Data Base Systems 4-0 into the program, an evaluation of each student's prior academic work and related Computer Management: provides basic man- military experience is coordinated agement techniques as applied to management of through the Curricular Office. As a result large computer centers. of this evaluation, academic credit for

courses previously completed and appli- CT 2000 Introduction to Computer cable to the Computer Systems cur- Management 3-2 riculum will be transferred. In addition, MN 2106 Individual and Group validation is encouraged where knowl- Behavior 4-0 edge of the material has been acquired by MN 3105 Organization and recent academic work or experience. Management 4-0 Through these procedures, it is expected CT 3220 Computer Center Operations . . .3-2 that in many cases, the introductory work CT 4185 Computer-Based Management need not be taken at the Naval Post- Information Systems 4-0 graduate School. The remaining courses CT 4182 Data Processing Management . .4-0 will be programmed with a nominal course load of 16 credit hours per quarter. Electives: provides an opportunity to explore a Any transfer of applicable credit is used subject in depth to meet curriculum sponsor's to reduce the number of courses taken in needs and to develop professionally. Selection of

the program and the length of the pro- electives is done in cooperation with, and by ap- gram. proval of, the Curricular Office. At least three

electives must be taken, one of them at the 4000 PROGRAM — The model curriculum level. If desired, a thesis may be undertaken in lieu includes the following comprehensive of two electives. These electives include additional fields: offerings in computer science, operations re- search, personnel/manpower, financial manage- Mathematics: provides the quantitative tools ment, material/logistics, and economics. necessary for management of systems. COMPUTER SCIENCE CURRICULUM MA 2300 Math for Management 5-0 CURRICULUM NUMBER 368 PS 301 Probability and Statistics (GROUP CS) for Management I 5-0 OBJECTIVE — To provide a graduate with the OS 3210 Operations Research for knowledge and skills necessary to specify, evalu- Computer Systems Managers .4-0 ate, and manage the design of computer systems

and to provide technical guidance in applications Financial Management: provides the funda- ranging from basic data processing to sophisticated

mentals necessary for effective management of re- tactical systems. This program is designed to meet sources. the needs of the Military Services for an officer

with graduate education in applied computer sci-

MN 3155 Financial and Managerial ence. The application of computers to all aspects

Accounting 4-0 of military operations is stressed throughout the

45 COMPUTER TECHNOLOGY curriculum. The program emphasizes the analysis study in Computer Science. This introductory and design methodologies appropriate to an under- work is found in the preparatory phase of the pro- standing of the hardware and software components gram. This portion of the program varies from zero of complex computer systems. The modern com- to two quarters in length depending on the stu- puter laboratory facilities and associated research dent's background, prior education, and length of in the application of computer techniques to cur- time away from formal academic work. rent military problems provide the graduate with The graduate program in Computer Science re- unequalled opportunities for productive achieve- quires four to five quarters to complete. At the ment throughout his future military career. beginning of the graduate phase of the curriculum QUALIFICATIONS FOR ADMISSION — A a student elects an option area in which to concen-

Baccalaureate degree or the equivalent with above trate his studies. The option areas presently avail- average grades in mathematics is required. Com- able are Tactical Computer Systems, Computer pletion of differential and integral calculus is con- Software, and Military Data Processing. sidered minimal preparation. Undergraduate Upon entry into the program, an evaluation of majors in applied science or engineering are highly each student's prior academic work and related desirable. Students lacking these prerequisites may military experience is coordinated through the Cur- be acceptable for the program providing their un- ricular Office. As a result of this evaluation, dergraduate records and/or other indicators of suc- academic credit for courses previously completed cess, such as the Graduate Record Examination, and applicable to the Computer Science curriculum indicate a capability for work in quantitative sub- will be transferred. In addition, validation is en- jects. Documented practical experience in the couraged where knowledge of the material has computer field will also enhance a candidate's po- been acquired by previous recent academic work tential for admission. or experience. Through these procedures, it is ex-

DESCRIPTION — Computer Science is a rela- pected that, in many cases, the preparatory mate- tively new academic discipline, concerned with the rial need not be taken at the Naval Postgraduate representation, storage and manipulation of data School. The remaining courses will be pro- by techniques and devices applicable to a wide grammed with a nominal course load of 16 credit variety of problems. This curriculum is an inter- hours per quarter. disciplinary program integrating mathematics, PREPARATORY STUDY — The preparatory probability, statistics, operations research, and phase of the curriculum provides the necessary electronics in addition to computer hardware and background and tools required for successful pur- software theory and applications. Completion of suit of graduate study in Computer Science. This the Computer Science program requires seven portion of the program varies in length depending academic quarters (1% years) or less, depending on the amount of course work listed below which on the student's academic background, experi- can be satisfied by prior academic work. Descrip- ence, and ability. Requirements for the Master of tions of the courses appear in the departmental list- Science in Computer Science are satisfied as part ings of this catalog. A review of elementary cal- of the curricular program. In addition, Naval of- culus and work in computer programming involv- ficers will be awarded the appropriate subspecialty ing a higher-level language and assembly language code upon successful completion of the program. prior to matriculation at the Postgraduate School is Normal input for the Computer Science cur- strongly urged. riculum is in September and March; however, on an individual case basis students may commence Mathematics their program in January and July through prior MA 1100 Calculus and Vector preparation and careful coordination with the cur- Analysis 5-2 ricular office. MA 2045 Computational Matrix

The typical student at the Naval Postgraduate Algebra 3-0

School is returning to a formal academic program MA 2121 Differential Equations 4-0 after several years of operational military duty. Since the needs of the military services often dic- Logic tate that an officer's graduate work is in a field MA 2025 Logic, Sets, and different from his undergraduate major, the seven Functions 4-0 quarter program includes a certain amount of in- MA 3026 Topics in Discrete troductory material which precedes the graduate Mathematics 4-0

46 COMPUTER TECHNOLOGY

Probability and Statistics quirements. The selection of the option area and PS 3414 Applied Probability and the courses is made in consultation with the Cur- Statistics 4-0 ricular Office.

Computer Fundamentals Tactical Computer Systems CS 2100 Introduction to FORTRAN CS 3510 Real Time Combat Systems Programming 1-2 and Structures 3-2 CS 2103 Introduction to COBOL CS 3230 Microcomputers 3-2 Programming 1-2 CS 4202 Interactive Computation CS 2110 Introduction to Computers Systems 3-2 and Programming for CS 3204 Data Communications 4-0 Computer Science Majors . . . .3-2 EE 2810 Digital Machines 3-3 CS 3111 Fundamental Concepts in Computer Software Structural Programming CS 4300 Data Base Systems 4-0 Languages 4-0 CS 3310 Artificial Intelligence 4-0 OA 3653 System Simulation 4-0 GRADUATE STUDY — The graduate phase of CS 3230 Microcomputers 3-2 the curriculum consists of required core courses, CS 3020 Program Development: option area courses, elective courses, and thesis Structure, Design, 3-4 research. Any transfer of applicable graduate Language credit is used to reduce the number of courses taken in the program and the length of the pro- Military Data Processing gram. CT 3220 Computer Center Operations . . .3-2 CT 4185 Computer Based Management Core Courses Information Systems 4-0 4-0 CS 31 12 Operating Systems MN 3170 Defense Resource Allocation . .4-0 CS 3300 Information Structures 3-0 CM 3184 Real-Time Information CS 3113 Introduction to Compilers 3-0 Systems 4-0 CS 41 12 Computer Systems 4-0 CS 41 13 Compiler Design and Elective Courses - Elective courses are avail- 3-2 Implementation able to broaden the student's education in an area

CS 4200 System Analysis and of interest. Selection of electives is done in coop- Design 4-0 eration with, and approval of the Curricular Of- 4-0 CS 4300 Data Base Systems fice. Four electives are available in areas such as CT4182 Data Processing management, electrical engineering, operations Management 4-0 analysis, mathematics, computer science, OS 3205 Operations Research for oceanography, and aeronautical engineering. Computer Scientists 4-0

MA 3232 Numerical Analysis 3-2 Thesis Research - Sixteen quarter hours are

allocated for thesis research, eight in each of the Option Courses - Three courses chosen from a student's final two quarters of the program. Em- particular option area are required. The options phasis is on military applications and research in offer a degree of specialization in a particular area the computer science field. The thesis subject will in recognition of a student's Military Service re- be appropriate to the option area selected.

47 ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATIONS

ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATIONS PROGRAMS CURRICULA NUMBERS 590, 591, 595, 600, 620/620CG

CARLYSLE JOHN THOMAS,. Com- career including operational billets, tech- mander, U.S. Navy; Curricular Of- nical management assignments, and the ficer; B.S., Univ. of Arizona, 1959; policy making positions. M.S. in Management, Naval Post- Within the broad fields of electronics graduate School, 1974. and communications, various option tracks are available after completing the ABRAHAM SHEINGOLD, Academic graduate core requirements. Successful Associate for Electronics/ completion of the Engineering Elec- Communications Engineering; B.S., tronics , Communications Engineering College of the City of New York, or Electronic Warfare Engineering Cur- 1936; M.S., 1937. ricula leads to an appropriate Navy sub- NORMAN FLOYD SCHNEIDEWIND, specialty code, and each curriculum in- Academic Associate for Telecom- cludes all requirements for the degree munications Systems; B.S.E.E., Master of Science in Electrical Engineer- Univ. of California at Berkeley, 1951; ing. The Electronic Warfare Systems M.B.A., Univ. of Southern Califor- Technology Curriculum results in an nia, 1960; M.S.O.R. (Engr.), 1970; Electronic Warfare subspecialty code, D.B.A., 1966. and meets requirements for the degree DAVID BOYSEN HOISINGTON, Aca- Master of Science in Systems Technol- demic Associate for Electronic War- ogy. In the Telecommunications Systems fare Systems Technology; B.S.E.E., Curriculum, the Communications Sys- Massachusetts Institute of Technol- tems Technology subspecialty code is ogy, 1940; M.S., Moore School of earned, and the requirements for the de- Electrical Engineering, 1941. gree Master of Science in Management are met. All curricula provide the officer Lieutenant ALLAN WILEY TULLOCH, with a well-rounded knowledge of the U.S. Navy; Assistant Commander, scientific principles, technical practices Curricular Officer; B.S., U.S. Naval and managerial/analytical skills pertinent Academy, 1967; M.S. in Manage- to his field of study. The officer's studies ment, Naval Postgraduate School, also serve to produce a heightened capac- 1972. ity for creative thought and innovative problem solving. The curricula provide latitude for studies in associated areas OBJECTIVE — The Electronics and outside the field of specialization to ac- Communications Programs include cur- commodate the academic background and ricula designed to satisfy the needs of the individual interests of the officer and help service and the interests of the officers in him acquire diverse professional knowl- these fields. Successful completion of a edge, a new appreciation for continuing curriculum leads to the award of the de- education, an added awareness of the gree of Master of Science or a higher de- many complex elements of problems, and gree in the principal field. This education an enhanced personal confidence condu- permits the officer to address more cive to productive achievement through- knowledgeably current and future mili- out his naval career. tary problems associated with electronic/ communications systems, and expands ENGINEERING ELECTRONICS his base of professional knowledge and CURRICULUM technical competence in his subspecialty CURRICULUM NUMBER 590 area. It is designed to enhance perform- OBJECTIVE (SPECIFIC) — To provide of- ance in all duties throughout a naval ficers, through graduate education, with com-

48 1

ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATIONS

prehensive scientific and technical knowledge in quarters duration, leading to a complete program the field of electronics as applied to Navy systems. duration of twenty-seven months. For students with better entrance qualifications, special review ELECTRONIC WARFARE ENGINEERING courses and course validations enable them to CURRICULUM complete the total program in eighteen, twenty-one CURRICULUM NUMBER 591 or twenty-four months. Toward the end of their preparatory program, OBJECTIVE (SPECIFIC) — To provide of- officers are evaluated for academic progress and ficers, through graduate education, with a com- potential to complete the advanced degree portion prehensive scientific and technical knowledge in of the curriculum. Those officers who have dem- the field of electronic warfare engineering as onstrated a capability to satisfy academic require- applied to Navy systems. ments for the Master of Science degree will con- tinue in the master's program and select an appro- priate area of subject specialization and thesis re- COMMUNICATIONS ENGINEERING search. Academically superior students may be CURRICULUM selected, subject to service needs and approval, for CURRICULUM NUMBER 600 further advanced studies leading to the degree of Electrical Engineer, Doctor of Engineering or Doc- OBJECTIVE (SPECIFIC) — To provide of- tor of Philosophy. Those officers who are unable ficers, through graduate education, with a com- to continue in graduate-level studies will pursue a prehensive scientific and technical knowledge in shortened terminal program beyond the basic core. the field of communications engineering as applied An appropriate subspecialty code will be granted to Navy and Defense Command, Control and to the few officers in this category. Communication Systems.

ELECTRONIC ENGINEERING, INTRODUCTORY CORE ELECTRONIC WARFARE ENGINEERING, AND COMMUNICATIONS ENGINEERING This portion of the program provides a sound CURRICULA academic background in mathematics, computer science and technology, physics and electrical en- CURRICULA NUMBERS 590, 591, AND 600 gineering. Each student's prior academic trans- will for validation of as many QUALIFICATIONS FOR ADMISSION — cripts be evaluated of these courses as possible. The courses which are Prior baccalaureate degree including above aver- not validated will be programmed using a nominal age grades in differential/integral calculus and course load of 16-18 credit hours per quarter. general physics. Those lacking this background may matriculate via the Engineering Science pro- Mathematics gram. MA 1100 Calculus and Vector DESCRIPTION — These curricula are designed Analysis 5-2 to establish a broad background of basic engineer- MA 2045 Computational Matrix ing knowledge leading to selected advanced Algebra 3-0 studies in electronic systems, communications, MA 2121 Differential Equations 4-0 electronic warfare, ship/weapon control systems, MA 2172 Complex Variables 4-0 information processing or other pertinent areas of Physics professional applicability. Classes convene PH 1041 Review of Mechanics and semiannually, in March and September. Electricity and The graduate-studies portion of the program is Magnetism 5-1 normally of twelve months duration. It is preceded PH 2241 Wave Phenomena 4-0 by an introductory core program which is designed PH 2641 Atomic Physics 4-2 to provide a smooth transition from previous studies and experience. For entering students who Circuits and Systems have a non-engineering background, except as EE 2101 Basic Circuit Theory 3-2 stated in the qualifications above, and who have EE 2102 Circuit Analysis 4-2 been absent from academic studies for five or more EE 2103 Linear Systems Analysis 4-2 years, the background studies may be of up to five EE 241 Control Systems 3-3

49 111

ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATIONS

Electronics EE 3631 Electromagnetic Radiation EE2211 Electronics Engineering and Compatibility 4-2 Fundamentals I 4-2 EE 4461 Advanced Systems EE 2212 Electronics Engineering Engineering 3-1

Fundamentals II 4-3 EE2216 Pulse and Digital Option Electives Circuits 4-3 The graduate program also includes a course se- quence in a selected area. Listed below are repre- Computers sentative electives associated with particular areas CS 2700 Introduction to Computer of professional applicability. Considerable latitude Programming with FORTRAN 2-2 is permitted in specific elective selections, with the EE 2810 Digital Machines 3-3 choices approved on the basis of consistency of the overall program with professional applicability Electromagnetics and an agreement with academic requirements. EE 2621 Introduction to Fields and Waves 4-0 Representative Electives EE 2622 Electromagnetic Engineering 3-1 Communications (required for 600 program) Communications EE 3422 Modern Communications 3-2 EE 2114 Communications Theory 4-0 EE 4575 Advanced Digital Methods in EE 2217 Communication Circuits 4-3 Communication Systems 4-2 EE 4581 Information Theory 3-2 GRADUATE STUDY EE 4591 Communication Satellite Systems Engineering 3-2 The advanced studies program leading to a mas- ter's degree is individually designed to be academ- Ship/Weapon Control Systems ically sound, consistent with the needs of the ser- EE 331 Energy Conversion 3-2 vice and responsive to the interests and objectives EE 4473 Missile Guidance Systems 3-1 of the officer. The program consists of courses in EE 4418 Ship Control Systems 3-2 required subject areas, elective courses in coherent EE 4412 Nonlinear and Discrete and relevant option areas and thesis research. The Systems 3-3 degree requirements include the completion of 40 EE 441 Digital Control Systems 3-2 credit hours of approved graduate study. The addi- EE 4433 Advanced Radar Systems 3-2 tional thesis research normally occupies the time EE 4413 Optimal Linear Estimation equivalent for four courses, allocated during the and Control 3-2 final three quarters of the program. Any transfer of graduate credit which is applicable may be used to Electronic Warfare reduce the number of programmed courses. (required for 591 program) EE 4433 Advanced Radar Systems 3-2 The Graduate Core EE 448 Electronic Warfare Techniques and Systems 3-3 To provide a well rounded graduate program, all EE 4482 Signals Intelligence (SIGINT) students are required to include courses in the sub- Systems Engineering 2-2 ject areas of advanced electronics, signal process- EE 4473 Missile Guidance Systems 3-1 ing, stochastic processes and advanced systems. EE 3631 Electromagnetic Radiation Representative courses include the following: and Compatibility 4-2

EE 3571 Stochastic Analysis of Signals .4-1 Information Processing EE 3215 Microwave Devices 4-2 EE 4581 Information Theory 3-2 EE 3263 Integrated Electronics 3-3 EE 4575 Advanced Digital Methods

in . .4-2 EE 4121 Advanced Network Theory . . . .3-2 Communications Systems EE 4572 Statistical Communication EE 3420 Engineering Fundamentals of Theory 3-2 Electro-Optics 3-1

50 ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATIONS

EE 3822 Engineering Applications ELECTRONIC WARFARE SYSTEMS of Computers 3-3 TECHNOLOGY EE 4422 Electro-Optic System CURRICULUM NUMBER 595 Engineering 3-1 OBJECTIVE (SPECIFIC) — To provide the service with sufficient officers thoroughly knowl- Digital Systems Engineering edgeable in the technical and operational aspects of EE3812 Switching Theory & both the art and the role of Electronic Warfare as a Logic Design 3-2 vital, integral part of modern warfare. 3822 Engineering Applications EE QUALIFICATIONS FOR ADMISSION — This of Computers 3-3 curriculum is open only to officers of the U.S. EE 4823 Advanced Digital Computer Armed Forces. Admission to the curriculum re- Systems 3-1 quires a Baccalaureate Degree with above average CS 4202 Interactive Computation grades. Completion of mathematics through dif- Systems 3-2 ferential and integral calculus is required. Students EE 4545 Digital Filters 3-2 lacking this background may matriculate via the Advanced Digital EE 4575 Methods Engineering Science Program. Although designed

in Communication Systems . . .4-2 primarily for unrestricted line officers with estab- lished warfare qualifications, quotas may be avail- Bioengineering able on a case basis for officers of the restricted EE 3801 Human Physiology 5-0 line communities. Of importance equal to academic qualifications is demonstrated outstand- EE 3820 Bioelectronic Instrumentation . .3-3 EE 4890 Computer Modeling of ing performance in an officer's warfare specialty. Biological Systems 2-4 A tour of duty providing operational electronic warfare experience is also desirable but not manda- EE 4880 Advanced Topics in Human Physiology 4-0 tory. Officers selected for the 595 Curriculum must be eligible for security clearances permitting

The following interdisciplinary or professional access to sensitive intelligence information. development courses are available under any op- DESCRIPTION — This curriculum is designed tion: to provide an understanding of the principles un- derlying the broad field of electronic warfare. Be-

OS 3203 Survey of Operations Analysis/ cause of the electronic nature of modern sensor, Systems Analysis 4-0 weapon and command, control and communication systems, this curriculum seeks to develop in the AS 3204 Defense Resource Analysis . . . .4-0 AS 3501 Project Management 4-0 officer a grasp of electronic, electrical and elec- tromagnetic fundamentals, theory and techniques. MN 3811 Communications in Organizations 4-0 Another principal goal of the 595 Curriculum is to MN 3155 Financial and Managerial develop an ability to describe technological factors Accounting 4-0 in terms which are meaningful and supportive in an operational or tactical situation. To achieve these

aims, preparatory material in mathematics, opera- ELECTRICAL ENGINEER tions research, probability, statistics, physics and

computer science are included in the program.

As determined by service needs and superior The 595 Curriculum is highly interdisciplinary academic achievement, officers may matriculate and comprises several tracks. Inputs will occur an-

into a program leading to the advanced degree nually in March. Each officer's transcript of prior

Electrical Engineer. This advanced graduate pro- baccalaureate study is evaluated to eliminate un- gram requires approximately seven quarters of necessary duplication of previously covered mate-

work beyond the Introductory Core. The scope of rial.

graduate study is greatly increased over the Master of Science curriculum and a thesis of greater depth INTRODUCTORY CORE is required. In addition, the officer may be pro- vided an opportunity for an industrial experience This portion of the program provides a sound

tour of up to 12 weeks duration. academic background in mathematics, computer

51 ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATIONS

science and technology, physics and electrical en- GRADUATE STUDY gineering. Each student's prior academic tran- scripts will be evaluated for validation of as many The Operational Electronic Warfare Curriculum of these courses as possible. The courses which are qualifies the student for the degree Master of Sci- not validated will be programmed using a nominal ence in Systems Technology. During the last three course load of 16-18 credit hours per quarter. quarters of this eight-quarter (two-year) program the officer undertakes thesis research and prepara- Mathematics tion on a topic relevant to current military elec- MA 1119 Selected Calculus Topics tronic warfare efforts. A program of seminars Review 2-1 given by representatives of EW-oriented activities MA 2129 Ordinary Differential and industry supplements classroom instruction. Equations and LaPlace Transforms 2-1 Electrical Engineering MA 2181 Vector Calculus 2-1 EE 4434 Microwave Devices and 4-2 MA 3139 Fourier Analysis and Radar ....4-1 Partial Differential EE4716 Signal Processing Systems Equations 4-0 EE 3625 Electromagnetic Radiation, PS 3411 Applied Probability Scattering, and Propagation 4-2 Theory I 4-1 EE 4484 Electronic Warfare Physics Systems 3-2 PH 2123 Basic Physics 4-0 Electro-Optics PH 2270 Fundamentals of 3271 Electro-Optic Principles Electro-Optics 4-0 PH and Devices 4-0 EE 4423 Electro-Optic Systems and Computer Science Countermeasures 3-1 CS 2700 Introduction to Computer Programming with FORTRAN 2-2 Operations Analysis CS 3510 Real-Time Combat Direction OS 3665 Human Vigilance Systems and Structures 3-2 Performance 3-1 OS 3208 Operations Analysis for Naval Intelligence Electronic Warfare 4-0 NS 2070 Naval Warfare and OS 4653 Operational Test and National Security 4-0 Evaluation 4-0

Basic Electrical Engineering Systems Technology 2721 Introduction to EE ST 3020 Electronic Warfare 4-1 Electronics Systems Computer Applications 3-2 3714 Introduction EE to ST 3350 Signal Intelligence and Signals 4-1 and Noise the Threat Environment 4-0 EE 2225 Pulse and Digital ST 4453 Underwater Sound, Systems, Circuits 2-1 and Countermeasures 3-2 EE 2418 Control Systems 2-1 MN3811 Communications in EE 2624 Electromagnetic Theory 4-1 Organizations 4-0

Operations Analysis TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS OS 3661 Decision Analysis and CURRICULA Data Analysis 4-0 CURRICULUM NUMBERS

OS 3655 Simulation and War Gaming . . 2-2 620 AND 620CG

Meteorology OBJECTIVE (SPECIFIC) — To provide in- MR 2416 Meteorology for Electronic struction to officers who will perform as Com- Warfare .2-0 munications Managers of new communications

52 ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATIONS

systems applications or as Communications Of- PS 3011 Probability and Statistics ficers in large commands and staffs, afloat and for Communications ashore, including the organization of the Joint Management 5-0 Chiefs of Staff and the Defense Communications OS 3211 Operations Research for Agency. Communications Managers . . .4-0 QUALIFICATIONS FOR ADMISSION — Electronics. Provides a non-engineering ap- Admission to the curricula requires a Bac- proach to communications systems. Courses are calaureate Degree with above average grades. designed to give the prospective manager suffi- Completion of mathematics through college cient knowledge to be able to discuss and under- algebra and trigonometry is required for the 620 stand communications technology, communica- curriculum. The student must be ready to start cal- tions systems, signal transmission systems and sys- culus courses on enrollment. The qualifications for tems analysis. the 620CG curriculum are the same as the 590 and EE 2421 Introduction to 600 curricula. Communications Technology .4-2

DESCRIPTION — The 620 and 620CG cur- EE 2422 Communications Systems I . . . .4-3 ricula are sponsored respectively by the Director, EE 2810 Digital Machines 3-3 Naval Communications and U.S. Coast Guard EE 2424 Signal Transmission Headquarters. Each curriculum provides com- Systems 4-2 prehensive study in management, with emphasis EE 3425 Communications Systems upon the systems management field. Additionally, Analysis 3-3 the curricula provide study in the technical field appropriate to decision making in advanced system Financial Management and Economic and program management. These technical courses Analysis. Provides the accounting and economic within the 620 curriculum have been especially analysis aspects of military resource allocation prepared for non-engineers whereas those in the problems. 620CG curriculum are engineering courses. Class- MN 3155 Financial and Managerial room instruction is supplemented by guest lecturer Accounting 4-0 seminars which afford the student an opportunity MN 3143 Managerial Economics 4-0 to hear discussions of communications topics by MN 3170 Defense Resource military officers and civilian executives from the Allocation 4-0 Naval Telecommunications Command, Defense Communications Agency, National Security Behavioral Science. Provides material on indi- Agency and other major communications ac- vidual and group behavior and social problems in tivities. the military. The student is acquainted with con- The 620 classes convene in September. Students temporary problems of race and inter-cultural rela- are accepted for the 620CG curriculum in either tions in the military establishment. March or September. Each student's prior MN 2106 Individual and Group academic transcript is evaluated for validation of Behavior 4-0 courses or for transfer of credit to cover as many MN 3812 Communication in courses as possible. Validation is also encouraged Organizations 4-0 for courses whose content has been acquired by experience or service courses. Organization and Management. Provides or- ganizational aspects of the DOD telecommunica- 620 (NAVY) CURRICULUM tions establishment, DOD procurement policies and management planning and control. Quantitative Methods. Provides the quantita- MN 3105 Organization and tive tools necessary for analyzing problems in tele- Management 4-0 communications systems management and for MN 3371 Procurement and Contract conducting thesis research. Administration 4-0 MA 2300 Mathematics for CO 2111 Defense Communications Management 5-0 Organization and MA 2040 Matrix Algebra 2-0 Planning

53 11

ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATIONS

CO 3 1 1 2 Integrated Defense EE 2103 Linear Systems Telecommunications Analysis 4-2

Systems 3-2 EE 21 14 Communications Theory I 4-0 EE 2212 Electronic Engineering

Information Systems. Provides an overview of Fundamentals II 4-3 computer hardward and software concepts and the EE 2621 Introduction to Fields computer-controlled aspects of message and data and Waves 4-0 communications systems. EE 2622 Electromagnetic Engineering . . .3-1 CS 2103 Introduction to Cobol EE 3422 Modern Communications 3-2 Programming 1-2 EE 3631 Electromagnetic Radiation CM 3184 Real Time Information and Compatibility 4-2 Systems 4-0 EE 4572 Statistical Communication CM 4184 Real Time Information Theory 3-2 System Management 4-0 Financial Management and Economic Electives. Provides the student with an opportu- Analysis. Provides the accounting and economic nity to pursue his own area of special interest. analysis aspects of military resource allocation 4105 Policy 4-0 MN Management problems. 4133 Economics of Computers 4-0 MN MN 3155 Financial and Managerial MN 4151 Internal Audit and Accounting 4-0 4-0 Control MN 3143 Managerial Economics 4-0 4185 Computer-Based Management CT MN 3170 Defense Resource Information Systems 4-0 Allocation 4-0 MN 4371 Procurement Policy 4-0

Organization and Management. Provides the Thesis. The student has the opportunity to apply behavioral, procurement and management plan- the course material to a practical military tele- ning and control aspects of military communica- communications problem during the last two quar- tions. ters of the program. MN 2106 Individual and Group 4-0 620CG (COAST GUARD) CURRICULUM Behavior MN 3105 Organization and Management 4-0 Quantitative Methods. Provides the quantita- MN 3371 Procurement and tive tools necessary for analyzing communications Contract Administration 4-0 management and engineering problems. MA 1100 Calculus and Vector Analysis 5-2 Information and Computer Systems. Pro- MA 2045 Computational Matrix vides the computer hardware and software design Algebra 3-0 concepts and the computer-controlled aspects of MA 2121 Differential Equations 4-0 message and data communication systems. MA 2172 Complex Variables 4-0 CS 2700 Introduction to Computers PS 341 Applied Probability and FORTRAN Programming .2-2

Theory I 4-1 CS 3200 Structure of Digital OS 3211 Operations Research for Computers 4-0

Communications Managers . . .4-0 CM 3184 Real Time Information OA 4633 Networks Flows Systems 4-0 and Graphs 4-0 CM 4184 Real Time Information System Management 4-0 Electronics. Provides extensive coverage of elec- CT 4185 Computer Based Management tronics and communications engineering. Information Systems 4-0 EE 2101 Basic Circuit Theory 3-2 EE 2102 Circuit Analysis 4-2 Electives. Provides the student with an opportu- EE 221 Electronic Engineering nity to pursue his own area of special interest. Rep-

Fundamentals I 4-2 resentative electives are:

54 ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATIONS

MN 3121 Leadership and Group EE 4591 Communication Satellite Behavior 4-0 Systems Engineering 3-2 MN 4105 Management Policy 4-0 MN 3124 Analysis of Bureaucracy 4-0 MN 4371 Procurement Policy 4-0 Thesis. The student has the opportunity to apply MN 4151 Internal Audit and the course material to a practical Coast Guard tele- Control 4-0 communications problem during the last two quar- MN 4133 Economics of Computers 4-0 ters of the program.

* ENGINEERING SCIENCE

ENGINEERING SCIENCE PROGRAM

OBJECTIVE — To provide officers DESCRIPTION — Officers ordered to who desire and are selected for an ad- this preparatory curriculum are assigned vanced technical education, but who are to the curricular office of the graduate deficient in mathematics and the physical curriculum they have been selected to at- sciences, an opportunity to qualify for tend. Each officer selects courses to cor- admission into one of the graduate level rect his personal deficiencies, concentrat- technical programs at Naval Postgraduate ing on basic mathematics, physical sci- School. ence and courses in the preparatory part QUALIFICATIONS FOR ADMIS- of his graduate curriculum. SION — A baccalaureate degree with a Normal input to the curriculum occurs C+ average, completion of at least two in March and September, with a planned pre calculus mathematics courses with a duration of two quarters. Inputs can be B average, or at least one course in cal- accepted at other dates dependent on the culus with a C grade and at least one starting dates for the graduate curriculum course in physics. to be followed.

Ej l

*'**CMNim ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES

ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES PROGRAMS CURRICULA NUMBERS 372, 373, AND 440

JERRY DEAN JARRELL, Commander, QUALIFICATIONS FOR ADMIS- U.S. Navy: Curricular Officer; B.S., SION* — A baccalaureate degree with at Concord College, 1956; M.S. in least average grades in mathematics and Meteorology, Naval Postgraduate the physical sciences is required. Comple- School, 1965; M.S. in Management, tion of mathematics through differential 1973. and integral calculus and one year of col- ROBERT GEORGE PAQUETTE, Aca- lege physics is considered to be minimal demic Associate (Oceanography); preparation. B.S., Univ. of Washington, 1936;

Ph.D., 1942. * This curriculum is not open to U.S. naval of- ROBERT JOSEPH RENARD, Academic ficers. The program is open to Air Force Of- Associate (Meteorology); M.S., Univ. ficers, Allied Officers, and qualified federal of Chicago, 1952; Ph.D., Florida State employees. Univ., 1970. JOHN SAVERIO KOLODZIEJ, Lieuten- DESCRIPTION — The Meteorology ant Commander, U.S. Navy; Assistant Curriculum is interdisciplinary in nature Curricular Officer; B.S., Univ. of and encompasses those areas of meteor- Notre Dame, 1961; M.S., Naval Post- ology which are directly related to en- graduate School, 1968. vironmental support of operations. The program consists of preparatory subjects, METEOROLOGY CURRICULUM a sequence in synoptic and numerical CURRICULUM NUMBER 372 meteorology, and a sequence of courses in dynamic meteorological processes. OBJECTIVE — To provide qualified The program recognizes the interaction of personnel with a sound understanding of the atmosphere and the ocean mass and the science of meteorology and to develop deals with their relationships at the air/sea the technical expertise to provide, and interface. utilize, meteorological and oceanographic Classroom instruction is supplemented data in support of all aspects of military by laboratory exercises, computer solu- operations. tions to problems, and guest lectures and This education enhances performance seminars. Upon completion of the pro- in all duties throughout a career including gram, the student is qualified to serve in- operational billets, technical management dependently as a meteorological forecas- assignments, and policy making posi- ter. By completing a required thesis, he is tions. Personnel will develop sound introduced to the problems associated graduate level technical ability based on with independent research. Successful general engineering and scientific princi- completion of the program leads to the ples, build a new appreciation for con- awarding of the degree of Master of Sci- tinuing education, acquire diverse profes- ence in Meteorology. sional knowledge, become aware of the Matriculation may occur any quarter many complex elements of problems, each year. Although the program is de- develop analytical ability for practical signed for eight academic quarters, stu- solving, broaden their capacity for origi- dents qualified may have this period nal thought, and discover a new personal shortened by validation of courses previ- confidence that leads to productive ously taken, transfer of credits from other achievement throughout their profes- institutions, and by evaluation of the level sional career. of previous experience in the field.

57 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES

Preparatory Courses: provides the academic personnel with a thorough understanding tools necessary for successful pursuit of the re- of the air- sea environment and to develop maining courses. the technical expertise to provide and utilize meteorological and oceanographic MA 2048 Linear Algebra and Vector data and knowledge in support of all as- Analysis 5-0 pects of military operation. MA 2121 Differential Equations 4-0 This education enhances performance MA 3132 Partial Differential Equations in all duties throughout a career including & Integral Transforms 4-0 operational billets, technical management MA 3232 Numerical Analysis 3-2 assignments and policy making positions. MR 2210 Marine Meteorology 4-3 Students will develop sound graduate MR 2520 Climatology and Statistics 3-1 level technical ability based on general OC 2120 Survey of Oceanography 4-0 engineering and scientific principles, build a new appreciation for continuing Synoptic and Numerical Meteorology education, acquire diverse professional Sequence: knowledge, develop analytical ability for practical problem solving, broaden their MR 3150 Geophysical Random capacity for original thought, and dis- Processes 3-1 cover a new personal confidence that MR 3212 Polar Meteorology/ leads to productive achievement through- Oceanography 3-1 out their careers. MR 3220 Meteorological Analysis 3-0 QUALIFICATIONS FOR ADMIS- MR 3225 Meteorological Analysis SION — A baccalaureate degree in Laboratory 0-6 meteorology, or oceanography, or the MR 3230 Tropospheric and Stratospheric equivalent. Provision is made for lesser Meteorology 4-0 qualified students to enter via the MR 3235 Tropospheric and Stratospheric Oceanography Curriculum (#440). Meteorology Laboratory 0-8 While this curriculum is open to officers MR 3252 Tropical Meteorology 3-4 of the other U.S. military services, allied MR 3262 Prognostic Charts and officers, and U.S. federal employees, its Forecasting Weather availability to U.S. Navy officers is lim- Elements 3-4 ited to those of the Restricted Line (Spe- MR 4241 Mesoscale Meteorology 3-0 cial Duty — Geophysics). Additionally, MR 4323 Numerical Air and Ocean Navy officer students in the Oceanog- Modeling 4-3 raphy Curriculum may, upon change of Dynamic Meteorology Sequence: designator, transfer into the Air-Ocean Science Curriculum.

MR 3321 Air-Ocean Fluid Dynamics . . . .4-0 DESCRIPTION — The Air-Ocean MR 3420 Geophysical Thermodynamics .4-0 Curriculum (#373) is interdisciplinary in MR 3421 Cloud Physics 3-0 nature and encompasses those areas of MR 3512 Heat Transfer Processes 4-0 meteorology and oceanography which are MR 4322 Dynamic Meteorology 4-0 directly related to environmental support MR 4413 Air/Sea Interaction 4-0 of military operations. The program con- sists of preparatory subjects, basic Thesis Preparation: Ample time is pro- courses in dynamic and physical vided for the student to complete research meteorology and oceanography, and a se- for a thesis in the area of his primary' in- quence in environmental analysis and terest. Elective courses are also available forecasting, including numerical methods in air-ocean science or related fields. by computer. The program recognizes the importance of interactions between the AIR-OCEAN SCIENCE CURRICULUM atmosphere and the oceans, and deals CURRICULUM NUMBER 373 with their relationships at the air/sea inter- face. OBJECTIVE — To provide qualified Classroom instruction is supplemented

58 1

ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES

by laboratory exercises, field experience, MR 3230 Tropospheric and Stratospheric computer solutions to problems, and Meterology 4-0 guest lectures and seminars. Each student MR 3235 Tropospheric and Stratospheric is required to complete a satisfactory Meteorology Laboratory 0-8 thesis. In so doing the student is intro- MR 3252 Tropical Meteorology 3-4 duced to the problem of applying his MR 3262 Prognostic Charts and theoretical knowledge to the solution of a Forecasting Weather practical problem. Upon completion of Elements 3-4

the program, the student is qualified to MR 3321 Air-Ocean Fluid Dynamics . . . .4-0 serve independently as a meteorological MR 3512 Heat Transfer Processes 4-0 and oceanographic forecaster in support MR 4322 Dynamic Meteorology 4-0 of operations. MR 4323 Numerical Air and Matriculation may occur any quarter Ocean Modeling 4-3 each year. A typical program for students MR 4413 Air/Sea Interaction 4-0 with a baccalaureate degree in either me- MR/OC 0810 Thesis Research 0-0 terology or oceanography is eight quar- MR/OC 4900 Thesis Seminar 2-0 ters. However, students may have this OC 3150 Geophysical Random period shortened by validation of courses Processes 4-2

previously taken, transfer of credits, and OC 3221 Physical Oceanography II 3-0 by evaluation of the level of previous ex- OC 3321 Marine Geophysics 3-0 perience in the field. OC 3621 Regional Military Successful completion of the program Oceanography 1-4 leads to the awarding of the degree of OC 421 Waves and Tides 4-0 Master of Science in Meteorology and OC 4213 Coastal Oceanography 3-2 Oceanography. OC 4260 Sound in the Sea 4-0 OC 4322 Ocean Dynamics 4-0 Typical Program: PH3431 Physics of Sound in the Ocean 4-2

Preparatory Phase (Student is expected to re- quire four courses from this group) Elective Area List I (Two courses required)

CS 2700 Introduction to FORTRAN ... .2-2 MR 3421 Cloud Physics 3-0 MA 2048 Linear Algebra and MR 4241 Mesoscale Meteorology 3-0 Vector Analysis 5-0 MR 4416 Atmospheric Factors in Electro- MA 2121 Differential Equations 4-0 magnetic Propagation 3-0 MR 2210 Marine Meteorology 4-3 MR/OC 3212 Polar Oceanograpy MR 3220 Meteorological Analysis 3-0 and Meterology 3-1 MR 3225 Meterological Analysis OC 3610 Ocean Wave Forecasting 2-2 Laboratory 0-6 OC 3617 Acoustical Forecasting 2-2 MR 3420 Geophysical Thermodynamics .4-0 OC 3801 Ocean Operations I 3-1 OC 3220 Physical Oceanography I 3-0 OC 3320 Geological Oceanography 3-3 OC 3420 Biological Oceanography 3-3 Elective Area List II (Two courses required) OC 3520 Chemical Oceanography 3-3 PS 2501 Introduction to Probability Any from List I and Statistics 4-0 Advanced Meteorology Advanced Oceanography Curriculum Core Advanced Mathematics Operations Analysis MA 3132 Partial Differential Computer Systems Equations 4-0 Management MA 3232 Numerical Analysis 3-2 International Law and Ocean Policy

MN3811 Communications in Environmental Quality Organizations 4-0 Electronics

59 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES

Communications this program leads to the awarding of the degree of Underwater Acoustics master of Science in Oceanography and qualifies the student to serve in any of the oceanography OCEANOGRAPHY CURRICULUM billets in the Department of Defense. CURRICULUM NUMBER 440 Matriculation may occur any quarter of the year.

Although the program is designed for eight quar- OBJECTIVE — To provide students with a sound ters, qualified students may have this period understanding of the science of physical oceanog- shortened by validation of courses previously raphy, and to develop the technical expertise to taken, transfer of credits from other institutions, provide and utilize oceanographic and acoustical and by evaluation of the level of previous experi- data in support of all aspects of military opera- ence in the field. tions. Particular emphasis is placed on the under- The heart of the oceanography program consists standing of oceanographic environmental effects of a basic core of graduate level courses supple- on the solution of the Antisubmarine and Undersea mented by available electives. The knowledge of Warfare problems. principles gained in these studies will enable the Students who successfully complete this cur- student to make beneficial applications of riculum will be awarded an appropriate subspe- oceanography to future military hardware design, cialty billet code. However, this education en- military tactics and strategy. As with the preparat- hances performance in all duties throughout a mili- ory portion, graduate courses may be selected/ tary career including operational billets, technical validated on an individual basis. Typically in- management assignments, and policy making posi- cluded courses are: tions. Students will develop sound graduate level MA 2048 Linear Algebra and Vector technical ability based on general engineering and Analysis 5-0 scientific principles, build a new appreciation for MA 2121 Differential Equations 4-0 continuing education, acquire diverse professional MA 3132 Partial Differential Equations knowledge, become aware of the many complex and Integral Transforms 4-0 elements of problems, develop analytical ability OC 3150 Geophysical Random Processes 4-2 for practical problem solving, broaden their capac- OC 3220 Physical Oceanography I 3-0 ity for original thought, and discover a new per- OC 3221 Physical Oceanography II 3-0 sonal confidence that leads to productive achieve- OC 3320 Geological Oceanography 3-3 ment throughout their career. OC 3420 Biological Oceanography 3-3 QUALIFICATIONS FOR ADMISSION — A OC 3520 Chemical Oceanography 3-3 baccalaureate degree with at least average grades OC 3709 Scientific Cruise in mathematics and the physical sciences is re- Experience 0-4 quired. Completion of mathematics through differ- 4-0 OC 421 1 Waves and Tides ential and integral calculus, one year of college OC 4213 Coastal Oceanography 3-2 physics, year of college chemistry is con- and one .4-0 OC 4321 Geophysical Fluid Dynamics . sidered to be minimal preparation. OC 4322 Ocean Dynamics 4-0 DESCRIPTION — The Oceanography Cur- OC 4413 Sea/Air Interaction 4-0 riculum #440 is interdisciplinary in nature and en- Courses Directed Specifically to compasses a broad spectrum of physical, chemi- Military Applications: cal, biological, and geological oceanography sup- .3-2 port of military operations. OC 3820 Principles of Measurement . . .

Classroom instruction is supplemented by labo- OC 3240 Operational Environmental ratory exercises both ashore and afloat. The Re- Products 0-4 search Vessel ACANIA is available for class labo- OC 3321 Marine Geophysics 3-0 ratory experience as well as for individual research OC 3610 Ocean Wave Forecasting 2-2 efforts. Guest lectures, seminars, and in situ study OC 3617 Acoustic Forecasting 2-2 at the Naval Arctic Research Laboratory in Bar- OC 3621 Regional Military row, Alaska, serve to round out the curriculum. Oceanography 1-4 3-1 Each student is required to complete a satisfactory OC 3801 Ocean Operations I 4-0 thesis. In so doing the officer is introduced to the OC 4260 Sound in the Sea concept of applying theoretical knowledge toward OC 4612 Polar Oceanography 3-2 a practical application. Successful completion of PH 3431 Physics of Sound in the Ocean .4-2

60 NAVAL ENGINEERING

NAVAL ENGINEERING PROGRAMS CURRICULA NUMBER 570

GEORGE PURVIANCE NEYMAN, III, grammed for the introductory study pro- Commander U.S. Navy; Curricular gram. The introductory study portion of Officer; B.S., Capitol Univ., 1957; the program includes courses in the fol- B.S.C., Webb Institute of Naval Ar- lowing areas: chitecture, 1966; M.S., 1966; M.S., Univ. of Rhode Island, 1972. PAUL JAMES MARTO, Academic As- UNDERGRADUATE sociate; B.S., Univ. of Notre Dame, 1960; M.S., Massachusetts Institute of Linear Algebra and Vector Analysis Technology, 1962; Sc.D., 1965. Computer Programming Ordinary Differential Equations Engineering Materials Statics and Dynamics NAVAL ENGINEERING CURRICULUM Mechanics of Solids CURRICULUM NUMBER 570 Engineering Thermodynamics Fluid Mechanics OBJECTIVES — To provide graduate Electrical Engineering Fundamentals education, primarily in the field of Me- chanical Engineering, to officers from all communities. The graduate will have the GRADUATE technical competence to operate and maintain modern warships and weapon Partial Differential Equations systems. He will be able to participate in Engineering Numerical Analysis technical aspects of naval systems acquis- Properties of Structural Materials ition and able to recognize applications Mechanical Vibrations for technological advances in naval ships Heat Transfer and weapons. Marine Power Systems ENTRANCE DATES — Classes nor- Mechanics of Structures mally convene in January, March, June Survey of Nuclear Power and September, however, entrance at any Hydrodynamics of Ocean Structures time is possible. Financial Management in Defense QUALIFICATIONS FOR ADMIS- Department SION — mathematics through integral Operations Research Fundamentals calculus plus one year of physics and chemistry. A baccalaureate degree or its After completion of the introductory study por- equivalent, preferably in engineering or tion of the program, a meaningful set of electives the physical sciences. are selected from the advanced graduate level DESCRIPTION — the academic pro- courses. These are chosen in consultation with the gram is grouped into an introductory Curricular Officer and faculty advisors. A normal study portion and an advanced graduate program of study leading to the degree Master of level study portion. The introductory Science in Mechanical Engineering will allow for study program consist of undergraduate five such elective courses chosen from the follow- and graduate level courses which provide ing extensive list: the necessary breadth and depth for suc- cessful pursuit of the advanced graduate Advanced Hydromechanics level study portion of the program. Each Viscous Flow student's transcript is evaluated for vali- Fluid Power Control dation of as many of the introductory Fluid Machinery study courses as possible and the student Marine Gas Turbines is interviewed upon arrival to reach a final Conduction and Radiation Heat Transfer decision on those courses to be pro- Convection Heat Transfer

61 NAVAL ENGINEERING

Design of Naval Marine Vehicles A limited number of academically superior stu-

Advanced Dynamics dents may be selected for the dual program in Vibration, Noise and Shock Naval (Mechanical) Engineering and in Manage- Advanced Mechanics of Solids ment. In addition to satisfying the requirements for Finite Element Methods the degree Master of Science in Mechanical En-

Theory of Continuous Media gineering, the student will pursue a program in Properties, Problems and Failures of management leading to the degree Master of Sci- Structural Materials ence in Management with a specialization in either Corrosion Financial Management or in Systems Acquisition Microscopy Management. Management courses are taken in Nuclear Reactor Analysis the following areas: Reactor Engineering Design Laser Technology Managerial Accounting Naval Weapons Management Economics Public Expenditure Policy and Analysis The program of study leading to the degree Me- Individual and Group Behavior

chanical Engineer is an advanced program of Personnel Management and Labor Relations graduate level studies with permits the student to Operations Analysis further his studies beyond the Master's degree. Systems Analysis Additional courses are chosen from those listed Systems Effectiveness

above and a thesis of greater depth is required. Systems Acquisition Approximately three additional quarters are re- Defense Project Management quired for this program. Criteria for selection in- Production Management clude superior academic performance, tour avail- Defense Contract Administration ability, and a demonstrated capability to perform Logistic Support in the environment of the professional engineer. Procurement

62 NAVAL INTELLIGENCE/NATIONAL SECURITY AFFAIRS

NAVAL INTELLIGENCE/ NATIONAL SECURITY AFFAIRS PROGRAMS CURRICULA NUMBERS 681, 682, 683, 684, 686 AND 825

THOMAS HAMMOND BARR, Com- awarded the intelligence subspecialty billet code mander, U.S. Navy; Curricular Of- and are eligible for the degree of Master of Arts in ficer for Naval Intelligence/National National Security Affairs. Security Affairs Programs; B.A., More specifically, the objectives of the cur- Stanford Univ., 1960. riculum are to provide the students with advanced education in the following areas: WILLIAN REESE, Academic Associate (1) the security interests of the United States and for Naval Intelligence; B.A., Reed other major international actors, with particular College, 1958; M.S., Univ. of Il- emphasis on the military, economic, political, and linois, 1960; Ph.D., 1962. social factors which shape and affect their interests JOHN WILLIAM AMOS, Academic As- and capabilities;

sociate for National Security Affairs; (2) the vocabulary, resource material, and basis B.A., Occidental College, 1957; of operation of military systems and subsystems M.A., Univ. of California at Berke- which allow the incorporation of technical and en-

ley, 1962; Ph.D., 1972. vironmental information into the solution of intel- ligence problems;

NAVAL INTELLIGENCE CURRICULUM (3) an understanding of the strengths and weak- CURRICULUM NUMBER 825 nesses of current military systems (U.S. and U.S.S.R.) and areas of probable improvement OBJECTIVE — To provide advanced education within the next 10 to 15 years; in the field of Naval Intelligence. This curriculum (4) methods of analysis applicable to the intelli- provides a broad graduate-level education in sci- gence process, with particular emphasis upon fore- ence and engineering, national security affairs, casting and threat assessment; analytical methods, and management techniques in (5) problems in the administration and dissemi- order to further the creative application of these nation of intelligence information, and the man- disciplines to the naval intelligence process. Orig- agement of the intelligence process; inal thinking and professional growth are empha- (6) techniques of interpersonal and group com- sized by a program of study based upon the grow- munication; ing strategic importance of the U.S. Navy, the (7) In addition, students will be kept abreast of complex environment in which the naval intelli- developments in naval intelligence through gence officer works, and the increasing burdens periodic scheduled briefings. upon the intelligence community. This education QUALIFICATIONS FOR ADMISSION — This enhances performance in all duties throughout a curriculum is open only to officers of the U.S. naval career including operational billets, techni- Armed Forces. It affords the student an opportu- cal management assignments and policy making nity to pursue an interdisciplinary graduate pro- positions. Naval officers develop sound graduate- gram. Options available are designed to build on level competence in national security affairs, the various technological backgrounds of the stu- technological aspects of naval intelligence, and dents and permit concentration in fields of interest analytical and management techniques. They beyond core courses. Admission requirements are develop a new appreciation for continuing educa- a college degree with a B average and college tion, acquire a diverse professional knowledge, algebra or its equivalent. Of equal importance is and become aware of the many complex elements demonstrated excellence in a warfare or restricted of naval, as well as national problems. They line specialty. Where an officer's fitness reports develop analytical ability for practical problem indicate consistent outstanding performance and solving, broaden their capacity for original thought obvious potential for promotion to senior rank, less and discover a new personal confidence that leads than a B average will qualify for selection. All to productive achievement throughout their naval officers selected must be eligible for Special Intel- career. Upon graduation, naval officers are ligence access. Recipients of orders not having a

63 NAVAL INTELLIGENCE/NATIONAL SECURITY AFFAIRS current Special Background Investigation (SBI) DEFENSE TECHNOLOGY SEQUENCE (within four and one half years), must submit the required request forms expeditiously in accordance This sequence is designed to address the special with their PCS orders. problems of technical intelligence. It emphasizes technical literacy and the ability to communicate DESCRIPTION — The curriculum begins in concerning technological and environmental prob- every academic quarter of each year and lasts for lems with specialists at the non-mathematical 18 months. The degree awarded is Master of Arts level. It thus stresses vocabulary, inter- in National Security Affairs. relationship of concepts, and a qualitative under- The academic disciplines involved in the pro- standing of the tradeoffs implicit in the design of gram include the following: political science, military systems. While not emphasizing a quan- mathematics, management, operations analysis, titative approach, mathematical models are intro- oceanography, meteorology, electrical engineer- duced where appropriate to reinforce the student's ing, physics, computer science, and economics. understanding of a concept and its physical appli-

The common core course of instruction reflects cation. Further, it seeks to provide a perspective sponsor requirements beyond the academic degree that will assist assessment of the reliability and requirements set forth in the catalogue under the significance of technical and environmental data,

Department of National Security Affairs. The as well as ensure a familiarity with available re- sponsor requirements relate to the needs of the sources in these fields that may be applied to spe- Naval Intelligence Community for officers pre- cific problems. pared to fill a wide variety of assignments. These The sequence progresses from building techni- core courses requirements are divided into the four cal vocabulary and qualitative understanding of major sequences outlined below to provide the basic science and engineering concepts to introduc- basic structure of the curriculum. tion to the general operating principles of technical military systems. Students with previous technical While most students progress through the core education may proceed directly to the applications program in these sequences, flexibility is allowed courses. These two courses concentrate on specific to take advantage of the diverse academic back- military systems such as weapons, sensors, com- ground of incoming students. Those students that munications, and electronic warfare. The strength, can validate specific core courses are permitted to weakness and trade-offs associated with ship, concentrate in greater depth in that sequence or to submarine and aircraft platform design are also in- choose electives from other sequences that will cluded. Finally, new technological developments, broaden their background in these areas. Two elec- weapons system acquisition and technological tives in the fifth and sixth quarters are allowed for forecasting are pursued through student participa- all students. Any course which is scheduled to be tion in seminar and practical exercise situations. taught and for which the student qualifies may be proposed as an elective. Many students select SE 2001 Environment Wave Propagations courses that relate directly to their thesis research and Ocean Systems 4-0 effort to provide the opportunity for the further knowl- acquisition of skills, methodologies, and SE 2002 Concepts of Science & edge in this area. Each student's program must be Engineering I 4-0 approved by the Curricular Office. SE 2003 Concepts of Science &

Engineering II 4-0 The final degree and program requirement is submission of a satisfactory thesis. The purpose of SE 3004 Survey of Military Technology: the thesis is to serve as a vehicle to integrate the

Concepts and Applications I . .4-0 many disciplines in the curriculum, to demonstrate SE 3005 Survey of Military Technology: competence in original research and thinking, and Concepts and Applications II .4-0 to promote searching analysis of intelligence prob- SE 4006 Special Topics in Technology lems of interest to the students and the intelligence Assessment 4-0 community. In addition, a two week TAD period allows students to discuss their research programs NATIONAL SECURITY AFFAIRS with interested staff officers and to locate data SEQUENCE sources in intelligence and other government agen- cies. The objective of the Security Affairs Sequence

64 NAVAL INTELLIGENCE/NATIONAL SECURITY AFFAIRS

is to delineate the interface between international are the management techniques applicable to au- politics, defense resource management and tomated data processing systems, their design, weapons technology. It is this complex and multi- basic interface operations, and associated security faceted environment which impacts upon the prob- problems. Throughout the sequence special em- lems to which naval intelligence must respond. phasis is placed on the application of the quantita- Pursuant to this objective, this sequence describes tive techniques, other methodologies and substan- and analyzes the security objectives of the major tive material assimilated to problems of current powers, assesses their capabilities, and evaluates interest to naval intelligence. their intentions and strategies with particular em- phasis on the employment of maritime power. MA 2310 Mathematics for Naval

Further, it synthesizes the political, technological, Intelligence I 5-3 economic, social and ideological forces that moti- MA 2311 Mathematics for Naval vate the actors in the international system and Intelligence II 5-2 models varying scenarios of interaction between OS 3510 Organizational Behavior and Naval them. It then relates these factors to the conduct of Intelligence 4-0 defense policy in the United States, the perception NS/OS 3062 Intelligence Data Analysis 4-2 of specific threats, and the response of the defense OS 3207 Operations Analysis for establishment to them. Students with previous Naval Intelligence 4-0 education in National Security Affairs may pro- NS/OS 4207 Seminar in Analysis of ceed directly to advanced courses. Intelligence Problems 4-0 NS 4063 Naval Threat Analysis 4-0 NS 3262 Theory & Practice of MN3184 Management Information System International Politics 4-0 for Naval Intelligence 4-0 NS 3400 Problems of Government &

Security in the Soviet Union . .4-0 PROFESSIONAL DEVELOPMENT NS 3061 American National Security SEQUENCE Policy 4-0

NS 3420 Soviet Maritime & Naval The professional development sequence in- Strategy 4-0 cludes the Naval Intelligence Seminar and the NS 3610 Problems of Government & Thesis Research Project. The seminar features Security in East Asia & guest speakers, field trips and study of the Naval Pacific Ocean 5-0 Intelligence community and profession. The

NS 4161 American National Security Thesis Research Project is a sponsor, as well as

Objectives & Net Assessment .4-0 academic requirement. Its purpose is to provide each officer the opportunity to integrate knowledge ANALYTICAL AND MANAGEMENT acquired from the various disciplines in the pro- SEQUENCE gram and apply the results to intelligence prob- lems. Research efforts are supported directly by This sequence introduces the student to quantita- the intelligence community and include a research tive techniques, substantive research methods, and tour of up to two weeks with these agencies. the primary concepts of resource management.

From mathematical preparatory courses it progres- NS 0810 Thesis Research 0-0 ses to methodological survey of various means to NS 0010 Seminar in Naval structure given problems, formulate possible solu- Intelligence 0-2 tions, organize and compile the supporting data, assess the reliability and communicate the signifi- NATIONAL SECURITY AFFAIRS cance of the results obtained. The methodological CURRICULA NUMBERS 681, 682, 683 courses also include study of both systems and 684, AND 686 aggregate data analysis. Management problems explored in the sequence include contracting, civi- OBJECTIVE: These curricula are designed to lian personnel, planning/programming/budgeting provide graduate education to DOD officers and (PPB), program evaluation and review techniques civilians in the field of security affairs with par- (PERT), management by objectives (MBO), and ticular emphasis on the following related areas: organizational development (OD). Also included politico-military affairs, strategic and operational

65 NAVAL INTELLIGENCE/NATIONAL SECURITY AFFAIRS planning, attache affairs, foreign intelligence and ernmental organizations. They should be aware of area analysis. These curricula may be divided into current political doctrine and issues. They should area specialties (681, 682 and 683 - delivered in know the strength, appeal and influence of Com- cooperation with the Defense Lanaguage Institute munism and other ideologies. Area specialists

(DLI), also in Monterey) and functional specialties should have a more detailed knowledge of their (684 and 686) conducted entirely at the Post- area and be aware of the current relationships and graduate School. Successful completion of any of attitudes toward both the United States and the these curricula leads to the degree of Master of Soviet Union prevalent in it.

Arts in National Security Affairs. (7) Culture and Religion - The student should be Current program sponsors include the following: familiar with the influence of class structure, cul- Navy — Deputy Chief of Naval Operations (Plans tural and religious values, and ideology on domes- and Policy). Air Force. — Assistant Chief of Staff, tic and foreign affairs. They should understand the Intelligence. Army — Director, Military Personnel origins and present state of cultural and religious Center, Foreign Area Office (FAO) Program. differences and conflicts and how these differences Specific educational objectives related to these affect regional and national cohesiveness. curricula are: (8) Current Issues - Students must be familiar

(1) Geopolitics — Students will be familiar with with the major security issues in the world today. the geopolitical regions of the world in terms of These include, but are not limited to political and their global strategic importance. They will under- military conflicts, insurgencies, social problems stand how geography, climate, economics, and and efforts for social reform, economic problems demography influence political thought and and other issues which affect both the status or foreign policy. well-being of the nations of the world. Knowledge

(2) Strategic Posture - Students should know the of these issues should be related to the formulation national strengths and weaknesses which affect and implementation of U.S. foreign and security strategic posture and capabilities. They should be policy. able to assess major military, political, economic, (9) Analytical and Research Skills - Scholarly and sociological trends as they relate to policy skills emphasized throughout the program include: choices in domestic and foreign affairs. effective oral and written expression, techniques

(3) Military Forces — Students will understand of research, interpretation and evaluation of com- the role, political influence, social position, com- plex data, problem solving, forecasting, decision position, structure, capabilities, and vul- making, the process of negotiation and debate, the nerabilities of the armed forces. They should be formulation of strategy and politico-military ob- familiar with current political and military devel- jectives. opments. They should be familiar with regional QUALIFICATIONS FOR ADMISSION — military and political relations and regional de- These curricula are open to officers and civilians of fense agreements both bilateral and multilateral. the Department of Defense. The entrance require-

(4) Geography — Students should have knowl- ments for these programs are a baccalaureate de- edge of geography and its influence on national gree earned with above average academic per- development, domestic transportation, economic formance. Applicants may demonstrate their ap- and military posture. Area specialists should have titude for the specific curriculum concerned a more detailed geographical knowledge of their through undergraduate courses that meet program areas and the strategic significance of their specific prerequisites, Graduate Record Examination re- regions. sults, or other evidences. Applicants must have the

(5) Economics - Students must be aware of the approval of the Chairman, Department of National economic strengths and weaknesses of the major Security Affairs. power blocs of the world, as well as economic phenomena which influence ideology, military AREA SPECIALTY CURRICULA doctrine, industrial and social development. Area

Specialists must be familiar with their respective #681 - Middle East, Africa, South Asia region's principal resources and economic influ- #682 - Far East, Southeast Asia, Pacific ence in the world, as well as their region's indus- #683 - Europe, USSR trial capacity and principal industries.

(6) Politics - Students should have a knowledge DESCRIPTION: These curricula are coopera- of the major types of political systems and gov- tive programs with the Defense Language Insti-

66 NAVAL INTELLIGENCE/NATIONAL SECURITY AFFAIRS

tute. They last from one to two years depending NS 3310 North Africa: Government upon the curricula and option selected, the lan- and Security in the guage studied, and previous educational back- Maghreb 4-0 ground. Inputs can be accepted to these programs NS 3312 Seminar in Middle each quarter of the academic year (July, Septem- East Oil 4-0 ber, January or March). Officers are assigned to NS 3313 Problems in Government NPS for the full duration of the combined pro- and Security in gram. Quotas for the language instruction are ob- Sub-Saharan Africa 4-0 tained directly from DLI by the Curricular Office, NS 3314 Problems of Government except in the case of those students who have ac- and Security in quired language proficiency either at DLI or other Israel 4-0 institutions prior to their admission to the program. NS 3315 Middle East: The Finally, for those sponsors whose students do not Military Dimension 4-0 require language instruction, a purely academic NS 3316 Problems of Government option conducted completely at NPS is offered. and Security in the Student programs are developed from the Northern Tier: Turkey, courses outlined below. Primarily they are com- Iran, Afghanistan prised of a common core consisting of at least six and Pakistan 4-0 functionally-oriented security affairs courses, at NS 3320 International Relations least nine area oriented security affairs courses, and Security Problems and either a comprehensive examination or a thesis of the Middle East 4-0 research project. The selection of specific courses NS 3330 Military Geography and is based on the area specialty and sponsor require- History of the ments concerned. Course mix and sequence will Middle East 4-0 also vary according to the quarter of entry into the NS 3331 20th Century Middle program. Eastern Military and Political History 4-0 Common Core NS 3350 Area Colloquium in NS 3061 American National Security Middle Eastern Studies I 2-0 Policy 4-0 NS 3351 Area Colloquium in NS 3078 The Politics of National Middle Eastern and Global Economic Studies II 2-0 Relations 4-0 NS 3620 Problems of Government NS 3169 Comparative Political Analysis and Security in South and Research Methods 4-0 Asia and the NS 3262 Theory and Practice of Indian Ocean 4-0 International Politics 4-0 NS 3710 International Security NS 4140 Problems of Security Problems of the Assistance and Arms Mediterranean 4-0

Transfers 4-0 NS 4300 Seminar in Security NS 4273 American Foreign Policy Problems of the and World Politics 4-0 Middle East 4-0 NS 4000 Perspectives on American NS 4330 Seminar in Middle 4-0 Civilization Eastern Civilizations 4-0 NS0810 Thesis Research 0-0 NS 0811 Preparation for Compre- #682 Far East, Southeast Asia, hensive Examination 0-0 Pacific NS 3400 Domestic Determinants of #681 Middle East, Africa, Soviet National South Asia Security Policy .4-0 NS 3300 Problems in Government NS 3410 Soviet National Security and Security in the and Foreign Policy Middle East .4-0 Making Processes .4-0

67 NAVAL INTELLIGENCE/NATIONAL SECURITY AFFAIRS

NS 3440 Comparative Communist NS 3450 Area Colloquium in

Political Systems . 4-0 Soviet Studies I 2-0 NS 3605 Geography, History and NS 3451 Area Colloquium in

Culture of Asia ..4-0 Soviet Studies II 2-0 NS 3606 Problems of Government NS 3610 Problems of Government and Security in and Security in East Penninsular Southeast Asia and the Pacific 5-0 Asia ..4-0 NS 3700 Strategic Geography NS 3608 Problems of Government and and History of Security in Insular Europe 4-0 Southeast Asia ..4-0 NS 3701 Recent History of NS 3610 Problems of Government Europe and USSR 4-0 and Security in East NS 3710 International Security Asia and the Problems of the Pacific Ocean ..5-0 Mediterranean 4-0 NS 3611 Problems of Government NS 3750 Area Colloquium in

and Security in European Studies I 2-0 Contemporary Japan ..4-0 NS 3751 Area Colloquium in

NS 3612 Problems of Government European Studies II 2-0 and Security in the NS 3800 Problems of Government Peoples Republic of and Security of the China ..4-0 Scandinavian-Baltic NS 3620 Problems of Government Region 4-0 and Security in South NS 4400 Seminar in Soviet Asia and the Security Problems 4-0 Indian Ocean ..4-0 NS 4425 Advanced Topics in Soviet NS 3650 Area Colloquium in Naval Affairs 4-0

Asian Studies I . .2-0 NS 4700 Seminar in Soviet and NS 3651 Area Colloquium in European Affairs 4-0 Asian Studies II .2-0 NS 4701 Seminar in Political and NS 4630 International Security Security Problems of Problems of Asia and Europe 4-0 the Adjacent Oceans ,.4-0 NS4710 Seminar in Sino-Soviet NS4710 Seminar in Sino- Relations 4-0 Soviet Relations .4-0 FUNCTIONAL SPECIALTY CURRICULA #683 - Europe, USSR - International Organizations NS 3268 Problems of Government #684 and Negotiations and Security in Europe 4-0 #686 - Strategic Planning NS 3280 Nuclear Weapons and DESCRIPTION: These curricula last up to 18 Foreign Policy 4-0 months. Entry may be made any academic quarter NS 3400 Domestic Determinants of (July, September, January, March). These cur- Soviet National Security ricula emphasize functional studies applicable to Policy 4-0 security affairs. Area study courses are also fea- NS 3410 Soviet National Security tured, but normally they apply to all, vice one spe- and Foreign Policy cific region. Program mix and sequence is selected Making Process 4-0 from the courses outlined below according to quar- NS 3420 Soviet Naval and ter of entry into the program and the sponsor re- Maritime Strategy 4-0 quirements concerned. NS 3430 Soviet Military Functional Specialty Courses: Strategy 4-0 NS 3032 Revolution and Political

NS 3440 Comparative Communist Terrorism in the Political Systems 4-0 Modern World 4-0

68 NAVAL INTELLIGENCE/NATIONAL SECURITY AFFAIRS

NS 3061 American National Security NS 3400 Domestic Determinants of Policy 4-0 Soviet National Security NS 3078 The Politics of National Policy 4-0 and Global Economic NS 3410 Soviet National Security Relations 4-0 and Foreign Policy NS 3164 Comparative Ideology 4-0 Making Process 4-0 NS 3169 Comparative Political Analysis NS 3420 Soviet Naval and and Research Methods 4-0 Maritime Strategy 4-0 NS 3172 Public Policy Processes 4-0 NS 3430 Soviet Military Strategy 4-0 NS 3262 Theory and Practice of NS 3520 Problems of Diplomacy International Politics 4-0 and Security in NS 3275 International Law 4-0 Latin America 4-0 NS 3276 Law of War 4-0 NS 3610 Problems of Government NS 3280 Nuclear Weapons and and Security in East Foreign Policy 4-0 Asia and the NS 3900 International Pacific 5-0 Organization 4-0 NS 3620 Problems of Government NS 3901 Ocean Policy 4-0 and Security in South NS 3902 Science, Technology and Asia and the Indian Public Policy 4-0 Ocean 4-0 NS 4061 Survey of Strategic NS 3701 Recent History of Studies 4-0 Europe and the USSR 4-0 NS 4077 Strategic Resources and NS 3710 International Security U.S. National Security Problems of the Policy 4-0 Mediterranean 4-0 NS 4140 Problems of Security NS 4300 Seminar in Middle East Assistance and Arms Security Problems 4-0 Transfers 4-0 NS 4630 Seminar in Asian NS4161 American National Security Security Problems 4-0 Objectives and Net NS 4700 Seminar in Soviet- Assessment 4-0 European Relations 4-0 NS 4273 American Foreign Policy NS 4710 Seminar in Sino-Soviet and World Politics 4-0 Relations 4-0 NS 0810 Thesis Research 4-0 AS 3510 Organizational Behavior and Naval Intelligence 4-0

Area Study Courses: Additional information on any of these curricula NS 3268 Problems of Government (681, 682, 683, 684, 686, and 825) may be ad- and Security in dressed to the Curricular Officer, Naval Europe 4-0 Intelligence/National Security Affairs Programs NS 3320 International Relations and (Code 38), Naval Postgraduate School, Monterey, Security Problems in the CA 93940. Telephone (408) 646-2228 or AUTO- Middle East 4-0 VON 878-2228.

69 OPERATIONS RESEARCH/SYSTEMS ANALYSIS

OPERATIONS RESEARCH/SYSTEMS ANALYSIS PROGRAM CURRICULUM NUMBER 360

JOSEPH HENRY CYR, Lieutenant above- average grades in mathematics is Commander, U.S. Navy; Curricular required. Completion of mathematics Officer; B.S. Purdue Univ., 1960; through calculus is considered minimal M.S., Naval Postgraduate School, preparation. A one year course in college 1969. physics is highly desired (Supply Officers excluded). Students lacking these quan- BRIAN DAVID ENGLER, Lieutenant, titative prerequisites will be accepted, in U.S. Navy; Assistant Curricular Of- certain cases, where their under-graduate ficer; B.S., U.S. Naval Academy, records indicate that they are exceptional 1969; Naval Postgraduate School, students and there are other possible indi- 1970. cators of success such as Graduate Record JAMES KERN HARTMAN, Academic Examination scores, correspondence or Associate; B.S., Massachusetts Insti- extension courses in quantitative subjects, tute of Technology, 1965; M.S., and outstanding motivation for the pro- Univ. of Nebraska, 1967; Ph.D., Case gram. Western Reserve Univ., 1970. DESCRIPTION — The Operations Research/Systems Analysis programs is OPERATIONS RESEARCH/SYSTEMS interdisciplinary in nature, consisting of ANALYSIS CURRICULUM course work in operations research, prob- CURRICULUM NUMBER 360 ability and statistics, mathematics, physi- (GROUP RO) cal science, economics, human engineer- ing, and computer science. Classes con- OBJECTIVE — To develop judgment vene semiannually, in March and Sep- and professional expertise in the quantita- tember. As the typical officer student is tive analysis of military operational and returning to a formal academic program defense managerial problems ashore and after 6 or 7 years (average) of operational afloat. The disciplines of mathematics, military duty, and because the needs of probability, statistics, economics, human the military services frequently require factors, physical science, and optimiza- that the officer's graduate work lie in a tion supply the theoretical background for field different from his undergraduate analyzing alternative choices in tactical major, the program includes a certain and strategic warfare and in planning, amount of introductory material which budgeting and procurement of systems must precede advanced study in this field. and forces. Skills in finding relevant in- The advanced study phase of the pro- formation, generating decision criteria, gram will normally require four to five and selecting alternatives are developed academic quarters to complete. The in- as well as computational capability. troductory phase of the program will vary This program provides the officer with in length from one to four academic quar- a sound graduate-level technical ability, ters, depending upon the student's back- insight into practical problem solving, a ground and academic preparation. Credits broadened capacity for original thought, transferred from other institutions may be and an appreciation for the value of con- applied to graduate degree requirements. tinuing education; these qualities generate Validation of courses is highly encour- a strong personal confidence which will aged. enhance performance of duty and lead to Near the end of the introductory phase productive achievement throughout the of the program, officers are screened for officer's military career. admission to the master's candidacy. QUALIFICATIONS FOR ADMIS- Those officers admitted to the Master's SION — A baccalaureate degree with candidacy elect an option course se-

70 1

OPERATIONS RESEARCH/SYSTEMS ANALYSIS

quence and must submit an acceptable Mathematics thesis in order to qualify for the degree MA 2109 Topics in Calculus 5-0 Master of Science in Operations Re- MA 21 10 Multivariate Calculus 4-0 search. MA 2042 Linear Algebra 4-0 An integral part of the advanced phase of the program is a six-week experience Probability & Statistics tour in which the officers are assigned as PS 2301 Probability 4-0 working members of appropriate military PS 3302 Probability and Statistics 4-1 or industrial groups engaged in operations PS 3303 Statistics 4-1 research/systems analysis on military problems. The experience tour is de- Physical Science signed to permit the student to become PH 3321 Radiation Systems 4-0 involved in the practical application of military operations research and to iden- Economics tify problems of real military interest AS 3609 Introduction to Mathematical which the officer may pursue as part of Economics 4-0 his advanced study and thesis effort. AS 3610 Utility Theory and Resource An important adjunct to the formal Allocation 4-0 classroom work is the seminar series, OA 0001 (0-2), in which guest lecturers pre- Operations Analysis sent first-hand information as to practical OA 2600 History and Nature of Operations principles and techniques in the field of Analysis 2-0 Operations Research/Systems Analysis. CS 2600 Introductory Computing and This seminar is scheduled for every Oper- Computer Science for ations Research/Systems Analysis student Operations Analysis 2-0 in every quarter. OA 3604 Linear Programming 4-0 Upon successful completion of the OA 3653 System Simulation 4-0 program, the naval officer is awarded an OA 3657 Human Factors in System appropriate subspecialty billet code. Design 4-0 A few exceptionally well-qualified of- ficers are selected for doctoral studies each year, depending upon the needs of the military services.

Graduate Study

Introductory Study The graduate program consists of required courses, elective courses, option courses, experi- The introductory study portion of the Operations ence tour, and thesis research. Any transfer of Research/Systems Analysis program provides nec- graduate credit which is applicable may be used to essary background and tool subjects for successful reduce the number of courses taken in the pro- pursuit of the graduate study. This portion of the gram. program is of variable length depending on the amount of the course work listed below which can be validated by examination or credited from a prior academic transcript. Descriptions of the Core Courses courses appear in the departmental listings of this AS 361 Systems Analysis I 4-0 catalogue. A nominal course load is 16 credit OA 3200 Computational Methods hours during any academic quarter. Prior to begin- in O.R 3-2 ning the program a review of elementary calculus, OA 3654 War Gaming 3-2 elementary physics and computer programming, OA 3660 Analysis of Operational through correspondence or extension courses, is Data 3-1 strongly urged. OA 3704 Stochastic Models I 4-0

71 1 1

OPERATIONS RESEARCH/SYSTEMS ANALYSIS

OA 4631 Nonlinear and Dynamic OA 4653 Operational Test and Programming 4-0 Evaluation 3-2 OA 465 Search Theory and OA 4654 Combat Models 4-0 Detection (USN Line) 4-0 OA 4655 Quantitative Analysis of

OA 4705 Stochastic Models II "...3-2 Tactics 4-0 OA 4656 Operations Research of Army Elective Courses - The program permits selec- Weapons Systems 4-0 tion of one elective course in the student's thesis OA 4662 Reliability and Weapons subject area. System Effectiveness EXPERIENCE TOUR — Eight quarter Measurement 4-0 PS 4321 Design of Experiments 3-1 hours are allocated for the experience tour which is usually taken in the last six Systems Analysis Option - Preparation for weeks of the first quarter of advanced study. dealing with defense department resource alloca- THESIS RESEARCH — Twelve quar- tion, planning, and programming. AS 4613 Theory of Systems ter hours are allocated for thesis research, Analysis 4-0 four each in the student's final three quar- 4614 Cost Estimation 4-0 ters of the program. OA OPTION COURSES — Five courses OA 4615 Econometrics 4-0 chosen from a particular option area are OA 4616 Defense Expenditure and 4-0 required. The options offer a degree of Policy Analysis 4617 Campaign Analysis 4-0 specialization in a particular area in rec- OA 4653 Operational Test and ognition of requirements of the officer's OA 3-2 military service or corps. The selection of Evaluation 4942 Structure, Conduct, and these courses is developed in consultation MN Performance of the with a faculty option advisor from the fol- Defense Industries 4-0 lowing areas:

Human Factors Option - Preparation for deal- Operations Evaluation (Navy) Option - Prep- ing with human performance evaluation and the aration for dealing with the analysis of tactics and design of man/machine systems. hardware in Naval Warfare. OA 3658 Human Factors in Systems OA 4322 Sample Inspection and Design II 3-0 Quality Assurance 4-0 OA 4322 Sample Inspection and OA 4617 Campaign Analysis 4-0 Quality Assurance 4-0 OA 4633 Network Flows and OA 4323 Decision Theory 3-0 Graphs 4-0 OA 4680 Human Performance OA 4652 OR Problems in Evaluation 4-0 Naval Warfare 3-0 OA 4685 Skilled Operator OA 4653 Operational Test and Performance 3-2 Evaluation 3-2 OA 4690 Evaluation of Human OA 4662 Reliability and Weapon Factors Data 3-2 System Effectiveness OA 4695 OR in Man/Machine Measurement 4-0 Systems 4-0 OA 4685 Skilled Operator PS 4321 Design of Experiments 3-1 Performance 3-2 OC 4260 Sound in the Ocean 3-0 Logistics Option - Preparation for dealing with PS 4321 Design of Experiments 3-1 supply systems for Navy Supply Corps and Quar- Operations Evaluation (Marine Corps, termaster or Maintenance officers. - Army) Option Preparation for dealing with the OA 3620 Inventory I 4-0 analysis of land combat operations. OA 4615 Econometrics 4-0

OA 4614 Cost Estimation 4-0 OA 462 Inventory II 4-0 OA 4617 Campaign Analysis 4-0 OA 4633 Network Flows and OA 4634 Games of Strategy 4-0 Graphs 4-0

72 OPERATIONS RESEARCH/SYSTEMS ANALYSIS

MN 2150 Financial Accounting 4-0 Advanced Modelling Option - Preparation for MN 3161 Managerial Accounting 4-0 dealing with the theory and techniques of opera- MN 3371 Military Procurement and tions research.

Contract Administration 4-0 OA 3620 Inventory I 4-0

MN 4181 Applications of Management OA 4632 Mathematical Programming . . .4-0

Information Systems 4-0 OA 4633 Network Flows and Graphs . . . .4-0 MN 4372 Physical Distribution in OA 4634 Games of Strategy 4-0 Supply Systems 4-0 OA 4662 Reliability and Weapons PS 4440 Time Series Analysis 4-0 Systems Effectiveness Measurement 4-0

OA 4706 Stochastic Models III 4-0 PS 3421 Nonparametric Statistics 4-0

73 WEAPONS ENGINEERING

WEAPONS ENGINEERING PROGRAMS CURRICULA NUMBERS 530, 531 AND 535

EDWARD JOSEPH MAHON, Com- This education enhances performance mander, U.S. Navy; Curricular Of- in all duties throughout a naval career in- ficer, Weapons Engineering Programs; cluding operational billets, technical B.S., U.S. Naval Academy, 1957; management assignments, and policy B.S., Naval Postgraduate School, making positions, thereby preparing the 1967. officer for increased responsibility, in- cluding command, both ashore and ROBERT CECIL WILLEMS, Lieutenant afloat. Commander, U.S. Navy; Assistant QUALIFICATIONS FOR ADMIS- Curricular Officer, Underwater Acous- SION — A baccalaureate degree with tics Program; B.S., Fort Hays Kansas mathematics through differential and in- State College, 1965; M.S., Naval tegral calculus is required. Courses in the Postgraduate School, 1972. physical sciences and engineering are de- JOHN NORVELL DYER, Academic As- sirable. sociate; B.A., Univ. of California at Allied officers may enroll in the above Berkeley, 1956; Ph.D., 1960. curricula subject to the exclusion of clas- sified courses as determined by the Chief Several curricular programs are ad- of Naval Operations. ministered by the Weapons Engineering DESCRIPTION — The structure of Curricular Office as follows: each curriculum takes into account the 530 Weapon Systems Technology fact that the typical officer student has been away from an academic environ- 531 Weapon Systems Science ment for some time and is not usually 535 Underwater Acoustics prepared to engage in graduate studies without some preparation. The extent of OBJECTIVES — To provide graduate the preparation will depend upon the education to officers from all com- academic background of the individual munities in the fundamentals of certain officer and will be decided upon by the engineering, scientific and analytical officer student in consultation with his principles with which to increase their Curricular Officer and Academic As- ability to analyze, understand, and man- sociate. Officers with less technical back- age the complex naval weapon systems in ground than is considered sufficient for the environments in which they operate; direct entry into one of the programs de- to enhance operational and command scribed here may be first enrolled in the competence of naval weapon systems in Engineering Science curriculum for one the environments in which they operate; or more quarters for additional prepara- to enhance operational and command tion. competence of naval officers in various The Continuing Education Program warfare subspecialties; to provide the pro- was established at the Naval Postgraduate fessional expertise, technical competence School in June 1974 as a means of provid- and practical experience to develop, the ing extended educational services. The ability to relate fundamental concepts di- self-instructional courses can be delivered rectly to naval weapon systems; to build a to officers at their current duty stations for new appreciation for continuing educa- completion during off-duty hours or tion; to broaden their capacity for original work/study periods. These have been thought, and to enhance their discovery of selected primarily from courses normally a new personal confidence leading to pro- taken in the initial phase of curricular ductive achievement throughout their programs at the Naval Postgraduate naval career. School and will serve to provide general

74 WEAPONS ENGINEERING

educational upgrading opportunities. of the Naval Postgraduate School. As weapons More particularly, their completion can have developed and become more complex, educa- reduce student time required in sub- tion at NPS has also changed to keep pace with sequent fully-funded graduate education rapidly emerging technology upon which combat

programs. systems are developed. Today and tomorrow all The curricula described below are in- professional military leaders must understand

terdisciplinary in nature because of the those principles and technologies if they are opti- wide knowledge required of the graduate. mally to operate, manage and command combat Each curriculum consists of a number of systems for which they will be responsible. basic courses designed to provide a Education in Weapon Systems Engineering must smooth transition from previous studies. include extensive breadth as well as specialization

In a typical program, most of the first four at the graduate level. Combat systems are complex or five quarters are devoted to the basic and dependent upon a wide range of basic scien- "core" material. Portions of this under- tific knowledge in areas such as explosives and graduate preparation may be validated by propellants, plasmas, materials science, controls, an academically prepared officer to per- electronics, electro-optics, lasers, radars, com- mit study to greater depth or breadth in munications and signal processing, and nuclear graduate electives, or subject to course science. Depth at the graduate level in one or more scheduling limitations, to shorten his time of these areas is required of each student involved on board. The remainder of the program in Weapon Systems Engineering. In addition, each is dedicated to advanced graduate spe- program addresses systems aspects of reliability, cialization and elective choices. Upon testing, effectiveness and procurement. successful completion of an approved curriculum, officers will be awarded an appropriate subspecialty billet code. Of- ficers should refer to the Annual Naval SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY Officer Billet Summary for possible as- WEAPON CURRICULUM 530 signment wherein they could apply their recently acquired education. Students will be awarded the degree of Master of Sci- DESCRIPTION — This is a program designed ence in an appropriate discipline depen- to meet the needs of the military services for an dent upon academic achievement and officer whose broad-based technical education successful completion of required emphasizes the concepts of systems engineering. courses. On-going counseling is provided Applications of classroom theory to current by the Curricular Officer/Academic As- weapon systems, and those under development, sociate team for all students and a close are stressed throughout the curriculum. This cur- professional relationship between officer riculum includes graduate level studies of com- students and faculty enables each officer puter science and real-time computer systems, to make his time at the School a valuable electrical engineering with emphasis on control asset to his professional development and systems, technology of explosives and propellants, career. material science with emphasis on mechanical be- havior and failure modes of materials. Also in- Descriptions of each curriculum and typical cluded are methodology and techniques of systems programs follow. Specific degree requirements engineering, and two in-depth option sequences may be found under the appropriate departmental wherein students may specialize in particular tech- section of the catalogue. nical subjects of current service needs. These elec- tives permit students to broaden their knowledge of weapon systems and also to reach greater depth in some particular area. Students also engage in thesis research in an area related to these advanced WEAPON SYSTEMS ENGINEERING studies. Graduates are awarded the degree Master of Science in Applied Science. Graduate education in weaponry and ordnance A recently incorporated option in this cur- systems has long been one of the primary functions riculum will allow some officers to pursue ad-

75 WEAPONS ENGINEERING

vanced studies in electrical engineering and to earn Graduate Specialization the degree Master of Science in Electrical En- gineering. This option has replaced the previously For the officer pursuing the general Weapon offered Engineering Electronics (Weapons) cur- Systems Technology program, a number of riculum 532. graduate options are available. Some typical areas In view of the wide breadth of the 530 cur- for advanced study are:

riculum that addresses all aspects of weaponry,

successful graduates, regardless of option, will re- Signal processing applied to weapon systems ceive the Weapon Systems Technology subspe- Military radars and electronic countermeasure sys- cialty code XX61. tems In addition to the formal course work and labo- Advanced control theory of weapon systems

ratories, students will participate in and report on Electro-optics and laser technology projects designed to investigate components of Nuclear physics and radiation effects major weapon systems in order to exercise their Advanced engineering mechanics and analyses of experience and their education to consider the weapon systems "real-life" aspects of systems engineering. Operations research/system analysis associated A guest lecture and seminar program, plus quar- with military systems terly visits to West Coast weapon-related ac- Advanced military communications theory tivities, serve to keep students informed of current Computers for command, control, and weapon sys- developments and stress the present day utilization tems of theory and technology.

For the officer who is to pursue his graduate Introductory and Core Studies studies in the field of electrical engineering, the areas of advanced study will typically include the This portion of the program provides the basic following: mathematical, scientific and engineering courses,

along with an intrpduction to systems engineering Microwave devices required for successful pursuit of the graduate elec- Discrete signal processing tives, as well as those graduate studies required of Statistical communication theory

all students. Each student's transcript will be eval- Advanced radar systems uated for validation of as many of the introductory Advanced systems engineering courses as possible. The remaining courses will be Advanced control theory programmed with a normal load of four courses Antenna engineering each quarter. The core courses, including some undergraduate This curriculum commences annually each Sep- level studies, typically contain the following: tember. March input by request.

Calculus, matrix algebra, vector analysis, complex numbers WEAPON SYSTEMS SCIENCE Ordinary and partial differential equations CURRICULUM #531 Mathematical series and transforms

Electromagnetic wave theory and propagation DESCRIPTION — This is a program which has Thermodynamics and physical chemistry of evolved from what was previously the Electro- propellants/explosives optics/Laser Technology option of the Weapon

Systems engineering for weapon systems Systems Engineering program. It is designed to Weapon systems testing and reliability meet the needs of the military services for Technology and damage potential of explosives graduates who have a strong background in techni-

Engineering materials and structural failures 'of cal and engineering physics, coupled with an ap- weapon systems preciation of the concepts of systems engineering, Computer modeling and programming especially as they relate to weapons. This core cur-

Real-time military computer systems riculum includes studies in electromagnetic wave Electrical engineering, linear systems, control of propagation and communications, real-time com- weapon systems puter systems, the chemistry of explosives and Military communications systems propellants, particle and fluid mechanics, signal

76 WEAPONS ENGINEERING processing, reliability and maintainability of systems/explosives/propellants weapon systems, and a thorough sequence of Real-time military computers/signal processing courses in atomic and molecular phenomena. Modern physics/quantum phenomena Graduate options are available in specialized areas such as electro-optics and laser technology, nuc- Graduate Specialization lear science, plasma physics or other areas depend- ing upon current service needs. In the scientific graduate sequence leading to In order to keep students informed of current qualification for the subspecialty XX63, some typ- developments and present-day utilization of theory ical specializations are: and technology, the program includes an active guest lecture and seminar series. Also, the students Electro-optics/military applications and devices participate in quarterly visits to various West Coast Laser and laser effects/laser damage military activities. Plasma physics/laser energy absorption In addition to formal course work, students par- Fluid drag reduction/vehicle hydrodynamics ticipate in group projects in which components of Nuclear physics and radiation effects major weapon systems are investigated. This en- Physics of the ocean-air interface courages them to combine their operational experi- Space and missile dynamics/atmospheric physics ence with their education in considering "real- life" aspects of systems engineering. In the graduate sequence dealing with the After completion of core curriculum, graduate broader aspects of Weapon Systems Engineering, level courses continue in two option sequences. In courses in the following areas are typical: the first of these, studies emphasize and broaden the student's knowledge of weapon systems. In the Weapon control systems second, advanced scientific studies and thesis re- Advanced military radar systems search are pursued which qualify the student for Electronic warfare systems the subspecialty code XX63 (Physics) with spe- Operations research/military systems analysis cialization in an area of current service needs. Explosives technology/propellants/blast effects Computer systems/military applications Introductory and Core Studies Environmental effects on military systems

This portion of the program provides the basic This curriculum commences annually each mathematical and engineering physics back- March. September input by request. ground, along with an introduction to systems en- gineering, required for successful pursuit of the graduate options. It also contains those graduate UNDERWATER ACOUSTICS studies required of all students in the program. CURRICULUM #535 Each student's academic transcript will be evalu- ated for validation of as many of the introductory DESCRIPTION — Underwater Acoustics is an courses as possible. The remaining courses will be interdisciplinary program. At NPS, courses of programmed with a normal load of four courses study are taken in physics, electrical engineering, each quarter. oceanography and mathematics. Specific coverage

The core courses, including some undergraduate is provided in such areas as propagation of sound level studies, typically contain the following: in the sea, transducer theory, signal processing electronics, oceanography, and noise and vibration Calculus, matrix algebra, vector analysis, complex control. Successful completion of the curriculum numbers permits the graduate to address current and future Ordinary and partial differential equations military problems associated with underwater Mathematical series and transforms acoustics systems and to expand his base of profes- Electromagnetic propagation/communications sional knowledge and technical competence.

Thermodynamics and statistical physics Courses are drawn principally from the fields of Weapon systems integration and engineering physics, electrical engineering, oceanography and Military systems reliability and maintainability mathematics. Although broadly based, the empha-

Particle and fluid mechanics sis is on underwater acoustics and its applications Chemistry of ordnance to Undersea Warfare. As can be seen in the follow-

77 WEAPONS ENGINEERING

ing list, courses included relate to the generation Thermal and dynamic properties of gases and liq- and propagation of sound in the ocean, military uids applications of underwater sound and the electrical Basic circuit theory engineering of instruments for the detection of un- Circuit analysis derwater sounds. Also included are topics concern- Communication theory ing the effects of the noise environment on people. Electronic engineering fundamentals As an integral part of his program, each officer Digital machines prepares a thesis under the guidance of a faculty Oceanography member. In addition, the program includes short field

trips, visits to facilities working on current military Graduate Study acoustic problems, and participation in such meet- ings as the Navy Symposium on Underwater The graduate portion of the program includes Acoustics. courses in the following areas: Within the Navy, successful completion leads to

an approved subspecialty code of XX56 and thus Partial differential equations and integral trans- qualifies the graduate officer for assignments to forms challenging subspecialty billets throughout the Applied probability military establishment. Electromagnetic wave propagation Physics of underwater vehicles Introductory Study Fundamental acoustics Underwater acoustics

This portion of the program provides the neces- Propagation of waves in fluids sary mathematics, electrical engineering, and Transducer theory and design physics required for successful pursuit of the Advanced acoustics laboratory graduate curriculum. Each student's transcript will Seminar in applications of underwater sound be evaluated for validation of as much material as Mechanical waves in solids possible. The remaining studies will be scheduled Shock, vibration and noise control in military sys- with a normal load of four courses each quarter. tems Shock waves and nonlinear acoustics Calculus review Sonar systems engineering Linear algebra Acoustic signal processing

Differential equations Oceanographic factors in underwater sound Mathematical physics Numerical methods This curriculum commences annually each Sep- Review of vector mechanics and fluids tember.

78 CURRICULA AT OTHER UNIVERSITIES

CURRICULA CONDUCTED AT OTHER UNIVERSITIES

PETER KENNETH STEVENSON, Commander, U.S. Navy; Manager, Graduate Educa- tion at Civilian Institutions; B.S. in Engineering Science, Naval Postgraduate School, 1970; M.S. in Management, 1971.

Curriculum Number Length Institution Primary Consultant

Advanced Science (Math) 380 2 yrs Various OP-96 Advanced Science (Chem) 382 2 yrs Various NAVSEASYSCOM Supply Aquisition/Distrib 810 12-18 mos Various NAVSUPSYSCOM

Criminal Law 884 1 yr Various JAG Facilities Engineering 47X 1-2 yrs Various NAVFACENGCOM

Forensic Science 885 1 yr Armed Forces Institute of Pathology* JAG

International Law 672 1 yr George Washington Univ* JAG

Joint/Strategic Intell . . .990 9 mos Defense Intell School* NAVINTCOM

Labor Law 886 1 yr Various JAG Law (Army Judge Advocate Officers Adv. Course) 881 9 mos U. of Virginia JAG

Logistics Management 700 1 yr Air Force Institute of Technology* CHNAVMAT Naval Constr & Engrg 510 2-3 yrs M.I.T NAVSEASYSCOM

Nuclear Effects (Phys) 521 1 8 mos Air Force Institute of Technology* NAVSEASYSCOM Nuclear Engineering (CEC) 572 18 mos Penn State Univ NAVFACENGCOM Nuclear Engineering (ED) 520 18 mos Penn State Univ NAVSEASYSCOM Ocean Engineering 472 1-2 yrs Various NAVFACENGCOM

Ocean Law 883 1 yr Various JAG

Petroleum Admin & Mgmt 880 1 yr Various JAG Petroleum Engineering 630 1-2 yrs U. of Texas NAVFACENGCOM Petroleum Management 811 17 mos U. of Kansas NAVSUPSYSCOM

Pol-Mil (Western Hemisphere) 685 1 yr Various CNO

Public Affairs 920 1 yr American Univ* CHINFO Religion 970 9 mos Various CHCHAP

Retailing 830 1 yr Michigan State* NAVSUPSYSCOM

Subsistence Technology 860 1 yr Michigan State* NAVSUPSYSCOM

Taxation ..882 1 yr Various JAG

Wo NROTC Unit at Institution

79 ADMINISTRATIVE SCIENCES

DEPARTMENT OF ADMINISTRATIVE SCIENCES

CARL RUSSELL JONES, Professor of M.B.A., Harvard Univ., 1964; Administrative Sciences; Chairman D.B.A., 1974. (1965)*; B.S., Carnegie Institute of CLYDE BROOKLYN DERR, Associate Technology, 1956; M.B.A., Univ. of Professor of Management (1974); Southern California, 1963; Ph.D., B.A., Univ. of California at Berkeley, Claremont Graduate School, 1965. 1967; Ed.D., Harvard Univ., 1971. JAMES KENICHI ARIMA, Associate RICHARD SANFORD ELSTER, As- Professor Operations Research and sociate Professor of Management and Behavioral Science (1969); B.A., Psychology (1969); B.A., Univ. of Univ. of California at Los Angeles, Minnesota, 1963; M.A., 1965; Ph.D., 1948; M.A., George Washington 1967. Univ., 1957; Ph.D., Northwestern CARSON KAN EOYANG, Associate Univ., 1962. Professor of Management (1974); JAMES DAVID BUTTINGER, Lieuten- B.A., Massachusetts Institute of ant Commander, U.S. Navy; Instruc- Technology, 1966; M.B.A., Harvard tor in Economics/Systems Analysis Univ., 1968; Ph.D., Stanford Univ., (1975); B.S., U.S. Naval Academy, 1976. 1967; M.S., Naval Postgraduate RAYMOND LLOYD FORBES, JR., School, 1971. Lieutenant Commander, U.S. Navy; Assistant Professor of Administrative PAUL MARSHALL CARRICK, As- Sciences (1976); B.S., U.S. Naval sociate Professor of Management Academy, 1959; M.A., United States (1969); B.A., Northwestern Univ., International Univ., 1971; Ph.D., 1949; Ph.D., Univ. of California at 1973. Berkeley, 1956. JAMES MORGAN FREMGEN, Profes- WILLIAM HOWARD CHURCH, Pro- sor of Accounting (1965); B.S.C., fessor of Management (1956); B.A., Univ. of Notre Dame, 1954; M.B.A., Whittier College, 1933; M.S. P. A., Indiana Univ., 1955; D.B.A., 1961; Univ. of Southern California, 1941. C.P.A., State of Indiana, 1964.

JOHN WALLIS CREIGHTON, Profes- WILLIAM CANNONG GIAUQUE, As- sor of Management (1967); B.S., sociate Professor of Administrative Univ. of Michigan, 1938; B.A., Hast- Sciences (1973); B.S., California In- ings College, 1939; Ph.D., Univ. of stitute of Technology, 1963; M.B.A., Michigan, 1954. Harvard Univ., 1968; D.B.A., 1972. ALEXANDER CLAYTON CROSBY, CHARLES BENGT GUSTAFSON, Navy; Instructor in Commander, U.S. Navy; Instructor in Commander, U.S. B. Management (1975); B.S., Univ. of Administrative Sciences (1977); Arch., Univ., 1957; M.S. in California at Berkeley, 1957; M.B.A., Miami Harvard Univ., 1972. Management, Naval Postgraduate School, 1971. LESLIE DARBYSHIRE, Professor* of WILLIAM JAMES HAGA, Associate Management (1962); B.A., Univ. of Professor of Management Sociology Bristol, 1950; D.B.A., Univ. of (1972); B.B.A., Wayne State Univ., Washington, 1957. 1960; M.A., Univ. of Illinois, 1970; Ph.D., 1972. STANLEY MICHAEL DEAN, Associate Professor of Management (1973); FENN CLARK HORTON, Associate B.A., Brigham Young Univ., 1962; Professor of Economics (1964); B.A.,

80 ADMINISTRATIVE SCIENCES

State Univ. of Iowa, 1950; M.A., 1963; M.B.A., George Washington Claremont Graduate School, 1967; Univ., 1971. Ph.D., 1968. CLAIR ALTON PETERSON, Associate JERRY DOUGLAS HORTON, Com- Professor of Operations Research and mander, U.S. Navy; Instructor in Economics (1962); B.B.A., Univ. of Management (1976); B.S., U.S. Mer- Minnesota, 1951; Ph.D., Mas- chant Marine Academy, 1957; M.S., sachusetts Institute of Technology, Naval Postgraduate School, 1966. 1961. ROBERT RUSSELL JUDSON, Adjunct JAMES CLAY ROBERTSON, Lieuten- Professor of Management (1973); ant Commander, U.S. Navy; Instruc- B.A., Univ. of Illinois, 1951; M.S., tor in Management (1976); A.B., Col- 1955. gate Univ., 1967; M.B.A., Univ. of Virginia, 1974. MELVIN BERNARD KLINE, Professor of Management (1970); B.S., College ROBERT WILLIAM SAGEHORN, of the City of New York, 1941; M.S., Lieutenant Commander, U.S. Navy; Stevens Institute of Technology, 1952; Instructor in Management (1975); M.E., Univ. of California at Los B.S., California Maritime Academy, Angeles, 1959; Ph.D., 1966. 1959; B.A., Naval Postgraduate RICHARD ALLIN McGONIGAL, School, 1970; M.S., 1975. Commander, U.S. Navy; Assistant NORMAN FLOYD SCHNEIDEWIND, Professor of Management (1974); Professor of Information Science and B.S., Cornell Univ., 1951; B.D., Computer Science (1971); B.S.E.E., Union Theological Seminary, 1954; Univ. of California at Berkeley, 1951; S.T.M., Columbia Univ., 1966; M.B.A., Univ. of Southern Califor- Ph.D., Michigan State Univ., 1971. nia, 1960; M.S.O.R. (ENGR), 1970; D.B.A., 1966. ALAN WAYNE McMASTERS, As- sociate Professor of Operations Re- JOHN DAVID SENGER, Professor of search and Administrative Sciences Management and Behavioral Sciences (1965); B.S., Univ. of California at (1957); B.S., Univ. of Illinois, 1945; Berkeley, 1957; M.S., 1962; Ph.D., M.S., 1948; Ph.D., 1965. 1966. JONATHAN CILLEY TIBBITTS, JR., NEIL PATRICK MILLER, Lieutenant Commander, U.S. Navy; Instructor in B.A., Whitman Colonel, U.S. Marine Corps; Instruc- Management (1975); College, 1958; BSCE, California Insti- tor in Administrative Sciences and tute of Technology, Computer Science (1976); B.A., 1958; MSCE, Stanford Univ., 1971. Univ. of California at Berkeley, 1956; B.A., Southern Colorado State Col- RONALD ALFRED WEITZMAN, As- lege, 1965; M.S., Management/Data sociate Professor of Psychology Processing, Naval Postgraduate (1971); B.A., Stanford Univ., 1952; School, 1966. M.A., 1954; Ph.D., Princeton Univ., JOSEPH FREDERICK OWENS, 1959. Lieutenant Commander, Supply DAVID RICHARD WHIPPLE, JR., As- Corps, U.S. Navy; Instructor in Man- sociate Professor of Economics and agement (1976); B.A., Grinnell Col- Systems Analysis (1971); B.A., Univ. lege, 1961; M.B.A., Columbia Univ., of St. Thomas, 1964; M.A., St. 1962. Mary's Univ., 1966; Ph.D., Univ. of KENNETH LEON PATTERSON, Kansas, 1971. Lieutenant Commander, U.S. Navy; CHESTER ARTHUR WRIGHT, Assis- Instructor in Management (1976); tant Professor of Social Psychology B.A., San Francisco State College, (1973); B.A., San Francisco State

81 .

ADMINISTRATIVE SCIENCES

Univ., 1965; M.S. Univ. of Califor- MASTER OF SCIENCE IN MANAGEMENT nia at Los Angeles. 1968. The award of the degree of Master of Science in *The year of joining the Postgraduate School Management requires: Faculty is indicated in parentheses.

1 . Completion of the Management Fundamentals DEPARTMENTAL REQUIREMENTS program plus a minimum of eight (8) quarter hours FOR DEGREES of upper division courses in subjects directly perti- nent to the nature and objectives of the particular Programs leading to degrees must be curriculum. The Management Fundamentals pro- arranged in consultation with the Chair- gram consists of a total of 34 quarter hours of 2000 man, Department of Administrative Sci- and 3000 level courses, including a minimum of ences. the following hours by disciplines:

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN Accounting and Financial Management APPLIED SCIENCE Behavioral Science Economics Students with acceptable academic backgrounds Management Theory may enter a program leading to the degree of Mas- Quantitative Methods ter of Science in Applied Science. The program of each student seeking this degree must contain a 2. The completion of a minimum of forty (40) minimum of 20 quarter hours in administrative sci- quarter hours of graduate level courses, at least ences at the graduate level, including work at the twelve (12) quarter hours at the 4000 level. 4000 level. Additionally, the program must con- tain a minimum of 12 graduate quarter hours in an 3. The completion of an approved sequence of approved sequence of courses outside the Depart- courses in the student's area of concentration. ment of Administrative Sciences. A total minimum Examples of concentration areas are accounting of 12 quarter hours at the 4000 level plus an ac- and financial management, communications man- ceptable thesis is required. This program provides agement, economics, management science, mate- depth and diversity through specially arranged rial management, personnel management, and sys- course sequences to meet the needs of the Navy tems acquisition management. and the interests of the individual. The Department

Chairman's approval is required for all programs 4. In addition to the 40 quarter hours of course leading to this degree. work, the submission of an acceptable thesis on a MASTER OF SCIENCE topic previously approved by the Department of IN COMPUTER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT Administrative Sciences.

1 A candidate for the degree of Master of Science 5. Final approval of a program leading to the Mas- in Computer Systems Management must complete ter of Science in Management shall be obtained for satisfactorily either (A) a minimum of 56 quarter each student from the Chairman, Department of hours of graduate level course work or (B) a Administrative Sciences. minimum of 48 quarter hours of graduate level course work and an acceptable thesis. SERVICE COURSES

2. Core course requirements at the graduate level must be successfully completed or validated by Upper Division Course

advanced credit in each of the following areas: AS 2701 INTRODUCTION TO SYSTEMS EN- Computer Science GINEERING (3-0 to 4-0). This course provides Data Processing the student with an introduction to system design Economics and development, the underlying philosophy, con- Financial Management and Accounting cepts, and methodology of systems engineering,

Material Management and its application in the Department of Defense

Operations Research and the Navy. It establishes the foundation for Statistics other courses in the Weapon Systems Technology

82 ADMINISTRATIVE SCIENCES

(WST) option of curriculum 530. Topics covered AS 3609 INTRODUCTION TO MATHEMATI- include systems engineering overview, the systems CAL ECONOMICS (4-0). A presentation of the approach, the system life cycle and system design basic economic concepts involved in the decision process, systems engineering disciplines. Empha- process of individuals and other entities faced with scarcity is sis is placed on the planning and design phases of of resources. The goal to provide suffi- the system life cycle. PREREQUISITE: None. cient background to allow accurate incorporation of economic incentives in descriptive and optimi- Upper Division or zation models constructed in the process of doing Graduate Courses systems analyses. Topics covered include oppor- tunity cost, incremental analysis and its relation to AS 3204 DEFENSE RESOURCE ANALYSIS decision rules, linear and nonlinear production (4-0). The aim of this course is to present the nat- processes, partial equilibrium analysis, ordinal and cardinal utility criteria. ure, the aims, and limitations of analysis as it and welfare PREREQUI- exists today and contributes to military problems. SITES: MA 2110, MA 2042. The common principles of cost/effectiveness analysis, design and formulation of the study, AS 3610 UTILITY THEORY AND RESOURCE methods of solution, sensitivity analysis, pitfalls ALLOCATION (4-0). Extension of the concepts and limitations. Case studies from the field of in- discussed in AS 3609 to the analysis of decisions terest of the class will be discussed. PREREQUI- involving the warfare of groups of individuals. SITE: None. Covered are externalities, public goods, joint pro- duction, nonmarket decision making through

shadow pricing. Also covered is an introduction to AS 3340 THE DEFENSE DECISION PROCESS the macroeconomic structure within which the AND ASW (4-0). Study of the defense decision micro decisions previously covered are made. In- process as it related to the choice of ASW forces. cluded is income determination and sector anlaysis Includes consideration of the systems acquisition with policy discussions and evaluation. PRE- system, the planning, programming and budgeting REQUISITE: AS 3609. system, and their interrelationship in setting the ASW force level and mix. The effect of the office AS 3611 SYSTEMS ANALYSIS I (4-0). Princi- of Management and Budget, and the Congressional ples of systems analysis and their relationship to budget process on ASW forces is also considered. the planning, programming, and budgeting system Current status of Soviet submarine employment, (PPBS), and the traditional OR models. Analysis hardware and doctrine. PREREQUISITE: Last of effectiveness measures and models. Cost es- quarter standing in the ASW curriculum. timating and analysis. Overall structure of cost-

effectiveness and decision criteria. Risk and uncer- AS 3501 PROJECT MANAGEMENT (4-0). Study tainty problems. PREREQUISITES: OA 3604, AS of practical application of management processes 3610, PS 3303. in the project and systems acquisition environ- ment. Planning, organization, staffing, directing AS 3703 MAINTAINABILITY ENGINEERING and controlling functions are discussed. Behav- (4-0). Maintainability as a system design disci- ioral aspects inter- of motivation, leadership and pline. The system life cycle/decision process and personal processes are included. Enrollment re- maintainability. The maintainability program plan stricted to non-systems acquisition management (MIL-STD-470). Maintenance engineering students. PREREQUISITE: None. analysis. Developing the maintenance concept.

Concepts of system effectiveness - reliability, AS 3510 ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOR AND maintainability, availability, dependability, and NAVAL INTELLIGENCE (4-0). An examination capability. Maintainability statistics, prediction, of the different approaches to the study of public demonstration, and evaluation (MIL-STD-471). management and their relevance to the administra- Maintainability design requirements and trade-off tion of naval intelligence. After a brief introduc- analysis. Maintainability program management, tion to the organization theory, measures of or- design reviews, data collection. Case studies and ganizational effectiveness and group decision mak- examples. PREREQUISITE: OS 3202. ing, a number of American intelligence organiza- tions are analyzed. PREREQUISITE: GV 3061. AS 3704 LOGISTICS ENGINEERING (4-0). In-

83 ADMINISTRATIVE SCIENCES

tegrated logistics support as a systems engineering Upper Division or Graduate Course discipline. Logistic support planning and the sys-

tem life cycle. Logistics elements. Logistic sup- CM 3184 REAL-TIME INFORMATION SYS- port analysis (MIL-STD-1388). Level-of-repair TEMS (4-0). The study of real-time and on-line analysis (MIL-STD-1390). Statistical techniques information systems from a functional and man- for logistics, resource analysis, provisioning and agement standpoint. Topics covered are: the

inventory control. Logistics interfaces with relia- characteristics, effectiveness and system econom- bility and maintainability. Data requirements. ics of selected DOD and civilian computer- Logistics management. PREREQUISITES: An in- communication networks and services; manage- troductory course in probability and statistics and a ment of real-time system development and opera- survey course in operations research. tions and analytical tools for evaluation of real- time systems. PREREQUISITES: CS 2103, MN 3105, OS 3211. Graduate Courses Graduate Course AS 4613 THEORY OF SYSTEMS ANALYSIS (4-0). Systems analysis (cost-effectiveness CM 4184 REAL-TIME INFORMATION SYS- analysis) formulated as commensurable and in- TEM MANAGEMENT (4-0). This course, given commensurable physical capital investment choice in the final quarter of the Communications Man- models. Emphasis on decision rules and the nature agement curriculum, integrates material presented of opportunity costs with respect to scale and tim- in previous courses. Cases and examples are con- ing of investment. Interpretation of methods of risk sidered which are illustrative of the management modeling and solution computation. Theory of the problems confronting a communications manager second best; theory of the social discount rate. In- in naval communication station or headquarters troduction to models of planning and control em- communications development activities. PRE- phasizing decentralization of the decision-making REQUISITES: CM 3184, EE 3425. problem. PREREQUISITES: AS 3611, OA 4631 (concurrently). COMPUTER SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT

AS 4665 SYSTEMS PSYCHOLOGY (4-0). CT 0001 SEMINAR FOR COMPUTER SYS- Course will be devoted to an examination of man's TEMS MANAGEMENT STUDENTS (0-2). Guest role and effectiveness as a system component. The Lecturers. Thesis and research presentations.

major emphasis of the course is placed on the PREREQUISITE: None. human aspects of the system. The course will examine human behavior in a systems context. CT 0810 THESIS RESEARCH FOR COMPUTER Topics to be covered include motivation, percep- SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT STUDENTS (0-0). tion and communication with emphasis being Every student conducting thesis research will en-

placed on the personnel sub-system and its in- roll in this course.

teracting elements. This course is designed for the ASW curriculum. PREREQUISITE: OS 3665. Upper Division Course

CT 2000 INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT (3-2). This course will provide MANAGEMENT an introduction to the field of automatic data pro- cessing and the functions and responsibilities of CM 0001 SEMINAR FOR TELECOMMUNICA- the computer manager. Specific topics are: survey TIONS MANAGEMENT STUDENTS (0-2). of contemporary computer applications, hardware Guest Lecturers. Thesis and research presenta- and software; functions and responsibilities of the tions. PREREQUISITE: None. computer manager; introduction to the role of per- sonnel management, financial management; quan- CM 0810 THESIS RESEARCH FOR TELE- titative methods and computer science in computer COMMUNICATIONS MANAGEMENT STU- management; NPS Computer Center operations, DENTS (0-0). Every student conducting thesis re- including management functions, computer room search will enroll in this course. operators, hardware, operating system and pro-

84 ADMINISTRATIVE SCIENCES

gramming. PREREQUISITE: None. ing thesis research will enroll in this course.

Upper Division or Graduate Course Upper Division Courses

CT 3220 COMPUTER CENTER OPERATIONS MN 2031 ECONOMIC DECISION MAKING (3-2). Theory and practice of the management of (4-0). The macroeconomic section includes a pre- computer center operations. Specific topics in- sentation of methods of national income determi- clude: facilities planning, production scheduling nation, the consumption function and multiplier and control, operational procedures, computer per- concepts and the impact of fiscal and monetary formance evaluation, analysis of operating systems policies. The microeconomic section covers an in- and hardware for installation management, organi- troduction to individual economic decision pro- zation and management of personnel in computer cesses and their relation to attainment of market installations and security of computer installations. equilibria. PREREQUISITE: MA 2300 concur- A feature of the course is experience obtained in rently. operating the NPS Computer Center installation. PREREQUISITES: CT 2000, CS 3010, CS 3020, MN 2106 INDIVIDUAL AND GROUP BEHAV- CS 3030 concurrently, or equivalent. IOR (4-0). A survey of individual and group be- havior with emphasis on those aspects which affect performance and satisfaction within an organiza- Graduate Courses tion. Topics include motivation, learning, person- ality, leadership, group effectiveness and role be- CT 4182 DATA PROCESSING MANAGEMENT havior. PREREQUISITE: None. (4-0). Study of computer systems analysis and de- sign. Management of ADP in the Federal Govern- MN 2150 FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING (4-0). ment, especially in the Department of Defense. Study of the basic postulates and principles of ac- Specific topics covered include: feasibility studies, counting. Specific topics include the accounting selection, and acquisition of equipment; evaluation cycle, asset valuation, equities and capital struc- of computer hardware and software; installation ture and financial statement analysis. PREREQ- and effective utilization of equipment; and ADP UISITE: None. various types of computer applications. PRE- REQUISITE: A background of advanced work in information systems or computer science and De- Upper Division or Graduate Courses partmental approval. MN 3001 BEHAVIORAL RESEARCH CT 4185 COMPUTER-BASED MANAGEMENT METHODOLOGY (4-0). Introduction to ep- INFORMATION SYSTEMS (4-0). The applica- istemology and the philosophy of science. tion and design of computer-based information Hypothetical construct, intervening variables and systems for management planning, control and op- operational definitions will be discussed. An in- troduction to erations. This is a required course in the Computer measurement and scaling will be gi- ven. of inferential statistics Systems Management Curriculum and also is of- Uses and experimental fered as an elective for other students who have method, both in the laboratory and in the field, will taken the prerequisites. PREREQUISITES: CT be examined. PREREQUISITES: MN 3105. PS 2000, MN 3155 or equivalent, and OS 3210 or 3211, and OS 3212 (concurrently). equivalent. MN 3002 HRM DATA ASSESSMENT (0-2). A laboratory course designed to apply quantitative MANAGEMENT methods to Human Resource Management data (e.g.. Navy survey data), including the processing MN 0001 SEMINAR FOR MANAGEMENT and the display of such data and the demonstration STUDENTS (0-2). Guest Lecturers. Thesis and re- of practical HRM evaluation and data-based prob- search presentations. PREREQUISITE: None. lems. PREREQUISITE: MN 3001 (concurrently).

MN 0810 THESIS RESEARCH FOR MANAGE- MN 3101 PERSONNEL MANAGEMENT AND MENT STUDENTS. (0-0) Every student conduct- LABOR RELATIONS (4-0). Study of the princi-

85 ADMINISTRATIVE SCIENCES

pies and practices of personnel administration in MN 3115 HUMAN RESOURCE DEVELOP- business and government organizations. A survey MENT (0-4). A laboratory course designed to

of the history, development and current status of complement Organization Development I (MN

labor-management relations in industry and gov- 3114), it will focus on a special assessment of in- ernment. Analysis of the labor market and the im- dividual student competencies needed to become plications of government regulations for wages and effective interventionists. An action plan for labor-management bargaining. PREREQUISITES: developing and improving these competencies will MN 3105, MN 3140, and MN 3161. be required. PREREQUISITE: MN 3114 (concur- rently). MN 3105 ORGANIZATION AND MANAGE-

MENT (4-0). The study of the management of or- MN 3 1 16 HRM FIELD WORK (0-4). A laboratory

ganizations emphasizing human and organizational course to accompany Organization Development II

variables and their implications for managerial ac- (MN 4123), it emphasizes general OD field trips, tion. Topics include the theories of management, visits to ongoing military HRM interventions and a organizational behavior, planning and control, and project designed to apply theory to practice. PRE- organizational development. PREREQUISITE: REQUISITE: MN 4123 (concurrently). MN 2106. MN 3117 WORKSHOP DESIGN (0-4). A prac- MN 31 10 INDIVIDUAL BEHAVIOR (4-0). Study ticum designed as a companion course to Educa- of the basic characteristics and determinants of in- tion and Training (MN 4116), to give students ex- dividual behavior. Specific topics include person- perience in designing, developing, implementing ality, motivation, learning, behavior conditioning, and assessing HRM workshops. PREREQUISITE: and introduction to tests and measurement. Impli- MN 4116 (concurrently). cations for effective administrative practice. PRE- REQUISITE: MN 2106. MN 3120 PLANNING AND CONTROL (4-0). Theory and techniques of the management func- MN 3111 PERSONNEL MANAGEMENT PRO- tions of planning and control. Topics will include CESSES (4-0). A broad coverage of human behav- policy and strategy formulation, long- and short- ior in the work situation with special emphasis on range planning, goal-setting and management by the problem of work in the Naval environment. objectives, budgeting and forecasting, perform- Topical areas covered include selection, place- ance evaluation and the use of rewards. PREREQ- ment, training, and evaluation of personnel; moti- UISITE: MN 3105 and MN 3161. vation, remuneration, morale, supervision, and working conditions in organizations; equipment MN 3121 LEADERSHIP AND GROUP BEHAV- design and man-machine relationships; and con- IOR (4-0). The study of groups in different settings sumer (user) behavior and the impact of technolog- and factors affecting both individual and group be- ical programs. PREREQUISITES: MN 3105, PS havior. Attention will be given to such concepts as

321 1 (concurrently). authority, conformity, cohesiveness, effective- ness, and leadership. Emphasis will be placed on MN 31 12 SELECTED TOPICS IN HUMAN RE- methods of observing group action. PREREQUI- SOURCES (2-0 to 5-0). Presentation of a wide SITE: MN 2106. selection of topics from the current literature. May be repeated for credit if the content changes. PRE- MN 3122 COMPARATIVE CULTURES (4-0). A REQUISITE: Departmental approval. comparative look at organization structures, man- agement philosophies, and supervisory techniques

MN 3114 ORGANIZATION DEVELOPMENT I around the world. This cross-cultural analysis is (3-0). The course will cover basic principles of prefaced by an introduction to the analysis of cul- intervention theory and method. What constitutes a ture and social systems. Particular attention will be

"healthy" organization, how to diagnose it and given to the problems of management in traditional

how to involve its participants to improve it from societies undergoing modernization. PREREQUI- the actual to the desired state are critical study SITE: MN 3105. problems. Cases, experiential teaching methods and interactive discussions will be employed. MN 3123 SOCIOLOGICAL ANALYSIS (4-0). PREREQUISITE: MN 3105. Survey of the general principles of the sociological

86 ADMINISTRATIVE SCIENCES

perspective in a symbolic interaction framework. the composition of output. Consumer and Producer Emphasis on processes and concepts including so- Choice Theory. Partial and general equilibrium cial interaction, aggregates, authority, roles, analysis. Welfare economics. Applications to de- status, norms, culture, alienation, deviance, and fense problems are emphasized. PREREQUI- the nature of social change. PREREQUISITE: MN SITES: MN 2031, MA 2300 or their equivalents. 3105. MN 3141 MICROECONOMICS (4-0). Study of MN 3124 ANALYSIS OF BUREAUCRACY the allocation of scarce resources to competing (4-0). An analysis of the forms and processes of goals. Consumer behavior and utility theory. complex organizations in evolution from charisma Theory of the firm. Analysis of alternative market to bureaucracy. Topics include formal dimensions structures. PREREQUISITE: A course in Princi- of structure, informal structure, professionalism, ples of Economics. basic growth and elaboration processes, and appli- cations of general systems theory to organizational MN 3142 INTERNATIONAL TRADE AND phenomena. PREREQUISITE: MN 3105. DEVELOPMENT (4-0). Study of the nature of trade between nations and the various approaches MN 3125 ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOR to economic development. Topics include trade AND ADMINISTRATION (4-0). Analysis of and resource allocation, international finance, human situations and their administrative implica- growth and development theory, and the market- tions. The course focuses on the responses made public planning for development debate. Policy is- by individuals and groups to the influences bearing sues are considered with emphasis on the implica- upon their behavior in organizational settings. tions for national action. PREREQUISITE: A PREREQUISITE: MN 3105. course in Principles of Economics.

MN 3126 SELECTED TOPICS IN THE BEHAV- MN 3143 MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS (4-0).

IORAL SCIENCES (2-0 to 5-0). Presentation of a Microeconomic theory and its applications and wide selection of topics from the current literature. capital budgeting; significance of market structure

May be repeated for credit if the content changes. upon performance, investment decisions and capi-

PREREQUISITE: Departmental approval. tal budgeting. Case and Industry studies. PRE- REQUISITE: A course in Principles of Econom- MN 3127 SELECTED TOPICS IN ORGANIZA- ics. TION AND MANAGEMENT (2-0 to 5-0). Presen- tation of a wide selection of topics from the current MN 3146 COMPARATIVE ECONOMIC SYS- literature. May be repeated for credit if the content TEMS (4-0). The characteristics and functions of changes. PREREQUISITE: Departmental ap- economic systems. Criteria for evaluating per- proval. formance. The analysis of alternative patterns of control, planning and market structures under MN 3130 MACROECONOMIC THEORY (4-0). capitalism, socialism, and mixed economies. Development of models to analyze the relation- PREREQUISITE: A course in Principles of Eco- ships between aggregate consumption, investment and output. Consideration of debt and financial as- sets, technical progress, growth, and monetary and MN 3155 FINANCIAL AND MANAGERIAL fiscal control systems. PREREQUISITE: A course ACCOUNTING (4-0). Study of both financial and in Principles of Economics. managerial accounting. Introduces the accounting principles, practices and procedures associated MN 3135 SELECTED TOPICS IN ECONOMICS with modern integrated systems. Specific topics (2-0 to 5-0). Presentation of a wide selection of include the accounting cycle, asset valuation, topics from the current literature. This course may equities, capital, financial statement analysis, flex- be repeated for credit if course content changes. ible budgets, cost volume profit analysis, and capi-

PREREQUISITE: A background in economics and tal budgeting. Closed to all students who must Departmental approval. take MN 2150 and lor MN 3161. PREREQUI- SITE: None. MN 3140 MICROECONOMIC THEORY (4-0). Determination of the allocation of resources and MN 3161 MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING (4-0).

87 ADMINISTRATIVE SCIENCES

Survey of cost accounting systems, including SYSTEMS AND THE COMPUTER (4-0). Study overhead costing, job order and process cost sys- of what an information system is, how the com-

tems, variable and absorption costing, and stan- puter and other resources fit into the system, and

dard costs. Emphasis is on applications of account- management considerations involved in the Intelli- ing data to planning, control and decision making. gence Data Handling System and other informa- Topics covered include flexible budgets, variance tion systems. Study of basic computer and MIS analysis, cost-volume-profit analysis, and incre- concepts as required, including computer and data

mental profit analysis. Capital budgeting is exam- structures, input/output systems and file organiza- ined extensively. PREREQUISITE: MN 2150. tion. Survey of COBOL programming and data-

base management languages. This course is for MN 3165 SELECTED TOPICS IN ACCOUNT- 825 Naval Intelligence students only. PREREQ- ING AND FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT (2-0 to UISITE: CS 0113 (concurrently). 5-0). Presentation of a wide selection of topics from the current literature. This course may be MN 3215 SELECTED TOPICS IN MANAGE-

repeated for credit if course content changes. MENT SCIENCE (2-0 to 5-0). Presentation of a PREREQUISITE: A background in accounting and wide selection of topics from the current literature. financial management and Departmental approval. May be repeated for credit if the content changes. PREREQUISITE: Departmental approval.

MN 3 170 DEFENSE RESOURCE ALLOCATION MN 3251 ACCOUNTING THEORY AND (4-0). The study of the process by which resources STANDARDS (4-0). Study of the basic concepts, are allocated within the Department of Defense. standards, principles, and practices underlying Topics include an analysis of the planning, pro- published financial reports. Specific topics include gramming, and budgeting system and the systems approaches to the specification of accounting prin- acquisition process, cost-effectiveness analysis, ciples, bases of asset valuation, income measure- and the economic, social and political environment ment, and the measurement of corporate equities. of the military manager. PREREQUISITES: Fi- Attention is devoted to current generally accepted nancial and Managerial Accounting, Mi- accounting principles, to controversial reporting croeconomics or Managerial Economics, and a problems, and to prospective new developments. survey of operations research/system analysis. PREREQUISITE: MN 3161.

3172 (4-0). MN PUBLIC POLICY PROCESSES MN 3371 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACT A presentation of the processes by which resources ADMINISTRATION (4-0). Study of the elements are allocated to the production of goods in the De- of the procurement process. Coverage includes the fense sector. Defense budget preparation, Presi- determination of requirements, techniques used in dential policy-making and management, and Con- purchasing, the military-industrial complex and its gressional budget action are considered and placed role in providing material and service, the man- within the context of the theory of public goods. agement of on-going programs, and the environ- PREREQUISITES: 3140, 3161, MN MN MN ment in which the acquisition takes place. Military 3105. also be offered as 3172. May NS procurement regulations are analyzed to determine their impact on efficient military logistics systems. MN 3183 MANAGEMENT INFORMATION PREREQUISITES: MN 3140 or MN 3141. SYSTEMS (4-0). Study of what an information system is, how the computer and other resources MN 3372 MATERIAL LOGISTICS (4-0). The fit into the system, and management consid- quantitative analysis of material logistics systems

erations involved in computer-based and other .in- and supply management problems. Elements of formation systems. Study of basic computer and study include inventory theory, data reporting, MIS concepts as required, including computer and forecasting, order processing, and system-wide data structure, input/output systems, file organiza- design problems. PREREQUISITE: PS 321 1 (con- tion, programming and data-base management. currently). PREREQUISITE: CS 2103 (concurrently). MN 3373 TRANSPORTATION MANAGEMENT (4-0). Provides a knowledge of problems and prac- MN 3184 MANAGEMENT INFORMATION tices encountered in the management of transporta-

88 ADMINISTRATIVE SCIENCES

tion systems. Areas covered include the study of 3105 or graduate standing in a technical cur- present and future trends in military and commer- riculum with consent of Instructor.

cial transportation systems. PREREQUISITES:

MN 3140 or MN 3141. MN 3811 - 3812 COMMUNICATION IN OR- GANIZATIONS (4-0). A survey of current man- MN 3374 PRODUCTION MANAGEMENT (4-0). agement strategies to more effectively employ This course examines the production process. Em- human resources in achieving mission ac-

phasis is distributed among the technical, manage- complishment. The organizational development

rial, and defense aspects of production. Topic approach to communication will be used to help coverage ranges from production planning through students expand their communication skills. MN production control. PREREQUISITES: MN 3105 3811 intended for non-Management stu- and PS 3211 and OS 3212. dents; MN 3812 intended for Management Students. Graded on Pass/Fail basis only. MN 3376 SELECTED TOPICS IN MATERIAL LOGISTICS (2-0 to 5-0). Presentation of a wide MN 3950 WORKSHOP IN MANAGEMENT (2-0 selection of topics from the current literature. May to 5-0). This course may be repeated for credit if be repeated for credit if the content changes. PRE- course content changes. PREREQUISITE: De- REQUISITE: Departmental approval. partmental approval. Graded on Pass/Fail basis only. MN 3645 INVESTIGATIVE METHODS OF

ECONOMICS I (4-0). Development and applica- MN 3960 READINGS IN MANAGEMENT (2-0 tions of econometric models of particular interest to 5-0). This course may be repeated for credit if to public sector managers. Topics include demand course content changes. PREREQUISITE: De- forecasting, production function estimates and cost partmental approval. Graded on Pass/Fail basis' estimating. PREREQUISITES: MN 3140 or MN only. 3141, and OS 3212 (concurrently). MN 3970 SEMINAR IN MANAGEMENT (2-0 to MN 3650 HEALTH ECONOMICS (4-0). An 5-0). Content of course varies. Students will be overview and analysis of the underlying elements allowed credit for taking this course more than one of the continuing problems in the military and civi- time. PREREQUISITE: Departmental approval. lian health care delivery sectors. Elements covered Graded on Pass/Fail basis only.

are: organizational structure and change in the mode of delivery of health care; Supply, Demand Graduate Courses and Output and Quality Measurement of health services; the impact of health care legislation; the MN 4105 MANAGEMENT POLICY (4-0). Study interrelations of the military and civilian sectors. and appraisal of a variety of policies requiring the PREREQUISITES: Microeconomics, e.g., MN analysis of problems and the formulation of deci- 3140, AS 3610 or equivalent. sion in both business and governmental enter- prises. Use of case material, management games, MN 3760 MANPOWER ECONOMICS (4-0). This and other devices as exercises in decision making course contains both theoretical and empirical is- and the executive action under conditions of uncer- sues in manpower economics. The theoretical tainty and change. PREREQUISITE: Open only to

development emphasizes individual employment, students in their final quarter of a Management job searching, mobility and career decisions. Em- Masters Program. pirical work presented will include studies on the all-volunteer force, hazardous duty compensation MN 4111 HUMAN RESOURCES SEMINAR and reenlistment bonuses. PREREQUISITES: MN (4-0). A combination of readings and individual 3140 or 3141, or AS 3609. student research reports in the area of human re- source goals. Emphasis on empirical analysis. MN 3801 SEMINAR IN TECHNOLOGY PREREQUISITE: Departmental approval. TRANSFER (4-0). The study of dissemination and utilization of technology and associated problems MN 4112 PERSONNEL SELECTION AND with emphasis on communications, sociology, and CLASSIFICATION (4-0). Analysis of human per- organizational factors. PREREQUISITE: MN formance within organizations. This course con-

89 . .

ADMINISTRATIVE SCIENCES

siders the methods available for measuring and MN 4123 ORGANIZATION DEVELOPMENT II predicting the performances of the members of or- (3-0). A study of the field of organization devel-

ganizations. Methods of measuring differences be- opment. The course provides knowledge and skills tween people via employment interviewing, test- of organization development and consultative ing, and life-history data are discussed. Tech- skills to improve organizational effectiveness. The niques for studying and recording job behavior are course covers major theories of organization also considered. In addition, the various strategies growth and development and a variety of OD for personnel decisions are discussed in terms of strategies designed to improve organizational func- validation, and selection and placement models. tions. Students will have opportunities to demon-

PREREQUISITES: MN 31 1 1 or MN 3101. strate and refine their individual skills in small group settings. PREREQUISITE: MN 3114. MN 4113 PERSONNEL TRAINING AND DEVELOPMENT (4-0). Determination of skills, MN 4126 SELECTED TOPICS IN THE BEHAV- knowledges and attitudes in which people should IORAL SCIENCES (2-0 to 5-0). Presentation of a be trained. Analysis of who should be trained and wide selection of topics from the current literature.

the methods currently available for training are May be repeated for credit if the content changes. discussed. Techniques available for evaluating the PREREQUISITE: Departmental approval. efficiency of training are also considered. PRE-

REQUISITES: MN 3 1 1 1 or MN 3 10 1 MN 4127 SELECTED TOPICS IN ORGANIZA- TION AND MANAGEMENT (2-0 to 5-0). Presen- MN 4114 PERSONNEL PERFORMANCE tation of a wide selection of topics from the current EVALUATION (4-0). Current methods of apprais- literature. May be repeated for credit if the content ing the work performance of individuals in differ- changes. PREREQUISITE: Department approval. ent types of work are reviewed. Problems as- sociated with each method are analyzed. Perform- MN 4133 ECONOMICS OF COMPUTERS (4-0).

ance evaluation is examined as a system interfac- Analytical tools of microeconomics and statistics ing with selection, classification, training, ad- applied to decision making in computer manage- vancement, and retention. PREREQUISITES: MN ment. Economics issues and legal constraints re- 3111 or MN 3101. lated to computer hardware and software systems are discussed. PREREQUISITES: MN 3143, PS

MN 4115 PERSONNEL MOTIVATION (4-0). A 3000 or PS 301 1 and CS 2103 or CT 2000. brief summary of the traditional theories of motiva-

tion is given. Several motivation to work theories MN 4142 INTERNATIONAL TRADE AND are discussed along with the research concerning DEVELOPMENT POLICY (4-0). Leading issues these theories. Current research on the roles of in trade and development policy. Consideration of

compensation in personnel motivation is consid- the implication of alternative economic systems on ered. PREREQUISITE: MN 3110. national policies. PREREQUISITE: MN 3142.

MN 4116 EDUCATION AND TRAINING (4-0). MN 4145 SYSTEMS ANALYSIS (4-0). This This course concentrates on adult learning theory, course will concentrate on the analysis of large curriculum design and instructional technology to scale defense resource allocation problems, using help students teach, develop and supervise cur- cost-effectiveness models. Topics include: dis-

riculum and instruction. The course is especially counting, constrained optimization, estimation oriented to the needs of the Human Resource Man- problems, and efficiency over time. Systems agement community. PREREQUISITE: MN 3105. analysis case studies will be emphasized. PRE- REQUISITES: MN3172. MN 4121 ORGANIZATIONAL THEORY (4-0). This course provides an indepth theoretical per- MN 4147 INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS (4-0).

spective on complex organizations. It provides the Development of the institutions and techniques for student with conceptual tools for understanding the resolving conflict over wages and conditions of external environment, forms and structures, goals, work. Theories of bargaining and arbitration.

systemic procedures and person-group- PREREQUISITE: MN 3 101 or MN 3 1 1 1 organizational interfaces. PREREQUISITE: MN 3105. MN 4151 INTERNAL CONTROL AND AUDIT-

90 ADMINISTRATIVE SCIENCES

ING (4-0). Study of the objectives and procedures various definitions of cost and alternative ways of of internal control in government and industry. measuring cost. Study of cost accounting systems, Examination of the independent audit function, in- methods of allocating costs to cost objects, and the cluding auditing standards and reports. Study of costing of activities, products, and projects. Con- internal auditing, with emphasis on operational sideration of the objectives and the substance of audits. Consideration of the principal Federal audit Cost Accounting Standards for negotiated defense organizations. Specialized topics including sam- procurement contracts. PREREQUISITE: MN pling techniques for auditing, audits of computer- 3161, PS 3211. based systems, and audit problems associated with selected assets and operations. PREREQUISITES: MN 4165 SELECTED TOPICS IN ACCOUNT-

, 1 , or their equiva- MN 3 16 1 , MN 3 183 and PS 32 1 ING AND FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT (2-0 to lents. 5-0). Presentation of a wide selection of topics from the current literature. This course may be MN 4152 DECISION MAKING FOR FINAN- repeated for credit if course content changes. CIAL MANAGEMENT (4-0). The management of PREREQUISITE: A background of advanced the finance function in industry, with particular work in accounting and financial management and attention to defense contractors. Specific topics in- Departmental approval. clude cash and working capital management, long-term financing, determination of optimal cap- MN 4172 MARKETING STRATEGY (4-0). Re- ital structure, and valuation of a going concern. search and study of areas of marketing that are PREREQUISITES: MN 3161 and MN 3140 or applicable to management strategy. Typical areas equivalent. to be considered are: sensitivity to the environ- ment; value of analytical tools; behavioral consid- MN 4153 SEMINAR IN ACCOUNTING AND erations; creativity and innovative approaches; CONTROL (4-0). Research and discussion of cur- marketing research as a tool; influence of Federal rent developments and controversies in accounting statutes. PREREQUISITES: PS 3211. and financial controls for government and indus- try. Students will be expected to do individual or MN 4181 APPLICATIONS OF MANAGEMENT small-group studies and to make reports thereon. INFORMATION SYSTEMS (4-0). Advanced

PREREQUISITES: MN 3161 and permission of study of management information as it relates to Instructor. various organizational systems. Students will study actual industrial and/or military organiza- MN 4154 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT IN THE tions in the context of management information NAVY (4-0). Review of financial management and systems. The issues of design, implementation, fund control procedures in DOD and the Navy. and operation of a management information sys- Includes study of PPBS, Comptrollership, Budget tem will be considered through the use of case Formulation and Execution, Headquarters and studies of industrial and military organizations.

Field Accounting Systems, and Types of Navy This course is primarily for management students. Funds. Students will be expected to do individual PREREQUISITES: MN 3183. or small-group studies and to make reports thereon. PREREQUISITES: MN 3161 and MN MN 4185 SELECTED TOPICS IN INFORMA- 3172. TION SYSTEMS (2-0 to 5-0). Presentation of a wide selection of topics from the current literature. MN 4161 FINANCIAL CONTROL SYSTEMS This course may be repeated for credit if course (4-0). Study of the structure and process of finan- content changes. PREREQUISITES: A back- cial control in governmental organizations in gen- ground of advanced work in information systems eral and DOD in particular. Specific topics include and Departmental approval. the basic concepts of management control, the measurement of inputs and outputs, pricing public MN 4191 DECISION ANALYSIS (4-0). Discus- services, programming, budgeting, accounting, sion of the major topics of decision analysis, in- and performance analysis. PREREQUISITES: MN cluding decision theory, single- and multi-attribute 3105 and MN 3161. utility theory, value of information, and modelling techniques. The course includes exposure to and MN 4162 COST ACCOUNTING (4-0). Review of use of computer models to structure and solve

91 ADMINISTRATIVE SCIENCES

problems. PREREQUISITE: OS 3212. tion. Techniques to analyze the effects and desira- bility of particular government expenditures are MN 4192 WORKSHOP IN MANAGEMENT covered and include the theory of second best, SCIENCE (2-0 to 5-0). This course may be re- cost-benefit analysis, consumer surplus, and social peated for credit if the content changes. PRE- discounting. PREREQUISITES: MN 3140 and REQUISITE: Departmental approval. MN 3170 or 3172 or AS 3611.

MN 4193 SELECTED TOPICS IN MANAGE- MN 4941 MICROECONOMIC THEORY AND MENT SCIENCE (2-0 to 5-0). Presentation of a POLICY (4-0). Advanced study of equilibrium and wide selection of topics from the current literature. disequilibrium microeconomic systems. Topics in- May be repeated for credit if the content changes. clude consumer choice, producer choice, market PREREQUISITE: Departmental approval. structure, risk, imperfect competition and regula- tion, and economic planning models. Policy issues MN 4225 LABOR LAW (4-0). Labor Law as it and their implication for national action. PRE- affects management, labor and the public with REQUISITE: MN 3140 or MN 3141 and De- special emphasis on legal problems confronting partmental approval. military personnel in managerial situations. PRE- REQUISITE: MN 3101. MN 4942 THE STRUCTURE, CONDUCT AND PERFORMANCE OF THE DEFENSE INDUS- MN 4371 PROCUREMENT POLICY (4-0). Case TRIES (4-0). A study of selected defense indus- study appraisals of business and government pro- tries structure (e.g., seller concentration, product curement policies. Emphasis is on procurement differentiation, barriers to entry, demand for prod- decision making and policy formulation through ucts, buyer concentration), conduct (e.g., pricing the case analysis method. PREREQUISITE: MN policy, product characteristics policy, policies to- 3371. ward rivals, policies toward customers), and per- formance (e.g., efficiency, progress, employ- MN 4373 TRANSPORTATION POLICY (4-0). ment). The government as consumer and reg- Advanced study in the management of transporta- ulator. Typical industries covered are aerospace, tion systems. Emphasis on coordinated transporta- computers, shipbuilding and telecommunications. tion management in large-scale systems and its PREREQUISITES: Microeconomics (MN 3140 or implication for DOD. PREREQUISITE: MN MN 3141 or MN 3143, or AS 3609). 3373. MN 4945 SELECTED TOPICS IN ECONOMICS MN 4376 SEMINAR IN MATERIAL LOGISTICS (2-0 to 5-0). Presentation of a wide selection of (4-0). Presentation of a wide selection of topics topics from the current literature. This course may from the current literature. This course may be be repeated for credit if course content changes.

repeated for credit if the content changes. PRE- PREREQUISITE: A background of advanced REQUISITE: Departmental approval. work in economics and Departmental approval.

MN 4650 THE MILITARY HEALTH CARE DE- MN 4950 WORKSHOP IN MANAGEMENT (2-0 LIVERY SYSTEM (4-0). This course is designed to 5-0). This course may be -epeated for credit if to acquaint the student with the structure and oper- course content changes. PREREQUISITE: De- ation of the Department of Defense's system for partmental approval. Graded on Pass/Fail basis providing health care to those eligible under cur- only.

rent regulations; to identify current problem areas, and through application of systems analysis and MN 4960 READINGS IN MANAGEMENT (2-0 management techniques to address the possible so- to 5-0). This course may be repeated for credit if lutions to these problems in a course project. course content changes. PREREQUISITES: De- PREREQUISITE: MN 3650. partmental approval. Graded on Pass/Fail basis only. MN 4920 PUBLIC EXPENDITURE ANALYSIS (4-0). A presentation of basic concepts such as MN 4970 SEMINAR IN MANAGEMENT (2-0 to public goods, joint production and externalities 5-0). Content of course varies. Students will be which necessitate governmental market interven- allowed credit for taking this course more than one

92 ADMINISTRATIVE SCIENCES

time. PREREQUISITE: Departmental approval. SM 3305 CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION (4-0). Graded on Pass/Fail basis only. This course stresses the management skills and techniques necessary for the successful administra- SYSTEMS ACQUISITION MANAGEMENT tion of Government prime contracts and subcon- tracts. Topics include defense procurement con- SM 0001 SEMINAR FOR SYSTEMS ACQUISI- tract administration, managing contract progress, TION MANAGEMENT STUDENTS (0-2). Guest change control, cost control, and contract termina- Lecturers. Thesis and research presentations. tion. PREREQUISITE: SM 3304. PREREQUISITE: None. SM 3306 SYSTEMS EFFECTIVENESS CON- SM 0810 THESIS RESEARCH FOR SYSTEMS CEPTS AND METHODS (4-0). An introduction ACQUISITION MANAGEMENT STUDENTS to system reliability, maintainability, and effec- (0-0). Every student conducting thesis research tiveness analysis. Failure (repair) rates and mean will enroll in this course. times to failure (repair). Models for aging and completion. Block diagrams and fault trees. Life Upper Division or Graduate Courses testing, Availability, interval reliability, and the synthesis of reliability, maintainability, and effec- SM 3301 INTRODUCTION TO SYSTEMS AC- tiveness considerations. PREREQUISITES: OS QUISITION (4-0). This course provides students 3202, OS 3203 (concurrently). with an overview of the Systems Acquisition pro- cess, its underlying philosophies and concepts, its Graduate Courses application in the Department of Defense and the Navy, and establishes the foundations for other SM 4302 PUBLIC EXPENDITURE, POLICY courses in the curriculum. Topics covered include AND ANALYSIS (4-0). The process of national the evolution of systems acquisition management, decision-making particularly as reflected in the de- the systems approach, the system life cycle and fense budgeting process. Models of budget deci- defense system acquisition cycle, user-producer sion making, including decentralization. Applica- acquisition management disciplines and activities. tion of social choice concepts. Applications from PREREQUISITE: Enrollment in the Systems Ac- the defense budgeting process. PREREQUISITES: quisition Management curriculum. MN3161, MN4145.

SM 3302 FUNDAMENTALS OF PROJECT SM 4304 SEMINAR IN SYSTEMS ACQUISI- MANAGEMENT (4-0). Study of the principles of TION (4-0). Presentation of a wide selection of management as a body of knowledge related to topics from current literature and research in sys- practice. Discusses the functions of management tems acquisition. PREREQUISITES: SM 3305, planning, organizing, staffing, directing, and con- SM 4305 or Department approval. Graded on trolling — as they apply within industry and gov- Pass/Fail basis only. ernment. Specific application of these principles and functions to project management are investi- SM 4305-4306 SYSTEMS ENGINEERING gated. PREREQUISITES: MN 2106 and SM 3301. MANAGEMENT III (4-0). The objective of these

courses is to provide the students with the opportu- SM 3304 PROCUREMENT PLANNING AND nity to study real-world Navy project management

CONTRACT NEGOTIATION (4-0). Study of the decision-making. It covers technical management procurement planning and negotiation phases of as applied to the systems acquisition process and the procurement cycle, including the determination stresses systems engineering disciplines and their of need, basic contract law, methods of procure- life cycle integration with emphasis on perform- ment, fundamentals of the Armed Services Pro- ance, cost, and schedule trade-offs. The course is curement Regulations and current procurement conducted by means of lectures and readings on management techniques. Topics include procure- systems engineering and the systems engineering ment organizations, procurement by formal adver- disciplines, in-depth study of life-cycle manage- tising and negotiation, source selection, pricing, ment of selected Navy projects by teams of stu- types of contracts, structuring incentives, and the dents, and participation in the Defense Manage- terms and conditions of contracts. PREREQUI- ment Simulation(DMS) exercise. PREREQUI- SITE: SM 3301. SITES: SM 3304, SM 3306.

93 ,

AERONAUTICS

DEPARTMENT OF AERONAUTICS

RICHARD WILLIAM BELL, Professor (1965); B.E.S. in M.E., Brigham of Aeronautics; Chairman (1951)*; Young Univ. 1960; M.S. 1962; A.B., Oberlin College, 1939; Ae.E., Ph.D., California Institute of California Institute of Technology, Technology, 1966. 1941; Ph.D., 1958. JAMES AVERY MILLER, Associate ROBERT EDWIN BALL, Associate Pro- Professor of Aeronautics (1963); B.S. fessor of Aeronautics (1967); B.S. in in M.E., Stanford Univ., 1955; M.S. C.E., Northwestern Univ., 1958; in M.E., 1957; Ph.D., Illinois Institute M.S., 1959; Ph.D., 1962. of Technology, 1963.

MILTON HAROLD BANK, II, Assistant DAVID WILLIS NETZER, Associate

Professor of Aeronautics 1 97 ; B . S Professor of Aeronautics, ( 1 ) . (1968); Naval Academy, 1957; B.S.A.E., B.S.M.E., Virginia Polytechnic Insti- Naval Postgraduate School, 1964; tute, 1960; M.S.M.E., Purdue Univ. Engr., Stanford, 1967; M.S., Georgia 1962; Ph.D., 1968. Institute of Technology, 1970; Ph.D., MAX FRANZ PLATZER, Professor of 1971. Aeronautics (1970); Dipl Ing., Tech. OSCAR BIBLARZ, Associate Professor Univ. of Vienna, Austria, 1957; Dr. of Aeronautics (1968); B.S., Univ. of Techn. Sci., 1964. California at Los Angeles, 1959; M.S. LOUIS VINCENT SCHMIDT, Professor 1963; Ph.D., Stanford Univ., 1968. of Aeronautics, (1964); B.S., Califor- DAVID WHITE CASWELL, CDR, U.S. nia Institute of Technology, 1946; Navy; Assistant Professor of Aeronau- M.S., 1948; Ae.E., 1950; Ph.D., tics (1974); B.S., Naval Academy, 1963. 1955; M.S. in A.E., Naval Post- RAYMOND PARMOUS SHREEVE, graduate School, M.S. in I.R., 1969; Associate Professor of Aeronautics George Washington Univ., 1972. (1971); B.Sc, Imperial College, Lon- DANIEL JOSEPH COLLINS, Professor don, 1958; M.S.E., Princeton Univ. of Aeronautics (1967); B.A., Lehigh 1961; Ph.D., Univ. of Washington, Univ., 1954; M.S. in M.E., California 1970. Institute of Technology, Ph.D., 1955; ROBERT DIEFENDORF ZUCKER, As- 1961. sociate Professor of Aeronautics THEODORE HENRY GAWAIN, Pro- (1965); B.S. in M.E., Massachusetts fessor of Aeronautics (1951); B.S., Institute of Technology, 1946; Univ. of Pennsylvania, 1940; D.Sc, M.M.E., Univ. of Louisville, 1958; Massachusetts Institute of Technol- Ph.D., Univ. of Arizona, 1966. ogy, 1944. CHARLES HORACE KAHR, JR., Pro- EMERITUS FACULTY fessor of Aeronautics (1947); B.S., Univ. of Michigan, 1944; M.S., 1945. WENDELL MAROIS COATES, Distin- DONALD MERRILL LAYTON, As- guished Professor Emeritus (1931); sociate Professor of Aeronautics A.B., Williams College, 1919; M.S., Univ. of (1968); B.S., Naval Academy, 1945; Michigan, 1923; D.Sc, B.S.A.E., Naval Postgraduate School, 1929. 1953; M.S. in A.E., Princeton Univ., ULRICH HAUPT, Associate Professor 1954; M.S., Naval Postgraduate Emeritus (1954); Dipl. Ing., Institute School, 1968. of Technology, Darmstadt, 1934. GERALD HERBERT LINDSEY, As- GEORGE JUDSON HIGGINS, Professor sociate Professor of Aeronautics Emeritus (1942); B.S., in Eng.

94 AERONAUTICS

(Ae.E.), Univ. of Michigan, 1923; degree program leading to the Master of Ae.E., 1934. Science in Aeronautical Engineering. However, students who have recently HENRY LEBRECHT KOHLER, Profes- earned a degree with major in Aeronau- sor Emeritus (1943); B.S., in M.E., tics may apply for admission directly to Univ. of Illinois, 1929; M.$. inM.E., the graduate program. Yale Univ., 1930; M.E., 1931. The Master of Science degree requires a minimum of 36 credit hours of graduate *Jhe year of joining the Postgraduate School courses, of which at least 20 credit hours Faculty is indicated in parentheses. shall be at the 4000 level. It also requires that not less than 32 credit hours shall be DEPARTMENTAL REQUIREMENTS in the disciplines of engineering, physical FOR DEGREES IN science or mathematics, and that this shall AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING include a minimum of 20 hours of courses in the Department of Aeronautics and a The following are academic require- minimum of 8 hours in other depart- ments for the award of degrees as deter- ments. mined by the Aeronautics Department. In An acceptable thesis is required for the addition the general minimum require- degree unless waived by the Chairman, ments as determined by the Academic Department of Aeronautics, in which case Council must also be satisfied. 10 quarter hours of 4000 level courses in The entrance requirement for study in the disciplines of engineering, physical the Aeronautics Department generally is a science, or mathematics will be required baccalaureate in engineering earned with in addition to those specified above, in- above average academic performance. creasing the total requirement to 46 quar- This requirement can sometimes be ter hours of graduate level credits. waived for students who have shown dis- tinctly superior ability in backgrounds AERONAUTICAL ENGINEER other than engineering but who have had adequate coverage in the basic physical Upon completing the preparatory and mathematical sciences. All entrants courses, students may be selected on the must obtain the approval of the Chair- basis of academic performance for the man, Department of Aeronautics. program leading to the degree Aeronauti- Students who have majored in cal Engineer. Selection to this degree Aeronautics, or who have experienced a program shall be limited to those students significant lapse in continuity with previ- who, in the opinion of the faculty, have ous academic work, initially will take the potential to conduct the required re- preparatory courses in aeronautical en- search. The degree Aeronautical Engineer gineering and mathematics at the upper requires a minimum of 72 credit hours of division level, extending through the first graduate courses, of which at least 48 two to three academic quarters and con- credit hours shall be at the 4000 level. It stituting a portion of the coursework for also requires that not less than 64 credit degrees in Aeronautics. Final approval of hours shall be in the disciplines of en- programs leading to degrees in Aeronaut- gineering, physical science or mathema- ical Engineering must be obtained from tics, and that this shall include a the Chairman, Department of Aeronau- minimum of 36 hours of courses in the tics. Department of Aeronautics and a minimum of 12 hours in other depart- MASTER OF SCIENCE ments. An acceptable thesis is required IN AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING for the degree. Students admitted to work for the de- Upon completing the preparatory gree Aeronautical Engineer may be satis- courses, students may be selected on the fying requirements for the Master of Sci- basis of academic performance for the ence degree concurrently. The Master of

95 AERONAUTICS

Science in Aeronautical Engineering may AERONAUTICAL LABORATORIES be conferred at the time of completion of the requirements for that degree. Five major laboratory divisions facili- tate instructional and research programs in subsonic aerodynamics, structural test, DOCTORATE rocket propulsion, turbomachinery, and gasdynamics. The Department of Aeronautics offers The subsonic aerodynamics laboratory programs leading to the doctorate in the consists of two low-speed, continuous fields of gasdynamics, flight structures, flow wind tunnels and a large continuous flight dynamics, propulsion and aero- flow visualization tunnel. Standard tech- space physics. niques are used in the 32 x 45 inch and 42 Entrance into the doctorate program x 60 inch wind tunnels to study basic fluid may be requested by officers currently en- flow about bodies, stability and control of rolled who have sufficiently high stand- flight vehicles, and unsteady flows about ing. The Department of Aeronautics also bluff bodies and lifting surfaces. Helium accepts officer students selected in the bubble filaments are used in the 5 x 5 x 12 Navy-wide Doctoral Study Program, and foot test section of the three-dimensional civilian students selected from employees flow visualization tunnel to define flow of the United States federal government. fields of interest, e.g. about helicopter All applicants who are not already en- blades, and jet flap flow. rolled as students in the Department of The structural test laboratory contains Aeronautics shall submit transcripts of testing machines for static and dynamic their previous academic and professional tests of materials and structures, and an records and letters of recommendation to electro-hydraulic closed-loop machine for the Department Chairman. The Chair- fatigue testing. Aircraft components as man, with the advice of other department large as complete aircraft wings are ac- members, shall decide whether to admit commodated on a special loading floor, the applicant to the Doctoral Program. where static and vibration tests are con- Every applicant who is accepted for the ducted. A well-equipped dynamics labo- Doctoral Program will initially be en- ratory contains shaker tables, analog rolled in the AeE Program under a special computers, and associated instrumenta- option which satisfies the broad de- tion. An adjacent strain gage and photo- partmental requirements for the En- elastic laboratory provides support to test gineer's degree and which includes re- programs and instruction in structural search work. As soon as feasible, the stu- testing techniques. dent must find a faculty adviser to super- The rocket laboratory consists of an in- vise his research and help him initially in strumented control room, a propellant the formulation of his plans for advanced chemistry laboratory, a high pressure air study. As early as practicable thereafter, a facility, and three test cells. The test cells Doctoral Committee shall be appointed to are equipped for investigating solid, liq- oversee that student's individual Doctoral uid, gaseous, and hybrid rocket combus- Program as provided in the school-wide tion, and for studies of the internal ballis- requirements for the Doctor's degree. tics of small caliber cannon. A solid fuel The degree requirements are as out- ramjet test facility is also in operation. lined under the general school require- The advanced facilities of the tur- ments for the Doctor's degree. bomachinery laboratories are distributed In the event that a student is unable in three buildings, one of which provides finally to satisfy the above requirements low speed tests with rectilinear cascades for the doctorate for any reason but has in of large dimensions and an axial-flow the course of his doctoral studies actually three-stage compressor. A second build- completed all of the requirements for the ing houses a centrifugal compressor test degree of Aeronautical Engineer, he shall rig, instrumented for conventional per- be awarded the latter degree. formance measurements and for special

96 AERONAUTICS investigation of three-dimensional flows not covered in formal courses. Topics cover a wide about both stationary and rotating vanes. spectrum of subjects ranging from reports of cur- The third building is used for high speed rent research to survey treatments of fields of sci- test of different types of turbomachines. entific and engineering interest. Digital data acquisition and control equipment for steady-state and for real- AE 0020 AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING time measurements at up to 100 kHz are PROGRAM PLANNING (0-1). Oral presentations available, with computer reduction and by the Aeronautics Academic Associate and fac- presentation on-line. Adjacent to this ulty members involved in research with Aeronau- building is a hotspin test unit, where disks tics students on program planning, thesis require- and propellers can be rotated at speeds up ments and research specialty areas. The course is to 50,000 rpm while heated to tempera- to be given to each input during second quarter on tures of 1800°F. board. The gas dynamics laboratory includes a 4x4 inch blowdown supersonic wind AE 0810 THESIS RESEARCH (0-0). Every stu- tunnel, a cold-driven, three-inch double- dent conducting thesis research will enroll in this diaphram shock tube, and a 2 x 2 x 18 course. foot open-circuit oscillating flow wind tunnel. Laser interferometers, schlieren Upper Division Courses systems, and hotwire anemometers are used for flow observations. Ruby, AE 2001 PARTICLE DYNAMICS (1-0). Princi- He-Ne, argon, and CO2 lasers are avail- ples of dynamics; absolute motion of particles; ref- able; extensive use is made of laser holog- erence frames; relative motion of particles. raphy. An electrohydrodynamic research facility permits studies of electric power AE 2002 EQUATIONS OF MOTION, SYSTEMS generation and turbulence. A coaxial OF PARTICLES (1-0). Equations of motion; plasma accelerator has recently been work-energy and impulse momentum; moving ref- completed. erence frames; particle systems. PREREQUISITE: In addition to the major laboratory AE2001. facilities, there are fully instrumented bal- listic ranges for studies of topics such as AE 2003 RIGID BODIES (1-0). Rigid body planar aircraft vulnerability, a composite materi- kinematics, moments of inertia; equations of mo- als fabrication laboratory, and a number tion; work energy and impulse-momentum. PRE- of flight simulators used with hybrid REQUISITE: AE 2002. computers and graphic displays in study- ing aircraft control problems and pilot/ AE 2004 SPACE KINEMATICS AND VIBRAT- control system interactions. The Depart- ING SYSTEMS (1-0). Rigid body space kinema- ment also operates a three-ton surface ef- tics; vibrating systems; free and forced response. fect ship testcraft of the captured air bub- PREREQUISITE: AE 2003. ble type. AE 2101 STATICS AND STRUCTURAL FUN- GENERAL PREREQUISITE DAMENTALS (1-0). Fundamental laws of me- REQUIREMENTS chanics (statics), vector arithmetic; analysis of reactions, statically determinate trusses, internal Unless otherwise stated a preparatory set of forces and moments, using method of sections and aeronautics minicourses and mathematics courses, method of joints; schematic, free body, and inter- or equivalent preparation to be approved by the nal force and moment diagrams, including sign

Chairman, Department of Aeronautics, is prereq- conventions. uisite to all other aeronautics courses. AE 2102-2103 STRESS AND STRAIN III (1-0). AERONAUTICS The first course introduces stress and strain con- cepts; equilibrium equations, symmetry of stress AE 0010 AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING tensor; strain-displacement relations; engineering SEMINAR (0-1). Oral presentations of material definitions and usages; bolted joints. The second

97 AERONAUTICS

course covers transformation of stress and strain; AE 2303 THIN AIRFOILS IN PLANE FLOW Mohr's circles; Hooke's law, Young's modulus, (1-0). Vortex sheet model of thin airfoil Basic and

Poisson's ratio; stress concentrations, elementary additional lift. Fourier solution. Slope of lift curve. theories of failure; centroids and moments of iner- Ideal angle of attack. Aerodynamic center. Flat tia. plate, circular arc, arbitrary and flapped airfoils.

AE 2104 BENDING AND SHEAR IN BEAMS AE 2304 BASIC AERODYNAMICS OF WINGS (1-0). Elementary formulae for bending and shear (1-0). Wing vortex system. Downwash. Lifting line stresses; moment - curvature relations, second and model. Basic equation. Basic and additional lift. fourth-order beam equations; solutions by direct Fourier solution. Induced drag. Lift curve slope. integration, superposition; slope and deflection Aerodynamic center. Spanwise loading for arbitrary diagrams, semi-graphical solutions; statically inde- planform and twist distribution. The horseshoe vor- terminate cases. tex. Interference and ground effects.

AE 2105 TORSION AND BUCKLING (1-0). Tor- AE 2305-2306 AIRCRAFT PERFORMANCE III sional stress and deflection on prismatic bars of (1-0). The first course covers standard atmospheres circular cross-sections, handbook solutions for tor- and altimeter; defined airspeeds and the airspeed in- sion on non-circular cross-sections. Beam-column dicator. Machmeter; drag polar and flight polar; and Euler column equations, eigenvalue solutions thrust and power required, climbing performance, for buckling loads and modes; effect of boundary ceilings; range and endurance at constant altitude. conditions; real, imperfect columns. The second course covers cruise climb characteris-

tics for range and endurance; energy management; AE 2106 ENERGY THEOREMS IN STRUC- turns, pull-ups. V-n diagram; take-off and landing. TURAL ANALYSIS (1-0). Fundamental quan- PREREQUISITE: AE 2301. tities defined; Castigliano's theorem; Method of Virtual Work; solution of statically indeterminate AE 2307 PRINCIPLES OF STATIC STABILITY problems using Castigliano and Virtual Work. AND CONTROL (1-0). Neutral and maneuver points; angle of attack and speed stability; control AE 2107 THIN- WALLED STRUCTURES (1-0). motions and forces to trim in straight and curved Hydrodynamic analogy to shear flow; Bredt's for- flight paths; trim tabs; CG limits. Principles are ex- mulae relating torsion and deflection to shear flow, plained by graphical analysis of wind tunnel data, shear center, shear flow due to torsion and bending independent of AE 2310. PREREQUISITE: AE of thin walled beams; effects of taper and cutouts; 2301. statically indeterminate cases; analysis of fuselage rings and stringers. AE 2308 DYNAMIC STABILITY — THE CLAS- SICAL MODES (1-0). Phugoid and short period AE 2301 AERODYNAMIC FUNDAMENTALS longitudinal modes; third oscillatory mode and

(1-0). Dimensional analysis, Aerodynamic coeffi- pitching divergence; rolling convergence, dutch roll cients, Reynolds and Mach numbers. Gradient, di- and spiral lateral modes; root locus diagrams, effects vergence, curl and acceleration; physical signifi- of CmO; CnijLi; stability boundaries. An indepen- cance and evaluation in common coordinate sys- dent course presenting solutions to equations of mo- tems. Scalar and vector potentials. Stream func- tion derived in AE 2311. PREREQUISITE: AE tion. Continuity equation. Gauss' and Stoke's 2307. theorems. Vorticity and circulation, Helmholtz laws. AE 2309 THE STABILITY DERIVATIVES (1-0). Definition of the significant aerodynamic deriva- AE 2302 INCOMPRESSIBLE FLOW (1-0). -Pres- tives through which disturbances affect aircraft mo- sure, gravity and viscous forces. Equation of mo- tions; discussion of the relative influence and roles tion. Energy distribution, Bernoulli's equation. of these derivatives in the classical dynamic modes. Steady inviscid flows of uniform energy. Trailing PREREQUISITE: AE 2308. vorticity. Irrotational motions, Biot Savart law. Momentum theorem. Elementary f^ne flows: AE 2310 EQUATIONS OF STATIC STABILITY souces, sinks, doublets. Flow about a circular cylin- AND CONTROL (1-0). Wing-body-tail parametric der with circulation. Kutta-Joukowski law. representations; effects of wing downwash; tail vol-

98 AERONAUTICS

ume; wing movement. Algebraic equations for pre- AE 2407 COMPRESSIBLE DUCT FLOW (1-0). liminary design, exhibiting analytically the fea- Constant area adiabatic flow with friction (Fanno); tures explained graphically in AE 2307. PRE- constant area frictionless flow with heat transfer REQUISITE: AE2301. (Rayleigh). PREREQUISITE: AE 2406.

AE 2311 LINEARIZED EQUATIONS OF AE 2408 REACTION PROPULSION SYSTEMS DYNAMIC STABILITY (1-0). Derivation of equa- (1-0). Types of propulsion engines and their cy- tions used in AE 2308; transformation to rotating cles; calculation of net thrust; power and efficiency reference frame, Euler angles of aircraft orientation, parameters; supersonic diffuser problems. PRE- stability axes and reference steady state, small dis- REQUISITE: AE 2407. turbance approximation, linear air reactions, non- dimensional system of parameters. PREREQUI- AE 2409 MULTI-DIMENSIONAL FLOW (1-0). SITE: AE2301. General formulation of continuity, energy, and momentum equations for 3-dimensional flow in-

AE 2312 CONFIGURATION VARIATIONS (1-0). cluding the effects of viscosity, rotation and en- Advanced airfoil concepts (supercritical airfoils, tropy production. PREREQUISITE: AE 2403. variable camber, vortex lift, jet flaps, etc.); direct lift and side force control; V/STOL developments; AE 2410 SMALL PERTURBATION SOLUTIONS active controls technology, relaxed static stability; FOR FRICTIONLESS FLOW (1-0). Linearization transonic and supersonic configurations. PREREQ- of governing equations by method of small pertur- UISITE: AE 2308. bations for case of isentropic flow; wavy wall solu- tions for subsonic and supersonic flow. PREREQ- AE 2401-2402 BASIC THERMODYNAMICS MI UISITE: AE 2409. (1-0). Concepts of heat and work; First Law for a cycle and process (closed systems), enthalpy; Sec- AE 2811 AERONAUTICAL LABORATORIES I ond Law, the heat engine, reversible process. Car- (0-2). A six- week course containing selected ex- not cycle. Entropy, properties of substances in gen- periments in aero- structures. PREREQUISITES: eral; process calculations for steam, perfect gases, AE 2101 through 2105. Graded on Pass/Fail basis real gases. only.

AE 2403 BASIC FLUID FLOW (1-0). The control AE 2812 AERONAUTICAL LABORATORIES II volume approach, equations of continuity, energy, (0-2). A six- week course containing selected ex- and momentum for open systems; consequences of periments in dynamics. PREREQUISITE: AE constant density; Rankine and Brayton cycles. 2001 through 2004. Graded on Pass/Fail basis PREREQUISITE: AE 2402. only.

AE 2404 INTRODUCTION TO VISCOUS FLOW AE 2813 AERONAUTICAL LABORATORIES III (1-0). Viscosity concepts; friction losses in ducts, (0-2). A six- week course containing selected ex- laminar and turbulent flow regimes; boundary layer periments in subsonic fluid flow. PREREQUISIT- concepts, pressure and friction drag. PREREQUI- ES: AE 2301 through 2307. Graded on Pass/Fail SITE: AE 2403. basis only.

AE 2405 VARYING-AREA FLOW (1-0). Intro- AE 2814 AERONAUTICAL LABORATORIES duction to compressible flow; varying-area adiaba- IV (0-2). A six- week course containing selected tic flow, isentropic flow; general nozzle and dif- experiments in supersonic fluid flow. PREREQ- fuser performance. PREREQUISITE: AE 2403. UISITES: AE 2401 through 2106. Graded on Pass/Fail basis only. AE 2406 SHOCKS AND PRANDTL-MEYER FLOW (1-0). Standing and moving normal shocks; Upper Division or oblique shocks; Prandtl-Meyer flow; overexpanded Graduate Courses and underexpanded nozzle operation. PREREQUI- AE 3321-3322 FLIGHT EVALUATION TECH- SITE: AE 2405. NIQUES I-II (3-2). Quantitative and qualitative

99 AERONAUTICS

techniques for the evaluation of aircraft perform- spacecraft; -rectangular and circular plates; compo- ance in flight; aircraft data acquisition systems; site and stiffened plates; vibration, stability, and normalizing and standardizing of flight test data; large deflection of plates; membrane theory of pilot rating scales; effects of design parameter on shells of revolution; general theory of shells of performance; laboratory flights in Departmental revolution. Finite element stiffness method as aircraft. Techniques for the evaluation of aircraft applied to aircraft and spacecraft; energy static and dynamic stability and control charac- theorems; stiffness matrices for structural ele-

teristics; flying qualities and handling qualities; ments; refined and isoparametric elements; matrix variation of stability parameters; application of displacement method; analysis of substructures; specifications to flight evaluations; maneuvering current aerospace computer programs; structural

flight; laboratory flights in Department aircraft. modeling techniques; dynamics and stability of elastic systems; synthesis and optimization. AE 3251 AIRCRAFT SURVIVABILITY/ VULNERABILITY (4-0). This course brings to- AE 4131-4132 SOLID MECHANICS FOR

gether all of the essential ingredients in a study of AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERS III (3-2). the survivability and vulnerability of fixed wing Theory of elasticity applied to aircraft problems and rotary wing aircraft in a hostile environment. beginning with the formulation of the three- Topics to be covered include: actual SEA and dimensional field equations and continuing with Mid-East Losses — how many and why; the threat engineering solutions by means of classical analyt- environment — small arms, AAA, SAM, AAM, ical methods, approximate energy methods, lasers; S/V assessment methodology — the mis- photoelastic methods and numerical methods. sion, aircraft description, vulnerability analysis, Further development of elasticity theory to provide

probability of kill, trade-off studies; survivability the application of stress analysis methods in as- enhancement — minimize detection, aircraft de- sessing ultimate structural integrity of aircraft sign, ECM, tactics; vulnerability reduction-design structures through theories of failure, fracture me- improvements for fuel systems, flight controls, chanics, fatigue and buckling. structures and materials, crew protection and the electrical system. In-depth S/V studies of the A-7, AE 4139 SPECIAL TOPICS IN SOLID ME- A- 10, F-16, F-18, and P-3 will be presented. CHANICS (4-0). Selected advanced coverage of PREREQUISITES: SECRET clearance and U.S. topics in solid mechanics including: plasticity, vis- Citizenship. coelasticity, general stability, thermoelasticity, nonlinear elasticity, wave propagation, etc. May AE 3801 AERONAUTICAL DATA SYSTEMS be repeated for credit if taken with different topics. (3-2). Equipment and procedures to be used in air- PREREQUISITE: Consent of Department Chair- borne and ground-based aeronautical laboratory measurement, recording, and analysis of parame- ters. Advanced applications of transducers, AE 4271 DESIGN PROBLEMS IN AERONAU-

amplifiers, signal processors and recording de- TICS I (3-3). A complex engineering problem in

vices. Statistical analysis of processed data. the field of flight vehicles is presented for solution by systems-oriented methods, with the primary AE 3900 SPECIAL TOPICS IN AERONAUTICS purpose of developing basic understanding for the (2-0 to 5-0). Directed graduate study or laboratory design process. Integration of various disciplines, research. Course may be repeated for additional evaluation of airworthiness requirements, real-life

credit if topic changes. PREREQUISITE: Consent complexities, and team work with clearly assigned of Department Chairman. responsibilities are emphasized. PREREQUISITE: Consent of Department Chariman. Graduate Courses AE 4272 DESIGN PROBLEMS IN AERONAU-

(Note section on general prerequisite require- TICS II (3-3). Continuation of AE 4271. ments) AE 4273 SUBSONIC AIRCRAFT DESIGN (3-2). AE 4101-4102 FLIGHT VEHICLE STRUC- The course centers on a preliminary design project TURAL ANALYSIS III (3-2). Theory of plate individually formulated by each student to meet and shell structures as applied to aircraft and given specifications. The end product is a three-

100 AERONAUTICS view supported by aerodynamic design calcula- locus and frequency response diagrams; analog tions. PREREQUISITES: AE 2305-06. computer simulation of control systems. State vec- tor solutions for continuous and sampled data sys- AE 4274 AIRCRAFT STRUCTURAL DESIGN tems; introduction to nonlinear systems; (3-2). A continuation of subsonic aerodynamic de- Liapunov's second method; optimal and modal sign into the structural design of the wing and control concepts; random processes; human pilot fuselage. The end product will be a wing and modeling. fuselage structural layout including stringer number and size, skin thicknesses, rib spacing, AE 4401 ADVANCED THERMODYNAMICS spar cap sizes, etc. PREREQUISITES: AE 2101- (3-2). Reactive mixtures, kinetic theory, transport 06. phenomena, quantum statistics; partition func- tions, thermodynamic properties. AE 4301 FLIGHT VEHICLE RESPONSE (3-2). Topics in stability and control of flight vehicles AE 4402 COMBUSTION (3-2). Reacting gas mix- including the effects of crosscoupling and tures, combustion temperature, chemical kinetics, aeroelasticity; state space formulation and solu- combustion generated pollutants, detonations and tions, controlability and observability. deflagrations, laminar and turbulent flame theories and experimental results, flame stabilization, gas AE 4302 ROTARY WING AERODYNAMICS turbine combustor design. PREREQUISITE: AE (3-2). Topics in the performance, stability, and 4401. control characteristics of rotary wing aircraft.

Hover, level flight, vertical climb and climbing AE 443 1 AEROTHERMODYNAMICS OF TUR- forward flight. Ground effect. Power require- BOMACHINES (4-0). Application of fundamental ments. laws of fluid dynamics and thermodynamics to the analysis of flows in turbomachines. AE 4831 con- AE 4305 V/STOL AIRCRAFT TECHNOLOGY currently. (3-2). Types of V/STOL aircraft: fundamental principles, main performance characteristics and AE 4432 ADVANCED THEORY OF TUR- propulsion requirements; STOL technology: high BOMACHINES (4-0). Advanced theory and lift devices, jet flaps, augmentor wings; VTOL methods for design and performance prediction of technology: flow vectoring devices, lift engine and turbomachines. PREREQUISITE: AE 4431, AE lift fan technology, augmentor wings, airframe/ 4832 concurrently. propulsion system interactions; V/STOL stability and control considerations. AE 4451-4452 AIRCRAFT AND MISSILE PROPULSION III (3-2). Description of various AE 4316 STRUCTURAL DYNAMICS (3-2). Re- propulsion methods: rockets, ramjets, gas tur- sponse of discrete and continuous elastic structures bines, and briefly, space propulsion; includes pa- to transient loads and to steady oscillatory loads rameters that specify system performance, infor- utilizing matrix methods. Manual and computer mation on current state of art and impact of trends methods of calculation. An introduction to random in propulsion technology, thrust and drag; discus- vibrations may also be offered as an optional topic sion of components; inlets, combustors, nozzles; at the discretion of the instructor. creative thinking is encouraged by discussion of novel propulsion schemes, stressing relationship to AE 4317 AEROELASTICITY (4-0). Static gas dynamics, mechanics and aerother- aeroelasticity problems in aircraft; non-stationary modynamics. Components are assembled, concep- airfoil theory; strip and lifting surface concepts. tually to form ramjets, turbofans, etc., for which

Application to the flutter problem. Transient performance (SFC, thrust) is predicted; several loads, gusts, buffet, and stall flutter. missions (e.g., fighter aircraft, air-to-air missile)

are defined and the best propulsion system is AE 4341-4342 GUIDANCE AND CONTROL selected for each application. FOR AEROSPACE SYSTEMS III (3-2). Funda- mental characteristics of feedback systems; time AE 4501 ADVANCED GASDYNAMICS (4-0). and frequency domain analysis of linear systems; Similarity and perturbation methods applied to state variable analysis; stability determination; root two-dimensional subsonic, supersonic and trans-

101 AERONAUTICS

onic flow. Shock wave interactions and reflections tions. Boundary layer concept and equations, with reference to the hodograph plane. Method of momentum and energy integrals, stability and characteristics: unsteady, and supersonic. Influ- transition. Fundamentals of turbulent flow; lami- ence of viscosity and heat conduction on gas nar and turbulent boundary layers with arbitrary dynamics. Some computer problems in gas pressure gradients. Techniques of solution. dynamics. AE 4512 CONVECTIVE HEAT AND MASS AE 4502 HYPERSONIC FLOW AND REAL GAS TRANSFER (4-0). Convective heat and mass EFFECTS (3-2). Real gas effects will be studied transfer in ducts and from exposed surfaces; lami- (dissociation, ionization) with reference to prob- nar and turbulent flows. Analytic techniques, inte- lems such as Couette flow, the wavy wall, and gral and numerical methods, experimental correla- Prandtl-Meyer flow. Some hypersonic flow with tions. Effects of variations in thermophysical emphasis on small perturbation analysis, similarity properties. Combined heat and mass transfer. solutions and Newtonian flow. PREREQUISITE: PREREQUISITE: AE4511. AE4501. AE 4632 COMPUTER METHODS IN AE 4503 AERODYNAMICS OF WINGS AND AERONAUTICS (3-2). Computer solutions of or- BODIES (3-2). Study of three-dimensional wings dinary and partial differential equations for aeros- and bodies in subsonic and supersonic flow. Slen- pace structures, gas dynamics, flight mechanics, der body theory and flow reversal theorems. dynamics and heat transfer problems. Equilibrium, Singluar perturbation problems and unsteady flow eigenvalue and propagation problems in discrete with some computer problems. and continuous systems. Introduction to computer design, computer graphics, hybrid computer, and AE 4504 MAGNETOFLUIDDYNAMICS (3-2). systems simulation. PREREQUISITE: MA 3232. Magnetohydrodynamic flows. Advanced energy conversion and propulsion systems which employ AE 4831 TURBOMACHINERY LABORATORY magneto/electrofluiddynamic principles. Defini- I (0-3). Measurements of the performance of tur- tion and review of pertinent physical concepts. bomachines. PREREQUISITE: AE 4431 concur- Current and future applications. rently.

AE 4505 LASER TECHNOLOGY (3-2). Survey AE 4832 TURBOMACHINERY LABORATORY of different types of lasers, including gaseous, II (0-3). Detailed investigations of stationary and solid state, gasdynamic and chemical lasers, re- rotating components of turbomachines. PREREQ- sonator cavities, gaussian beams and propagation UISITE: AE 4432 concurrently. mechanisms; high energy lasers and military appli- cations of lasers: PREREQUISITE: Consent of In- AE 4900 ADVANCED STUDY IN AERONAU- structor, (may also be taught as ME 4505) TICS (2-0 to 5-0). Directed graduate study or labo- ratory research. Course may be repeated for addi-

AE 4511 BOUNDARY LAYER THEORY (4-0). tional credit if topic changes. PREREQUISITE: Some exact solutions of the Navier-Stokes equa- Consent of Chairman.

102 ANTISUBMARINE WARFARE

ANTISUBMARINE WARFARE

The Antisubmarine Warfare Academic nia at Los Angeles, 1948; Ph.D., Group has administrative responsibility 1951. for the academic content of the Antisub- marine Warfare Program. Teaching in *The year of joining the Postgraduate School this program is carried out by faculty Faculty is indicated in parenthesis. members attached to the various Academic Departments associated with MASTER OF SCIENCE IN SYSTEMS the Program. TECHNOLOGY

ROBERT NEAGLE FORREST, As- 1 . The degree of Master of Science in Systems sociate Professor of Operations Re- Technology will be awarded at the completion of search; Chairman (1964)*; B.S., an interdisciplinary program carried out in accord- Univ. of Oregon, 1950; M.S., 1952; ance with the following degree requirements:

M.S., 1954; Ph.D., 1959. a. The Master of Science in Systems Technology requires a minimum of DONALD CHARLES DANIEL, Assis- 45 quarter hours of graduate level work of tant Professor of Political Science which at least 15 hours must represent (1975); B.A. Holy Cross College, courses at the 4000 level. 1966; Ph.D., Georgetown Univ., Graduate courses in at least four different academic 1971. disciplines must be included and in three

CARL RUSSEL JONES, Professor of disciplines, a course at the 4000 level Administrative Sciences (1965); B.S., must be included. Institute Carnegie of Technology; b. An approved sequence of at least three 1956; M.B.A., Univ. of Southern courses constituting advanced specializa- California, 1963; Ph.D., Claremont tion in an option area must be included. Graduate School, 1965. c. In addition to the 45 hours of course cred- GEORGE LAWRENCE SACKMAN, it, an acceptable group project or thesis Associate Professor of Electrical En- must be completed. gineering (1964); B.M.E., Univ. of d. The program must be approved by the Florida, 1954; B.E.E., 1957; M.S.E., Chairman of the ASW Group. 1959; Ph.D., Stanford Univ., 1964. SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY WARREN CHARLES THOMPSON,

Professor of Oceanography (1953); ST 0001 SEMINAR (0-1). Special lectures, and B.A., Univ. of California at Los discussion of matters related to the ASW Program. Angeles, 1943; M.S., Scripps Institu- PREREQUISITE: SECRET clearance. tion of Oceanography, 1948; Ph.D., Texas A&M Univ., 1953. ST 0810 THESIS RESEARCH/GROUP PROJECT ALAN ROBERT WASHBURN, As- (0-1). Students in the Systems Technology cur- sociate Professor of Operations Re- ricula will enroll in this course which consists of an search (1970); B.S., Carnegie Institute individual thesis or a group project involving sev- of Technology, 1962; M.S., 1963; eral students and faculty. Ph.D., 1965. ST 1810 INTRODUCTION TO PROGRAM- CARROLL ORVILLE WILDE, Profes- MABLE CALCULATORS (1-1). Programming sor of Mathematics (1968); B.S., Il- and use of keyboard functions, data storage and linois State Univ., 1958; Ph.D., Univ. retrieval, printers, plotters, subroutine packages. of Illinois, 1964. This course is designed for students in the An- OSCAR BRYAN WILSON, JR., Profes- tisubmarine Warfare and Weapons Engineering sor of Physics (1957); B.S., Univ. of curricula. PREREQUISITE: None. Graded on Texas, 1944; M.A., Univ. of Califor- Pass/Fail basis only.

103 ANTISUBMARINE WARFARE

ST 3000 STUDY PROJECT ON ASW SYSTEMS operating conditions. Graded on a Pass/Fail basis. PERFORMANCE (0-2). This project is the study PREREQUISITE: Enrollment in ASW curriculum and analysis of the performance of an assigned or consent of curriculum coordinator, SECRET type of ASW system under a variety of realistic clearance. AVIATION SAFETY

AVIATION SAFETY PROGRAMS

CLYDE HENRY TUOMELA, Captain, vention and Crash Investigation U.S. Navy; Director (1974)*; B.S., (1965); B.S., Naval Academy, 1945. Stanford Univ., 1959; M.S. George Washington Univ., 1972; War Col- lege, 1972. *The year of joining the Postgraduate School RUSSELL BRANSON BOMBERGER, Faculty is indicated in parenthesis. Professor of Law and Psychology (1958); B.S., Temple Univ., 1955 Ll.B., LaSalle Univ., 1968; J.D. AVIATION SAFETY OFFICER COURSE 1969; M.A. Univ. of Iowa, 1956 M.S., Univ. of Southern California An Aviation Safety Officer (ASO) course is of- 1960; M.A., Univ. of Iowa, 1961 fered eight times per year on a temporary addi- Ph.D., 1962. tional duty basis for those commands needing a CRAIG MERRILL BRADBURY, Com- trained Aviation Safety Officer. The course pre-

mander, U.S. Navy; Instructor in Ad- pares aviation safety officers at the squadron level vanced Safety Management and Air- to assist commanding officers in conducting an ag- craft Accident Investigation (1976); gressive accident prevention program. When the B.S., Naval Postgraduate School, ASO completes this course he will be able to orga- 1963. nize and administer an accident prevention pro- JOHN ROBERT JOHNSON, Lieutenant gram at the squadron level as defined in OP- Commander; U.S. Navy; Instructor in NAVINST 3750.14 and 5100.8. Safety Program Management and Air- This 6 week course consists of approximately craft Accident Prevention (1976); 185 classroom hours of safety program manage- B.A., Drury College, 1960. ment, including mishap prevention techniques, operational aerodynamics and aircraft structures, EDWARD JOHN KENNEDY, Associate mishap investigation and reporting, psychology, Professor of Aviation Physiology law, and aviation physiology. Prior completion of (1972); M.D., Univ. of Iowa College college level courses in algebra and/or physics is of Medicine, 1962. highly desirable. Two class field trips will be con- JAMES CHRISTIAN NIELSEN, As- ducted: a safety survey of an operating squadron or sociate Professor of Aeronautical air station; and an industrial activity tour. Engr. and Safety; (1966); B.S.A.E., Designated naval aviators and naval flight of- Univ. of Washington, 1950; ficers of the Navy and Marine Corps of the rank of M.S.A.E., 1957. Lieutenant, USN, and Captain, USMC, and above are eligible to attend. Exceptions must be approved GEORGE EDWARD TUCKER, Cap- by Type Commanders, or CMC, as appropriate. tain, U.S. Marine Corps; Instructor in Details of quota control and class schedules are Aeronautical Engineering and Safety defined in CNETNOTICE 1520. (1977); B.S., U.S. Naval Academy, 1968. LEWIS EDWARD WALDEISEN, Commander; U.S. Navy; Assistant Professor of Operations Research for ADVANCED SAFETY MANAGEMENT Human Factors Engineering (1974) COURSE B.S., Univ. of San Francisco, 1960 M.A., Univ. of New Mexico, 1965 An Advanced Safety Management (ASM) Ph.D., Texas Tech Univ., 1974. course is offered four times per year on a tempo- rary additional duty basis to provide additional LESTER CHARLES WIBLE, Assistant safety education. beyond the ASO level for officers Professor of Aviation Accident Pre- assigned to major aviation staffs, the Naval Safety

105 AVIATION SAFETY

Center, aircraft carriers, air stations, carrier air AVIATION wing staffs and similar organizations. This course consists of approximately 138 class- Upper Division Courses room hours of such subjects as safety management concepts; computer systems data analysis; safety- AO 2020 AERODYNAMICS FOR AIRCRAFT identified hardware; industrial safety (including ACCIDENT PREVENTION AND INVESTIGA- Occupational Safety and Health Act concepts); and TION (3-0). Survey of aerodynamics, perform-

shipboard safety. A field trip to an airline mainte- ance, stability and control of flight vehicles. Criti- nance base will be conducted. cal areas of operation, contribution of operator Enrollment in the ASM course is limited to of- techniques, effects of varying configurations, de- ficers currently occupying staff aviation safety bil- sign deficiencies, and manufacturing defects. lets or proceeding to such duty. A prerequisite for the ASM course is completion of either the ASO AO 2030 AIRCRAFT STRUCTURAL course, the former Survey of Aviation Safety ANALYSIS (1-0). Strength of materials, design

course, or at least one year's experience in a safety criteria, failure mechanisms. Recognition of fail- billet. Eligible officers without this prerequisite ures, fatigue, brittle fractures, contribution of should be ordered to attend both the ASO and manufacturing and maintenance, analysis of evi- ASM courses. Details of quota control and class dence, corrosion control technology, and quality schedules are defined in CNET NOTICE 1520. control concepts.

RESIDENT COURSES Upper Division or Graduate Courses

Officers regularly enrolled in other curricula of the Postgraduate School may qualify for the Avia- AO 3000 PROBLEMS IN ACCIDENT PREVEN- tion Safety Officer Certificate by completing the TION AND INVESTIGATION (0-4). Problem- program requirements: AO 2020, AO 2030, AO solving exercises in the application of systems 3000, AO 3040, AO 3050, and AO 3060. Substitu- safety concepts in the organization of squadron ac- tions for some of these courses may be made by cident prevention and investigation effort. Devel- taking equivalent courses in other departments oped primarily through case-study methods, the upon approval of the Director of Aviation Safety. course emphasizes conservation of resources, cost Examples: AO 2020 may be replaced by upper di- effectiveness, and systems management in acci- vision or graduate courses in aeronautical en- dent prevention, investigation, and reporting. gineering covering similar topics. AO 3040 may be replaced by upper division or graduate courses AO 3040 SAFETY PSYCHOLOGY (1-0). Study in psychology covering similar topics. of human reliability in survival-value environ-

Officers regularly enrolled in other curricula of ments; personality elements in safety motivation; the Postgraduate School may qualify for the Ad- identification and reduction of problems in human vanced Safety Management Certificate by com- reliability. pleting ASM program requirements. Prospective ASM candidates must have completed the Aviation AO 3050 SAFETY LAW (1-0). Study of leading

Safety Officer program described above, or its cases and statutes concerning rights and duties in equivalent, prior to enrolling in ASM course. Spe- the safety disciplines. Emergency claims; quasi- cific ASM course requirements include AO 3100 contractural duties. Criminal prosecution of safety and AO 3120. violations. Legal duties of care. Special rules of evidence used by the courts in safety-related dis- AVIATION SAFETY COMMAND COURSE putes.

An Aviation Safety Command (ASC) course is AO 3060 PROBLEMS IN AVIATION MEDICINE offered five times a year on a temporary additibnal (1-0). Life-science considerations in accident pre- duty basis to commanding officers and executive vention and investigation. Medical prediction. Ef- officers of aviation commands. This course con- fects of hypoxia, dysbarism, G-forces, spatial dis- sists of 41 hours in such subjects as hazard iden- orientation, diet, drugs, and exercise upon flight tification, mishap histories, legal constraints, re- capabilities. Recognition of emotional difficulties; sult of safety surveys of aviation activities, and emotional considerations in accident-prevention. failure modes. No academic credit is available for Interpretation of autopsy reports. this course.

106 AVIATION SAFETY

AO 3100 MANAGEMENT OF ACCIDENT- AO 3120 TECHNOLOGICAL ASPECTS OF PREVENTION PROGRAMS (3-2). Management ACCIDENT-PREVENTION AND ANALYSIS theories, practices, communications, and controls; (3-2). Topics include case studies of technological automatic data-processing and analysis of accident design-related avaiation mishaps; identification of statistics; legal consideration in safety manage- structural failure modes; computer and simulator ment; use of systems safety in hazard identifica- methods in aeronautics; safety-related problems of tion. Navy weapons-system evaluation and acquisition. COMPUTER SCIENCE

DEPARTMENT OF COMPUTER SCIENCE

CHARLES PHILIP GIBFRIED, Com- of California at Berkeley, 1956; B.A., mander, U.S. Navy; Assistant Profes- Southern Colorado State College, sor of Computer Science and Opera- 1965; M.S., Naval Postgraduate tions Research; Acting Chariman School, 1966. (1975)*; B.S., Univ. of Illinois; 1958; VICTOR MICHAEL POWERS, Assis- M.S., Naval Postgraduate School, tant Professor of Electrical Engineer- 1972. ing and Computer Science (1970); GERALD LEONARD BARKSDALE, B.S., Univ. of Michigan, 1963; JR., Assistant Professor of Computer M.S.E.E., 1964; Ph.D., 1970. Science and Mathematics (1969); GARY MICHAEL RAETZ, LT. U.S. B.S.E.E., Rice Univ., 1965; Navy; Instructor in Computer Science M.S.E.E., 1966; M.S.C.S., Univ. of and Mathematics (1973); B.S. Port- Wisconsin at Madison, 1972; Ph.C, land State Univ., 1972; M.S., Naval 1972. Postgraduate School, 1973. GERALD GERARD BROWN, Associate GEORGE ANTHONY RAHE, Professor Professor of Computer Science and of Electrical Engineering and Com- Operations Research (1976); B.A., puter Science (1965); B.S., Univ. of California State Univ. at Fullerton, California at Los Angeles, 1957; 1968; M.B.A., 1969; Ph.D., Univ. of M.S., 1959; Ph.D., 1965. California at Los Angeles, 1974. LYLE VERNON RICH, Lieutenant, RICHARD WESLEY HAMMING, Ad- U.S. Navy; Instructor in Computer junct Professor of Computer Science Science and Mathematics (1975); (1976); B.S., Univ. of Chicago, B.S., Illinois State Univ., 1969; M.S., 1937, M.S., Univ. of Nebraska, Naval Postgraduate School, 1971. 1939; Ph.D., Univ. of Illinois 1942. RONALD JAY ROLAND, Lieutenant STEPHEN HOLL, Lieutenant TRYGVE Colonel, U.S. Air Force, Assistant Commander, U.S. Navy; Assistant Professor of Computer Science (1976); Professor of Computer Science (1976); B.S. Colorado State Univ., 1969; B.S. U.S. Naval Academy, 1967; M.S., Univ. of Hawaii, 1971; Ph.D., The Johns Hopkins Univ., A.B.D., Univ. of Nebraska, 1977. 1974. NORMAN FLOYD SCHNEIDEWIND, CYNTHIA EMBERSON IRVINE, Re- Professor of Computer Science and In- search Associate (1975); B.A. Rice formation Science (1971); B.S.E.E., Univ., 1970; Ph.D., Case Western Univ. of California at Berkely, 1951; Reserve Univ., 1975. M.B.A., Univ. of Southern Califor- GARY ARLEN KILDALL, Associate nia, 1960; M.S.O.R. (ENGR), 1970; Professor of Computer Science and D.B.A., 1966. Mathematics (1972); B.S. Univ. of Washington, 1967; M.S., 1968; *The year of joining the Postgraduate School Ph.D., 1972. Faculty is indicated in parentheses. UNO ROBERT KODRES, Associate Professor of Mathematics and Com- puter Science (1963); B.A., Wartburg MASTER OF SCIENCE College, 1954; M.S., Iowa State IN COMPUTER SCIENCE Univ., 1956; Ph.D., 1958.

in NEIL PATRICK MILLER, Lieutenant 1 . The degree of Master of Science Computer Colonel, U.S. Marine Corps; Instruc- Science will be awarded upon the satisfactory tor in Computer Science and Adminis- completion of a program, approved by the Chair- trative Sciences (1976); B.A., Univ. man, Computer Science Department, which satis-

108 COMPUTER SCIENCE

fies, as a minimum, the following degree require- COMPUTER SCIENCE ments: CS 0001 SEMINAR (0-1). Special lectures; guest

A. At least 40 quarter hours of graduate level lecturers; discussion of student thesis research fac- work of which at least 12 quarter hours ulty research projects. PREREQUISITE: None.

must be at the 4000 level. CS 01 10 FORTRAN PROGRAMMING (3-0). The

B. The program shall include at least: basic elements of FORTRAN are covered. Practi- cal application of the principles is afforded by Quarter Hours means of a series of problems of increasing diffi- culty.

Computer Science 20 CS 0113 COBOL PROGRAMMING (3-0). The Operations Research, Electrical basic elements of are covered. Practical Engineering, and/or Management. COBOL application of principles is afforded by means of a Mathematics, Probability, and series of problems of increasing difficulty. Televi- Statistics sion lectures.

C. Completion of an approved sequence of CS 0810 THESIS RESEARCH (0-0). Every stu- courses constituting specialization in an dent conducting thesis research will enroll in this area of Computer Science. course.

D. Completion of an acceptable thesis in ad- Upper Division Courses dition to the 40 quarter hours of course work. CS 2010 INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTERS AND DATA PROCESSING FOR NON- COMPUTER SCIENCE MAJOR (2-0). An intro- LABORATORY FACILITIES duction to the general characteristics of contempo- rary computers and to the functions they serve in a The Computer Science Department has cogni- diversity of organizations, emphasizing the zance over the Postgraduate School's Computer capabilities of the computer, the limitations of

Laboratories. The Signal Processing Laboratory is computing and the economics of data processing in an interconnected computer complex consisting of general. There are no prerequisite or corequisite a medium sized digital computer, two high per- courses. Prior computing experience is not as- formance interactive display systems, a large gen- sumed and programming is not taught. eral purpose hybrid/analog computer and multiple terminals and display equipment. Two PDP-11/50 CS 2100 INTRODUCTION TO FORTRAN PRO- computers and a CSPI-125 signal processing com- GRAMMING (1-2). This course is designed to puter have been combined into a multiprocessing provide the student with a basic familiarity in system which supports four different types of dis- FORTRAN. The course is intended for the student plays and sixteen time sharing terminals. A Mili- who is already familiar with programming in a tary Systems Laboratory features a general purpose higher level language. The course will normally be computer capable of emulating current military taught in either a PSI or self-instructional mode. hardware such as AN/UYK-7 and AN/UYK-20 PREREQUISITE: CS 2110, CS 2010, or consent computers. The Microcomputer Laboratory con- of Instructor. sists of a variety of microprocessors; included among these are multiple Intellec 8-80 systems CS 2103 INTRODUCTION TO COBOL PRO- supported by floppy-disk units and a Sycor System GRAMMING (1-2). This course is designed to supporting four time-sharing terminals. All of the provide the student with a basic familiarity in above facilities are available school-wide for COBOL. The course is intended for the student hands-on use in instructional and research pro- who is familiar with programming in a higher level grams. In addition, the computational resources of language. The course may be taught in either a PSI the W.R. Church Computer Center provides sup- or self-instructional mode. PREREQUISITE: CS port for timesharing and batch processing. 21 10, CS 2010, or consent of Instructor.

109 COMPUTER SCIENCE

CS 2105 SURVEY OF COMPUTERS AND introduction to the characteristics of general pur- PROGRAMMING (4-0). A general appreciation pose digital computers, and the fundamentals of of computer history, computer system organiza- algorithmic problem solving emphasizing the tion, computer applications and computer man- flow-charting method. Basic computer programm- agement. Flowcharting and coding in an al- ing in the FORTRAN language, primarily directed gorithmic language. Not recommended for anyone toward the solution of numerical problems and intending to take further courses in computer sci- matrix manipulation, including the use of library ence. PREREQUISITE: None. subroutines. Students who have taken a previous FORTRAN course (CS 0110, CS 2100 or CS CS 2107 INTRODUCTION TO THE CMS-2 2600) should not enroll in this course. COMPILER LANGUAGE (1-2). This course is designed to provide the student with a basic famil- Upper Division or Graduate Courses iarity in CMS-2. The course is intended for the student who is familiar with programming in a CS 3010 COMPUTING DEVICES AND SYS- higher level language. The course may be taught in TEMS (3-0). This course will provide a survey of either a PSI or self-instructional mode. PREREQ- peripheral computer devices, computer memories, UISITE: CS 2110 or consent of Instructor. the central processing unit and their interaction and means of communication. Consideration will be CS 2110 INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTERS given to the various arrangements of data in the AND PROGRAMMING FOR COMPUTER SCI- different storage devices in relation to the writing ENCE MAJORS (3-2). Algorithmic problem solv- and retrieving of this data. Specific equipment in ing. Emphasis on symbol manipulation more than the NPS computer center and computer laboratory numeric computation. Basics and characteristics of will be examined in detail in a hands-on environ- computers and computer solutions of problems. ment and consideration given to interaction, cor- Programming and timesharing systems. Basic ma- rection and circumvention of inoperative units. chine operations and assembly-level programs. PREREQUISITE: CT 2000. PREREQUISITE: None. CS 3020 PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT: CS 2520 MATHEMATICAL MODELING AND STRUCTURE, DESIGN, AND LANGUAGES PROGRAMMING (4-2). Programming as applied (3-4). This course will provide the student with to basic numerical techniques (iterative approxi- broad background in the concept, design and mation methods, numerical solution of ordinary development of computer programs. The subject differential equations). Experiments with exam- of language selection, program evaluation, testing ples from weapon systems performance. PRE- and debugging, and program documentation will

REQUISITE: CS 2700, PS 341 1, PS 3419 and MA be covered in the lecture portion of the course. The 2121. laboratory session will be devoted to the develop- ment of programming skills and practices as dis- CS 2600 INTRODUCTORY COMPUTING AND cussed in the lectures, using the American Na- COMPUTER SCIENCE FOR OPERATIONS tional Standards Institute COBOL language. Proj- ANALYSTS (2-0). An introduction to computer ects assigned during the course will be tested, de- problem solving methods for students in the Opera- bugged and run in the NPS computer center. PRE- tions Research curriculum. Topics include subpro- REQUISITES: CT 2000, CS 2110 or equivalent grams, numerical error control and numerical background or consent of Instructor. methods and program organization and debugging.

Emphasis is placed on actual computer programm- CS 3030 OPERATING SYSTEMS STRUC- ing experience with 5-7 operations research related TURES (5-0). This course will provide a broad projects of increasing difficulty. Classroom exam- overview of operating system including memory ples and assigned projects are drawn from first management techniques, job scheduling, processor quarter Operations Research courses. PREREQ- scheduling, device management and data (informa- UISITES: CS 0110 or experience in FORTRAN tion) management techniques. Case studies will be programming. included to illustrate the manager-operating sys- tem interfaces, including time usage accounting, CS 2700 INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER error processing and recovery, operating system PROGRAMMING WITH FORTRAN (2-2). An selection, data control and security, and operating

110 . .

COMPUTER SCIENCE

system utility support. In addition future trends in Techniques and devices for effective data trans- computers will be investigated, including maxi, mission in computer-based systems. PREREQUI- mini, and microcomputers. PREREQUISITES: CS SITES: EE 2810, PS 3401. 3010 and CS 3020 or equivalent background and consent of Instructor. CS 3230 MICROCOMPUTERS (3-2). Mi- crocomputer organization. Instruction repertoire. CS 3111 FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS IN Higher level languages for microcomputers. Inter- STRUCTURAL PROGRAMMING LAN- facing microcomputers with other computer sys- GUAGES (4-0). An introduction to the significant tems and external digital equipment. Systems de- features of programming languages. Formal defini- sign using microcomputers as systems elements. tion of a language including specification of syntax The laboratory sessions are devoted to projects

and semantics. Characteristics of assemblers, which familiarize the student with the practical as- compilers and interpreters. Properties of block pects of systems design. PREREQUISITES: CS structured languages, including scope of declara- 3111, EE 2810 or equivalent. tions, storage allocation and subroutines. Basic programming techniques, including string manipu- CS 3300 INFORMATION STRUCTURES (3-0). lation, list processing, bit manipulation and recur- Basic concepts of data. Linear lists, strings, ar- sion. PREREQUISITES: Either CS 2100, CS rays, and orthogonal lists. Representation of trees 2103, CS 2110 or consent of the Instructor. and graphs. Storage systems and structures, and storage allocation and collection. Symbol tables CS 3112 OPERATING SYSTEMS (4-0). This and searching techniques. Sorting (ordering) tech- course is an introduction to the fundamental con- niques. Formal specification of data structures, cepts of operating systems and system software. data structures in programming languages, and Topics to be discussed include multiprogramming, generalized data management. PREREQUISITES: multiprocessing, dynamic relocation, paging, CS 3111. segmentation and virtual memory. Timesharing, process scheduling, system communication and auxiliary storage management are also included. CS 3310 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE (4-0). Currently available digital computer systems are Definition of heuristic versus algorithmic compared to demonstrate these concepts. PRE- methods, rationale of heuristic approach, descrip- tion of cognitive processes and apporaches to REQUISITES: CS 2 1 10 and CS 3 1 1 1 mathematical invention. Objective of work in arti- CS 3113 INTRODUCTION TO COMPILERS ficial intelligence, simulation of cognitive behav- ior and self-organizing systems. Heuristic pro- (3-2). This course is intended to explore the basics gramming techniques including the use of list- of modern compiler design and construction tech- processing languages. Survey of niques. The fundamentals of scanning, grammar examples from representative application areas. The mind-brain based parsing and compiler semantics are devel- problem and the nature of intelligence. Class and oped in the framework of modern compiler- individual projects to illustrate basic concepts. compiler and translator-writing system technol-

2 1 10 or 3 1 1 1 ogy. The laboratory periods will be used to PREREQUISITE: CS CS develop a small model compiler/assembler. Mod- ern languages and current NPS research will be CS 3502 REAL-TIME INTERACTIVE COM- used as examples whenever possible. PREREQ- PUTER SYSTEMS (3-2). This course presents a UISITES: CS 3111 or consent of the Instructor. study of the hardware and software requirements of real-time, near real-time, and interactive com- CS 3204 DATA COMMUNICATIONS (4-0). puter systems. Concepts of system software in- Quantitative study of communication processes cluding multiprogramming, multiprocessing, data with emphasis on digital communication. Con- structures, memory management, and facilities for cepts fundamental to the engineering of accurate, user-computer interaction are presented. Inter- efficient communication links and systems. Ele- rupts, interactive device concepts including ments of information theory. Communication graphic displays, data transmission techniques and channels and their capacity, encoding and decod- other hardware support concepts are included. A ing of data over noisy channels. Error detection set of DOD and civilian computer systems will be and correction coding schemes and procedures. examined to determine and compare characteris-

111 COMPUTER SCIENCE

tics, effectiveness and system economies of vari- tion, design, documentation and testing of com- ous real-time computer systems. Introduction to plex computer programs. Memory, control and

system characteristics is facilitated by laboratory capability protection. Resource allocation work in which interactive systems are used to mechanisms, policies and problems. File system demonstrate concepts presented in the classroom. organization. Analysis, simulation and measure- PREREQUISITES: CS 2105, CS 2110, or the ment techniques and their application to computer equivalent. system design. Concepts are presented in terms of the fundamental insight provided by considering CS 3510 REAL-TIME COMBAT DIRECTION timesharing systems. PREREQUISITE: EE 2810, SYSTEMS AND STRUCTURES (3-2). Basic CS 3112. principles of hardware and software structures and

interactions in real-time systems. Operating sys- tems; interrupts, multiprocessing, multiprogram- CS 4113 COMPILER DESIGN AND IM- ming. Data flow in inter- and intra-computer PLEMENTATION (3-2). This course extends the communication. Operation and management of concepts introduced in CS 31 13. The methods and peripherals. Evaluation and interpretation of com- techniques of grammar analysis and parsing are ponent specifications in terms of computer system developed with particular emphasis on LALR(l) capabilities. PREREQUISITES: CS 2520 or EE based systems. The problems of dynamic versus 2810, orCS 2700. static run time memory allocation; code genera- tion; intermediate languages; error detection/ CS 3601 AUTOMATA AND FORMAL LAN- analysis/correction at compile/run time; code op- GUAGES (3-0). Logical networks, neural net- timization and multipass compilation are devel- works, finite automata, minimalization of au- oped in additional detail. Laboratory periods will tomata, regular expressions, context-sensitive lan- be used for analysis of existing compilers. PRE-

guages and linear bounded automata. Ambiguity in REQUISITES: CS 3 1 1 3 and CS 3300 or consent of formal languages. PREREQUISITES: MA 2025 the Instructor. and MA 3026 or equivalent.

CS 4200 SYSTEM ANALYSIS AND DESIGN CS 3800 DIRECTED STUDY IN COMPUTER (4-0). This course covers system development in- SCIENCES (0-2 to 0-8). Individual research and cluding the basics of analysis, design and testing; study by the student under the supervision of a system description tools including decision tables, member of the faculty. Intended primarily to per- flowcharts, state diagrams and system description mit interested students to pursue in depth subjects techniques; system analysis tools; system analysis not fully covered in formal class work. PREREQ- procedures; as well as important design issues such UISITE: Consent of the Instructor. Graded on as hardware/software compatability, operating sys- Pass/Fail basis only. tem compatability and information system re- quirements. PREREQUISITES: Completion of CS 3900 SELECTED TOPICS IN COMPUTER upper level CS series or consent of Instructor. SCIENCE (3-0). Presentation of a wide selection of topics from current literature. Lectures on sub- jects of current interest and exploration may be CS 4202 INTERACTIVE COMPUTATION SYS- presented by invited guests from other univer- TEMS (3-2). A study of the man-computer inter- sities, government laboratories, and from industry, face and methods for computer-assisted problem as well as by faculty members of the Naval Post- solving. System facilities for man-computer in- graduate School. Tours of other facilities of inter- teraction. Computer graphics, transformations and est may also be conducted. PREREQUISITE: graphics software. Data structures, memory re- Consent of Instructor. Graded on Pass/Fail basis quirements, storage, file, and data management. only. Languages for man-computer interaction including graphics, command, problem-oriented, and special Graduate Courses purpose languages. Laboratory work includes in- CS 4112 COMPUTER SYSTEMS (4-0). System dividual projects using interactive graphical con- design concepts in computer hardware-software soles. PREREQUISITES: EE 2810, CS 3112, CS combinations. Software engineering: specifica- 3300 pre or corequisite, or consent of Instructor.

112 COMPUTER SCIENCE

CS 4300 DATA BASE SYSTEMS (4-0). This public sectors. PREREQUISITE: CS 3020 or a course explores the technology of current Data knowledge of COBOL, or other higher level lan- Base Systems. The course deals with the historical guage, and consent of the Instructor. development of Data Base Systems, current technology and future trends. The primary empha- CS 4800 DIRECTED STUDY IN ADVANCED

sis is the logical view of data base implementa- COMPUTER SCIENCE (0-2 to 0-8). Directed ad- tions, including the hierarchy, network and rela- vanced study in computer science on a subject of tional models and the language extensions requried mutual interest to student and staff member. In- to support such systems. PREREQUISITES: CS tended primarily to permit students to pursue in 3112 and CS 3300, or CS 3030 and consent of depth subjects not fully covered in formal class Instructor. work or thesis research. May be repeated for credit with a different topic. A written report to the de-

CS 4320 DATA BASE SYSTEM DESIGN (4-0). partment chairman is required at the end of the CS 4320 explores the design of Data Base Systems quarter. PREREQUISITE: Consent of Instructor. and current technology of Data Base software. Im- Graded on Pass/Fail basis only. plementation techniques, viable alternatives, data base philosophies, data manipulation in complex CS 4900 ADVANCED TOPICS IN COMPUTER information environments, and system require- SCIENCE (3-0). This course examines topics in ments are explored. Examples of systems will be the fields of current research in computer science. drawn from active DoD data base systems and cur- PREREQUISITE: Consent of Instructor. Graded rent application/research in the private as well as on Pass/Fail basis only.

113 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

DONALD EVAN KIRK, Professor of ALEX GERBA, JR. Associate Professor Electrical Engineering; Chairman of Electrical Engineering (1959); (1965)*; B.S., Worchester B.E.E., Univ. of Louisville, 1947; Polytechnic Institute, 1959; M.S., M.S., Univ. of Illinois, 1957. Naval Postgraduate School, 1961; Ph.D., Univ. of Illinois, 1965. DAVID BOYSEN HOISINGTON, Pro- fessor of ORESTES METHODIUS Electronics (1947); B.S., BAYCURA, Massachusetts Institute of Technol- Associate Professor of Electrical En- ogy, 1940; M.S., Univ. of Pennsyl- gineering B.S.E.E., (1966); Carnegie vania, 1941. Institute of Technology, 1957; M.S., Univ. of Pittsburgh, 1959; D.Sc, STEPHEN JAUREGUI, JR., Associate 1963. Professor of Electrical Engineering (1971); B.A., Univ. of California at JOHN MILLER BOULDRY, Associate Berkeley, 1956; M.S., Naval Post- Professor of Electrical Engineering graduate School, 1960; Ph.D., 1962. (1946); B.S., Northeastern Univ., 1941; M.S., Brown Univ., 1956. CLARENCE FREDERICK KLAMM, STEPHEN BREIDA, Associate Professor JR., Professor of Electronics (1951); of Electronics (1958); B.S.E.E., Dre- B.S., Washington Univ., 1943; M.S., xel Institute of Technology, 1952; 1948. M.S.E.E., Purdue Univ., 1954. JEFFREY BRUCE KNORR, Associate ROBERT WARD BURTON, Lieutenant Professor of Electrical Engineering Colonel, U.S. Air Force; Associate (1970); B.S., Pennsylvania State Professor of Electrical Engineering Univ., 1963; M.S., 1964; Ph.D., Cor- (1973); B.S., U.S. Naval Academy, nell Univ., 1970. 1955; S.M. (E.E.), Massachusetts In- GEORGE HEINEMANN MARMONT, stitute of Technology, 1960; E.E., Professor of Electronics (1959); B.S., 1960; Ph.D., Harvard Univ., 1964. California Institute of Technology, SHU-GAR CHAN, Associate Professor 1934; Ph.D., 1940. of Electrical Engineering (1964); Pro- B.S., Univ. of Washington, 1954; GLEN ALLEN MYERS, Associate Electrical M.S. Columbia Univ., 1954; Ph.D., fessor of Engineering Kansas Univ., 1964. (1965); B.S.E.E., Univ. of North Dakota, 1955; M.S.E.E. Stanford MITCHELL LAVETTE COTTON, As- Univ., 1956; Ph.D., 1965. sociate Professor of Electronics (1953); B.S., California Institute of HERBERT LeROY MYERS, Assistant Technology, 1948; M.S., Washington Professor of Electrical Engineering Univ., 1952; E.E., Univ. of California (1951); B.S., Univ. of Southern at Berkeley, 1954. California, 1951. JOHN HENRY DUFFIN, Professor of JOHN EVERETT OHLSON, Associate Electrical Engineering (1962); B.S., Professor of Electrical Engineering Lehigh Univ., 1940; Ph.D., Univ. of (1971); B.S., Massachusetts Institute California at Berkeley, 1959. of Technology, 1962; M.S.E.E., Stan- ford Univ., Ph.D., GERALD DEAN EWING, Associate 1963; 1967. Professor of Electrical Engineering RUDOLF PANHOLZER, Professor of (1963); B.S.E.E., Univ. of California Electrical Engineering (1964); Dipl. at Berkeley, 1957; M.S.E.E., 1959; Ing., Technische Hochschule in Graz, E.E., Oregon State Univ., 1962; Austria, 1953; D.Sc, 1961; Ph.D., 1964. M.S.E.E., Stanford Univ., 1956.

114 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

SYDNEY RICHARD PARKER, Profes- gineering (1951); B.E., John Hopkins sor of Electrical Engineering; (1966); Univ., 1940; D.Eng., 1947. City College of New York, B.E.E., HAROLD ARTHUR TITUS, Professor 1944; M.S. Stevens Institute of of Electronics (1962); B.S., Kansas Technology, 1948; Sc.D., 1964. Univ., 1952; M.S. Stanford Univ., JOHN PATRICK POWERS, Associate 1957; Ph.D., 1962. Professor of Electrical Engineering JOHN THOMAS VINSON, Command- (1970); B.S.E.E., Tufts Univ., 1965; er, U.S. Navy; Instructor in Electrical M.S., Stanford Univ., 1966; Ph.D., Engineering (1976); B.S. Naval Post- Univ. of California at Santa Barbara, graduate School, 1967, M.S., 1972. 1970. JOHN ROBERT WARD, Professor of VICTOR MICHAEL POWERS, Assis- Electrical Engineering (1962); B.Sc, tant Professor of Electrical Engineer- Univ. of Sydney, 1949; B.E., 1952; ing (1970); B.S.E.E., Univ. of Michi- Ph.D., 1958. gan, 1963; M.S., 1964; Ph.D., 1970. MILTON LUDELL WILCOX, Associate GEORGE ANTHONY RAHE, Professor Professor of Electrical Engineering of Electrical Engineering and Com- (1958); B.S., Michigan State Univ., puter Science (1965); B.S., Univ. of 1938; M.S., Univ. of Notre Dame, California at Los Angeles, 1957; 1956. M.S., 1959; Ph.D., 1965. JOHN McREYNOLDS WOZEN- CHARLES HARRY ROTHAUGE, Pro- CRAFT, Professor of Electrical En- fessor of Electrical Engineering gineering (1977); B.S., U.S. Military (1949); B.E., John Hopkins Univ., Academy, 1946; M.S., Massachusetts 1940; D. Eng., 1949. Institute of Technology, 1951; E.E., GEORGE LAWRENCE SACKMAN, 1951; Ph.D., 1957. Associate Professor of Electrical En- EMERITUS FACULTY gineering (1964); B.M.E., Univ. of Pro- Florida, 1954; B.E.E., 1957; M.S.E., WILLIAM MALCOLM BAUER, 1959; Ph.D. Stanford Univ., 1964. fessor Emeritus (1946); B.S., North- western Univ., 1927; E.E., 1928; ABRAHAM SHEINGOLD, Distin- M.S., Harvard Univ., 1929; D.Sc, guished Professor of Electronics 1940. (1946); B.S., College of the City of New York, 1936; M.S., 1937. JESSE GERALD CHANEY, Professor Emeritus (1944); A.B., Southwestern DONALD ALAN STENTZ, Associate Univ., 1924; A.M., Univ. of Texas, Professor of Electronics (1949); B.S., 1930. Duke Univ., 1949; M.S. Naval Post- graduate School, 1958. PAUL EUGENE COOPER, Professor Emeritus (1946); B.S., Univ. of ROBERT DENNY STRUM, Associate Texas, 1937; M.S., 1939. Professor of Electrical Engineering (1958); B.S., Rose Polytechnic Insti- EDWARD MARKHAM GARDNER, tute, 1946; M.S., Univ. of Santa Professor Emeritus (1948); B.S., Clara, 1964. Univ. of London, 1923; M.S., California Institute of Technology, TIEN-FAN TAO, Professor of Electrical 1938. Engineering (1971); B.S., National Taiwan Univ., 1955; M.S., Univ. of GEORGE ROBERT GIET, Distin- Pennsylvania, 1958; Ph.D., Harvard guished Professor Emeritus (1925); Univ., 1963. A.B., Columbia Univ., 1921; E.E., 1923. GEORGE JULIUS THALER, Distin- guished Professor of Electrical En- RAYMOND KENNETH HOUSTON, Professor Emeritus (1946); B.S.,

115 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

Worcester Polytechnic Institute, 1938; Engineering degree shall be required for M.S., 1939. the degree of Master of Science in Elec- trical Engineering. The academic records ROBERT LEE MILLER, Professor of those students who do not complete the Emeritus (1946); B.Ed., Illinois State requirements for the Bachelor of Science Normal Univ., 1936; M.S., Univ. of in Electrical Engineering degree at the Illinois, 1941. Naval Postgraduate School will be evalu- RAYMOND PATRICK MURRAY, As- ated by the Department of Electrical En- sociate Professor Emeritus (1947); gineering to determine what additional B.S., Kansas State College, 1937; undergraduate courses need to be taken to M.S., Brown Univ., 1953. qualify for entry into the graduate pro- CHARLES BENJAMIN OLER, Profes- gram. Of the 40 quarter hours a minimum sor Emeritus (1946); B.S., Univ. of of four courses, of at least 12 hours must Pennsylvania, 1927; M.S., 1930; be in the course sequence 4000-4999. At D.Eng., John Hopkins Univ., 1950. least 30 hours shall be required in Electri- cal Engineering subjects. An acceptable WILLIAM CONLEY SMITH, Professor thesis must be presented. Approval of all Emeritus B.S., Ohio Univ., (1946); programs must be obtained from the 1935; M.S., 1939. Chairman, Department of Electrical En- JOHN BENJAMIN TURNER, JR., As- gineering. sociate Professor Emeritus (1955); 2. An acceptable thesis for the En- B.S., Univ. of Arkansas, 1941; M.S., gineer's Degree may be accepted as meet- Univ. of California at Berkeley, 1948. ing the thesis requirements of the Mas- ALLEN EDGAR VIVELL, Dean ter's Degree. However, the thesis re- quirement for the Master's Degree may Emeritus (1945); B.E., Johns Hopkins be waived upon the approval of the Univ., 1927; D.Eng., 1937. Chairman of the Department under the RICHARD CARVEL HENSEN following circumstances: WHEELER, Professor Emeritus a. The student has been admitted to (1929); B.E., Johns Hopkins Univ., the Engineer's Degree, Doctor of En- 1923; D. Eng., Rensselaer Polytechnic gineering or Doctor of Philosophy De- Institute, 1926. gree program. b. The student has completed four *The year of joining the Postgraduate School (4) 4000 level courses of a minimum Faculty is indicated in parentheses. of twelve (12) credits over and above the course requirements for the Mas- DEPARTMENTAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ter's Degree. DEGREES IN ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING MASTER OF SCIENCE IN APPLIED SCIENCE In addition to meeting the minimum specific academic requirement for these 1. Students with acceptable academic degrees as given below, candidates must backgrounds may enter a program leading also satisfy the general degree require- to the degree of Master of Science in ments as determined by the Academic Applied Science. The program of each Council. student seeking this degree must contain a minimum of 20 quarter hours in electrical engineering at the graduate level, includ- MASTER OF SCIENCE IN ELECTRICAL ing work at the 4000 level. Additionally, ENGINEERING the program must contain a minimum of 12 graduate quarter hours in an approved 1. A minimum of 40 quarter hours of sequence of courses outside the Electrical graduate work beyond the requirements Engineering Department. A total for the Bachelor of Science in Electrical minimum of 12 quarter hours at the 4000

116 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

level plus an acceptable thesis is required. ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING This program provides depth and diver- LABORATORY sity through specially arranged course se- quences to meet the needs of the Navy The Electrical Engineering Department Labora- and the interests of the individual. The tories have excellent facilities in almost all phases Department Chairman's approval is re- of modern electrical engineering. At present the quired for all programs leading to this de- laboratories are divided into Communications and gree. Navigation, Microwaves and Antennas, Radar and Electronic Countermeasures, Signal Processing and Digital Systems, General Measurements, ELECTRICAL ENGINEER Solid State and Thin Films, Lasers, Control Sys- tems, Sonar, Energy Conversion, and Bio-

1. Students with acceptable academic Engineering Laboratories. There are extensive ser- backgrounds may enter a program leading vice facilities including a calibration laboratory to the degree Electrical Engineer. Nor- where a continuous program of calibration and mally this program is of three years' dura- maintenance of laboratory instruments is carried tion. Candidates for the Engineer's de- out. gree are selected during their second year In addition to the usual experimental and in- in residence. structional type laboratories, status as a Naval 2. A minimum of 80 graduate course facility enables the Department to utilize a number credits are required for the award of the of modern systems as adjuncts to the laboratory. Engineer's degree. Of these at least 30 These include communications, radar, telemetry, hours are to be in courses in the sequence sonar, countermeasures and navigational systems. 4000-4999. An acceptable thesis must be Students in the Department have access to the completed. A departmental advisor will Computer Center (IBM/360 System) as well as the be appointed for consultation in the Computer Laboratory which is a school-wide di- development of a program of study. Ap- rect access computer complex where each student proval of all programs must be obtained may program and operate the computer system for from the Chairman Department of Elec- the solution of his own problem. The facility in- trical Engineering. cludes a medium size digital computer, two high performance input-output display units, and a gen-

eral purpose hybrid/analog computer; all inte- DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY grated into a single system. These facilities sup-

AND port a wide range of research and instruction in DOCTOR OF ENGINEERING digital and hybrid computation and simulation. As a part of the laboratory facility, there are

The Department of Electrical Engineer- generous research spaces available for thesis stu- ing has an active program leading to the dents to conduct their research problems on an in- degrees of Doctor of Philosophy and Doc- dividual basis. tor of Engineering. Areas of special strength in the department are signal pro- BIOENGINEERING/BIOMEDICAL STUDIES cessing, communications systems, elec- tronic systems and devices and control The Department of Electrical Engineering has theory. Joint programs with other de- responsibility for the biology courses listed below. partments are possible. A noteworthy fea- These courses together with certain ones offered ture of the program leading to the Doctor by other departments can be included, as appropri- of Engineering degree is that the student's ate, in the curriculum of a student interested in a research is conducted away from the bioengineering/biomedical program as part of his Naval Postgraduate School in a cooperat- studies toward a degree. ing laboratory or other installation of the Federal Government. The degree re- Upper Division or Graduate Courses quirements are as outlined under the gen- eral school requirements for the Doctor's EE 3800 CELLULAR AND MOLECULAR degree. BIOLOGY (4-0). The fundamental principles of

117 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

the living cell covered from a biochemical and project type course. Its exact content will vary with biophysical standpoint. The structure and role of the interests of the instructors and students. How-

macromolecules in the cell is studied; in particular ever, examples of models of biological systems, as DNA, RNA and their relations to cell function, to reported in the current literature, will be studied, the synthesis of proteins, and to genetics. PRE- and, as laboratory projects, one or more new mod-

REQUISITES: CH 3401 , and a course in probabil- els will be devised and analyzed, using computer

ity and statistics. techniques. PREREQUISITES: EE 3801, EE 4840, EE4414, or equivalent. A stochastic model- EE 3801 HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY (5-0). A com- ing course such as OA 3704 is desirable. prehensive course in mammalian physiology, em- phasizing human functional aspects. PREREQUI- DEFENSE COMMUNICATIONS SITE: EE 3800. Upper Division Course INSTRUMENTA- EE 3820 BIOELECTRONIC CO 2111 DEFENSE TELECOMMUNICATIONS TION (3-3). The application of electronic methods ORGANIZATION AND PLANNING (4-0). Or- to biological and medical measurements is treated ganization and functions of Department of Defense in The special problems involved, such as depth. Telecommunications Systems, including com- design of electrodes and input amplifiers, and the mand and control functions. A study of the Na- conversion of data to meaningful parameters are tional Communications System, Defense Com- studied. The laboratory includes actual measure- munications Systems, and the complete Naval ment procedures, using living material. PRE- communications organization, including the Naval REQUISITES: EE 3801, EE 2103, EE 2212 or Security Group Integration of the various organiza- equivalent. tional systems is emphasized. The role of com-

munications in the Naval Planning process is Graduate Courses studied as well as an introduction to communica-

EE 4840 NEURAL SIGNAL PROCESSING AND tions planning. Course is structured to include CONTROL (3-3). This course extends the cover- supportive field trips to nearby telecommunica- age of neurophysiology beyond that given in EE tions facilities and seminars on subjects of current 3801 Human Physiology. Lecture material de- telecommunications interest. scribes the basic structure and performance of neural circuits, especially those involved in multi- Upper Division or Graduate Course synaptic reflex arcs, including inhibitory action, and those involved in muscular control. Associa- CO 3112 INTEGRATED DEFENSE TELE- tive and integrative functions of the fore brain are COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS (4-0). Brief re- studied. The laboratory part consists of experi- view of Defense Tactical and Strategic Integrated ments using living material and projects where Telecommunications Systems followed by in depth basic models of neural processes would be set up analysis of technical and managerial problems as- and their performance measured, using real time sociated with current and programmed automated computer processing as appropriate. PREREQUI- telecommunications systems. Course entails field SITES: EE 3801, EE 3802, EE 2103, EE 2212, CS trips to telephone, satellite and automatic tele- 2700 or equivalent. communications switching centers in conjunction with seminars on current supportive telecommuni- EE 4880 ADVANCED TOPICS IN HUMAN cation topics. PREREQUISITES: CO 2111, MN PHYSIOLOGY (4-0). Recent advances in the 3105, MN 3170, MN 3183. U.S. Citizenship and study of human physiological systems are pre- SECRET Clearance are required. sented. The areas covered include circulation and heart, renal function, metabolic interrelations, en- ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING docrine systems and their control, immunology, and recent research in neurophysiology and the EE 0110 REVIEW OF BASIC ELECTRICAL special senses. PREREQUISITES: EE 3801, EE CONCEPTS (5-0). Topics include the current- 4840. voltage relations in simple circuits, circuit laws and theorems, elementary AC circuit concepts, EE 4890 COMPUTER MODELING OF BIOLOG- physical definitions of circuit constants and laws

ICAL SYSTEMS (2-4). This is a seminar and of electron motion. A six week refresher course.

118 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

EE 0810 THESIS RESEARCH (0-0). Every stu- and the transfer function concept are included. dent conducting thesis research will enroll in this Primarily for scientific and non-electrical en- course. gineering curricula. PREREQUISITE: MA 1100 (may be concurrent). EE 0951 SEMINAR (0-1). Lectures on subjects of current interest will be presented by invited guests EE 2107 INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRICAL from other universities, government laboratories, ENGINEERING (4-2). The first in a sequence of and from industry, as well as by faculty members courses designed for the Weapon Systems of the Naval Postgraduate School. Technology curriculum. Electrical quantities; basic circuit elements; simple circuits; circuit laws; EE 0960 THESIS TOPICS SEMINAR (0-1). In- circuit analysis; electronic building blocks. PRE- troductory presentations by NPS faculty members REQUISITE: Calculus. of current research projects. Intended to inform first-year students of potential thesis areas. EE 2108 LINEAR SYSTEMS ANALYSIS (4-2). The second in a sequence of courses designed for Upper Division Courses the Weapons Systems Technology curriculum. Formulation of system models including state EE 2101 BASIC CIRCUIT THEORY (3-2). An equations, transfer functions and system diagrams; introduction to electrical engineering circuit analytical methods for solving system equations; theory; concepts of charge, current, voltage, en- digital and analog computer solution of system ergy and power; Sources, resistance, capacitance models; frequency response analysis. PREREQ- and inductance; Kirchhoff's current and voltage UISITES: EE 2107, MA 3139 or equivalent (may laws; loop and nodal analysis; network theorems. be taken concurrently). PREREQUISITES: Integral calculus and MA 2045 (may be concurrent). EE 2111 ENGINEERING FUNDAMENTALS FOR AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERS (4-2). An EE 2102 CIRCUIT ANALYSIS (4-2). Solution of intensive course covering the fundamentals of network equations using the Laplace transform Electrical Engineering including both circuits and method; network functions, poles and zeros and electronic devices for students in Aeronautical En- stability; sinusoidal steady-state analysis; fre- gineering. PREREQUISITES: MA 2047, MA quency response; Fourier series; network 3130, MA 3173 or equivalent. theorems; two-part networks. PREREQUISITES: EE 2101 or equivalent. EE 2114 COMMUNICATIONS THEORY (4-0). In this introductory course the following concepts EE 2103 LINEAR SYSTEMS ANALYSIS (4-2). and their mathematical formulations are presented:

Mathematical modeling; convolution; state vari- power spectral density; matched filters; sampling; able equations and solution; signal flow graphs; pulse encoding methods; frequency and time mul- simulation of linear systems on digital and analog tiplexing; amplitude, frequency and phase modula- computers. PREREQUISITES: EE 2102; different- tion. In addition, a comparison of modulation ial equations; complex variable theory and FOR- methods is presented. PREREQUISITES: EE 2103 TRAN (may be concurrent). and EE 2212 or equivalent.

EE 2104-2105 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING EE 2121 CIRCUIT FUNDAMENTALS (4-2). An FUNDAMENTALS III (3-2) and (4-2). The phys- introduction to basic electrical circuit theory for ical principles of electrical engineering are pre- students in Avionics curriculum. The course topics sented, followed by basic circuit analysis; topics include the circuit concept and circuit elements, covered are power and response in electrical cir- power and energy; basic circuit laws and theorems; cuits including single phase and three phase sys- steady state solutions; state equations and trajec- tems; electronic principles are introduced. Elec- tories. The course may be taught in the self in- tronic devices and their models are considered; structed mode. PREREQUISITES: Differential amplifiers and principles of feedback leading to the and integral calculus (may be taken concurrently). system concept are presented; magnetic circuits and electromagnetic to mechanical energy conver- EE 2122 LINEAR SYSTEM FUNDAMENTALS sion principles are studied; the Laplace transform (4-2). A continuation of EE 2121 for Avionic en-

119 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

gineers. Topics include Laplace transform; and electrical properties and charge flow mechanisms time solutions network theroems and parameters; of semiconductor materials; properties of p-n junc- matrix methods; Fourier transform methods; con- tions with emphasis on the role in diodes and bipo-

volution, signal flow graphs; simulation of linear lar transistors; application of diodes in circuits; systems on analog and digital computers. The static bipolar transistor models; MOS and junction course may be taught in the self-instructed mode. FET's. Topics include analysis of linear PREREQUISITES: EE 2121, differential equa- amplifiers; determination of device parameters; tions and FORTRAN. design of biasing circuits; multistage amplifiers; properties of common amplifier configurations;

EE 2151 CIRCUIT EQUATIONS - A REVIEW feedback amplifiers; tuned amplifiers; and power (1-0). The circuit concept, signals, sources and amplifiers. PREREQUISITES: EE 2101 (may be circuit elements; Kirchhoffs laws; formulation of concurrent) or equivalent. loop, nodal and state equations. PREREQUISITE: A proven background in electrical engineering, EE 2213 ADVANCED REVIEW OF ELEC- with consent of Instructor. TRONIC ENGINEERING FUNDAMENTALS (4-3). Review of semiconductor devices and cir- EE 2152 CIRCUIT ANALYSIS IN THE FRE- cuit configurations; linear amplifiers and their QUENCY DOMAIN - A REVIEW (1-0) Solution analysis; multistage amplifiers and frequency re- of circuit equations by the Laplace transform sponse; power amplifiers and distortion effects, method, the s-domain and s-domain circuit equa- feedback amplifiers; stability effects and oscilla- tions; s-domain network functions; sinusoidal tion. PREREQUISITES: Degree in EE and per- steady-state analysis; sinusoidal network func- mission of Instructor. tions; superposition, Thevenin's theorem and Nor- ton's theorem. PREREQUISITE: EE 2151. EE 2216 PULSE AND DIGITAL CIRCUITS (4-3). The topics studied include basic waveform EE 2153 SOME TECHNIQUES OF NETWORK characteristics and shaping techniques, wide-band ANALYSIS - A REVIEW (1-0). Fourier series; linear amplifiers, characteristics of electronic frequency response; topology and matrix methods; switching devices, clipping, clamping and switch- two ports; circuit theorems, AC power. PREREQ- ing circuits, multivibrator and trigger circuits, UISITE: EE2152. time-based generators, logic circuits, counting and timing circuits. PREREQUISITES: EE 2212 or

EE 2154 INTRODUCTION TO SYSTEMS - A equivalent. REVIEW (1-0). The signal flow graph; state equa- tion review; solution of state equations; initial EE 2217 COMMUNICATION CIRCUITS (4-3). condition response, natural modes and stability; Electronic circuits used for the transmission and forced response and transfer functional relation- reception of analog and digital signals. Topics in- ships between transfer functions, state equations clude oscillators, modulators, and demodulators, time-domain convolution and signal flow graphs. frequency converters, and special-purpose PREREQUISITE: EE 2153. amplifiers. PREREQUISITES: EE2216, EE2114.

EE 2155 ADDITIONAL TOPICS — CIRCUITS AND SYSTEMS (1-0). Topics chosen from among EE 2225 PULSE AND DIGITAL CIRCUITS the following: modelling, discrete circuits and sys- (2-1). A course to prepare the student to under- tems; Fourier integral (transfer); convolution in the stand pulse systems in radar and electromagnetic time and frequency domains; stability. PREREQ- warfare. Included are wave-shaping and timing UISITE: EE2154. circuits, as well as basic logic circuits and con- cepts. Devices and circuits discussed include EE 2156 CIRCUITS & SYSTEMS LABORA- linear and non-linear wave shaping circuits using TORY (0-2). Laboratory projects to support EE diodes and op-amps, gates, flip-flops, registers, 2151 thru EE2155. counters, displays, decoders, multiplexers, A/D and D/A converters, sample-and-hold, and pulse EE 2211-2212 ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING stretchers. Laboratory experiments reinforce and FUNDAMENTALS I-II (4-2) and (4-3). A general extend concepts presented in the lectures. PRE- introduction to electronic devices and circuits; the REQUISITE: EE2721.

120 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

EE 2311 PRINCIPLES OF ENERGY CONVER- digital-data transmission theory. PREREQUI- SION (3-2). An introduction to the principles of SITE: EE2421. energy conversion. Topics presented are ther- moelectric, thermionic, photovoltaic, elec- EE 2424 SIGNAL TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS trochemical and electromagnetic methods of en- (4-2). This course covers the elements of electrical ergy conversion. PREREQUISITES: EE 2102, EE energy transmission as applied to communications.

221 1, or equivalent, permission of Instructor. The principles of electromagnetic waves are repre- sented, guided waves on transmission lines and EE 2411 CONTROL SYSTEMS (3-3). Introduc- waveguides are studied. The radiated field in tion to the analysis and design of linear feedback space, antennas and propagation are covered, and control systems by means of s-plane and frequency a representative system, such as a satellite com-

response methods. Analysis using state variables munications system is studied. PREREQUISITE: for continuous and discrete systems; design using EE 2423 (may be concurrent).

frequency and time domain performance indices is discussed. Laboratory work includes simulation EE 2621 INTRODUCTION TO FIELDS AND

using analog and digital computers; testing and WAVES (4-0). Static field theory is developed and evaluation of physical systems. PREREQUISIT- applied to boundary value problems. Time- varying ES: EE 2103 and CS 2700 or their equivalent. Maxwell equations are developed and solutions to the wave equations are presented. Additional top-

EE 24 1 8 CONTROL SYSTEMS (2- 1 ) . This course ics include skin effect, reflection of waves and develops the basic tools of the control systems en- radiation. PREREQUISITE: EE 2103 or equiva-

gineer. The applications to electronic warfare are lent. emphasized in the examples and laboratory exper- iments. The dynamics for a radar control system, a EE 2622 ELECTROMAGNETIC ENGINEERING missile seeker head tracking system and missiles (3-1). A continuation of EE 2621. Topics include are investigated. Basic topics are introduced such transmission lines, waveguides and cavity re- as signal flow graphs and system step and fre- sonators. Applications are presented in the labora- quency response characteristics, and digital sys- tory. PREREQUISITE: EE 2621 or equivalent. tems theory as used in radar tracking and command guided and semi-active homing missiles. PRE- EE 2623 ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY RE- REQUISITES: MA 3139, SECRET clearance and VIEW (4-1). A comprehensive review of basic U.S. Citizenship. electromagnetic theory intended for those students

having previous education in this subject area. EE 2421 INTRODUCTION TO COMMUNICA- This course will provide accelerated coverage of TIONS TECHNOLOGY (4-2). The first of a se- those topics in the basic undergraduate sequence quence of five courses designed for the Telecom- EE 2621/2622. Topics include experimental laws munications Specialist. An introduction is given to and Maxwell's equations. Maxwell's equations are

the basic elements of the communications system, applied to problems in electrostatics and magnetos- followed by pertinent principles of electrical cir- tatics, plane wave propagation, TEM lines and cuits and fundamentals of electronics devices. cavities, TE and TM modes in rectangular and cir- PREREQUISITE: A course in calculus. cular waveguides and cavities and radiation from elementary sources. Transient and state circuit EE 2422-2423 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS properties of transmission lines are also covered. I-II (4-3). A continuation of EE 2421. The topics PREREQUISITES: Consent of Instructor; previ- covered are: the general analog communications ous background in electromagnetic theory. systems with identification of subsystems; power conversion, oscillators, modulation and demodula- EE 2624 ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY (4-1). tion, special purpose circuits, elementary com- This course covers the experimental laws of elec- munication theory. A study of digital communica- tromagnetic theory and the development of Max- tion systems. The general concepts of digital sig- well's equations. Maxwell's equations are then naling are covered, followed by a consideration of utilized in the study of plane waves, transmission elementary switching and shaping circuits, logical lines, wave guides, cavity resonators and elemen- processing and logic circuits, the digital computer tary radiation. Laboratory experiments dealing as a communications sub-system, and elementary with high frequency components and mea-

121 ,

ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

surements reinforce and extend the concepts pre- EE 3263 INTEGRATED ELECTRONICS (3-3). sented in the lectures. PREREQUISITES: MA Fabrication of bipolar and MOS ICs. Digital bipo- 2181 and EE 2721 or equivalent. lar and MOS MSI and LSIs: multiplexers, decod- ers, memories, etc. Linear ICs: operational EE 2721 INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRONICS amplifiers, wave generators, phase locked loops, SYSTEMS (4-1). A first course in electronic sys- etc. Discussion of recent developments in ICs.

tems for the ASW curriculum. Emphasis is on PREREQUISITE: EE 2216. functional aspects of linear and non-linear opera- tions on continuous and discrete signals. Topics EE 3311 ENERGY CONVERSION (3-2). A con- include feedback amplifiers, linear circuits, reac- sideration and application of principles used in tive elements, non-linear elements, electronic conversion of energy to the electric form. Devices logic and computation, and input/output and mem- utilizing these principles are analyzed and include ory devices. PREREQUISITE: Mathematics thermoelectric, thermionic, electrochemical and through calculus; CO-REQUISITE: MA 2129. others. A term paper based on library research in

the energy conversion field is required. PREREQ- EE 2810 DIGITAL MACHINES (3-3). Basic prin- UISITES: EE 2102 or equivalent, EE 2211, per- ciples of digital system design with emphasis upon mission of the Instructor. the organization and programming of simple com- puters. Elements of Boolean algebra and logic de- EE 3312 ELECTROMAGNETIC MACHINES sign. Storage organization and control. Input- (3-4). The model oriented approach to the analysis output data flow. Relations of machine logic to of rotating machines and amplifiers is utilized to program design. Laboratory sessions are devoted obtain their dynamic and steady state characteris- to study of computer logical elements, processing, tics. DC motors, generators and control machines storage, and I/O units. PREREQUISITE: CS 2700. are analyzed. PREREQUISITE: EE 2103 or equiv- alent.

Upper Division or Graduate Courses EE 3314 DISTRIBUTION AND CONVERSION OF ELECTRICAL ENERGY (3-2). An introduc- EE 3111 AVIONIC SYSTEMS (4-2). A course tion to the steady state and dynamic operation of designed to provide as much background as possi- electric motors and generators. General trans- ble in avionic systems for aeronautical engineers. former principles. A ship's power distribution sys-

Topics included are: radar principles, avionic tem and its protection is considered. Polyphase computers, laser and infrared devices, sonar, navi- circuits and symmetrical components are intro- gation systems, systems engineering. PREREQ- duced as needed. PREREQUISITE: EE 2105. UISITE: EE 2111. EE 3410 CONTINUOUS AND DIGITAL CON- EE 3118 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS (4-2). TROL SYSTEMS (4-2). The third in a sequence of The fourth in a sequence of courses designed for courses designed for the Weapon Systems the Weapon Systems Technology curriculum. Technology curriculum. Feedback; performance Modulation systems, analog and digital types; measures; root locus methods; systems with digital complete modulation systems incorporating pulse controllers; the matrix approach to analysis and and pulse code schemes; noise in communication design. PREREQUISITES: EE 2108, MA 3139 or systems; error detection and correction; radar sys- equivalent. tems. PREREQUISITES: EE 2107, MA 3139 or equivalent. EE 3413 FUNDAMENTALS OF AUTOMATIC CONTROL (3-3). A course in the fundamentals of EE 3215 MICROWAVE DEVICES (4-2). Elec- automatic control theory and practice, primarily tron tube and solid state microwave devices are for nonelectrical engineering curricula. Topics in- studied. Klystrons, magnetrons, traveling wave clude analysis and design of linear feedback con-

tubes, microwave transistors, tunnel diodes, varac- trol systems using frequency and time-domain tors, bulk effect, quantum electronic and other cur- techniques. Performance indices are discussed rent devices are among those included. PREREQ- with application to the broad field of controls.

UISITES: EE 22 1 2 , EE 2622 (or their equivalent) Laboratory work includes computer simulation and

or permission of Instructor. test and evaluation of physical systems. PRE-

122 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

REQUISITES: MA 3121, EE 2105 or equivalent, modern systems point of view on a graduate level or permission of Instructor. to those students who do not elect to take an exten- sive EE sequence. Topics covered are: noise and EE 3420 ENGINEERING FUNDAMENTALS OF its Statistical Analysis; Noise Passing Through ELECTRO OPTICS (3-1). An introduction to ele- Systems; Principles of Detection and Measure- ments of electro-optic systems for engineering stu- ment; Factors Influencing Electromagnetic Trans- dents. Elements such as lasers, light emitting di- mission; Processing Signals for Maximum SNR; odes, infrared sources and detectors are studied to Theory of Detection; Topics in Extraction of In- characterize their operating parameters and limita- formation; Applications of these Principles to tions. The influence of other elements such as lens Radar Systems. PREREQUISITES: Electromagne- systems and properties of the propagation channel tics sequence through PH 2352. are also studied. PREREQUISITES: PH 2641 and EE 2212 or equivalent. EE 3625 ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION, SCATTERING AND PROPAGATION (4-2). This EE 3422 MODERN COMMUNICATIONS (3-2). course covers the fundamentals of antennas used in A study of modern communications trends, with the VLF through the microwave portion of the emphasis on theoretical study of current and pro- electromagnetic spectrum. Scattering and propaga- posed systems. The topics covered include multi- tion in this part of the spectrum is also discussed, plex systems, coding, and pseudo-random noise as are those elements of electromagnetic compati- modulation systems. PREREQUISITE: EE 3571. bility which relate to radiation. Laboratory exer- cises relating to pattern and impedance measure- EE 3425 COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS ment, and use of computer programs further en- ANALYSIS (3-3). The final course in the Com- hance the student's understanding of those con- munications Management sequence. The objective cepts presented in the lectures. PREREQUISITE: is to look at the overall Communications System EE 2624. with particular attention to system aspects. Some of the subjects considered are: underlying com- EE 3631 ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION munication theory, multiplexing methods, evalua- AND COMPATIBILITY (4-2). This course covers tion and selection of systems, modern trends in wire and aperature antenna elements and arrays for systems. PREREQUISITE: EE 2424. communication and radar systems. Basic compati- bility fundamentals are also discussed. While es- EE 3471 GUIDANCE AND NAVIGATION (3-2). sentially stressing engineering, this course applies A study of the systems involved in guidance and field theory concepts developed in earlier course to navigation. Topics include LORAN, OMEGA, practical systems. PREREQUISITE: EE 2622 or NAVSAT, and inertial navigation systems. Vari- equivalent. ous missiles and their guidance techniques are analyzed. PREREQUISITES: EE 2411 and EE 3631. EE 3652 MICROWAVE CIRCUITS AND MEA- SUREMENTS (3-2). A continuation of EE 2622. EE 3571 STOCHASTIC ANALYSIS OF SIG- Waveguides and cavities are discussed in detail

NALS (4-1). Fundamental concepts necessary for and perturbation theory is introduced. Other topics handling non-deterministic signals and noise in are selected from coupled lines, periodic circuits, communication and control systems. Topics in- strip line techniques, scattering parameters, and clude properties of random variables, statistical ferrities as well as topics from the current litera- averages, autocorrelation and power spectral den- ture. Microwave measurement techniques will be sity, transform relations, stationarity and ergodic- presented in the laboratory. PREREQUISITE: EE ity, noise models. The laboratory exercises illus- 2622 or equivalent. trate the concepts and principles using real signals. PREREQUISITE: EE 2114. EE 3671 PROPAGATION (3-0). Properties of the earth and its atmosphere and their effect on EE 3575 SYSTEMS ASPECTS OF ELEC- radiowave propagation from ELF through millime- TROMAGNETIC SIGNAL TRANSMISSIONS ter wave-lengths. Topics include noise, scatter, (4-0). This course is in the graduate sequence of coverage predictions and frequency selection. Use the WS curriculum. It is designed to present a is made of engineering nomograms and computer

123 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

methods. PREREQUISITE: EE 2622 or equiva- TEMS (3-3). Techniques for the analysis of non-

lent. linear and discrete systems. Phase plane and de-

scribing function analysis. Laboratory work in- EE 3714 INTRODUCTION TO SIGNALS AND cludes analog and digital simulation. PREREQUI- NOISE (4-1). A course in the analysis of signals SITE: EE2411. and noise. The topics include signal and noise pa- rameters, linear systems response, modulation, EE 4414 STOCHASTIC CONTROL THEORY sampling, correlation, and coding. The last week (2-2). Statistical and probabilistic concepts are of the course requires participation in an ASW- applied to the development of optimal methods for

related group project. This course is designed for estimation, prediction, and identification. These the ASW curriculum. PREREQUISITES: EE methods are applied to the stochastic control prob- 2721, PS 3411, MA 3139. lem. PREREQUISITES: EE 2411 and EE 3571.

EE 3812 SWITCHING THEORY AND LOGIC EE 4415 ALBEGRAIC METHODS IN CON- DESIGN (3-2). Models for logic elements and TROL THEORY (4-0). This course treats ad- networks. Equivalence and machine minimization. vanced concepts in root-locus theory including Threshold logic. Synthesis of combination and se- graphical and analytical (algebraic) design of com-

quential networks. State assignment. Applications pensation. Extension is made to two-parameter to digital machine design. Laboratory work is analysis and design. The Mitrovic-Siljak relation- oriented around a project in logic network design. ships are developed, leading to the coefficient PREREQUISITE: EE 2810. plane and parameter-plane methods. Stability analysis, adjustment, design and synthesis using EE 3822 ENGINEERING APPLICATIONS OF parameter-plane methods are treated in detail. Ex- COMPUTERS (3-3). Use of digital, analog, and tensions to multiparameter problems are discussed. hybrid computing machines in various application PREREQUISITE: EE2411. areas, e.g., systems design, parameter optimiza- tion, adaptive control, data acquisition and filter- EE 4416 TOPICS IN MODERN CONTROL ing, signal processing, biomedical instrumenta- THEORY (3-0). A course intended to acquaint the tion. Special techniques for real-time processing student with recent developments in control as and simulation. Laboratory work is conducted in found in the research publications of the profes- small groups and involves application studies sion. Topics are selected at the direction of the using the various types of computers. PREREQ- instructor and may include such subjects as Adap- UISITE: EE2810. tive Systems, Digital and Hybrid Simulation, Fi- nite State Automata, Learning Systems, Lyapunov Graduate Courses Methods, Popov Stability, Sensitivity, etc. PRE- REQUISITE: Consent of the Instructor. EE 4121 ADVANCED NETWORK THEORY (3-2). Topology. Circuit formulation, nonlinear EE 4417 OPTIMAL CONTROL (4-0). The opti- modeling, and computer solutions. Circuit sen- mal control problem is treated using the calculus of sitivity models. Concepts and tests for passivity, variations. Pontryagin's maximum principle, and activity, causality, and stability. Driving point dynamic programming. PREREQUISITE: EE synthesis. Transfer function properties and synthe- 2411. sis. PREREQUISITES: EE 2103 or equivalent and EE2211. EE 4418 SHIP CONTROL SYSTEMS (3-2). Theory of motion of ships. Basic ship control sys- EE 4410 MATHEMATICAL MODELS AND tems; steering, control roll stabilization, boiler SIMULATION FOR CONTROL SYSTEMS control, loops, speed and propulsion controls. Sea (3-2). Modeling of linear and nonlinear systems. states and their effects. Performance objectives Modeling concepts and techniques. Philosophy of and performance specifications. Models. Simula- model studies. Verification of the model and its tion studies. PREREQUISITE: EE 2411. parameters. Design studies using computer mod- els. PREREQUISITE: EE 2411. EE 4422 ELECTRO-OPTIC SYSTEMS EN- GINEERING (3-1). Analysis and design of EE 4412 NONLINEAR AND DISCRETE SYS- electro-optic systems such as laser communica-

124 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

tions, optical information processing, infared im- involving radar systems are considered. Labora- aging and detection systems, laser-aided guidance. tory sessions deal with basic pulse radar systems

Emphasis is on the design of systems to meet spe- from which the advanced techniques have devel- cifications and analysis of existing systems to un- oped, with performance measurement methods, derstand the design philosophy. PREREQUISIT- automatic tracking systems, pulse compression, ES: EE 3420 or EE 4421. and the measurement of radar cross section of targets. PREREQUISITES: EE 4716, EE 3625 EE 4423 ELECTRO-OPTIC SYSTEMS AND (may be taken concurrently). SECRET clearance COUNTERMEASURES (3-1). A study of military and U.S. Citizenship. applications of electro-optic systems, IR and EO missile seekers, laser designators, optical surveil- EE 4451 SONAR SYSTEMS ENGINEERING lance, high energy laser systems, laser communi- (4-2). A study of the theory and engineering prac-

cations and laser radar. Emphasis is on system ap- tices pertaining to passive and active sonar sys- plications, countermeasures and counter- tems. This study emphasizes the research and countermeasures. PREREQUISITES: PH 3271 or development of underwater acoustic surveillance EE 4422 and SECRET clearance and U.S. Citizen- systems. The objective of the course is to deter- ship. mine how the engineering design is conditioned by the characteristics of the transmission medium as EE 4432 RADAR SYSTEMS (3-2). The principles well as the operational requirements. PREREQUI- of pulse radar systems are developed in classroom SITES: PH 4454, EE 3571, EE 2212, U.S. Citi- and laboratory exercises. Additional topics devel- zenship and SECRET clearance. oped include the radar equation, doppler systems, automatic target-tracking systems, pulse compres- EE 4452 UNDERWATER ACOUSTIC SYS- sion, and multiple-unit steerable-array radars. TEMS ENGINEERING (4-2). A study of the PREREQUISITES: EE 3571 EE 3215, and EE theory and engineering principles of underwater

2622 or equivalent. This course is intended for acoustics, communications, surveillance, and

students who do not have U.S. citizenship. navigational systems. Emphasis is placed on the

principles and problems common to all underwater EE 4433 ADVANCED RADAR SYSTEMS (3-2). acoustic systems, and the design tradeoffs that are

The radar range equation is developed in a form available to the engineer. The laboratory periods including signal integration, the effects of target are used for making engineering tests on existing cross-section, fluctuations, and propagation systems and designing, building, and testing a sys- losses. Modern techniques discussed include pulse tem or subsystem of the student's own design. compression, frequency- modulated radar, MTI, PREREQUISITES: EE 3571, EE 2212. pulse doppler systems, monopulse tracking sys- tems, multiple-unit steerable array radars, and syn- EE 4461 ADVANCED SYSTEMS ENGINEER- thetic aperture systems. Laboratory sessions deal ING (3-1). An introduction to the engineering of with basic pulse radar systems from which the ad- large scale systems. The primary aim of this course vanced techniques have developed, with pulse is to increase the student's awareness of the com- compression, and with the measurement of radar plex interactions of various disciplines and the cross section of targets. PREREQUISITES: EE main recurring problems in systems engineering. 3215, EE 3571 (may be concurrent), SECRET The class will be expected to participate in a group Clearance and U.S. Citizenship. project involving a feasibility study of a proposed new system. PREREQUISITES: EE 3571, EE EE 4434 MICROWAVE DEVICES AND 2411. RADAR (4-2). Those microwave devices most important in radar and in electronic warfare sys- EE 4473 MISSILE GUIDANCE SYSTEMS (3-1). tems are studied, including magnetrons, Principles of inertial sensors and autonavigator traveling- wave tubes, and solid-state diodes. The systems. Radar and Infared trackers. Trajectory radar range equation is developed. In addition to analysis. Steering logic' Proportional navigation. basic pulse radar, modern techniques are discussed Pursuit-evasion strategy. Control of ballistic and including doppler systems, tracking radar, pulse aerodynamic vehicles. Navigation and guidance in compression, and electronically steerable array space. Laboratory work is concerned with testing radars. Electromagnetic compatibility problems of components and evaluation by computer Simula-

125 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

tion of complete guidance system performance. ceptive countermeasures against fuses, communi- PREREQUISITES: EE 4412, EE 4433, or equiva- cations, and various radar detection and tracking lent, SECRET Clearance and U.S. Citizenship. systems are discussed. Equations for required jammer gain and power output are developed. The EE 4481 ELECTRONIC WARFARE TECH- characteristics of passive countermeasures are dis- NIQUES AND SYSTEMS (3-3). Active and pas- cussed. Other topics include anti-radiation mis- sive countermeasure techniques are considered, siles, counter-countermeasure circuits, target including signal representation, signal analysis, masking and modification, signal intercept, signal and signal interception. Important parameters of sorting, signal identification, and direction find- radar and communications systems are defined. ing. Techniques are discussed in relation to U.S., Denial and deceptive jamming techniques are con- allied, and communist block systems. Laboratory sidered along with counter measure and counter work reinforces the classroom discussions. PRE- counter-measure techniques. Signal intercept sys- REQUISITES: EE 4434, SECRET clearance, and tems are treated. Acoustic, radio-frequency, in- U.S. Citizenship. frared, and optical countermeasures are discussed. PREREQUISITES: EE 4433, U.S. Citizenship and EE 4545 PRINCIPLES OF DIGITAL FILTERS SECRET Clearance. (3-2). A course in the techniques and algorithms involved in the processing of discrete signals using

EE 4482 SIGNALS INTELLIGENCE (SIGINT) the principles of digital filtering. Included is the SYSTEMS ENGINEERING (2-2). This course approximation problem of converting frequency covers airborne, shipboard, and ground based and time domain specifications into recursive and intercept and direction finding system techniques non-recursive filter algorithms, filter synthesis and used against simple and sophisticated electro- realization, the discrete Fourier and other trans- magnetic radiation systems. Among the topics formations, extension to multidimensional signal covered are current state of the art for wideband analysis, and image processing. Other topics in- and directional antennas, wideband RF pream- cluded are error analysis, noise generation due to plifiers, scanning and chirping receivers, displays, finite precision arithmetic, and limit cycles. Prob- recorders, pattern recognizers and signal analysis lems and exercises are derived from military appli- devices. The laboratory periods are largely de- cations and include filter design, realization, and voted to the specification and block diagram of testing. PREREQUISITE: EE 21 14 or equivalent. systems to handle specified SIGINT tasks. PRE- REQUISITES: EE 4481 or permission of Instruc- EE 4572 STATISTICAL COMMUNICATION tor. U.S. Citizenship and SECRET Clearance are THEORY (3-2). Advanced statistical methods required. applied to the analysis of signals and noise in communication systems, including applications to EE 4483 PRINCIPLES OF ELECTRONIC WAR- radar and sonar. Topics include the responses of FARE (unclassified) (3-2). This course in elec- linear and non-linear systems, error measures, op- tronic warfare is intended for students who do not timal filters, decision schemes and parameter esti- have U.S. Citizenship. Particular attention is paid mation, broadband concepts, and applications to to the problems encountered in jamming radar sys- analog and digital communications. The laboratory tems, to the intelligence information needed for exercises feature real time signal processing jamming, and to anti-jamming features for radars. methods. PREREQUISITE: EE 3571. Other topics include intercept receivers, intercept probability, direction finding, confusion reflec- EE 4575 ADVANCED DIGITAL METHODS IN tors, and infrared techniques. In the laboratory, COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS (4-2). The intent basic principles are applied to jamming radar sys- of this course is to present the use of advanced tems. PREREQUISITES: EE 4432 or EE 4433'. digital methods ("state-of-the-art") in present and proposed communication systems. An essential EE 4484 ELECTRONIC WARFARE SYSTEMS part of the course will be the student's laboratory (3-2). This course covers electronic warfare in that experience with advanced hardware configured portion of the electromagnetic spectrum through into subsystems and systems. Topics will include the millimeter wavelength region. The infra red microcomputers, microprogramming (including through electro-optic region is covered in a com- devising and making programmed read-only- panion course, EE 4423. Electronic denial and de- memories, PROM's) digital encoding and decod-

126 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

ing methods including interfacing and transmis- in the areas of antenna and microwave theory will sion, digital filters, display methods, advanced be covered. These include radiation and scattering device technology including surface acoustic wave from wires and surfaces and wave propagation on (SAW) methods, new logic families (CCD, ECL, structures used in microwave integrated circuitry. PL), and various kinds of memory devices. PRE- PREREQUISITE: Consent of Instructor. REQUISITE: EE 3571. EE 4716 SIGNAL PROCESSING SYSTEMS EE 4581 INFORMATION THEORY (3-2). Con- (4-1). A study of digital, analog, and hybrid signal cepts of information measure for discrete and con- processing systems for communications, echo tinuous signals. Fundamental theorems relating to ranging, and electronic surveillance. Examples coding and channel capacity. Effects of noise on from current and proposed military systems will be information transmission. Coding methods for analyzed. This course is designed for the ASW error control in digital communication systems. curriculum. PREREQUISITE: EE 3714. Selected applications of the theory to systems. PREREQUISITE: EE 4572. EE 4823 ADVANCED DIGITAL COMPUTER SYSTEMS (3-1). A course intended to acquaint EE 4591 COMMUNICATIONS SATELLITE the student with recent developments in digital sys- SYSTEMS ENGINEERING (3-2). This course tems as found in the research publications. Topics covers communication satellite systems including are selected at the discretion of the instructor and ground based, shipboard and airborne terminals as may include such subjects as: machine organiza- well as the satellite proper. Tradeoffs in orbits, tion, computer graphics, man-machine interfaces, modulation techniques, multipurpose systems, design automation, parallel processing, etc. An in- power sources, tie-in-techniques to standard com- dividually planned laboratory program is directed munications including costs are covered. State of toward an experimental project involving state-of- the art techniques in antennas, stabilizers, anten- the-art utilization of computer hardware or nas, phase-locked-loops, and spread spectrum software. PREREQUISITE: EE 3812. techniques are included. In addition, satellite tracking and siting problems are discussed. PRE- EE 4900 SPECIAL TOPICS IN ELECTRICAL REQUISITE: EE 4572 (may be concurrent). ENGINEERING (2-0 to 5-0). Supervised study in selected areas of electrical engineering to meet the

EE 4623 ADVANCED ELECTROMAGNETIC needs of the individual student. A written report is THEORY (3-2). This course will provide an intro- required at the end of the quarter. Graded on a duction to mathematical techniques of importance Pass/Fail basis only. PREREQUISITE: Consent of in the solution of electromagnetic problems by the Department Chairman. numerical methods. Applications of Navy interest

127 ELECTRONIC WARFARE

ELECTRONIC WARFARE

The Electronic Warfare Academic *The year of joining the Postgraduate School Group has administrative responsibility Faculty is indicated in parentheses. for the academic content of the Electronic Warfare Systems Technology curriculum. MASTER OF SCIENCE IN Teaching in this multi-disciplinary pro- SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY gram is carried out by faculty members attached to the following academic de- 1 . The degree of Master of Science in partments: Computer Science, Electrical Systems Technology will be awarded at Engineering, Mathematics, Meteorology, the completion of a multidisciplinary pro- National Security Affairs, Operations Re- gram, Curriculum 595, satisfying the fol- search, and Physics and Chemistry. lowing degree requirements: Members of the Academic Group are: a. The Master of Science in Systems Technology requires a minimum of 45 quarter hours of graduate level

work of which at least 1 5 hours must DAVID BOYSEN HOISINGTON, Pro- represent courses at the 4000 level. fessor of Electronics; Chairman Graduate courses in at least four dif- (1947)*; B.S., Massachusetts Institute ferent academic disciplines must be of Technology, 1940; M.S., Univ. of included, and in three disciplines, a Pennsylvania, 1941. course at the 4000 level must be in- EUGENE CASSON CRITTENDEN, cluded. JR., Distinguished Professor of b. An approved sequence of at Physics (1953); B.A., Cornell Univ., least three courses constituting ad- 1934; Ph.D., 1938. vanced specialization in one area must be included. JOHN NORVELL DYER, Professor of c. In addition to the 45 hours of Physics (1961); B.A., Univ. of course credit, an acceptable thesis California at Berkeley, 1956; Ph.D., must be completed. 1960. JEFFREY BRUCE KNORR, Associate SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY Professor of Electrical Engineering

(1970); B.S., Pennsylvania State ST 0002 SEMINAR (0-1). Special lectures and Univ., 1963; M.S., 1964; Ph.D., Cor- discussion of matters related to the EW program. nell Univ., 1970. PREREQUISITE: SECRET clearance. WILLIAM REESE, Professor of Physics (1963); B.A., Reed College, 1958; ST 08 10 THESIS RESEARCH/GROUP PROJECT (0-1). in the Technology cur- M.S., Univ. of Illinois, 1960; Ph.D., Students Systems 1962. ricula will enroll in this course which consists of an individual thesis or a group project involving sev- NORMAN FLOYD SCHNEIDEWIND, eral students and faculty. Professor of Information Science and Computer Science (1971); B.S.E.E., ST 3020 ELECTRONIC WARFARE COM- Univ. of California at Berkeley, 1951; PUTER APPLICATIONS (3-2). Application of Univ. of Southern Califor- M.B.A., digital and analog techniques to the recording, nia, 1970; 1960; M.S.O.R. (ENGR), processing, display, and interpretation of elec- D.B.A., 1966. tronic warfare signals and data. The computer is ALAN ROBERT WASHBURN, As- applied to the solution of electronic warfare prob- sociate Professor of Operations Re- lems such as signal identification, and to problems search (1970); B.S., Carnegie Institute encountered in operational test and evaluation. of Technology, 1962; M.S., 1963; PREREQUISITES: CS 3510, EE 4484, OS 3655, Ph.D., 1965. OS 3208, OS 4653 (may be taken concurrently).

128 ELECTRONIC WARFARE

ST 3350 SIGNAL INTELLIGENCE AND THE ST 4453 UNDERWATER SOUND, SYSTEMS, THREAT ENVIRONMENT (4-0). This course fo- AND COUNTERMEASURES (3-2). A study of cuses on the current threat environment within the principles of underwater sound propagation, which the U.S. Navy operates; U.S. signal intelli- and the design and operational characteristics of gence capabilities for countering the threat; and the underwater sound systems. Emphasis is placed on process for designing new U.S. countermeasure various measures used to interfere with Sonar sys- systems. The threat focus will specifically be on tems, and the techniques used to counter this inter- the Soviet Navy as the U.S. Navy's most formida- ference. Topics studied include: sensor arrays, ble opponent in the foreseeable future. PREREQ- acoustic propagation, noise, acoustic quieting, UISITES: SI clearance and U.S. Citizenship. Reg- signal processing, and examples of active and pas- istration in EW curriculum #595 or consent of sive underwater acoustic systems, including acous- Instructor. tic countermeasures. PREREQUISITES: PH 2123, SECRET clearance, and U.S. Citizenship.

129 ENGINEERING ACOUSTICS

ENGINEERING ACOUSTICS

The academic character of programs in to a Master of Science in Engineering Engineering Acoustics is interdiscipli- Acoustics must have completed work nary, with courses drawn principally from which would qualify him for a Bachelor the fields of electrical engineering and of Science degree in engineering or phys- physics. Although broadly based, the ical science. Credit requirement for the emphasis is on those aspects of acoustics Master of Science degree must be met by concerning propagation of sound in the courses in addition to those used to satisfy oceans, on applications of underwater this requirement. sound and on the electrical engineering of 2. The Master of Science in Engineering instrumentation for detection of underwa- Acoustics requires a minimum of 36 ter sounds. These programs are designed graduate credit quarter hours of course for students in the Underwater Acoustics work; at least 20 graduate quarter hours Curriculum. must be taken in acoustics and its applica- The academic aspects of the programs tions. One 4000 level course from each of are the responsibility of a committee, three of the following areas must be in- chaired by O.B. Wilson, Jr., Professor of cluded: wave propagation, vibration and Physics, with G.S. Sackman, Associate noise control, transducer theory, sonar Professor of Electrical Engineering, as a member. systems, and signal processing. 3. An acceptable thesis must be com- DEGREE REQUIREMENTS pleted. MASTER OF SCIENCE IN 4. Approval of each program by the En- ENGINEERING ACOUSTICS gineering Acoustics Academic Commit-

1 . A student pursuing a program leading tee. MATHEMATICS

DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS

CARROLL ORVILLE WILDE, Profes- Ph.D., Univ. of Kansas, 1957. Mathematics; Chairman sor of HERMAN BERNHARD MARKS, As- (1968)*; B.S., Illinois State Univ., sociate Professor of Mathematics 1958; Ph.D., Univ. of Illinois, 1964. (1961); B.S., Southern Methodist CRAIG COMSTOCK, Professor of Univ., 1950; M.A., Univ. of Texas, Mathematics (1970); B.E.P., Cornell 1959. Univ., 1956; M.S., Naval Post- GEORGE WILLIAM MORRIS, Profes- graduate School, 1961; Ph.D., Har- sor of Mathematics (1968); B.A., vard Univ., 1965. Southwestern Institute of Technology, DANIEL LEE DAVIS, Associate Profes- 1942; M.A., Univ. of Oklahoma, sor of Mathematics (1971); B.S., 1947; Ph.D., Univ. of California at Georgia Institute of Technology, Los Angeles, 1957. 1965; Ph.D., California Institute of IRA BERT RUSSAK, Associate Profes- Technology, 1969. sor of Mathematics (1972); M.E., Ste- FRANK DAVID FAULKNER, Distin- vens Institute of Technology, 1957; guished Professor of Mathematics M.A., Univ. of California at Los (1950); B.S., Kansas State Teachers Angeles, 1962; Ph.D., 1967. College, 1940; M.S., Kansas State ARTHUR LORING SCHOENSTADT, College, 1942; Ph.D., Univ. of Associate Professor of Mathematics Michigan, 1969. (1970); B.S., Rensselaer Polytechnic RICHARD HOMER FRANKE, As- Institute, 1964; M.A., 1965; Ph.D., sociate Professor of Mathematics 1968. (1970); B.S., Fort Hays Kansas State College, 1959; B.S., Univ. of Utah, ELMO JOSEPH STEWART, Professor 1961; Ph.D., 1970. of Mathematics (1955); B.S., Univ. of Utah, 1937; M.S., 1939; Ph.D., Rice EUGENE GASKELL, Profes- ROBERT Univ., 1953. sor of Mathematics (1966); A. B., Al- bion College, 1933; M.S., Univ. of DONALD HERBERT TRAHAN, As- Michigan, 1934; Ph.D., 1940. sociate Professor of Mathematics (1966); B.S., Univ. of Vermont, TOKE JAYACHANDRAN, Associate 1952; M.A., Univ. of Nebraska, 1954; Professor of Mathematics (1967); Ph.D., Univ. of Pittsburgh, 1961. B.S., V.R. College, Nellore, India, 1951; M.S., Univ. of Wyoming, PETER CHENG-CHAO WANG, As- 1962; Ph.D., Case Institute of sociate Professor of Mathematics Technology, 1967. (1970); B.A., Pacific Lutheran Univ., 1961; M.A., Wayne State Univ., LADIS DANIEL KOVACH, Professor 1962; Ph.D., 1966. of Mathematics (1967); B.S., Case In- stitute of Technology, 1936; M.S., MAURICE DEAN WEIR, Associate Pro- 1948; M.A., Western Reserve Univ., fessor of Mathematics (1969); B.A., 1940; Ph.D., Purdue Univ., 1951. Whitman College, 1961; M.S., Carnegie-Mellon Univ., 1963; D.A., BROOKS JAVINS LOCKHART, Pro- 1970. fessor of Mathematics (1948); B.A., Marshall Univ., 1937; M.S., West EMERITUS FACULTY Virginia Univ., 1940; Ph.D., Univ. of Illinois, 1943. WILLARD EVAN BLEICK, Professor KENNETH ROBERT LUCAS, As- Emeritus (1946); M.E., Stevens Insti- sociate Professor of Mathematics tute of Technology, 1929; Ph.D., (1958); B.S., Washburn Univ., 1949; Johns Hopkins Univ., 1933.

131 MATHEMATICS

JOSEPH GIARRATANA, Professor MASTER OF SCIENCE DEGREE Emeritus (1946); B.S., Univ. of Mon- WITH MAJOR IN MATHEMATICS tana, 1928; Ph.D., New York Univ., 1936. 1. In order to pursue a program leading CARL ADOLF HERING, Professor to the Master of Science degree with major in mathematics, a student must Emeritus (1946); B.S., Oregon State have a background which would qualify College, 1941; M.S., Cornell Univ., him for a Bachelor of Science degree with 1944. major in mathematics. A student whose JOHN PHILIP PIERCE, Professor Emer- background does not satisfy this require- itus (1948); B.S.E.E., Worcester ment may take course work to eliminate Polytechnic Institute, 1931; this deficiency. However, such courses M.S.E.E., Polytechnic Institute of cannot be counted toward satisfying the Brooklyn, 1937. Departmental requirements for the degree FRANCIS McCONNELL PULLIAM, of Master of Science. Professor Emeritus (1949); B.A., 2. A curriculum which satisfies the Mas- Univ. of Illinois, 1937; M.A., 1938; ter of Science degree requirements con- Ph.D., 1947. sists of a minimum of 45 quarter hours of CHARLES HENRY RAWLINS, JR., approved courses in mathematics and re- Professor Emeritus (1922); Ph.B., lated subjects. An acceptable thesis may Dickinson College, 1910; M.A., be counted as equivalent to nine quarter 1913; Ph.D., Johns Hopkins Univ., hours. A student must have a QPR of 3.0 1916. or greater in any major program. JAMES WOODROW WILSON, Profes- 3. At the discretion of the Chairman of sor Emeritus (1949); B.A., Stephen F. the Department of Mathematics, a student Austin State, 1935; B.S. in Ch.E., pursuing a program leading to the Master Univ. of Texas, 1939; M.S. in Ch.E., of Science degree with major in mathema- Texas A&M College, 1941. tics may (or may not) be required to write a thesis in mathematics.

*The year of joining the Postgraduate School 4. The following topics are specifically Faculty is indicated in parentheses. included in any major program. a. 6 hours of Algebra b. 6 hours of Analysis

DEPARTMENTAL REQUIREMENTS FOR 5. The main areas for thesis topics are DEGREES IN MATHEMATICS a. Computer Science b. Differential Equations The Department of Mathematics offers c. Fourier Analysis a Master of Science degree to qualified d. Functional Analysis students. An interested student should e. Numerical Methods consult the Chairman of the Mathematics f. Optimal Control Department for an evaluation of his pre- g. Probability and Statistics vious academic record to determine his h. Tensor Analysis and Applications potential for successfully completing a degree program. MASTER OF SCIENCE IN If the student's previous record is APPLIED SCIENCE found to be adequate, a mathematics pro- gram is designed which satisfies the De- 1. Students with acceptable academic partmental requirements and fits the in- backgrounds may enter a program leading terest, preparation and aptitude of the stu- to the degree of Master of Science in dent. The program, and subsequent Applied Science. The program of each changes in the program, must be ap- student seeking this degree must contain a proved by the Departmental Chairman. minimum of 20 quarter hours in

132 MATHEMATICS

mathematics at the graduate level, includ- grals, transcendental functions. Taylor's theorem, ing work at the 4000 level. Additionally, vectors in two and three dimensions, functions of the program must contain a minimum of several variables, partial derivatives, multiple in- 12 graduate quarter hours in an approved tegration. PREREQUISITE: A previous course in sequence of courses outside the Mathema- calculus. tics Department. A total minimum of 12 quarter hours at the 4000 level plus an MA 1115-1116 CALCULUS MI (5-0). Introduc- acceptable thesis is required. This pro- tion to plane analytic geometry, functions of one gram provides depth and diversity variable, limits, continuity, derivatives, indefinite through specially arranged course se- and definite integrals, transcendental functions, quences to meet the needs of the Navy conic sections, polar coordinates, vector algebra in and the interests of the individual. The three dimensions. Vector calculus in three dimen- Department Chairman's approval is re- sions, functions of several variables, double and quired for all programs leading to this de- simple integrals, vector field theory, infinite gree. series. PREREQUISITE: Some previous work in calculus.

MATHEMATICS MA 1119 SELECTED CALCULUS TOPICS RE- VIEW (2-1). Functions, limits, continuity, differ- MA 0112 REFRESHER MATHEMATICS (5-5). entiation of functions of one variable and several Calculus review. variables. Implicit functions, parametric equa- tions, optimization. Definite, indefinite and multi- MA 0113 REFRESHER MATHEMATICS (5-5). ple integrals. Sequences and series, series repre- Algebra review. sentation of functions, Euler's formula. PRE- REQUISITE: A previous course in calculus. MA 0114 REFRESHER MATHEMATICS (5-5). Pre-calculus review. MA 1120-1121 CALCULUS AND ANALYTIC GEOMETRY I-II (5-2). Introduction to plane ana- MA 0125 LOGIC AND SET THEORY (5-0). An lytic geometry, functions of one variable, limits, introduction to the elements of set theory and continuity, derivatives, indefinite and definite in- mathematical reasoning. Sets, Venn Diagrams, tegrals, transcendental functions, conic sections, truth tables, quantifiers, logical reasoning. Func- elementary vector algebra, vector differentiation. tions, relations, partitions and equivalence rela- Polar coordinates, vector algebra and vector cal- tions, 1-1 correspondence. (Paradoxes of set culus in three dimensional space, functions of sev- theory, axiom of choice.) PREREQUISITE: None. eral variables, double and triple integrals, infinite series, introduction to differential equations. MA 0810 THESIS RESEARCH (0-0). Every stu- PREREQUISITE: MA 1021. dent conducting thesis research will enroll in this course. MA 1131 INTRODUCTION TO CALCULUS (1-0). A review of the real number system and Lower Division Courses topics in analytic geometry. PREREQUISITE: col- lege algebra. MA 1021 PRECALCULUS MATHEMATICS (4-0). Brief review of algebraic fundamentals. MA 1132 LOGIC, FUNCTIONS AND LIMITS Algebra of complex numbers, quadratic equations. (1-0). Elementary logic and mathematical induc- Systems of equations. Trigonometric functions of tion, functions, continuity and limits. PREREQ- the general angle. Identities. Solution of right UISITE: MA 1131 or equivalent. triangles. Elements of the theory of equations. In- troduction to analytic geometry. PREREQUI- MA 1133 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS (1-0). SITES: None. Slope, derivative, chain rule, implicit differentia- tion and the differential. PREREQUISITE: MA

MA 1 100 CALCULUS AND VECTOR ANALY- 1 132 or equivalent. SIS (5-2). Functions of one variable, limits, de- rivatives, continuity, indefinite and definite inte- MA 1134 APPLICATIONS OF DIFFERENTIAL

133 MATHEMATICS

CALCULUS (1-0). Graphing, optimization prob- MA 2040 MATRIX ALGEBRA (2-0). Linear lems, rate and simple harmonic motion. PRE- equations, systems of linear equations, determin- REQUISITE: MA 1133 or equivalent. ants, matrices and vectors, addition and multipli- cation of matrices, inverse of a matrix, partitioned MA 1135 INVERSE FUNCTIONS (1-0). matrices, vector spaces and subspaces, rank of a

Logarithmic and inverse trigonometric functions matrix. This course is designed primarily for stu- intermediate value theorem; hyperbolic functions. dents in management. PREREQUISITE: College PREREQUISITE: MA 1133 or equivalent. algebra.

MA 1136 THE DEFINITE INTEGRAL (1-0). MA 2042 LINEAR ALGEBRA (4-0). Systems of Anti-derivatives, areas, volumes of solids of revo- linear equations, matrices, and determinants. Fi- lution, integration between limits. PREREQUI- nite dimensional vector spaces, linear dependence, SITE: MA 1135 or equivalent. basis, dimension, inner products, orthogonaliza- tion. Linear transformations, rank and nullity, MA 1137 APPLICATIONS OF THE DEFINITE change of basis, linear functionals, orthogonal INTEGRAL (1-0). Arc length, center of mass and transformations, quadratic forms, symmetric mat- centroids. Trapezoidal and Simpson's rules. Fun- rices, diagonalization, eigenvalues and eigenvec- damental theorem of the integral calculus. PRE- tors. PREREQUISITE: MA 2109 or MA 1116. REQUISITE: MA 1136 or equivalent. MA 2045 COMPUTATIONAL MATRIX MA 1138 VECTORS IN THE PLANE (1-0). ALGEBRA (3-0). Systems of linear algebraic Parametric equations. Paths and curvature in the equations. Matrix algebra and determinants. Nu- plane. Geometric principles. Vectors in the plane. merical methods in linear algebra. Vector spaces. PREREQUISITE: MA 1137 or equivalent. Rank, Inverse by Gauss' method. Characteristic equations, roots and vectors — numerical MA 1139 DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS OF methods. PREREQUISITE: None. SEVERAL VARIABLES (1-0). Partial differ- entiation. Coordinates and graphs in space. Planes MA 2048 LINEAR ALGEBRA AND VECTOR and tangent planes. The chain rule, implicit func- ANALYSIS (5-0). Algebra of matrices. Determin- tions. Gradient and directional derivative. PRE- ants. Elementary matrices, rank of matrix and in- REQUISITE: MA 1138 or equivalent. verse of a matrix. Linear vector spaces, subspaces, linear dependence and independence, basis and MA 1140 MULTIPLE INTEGRATION (1-0). dimension. Systems of homogeneous and non- Vectors in space; paths, gradients and arc lengths. homogeneous linear equations and their solutions.

2 3 Double and triple integrals and applications. Eigenvalues and vectors in R and R . Calculus of Cylindrical and spherical coordinates. PREREQ- these vectors. Del operator, directional derivative, UISITE: MA 1139 or equivalent. gradient, divergence and curl with applications. Vector integration, line integrals, surface and vol- MA 1150 INFINITE SERIES (1-0). Infinite series ume integrals. Green's, Stokes' and the Di- and sequences. Tests for convergence of positive vergence Theorem. PREREQUISITE: MA 1 100 or series. Manipulating infinite series. The Cauchy equivalent. product of two series. Power series. Derivative or integral of a power series. Taylor series and forms MA 2109 TOPICS IN CALCULUS (5-0). A selec- of the remainder. Solving differential equations. tion of miscellaneous topics such as differential PREREQUISITE: MA 1120 or equivalent. equations, vector analysis in three space, three- dimensional differential and integral calculus, in-

Upper Division Courses finite series. PREREQUISITE: Differential and in- tegral calculus. MA 2025 LOGIC, SETS AND FUNCTIONS (4-0). Propositional logic, elements of set theory, MA 21 10 MULTI VARIABLE CALCULUS (4-0). relations, functions and partitions. An introduction Integrated with linear algebra. Functions of several to theorem proving techniques, including variables, continuous transformations, jacobians, mathematical induction, in the context of basic chain rule, implicit function theorem, inverse mathematical systems. PREREQUISITE: None. function theorem, extrema, Lagrange multiplier

134 MATHEMATICS

technique, curvilinear coordinates. PREREQUI- MA 2300 MATHEMATICS FOR MANAGE-

SITE: MA 1 100 or equivalent, MA 2042 or equiv- MENT (5-0). This course is designed to provide a alent concurrently. mathematical basis for modern managerial tools

and techniques. It includes elements of differential

MA 2121 DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS (4-0). and integral calculus, sequences and series and an Ordinary differential equations: homogeneous and introduction to matrix algebra. PREREQUISITE: nonhomogeneous equations, linear independence College algebra. of solutions, linear and non-linear equations, power series solutions, systems of differential MA 2305-2306 CALCULUS III (3-0), (2-0). A equations, applications. PREREQUISITE: MA two course sequence in calculus designed primar- 1100 or equivalent, MA 2045 or equivalent con- ily for students in Administrative Science. Brief currently. review of algebra; differential calculus of power functions, logarithmic functions and exponential functions; multivariable calculus, maxima and MA 2129 ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUA- minima with and without constraints. Integral cal- TIONS AND LAPLACE TRANSFORMS (2-1). culus of power functions, logarithmic functions First order ordinary differential equations, second and exponential functions. Applications will be order equations with constant coefficients, applica- from the field of economics and management. tion, LaPlace Transforms. PREREQUISITE: Dif- PREREQUISITE: College algebra. ferential and integral calculus.

MA 2310-2311 MATHEMATICS FOR NAVAL MA 2161 INTRODUCTION TO MATHEMATI- INTELLIGENCE III (5-3) and (5-2). A review of CAL PHYSICS (5-0). An introduction to the tech- linear, logarithmic, sinusoidal and exponential niques used in solving problems in classical field functions, with graphical emphasis; differentiation theories. Vector and scalar fields are studied. Po- and integration, with both analytical and numerical tential fields for fluid flow using curvilinear coor- procedures, continuation to include introductory dinates. Vector field theory. Analytic functions of treatments of Fourier analysis; the Fourier integral, a complex variable. Residue theory with applica- spectral analysis, differential equations and the tion to Fourier and Laplace transforms. Conformal Laplace transformation. Descriptive statistics and mapping. PREREQUISITE: MA 1110 and MA data presentation, discrete probability and the 2121 (the latter may be taken concurrently). binomial and Poisson distributions, continuous probability, the normal distribution and the central MA 2172 COMPLEX VARIABLES (4-0). Ana- limit theorem, hypothesis testing, estimation and lytic functions, integration and series repre- correlation, small samples. Students' t-distribu- sentations. Residue theory and applications tion, the Chi-square distribution. Single and mul- applied to ordinary and partial differential equa- tiple regression, computation, data processing and tions; convolution theorems. PREREQUISITE: analysis. PREREQUISITE: College algebra and MA 2121. trigonometry.

MA 2181 VECTOR CALCULUS (2-1). Differ- MA 2400 INTRODUCTION TO VECTORS, entiation and integration of vector functions. The MATRICES AND VECTOR CALCULUS (3-0). del operator and related concepts. Green's The algebra of vectors and matrices. Systems of theorem, Stokes' theorem, divergence theorem. linear equations, determinants; eigenvalues. Direc-

Interpretations and applications. PREREQUISITE: tional derivative, gradient, divergence, curl; line, Calculus and vector algebra. surface and volume integrals; integral theorems; applications. PREREQUISITE: Differential and MA 2232 NUMERICAL METHODS (3-1). Error integral calculus. propagation. Evaluation of functions. Non-linear equations. Linear algebra for computers. Interpo- MA 2401 INTRODUCTION TO DIFFERENTIAL lation. Least squares approximation. Numerical in- EQUATIONS AND COMPLEX FUNCTIONS tegration. Ordinary differential equations. PRE- (4-1). Ordinary differential equations including REQUISITE: MA 2121 and CS 0110 or equiva- series solutions and Laplace transforms; Fourier lent. series and partial differential equations; complex

135 MATHEMATICS

analytic functions. PREREQUISITE: Differential residue theory, conformal mapping; applications to and integral calculus. ordinary and partial differential equations includ- ing Laplace transforms and their complex inver- Upper Division or Graduate Courses sion. PREREQUISITE: MA 3130.

MA 3026 TOPICS IN DISCRETE MATHEMA- MA 3181 VECTOR ANALYSIS (3-0). Vector dif- TICS (4-0). Review of mathematical induction. ferential and integral calculus in rectangular and Elements of number theory; divisibility; congru- orthogonal curvilinear coordinate systems; appli- ences and prime numbers. Generating functions cations in various fields of engineering. PRE- and combinatorial problems. Elements of graph REQUISITE: MA 1100 or equivalent. theory. PREREQUISITE: MA 2025. MA 3185 TENSOR ANALYSIS (3-0). Definition MA 3046-3047 LINEAR ALGEBRA III (3-0). of a tensor. Algebra of tensors. The metric tensor. Special types of matrices; orthogonal reduction of The geometric representation of vectors in general a real symmetric matrix to diagonal form; quadra- coordinates. The co- variant derivative and its ap- tic forms and reductions to expressions involving plication to geodesies. The Reimann tensor, paral- only squares of the variables; applications to max- lelism, and curvature of space. PREREQUISITE: ima and minima; Lambda matrices and related top- Consent of Instructor. ics; Cayley-Hamilton theorem. Reduced charac- teristic function; canonical forms, idempotent and MA 3232 NUMERICAL ANALYSIS (3-2). Solu- nilpotent matrices; solutions to matrix polynomial tion of nonlinear equations, zeros of polynomials. equations; functions of a square matrix; applica- Interpolation and approximation. Numerical dif- tions such as to differential equations, stability ferentiation and quadrature. Matrix manipulations; criteria. PREREQUISITE: MA 2045. linear simultaneous algebraic equations, eigen- values. Numerical solutions of ordinary different-

MA 3130 DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS (4-0). ial equations. Analysis of computational errors. Review of linear ordinary differential equations. PREREQUISITE: MA 2121 or equivalent (may be Separation of variables for partial differential taken concurrently) and FORTRAN programming. equations. Fourier Series and orthogonal func- tions. Series solutions and special functions. MA 3243 NUMERICAL METHODS FOR PAR- Boundary value problems in two and three dimen- TIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS (4-1). Fi- sions. PREREQUISITE: MA 1100, MA 2400 and nite difference approximations for derivatives. ordinary differential equations. Truncation and discretization errors. Parabolic and hyperbolic equations. Explicit and implicit MA 3132 PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUA- methods. The Crank-Nicolson method. The im- TIONS AND INTEGRAL TRANSFORMS (4-0). plicit alternating direction method. Approxima- Solution of boundary value problems by separation tions at irregular boundaries. Elliptic equations. of variables; Sturm-Liouville problems; Fourier, The Liebmann method. Systems of partial differ- Bessel and Legendre series solutions, Laplace and ential equations. Students are expected to write Fourier transforms; classification of second order FORTRAN programs for the above methods. A equations; applications. PREREQUISITE: MA term project involving the solution of a suitably 2121 or equivalent. difficult boundary value problem is required, PREREQUISITE: MA 3132, CS 2700 or equiva- MA 3139 FOURIER ANALYSIS AND PARTIAL lent. DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS (4-0). Solution of the one-, two-, and three-dimensional wave equa- MA 3362 ORBITAL MECHANICS (3-0). Review tions by separation of variables and characteristics; of kinematics, Lagrange's equation of motion. The ray propagation; Fourier analysis applied to ordi- earth's gravitational field. Central force motion. nary and partial differential equations; convolution The two body problem. Perturbations. PREREQ- therorems. PREREQUISITE: MA 2129. UISITE: A course in dynamics.

MA 3173 COMPLEX VARIABLES AND LA- MA 3560 MODERN APPLIED ALGEBRA (3-0). PLACE TRANSFORMS (4-0). Continuation of An introductory course in the techniques and tools MA 3130. Complex variables, contour integration, of abstract algebra with special emphasis on appli-

136 MATHEMATICS

cations to coding theory, radar and communica- equations. PREREQUISITE: Consent of Instruc-

tions systems, and computer science. Elements of tor.

set theory, equivalence relations and partitions. Semigroups, groups, subgroups and homomor- Graduate Courses phisms. Rings, ideals and fields. Directed graphs and lattices. Applications may vary. PREREQUI- MA 4237 ADVANCED TOPICS IN NUMERI- SITE: Consent of Instructor. CAL ANALYSIS (4-0). The subject matter will vary according to the abilities and interest of those

MA 3565 MODERN ALGEBRA I (3-0). An ad- enrolled. PREREQUISITE: Consent of Instructor. vanced course in the subject of abstract algebra. Graded on Pass/Fail basis only. Semigroups, groups, subgroups, normal sub- groups. Groups acting on sets, operator groups. MA 4393 TOPICS IN APPLIED MATHEMA- The Jordan-Holder Theorem, solvable groups. The TICS (3-0). A selection of topics in applied Krull Schmidt Theorem. PREREQUISITE: MA mathematics. The course content varies. Credit 3560 or consent of Instructor. may be granted for taking this course more than once. PREREQUISITE: Consent of Instructor. MA 3605-3606 FUNDAMENTALS OF ANALY- SIS I-II (3-0). Elements of set theory, the real MA 4501 TOPICS IN FOUNDATIONS OF number system, and the usual topology of En; MATHEMATICS (3-0). A selection of topics in properties of continuous functions; differential of foundations of mathematics. Content of the course vector-valued functions, Jacobians, and applica- varies. Students will be allowed credit for taking tions (implicit function, inverse function theorem, the course more than once. PREREQUISITE: extremum problems). Functions of bounded varia- Consent of Instructor. Graded on Pass/Fail basis tion and theory of Reimann-Stieltjes integration, only. multiple and iterated integrals, convergence theorems for sequences and series of functions. MA 4566 MODERN ALGEBRA II (3-0). A con- PREREQUISITE: Consent of Instructor. tinuation of MA 3565. Rings, ring homomor- phism, integral domains and euclidean domains. Unique factorization rings, polynominal rings. MA 3610 INTRODUCTION TO GENERAL TO- Modules and ideals. Noetherian rings, Field exten- POLOGY (3-0). Topologies, bases and subbases, sion and Galois theory. PREREQUISITE: MA compactness and connectivity. Moore-Smith con- 3565. vergence theorems. Metrization and embedding theorems, uniform structures. Tychonoff product MA 4593 TOPICS IN ALGEBRA (3-0). A selec- theorem, Alexandroff and Stone-Cech compactifi- tion of topics in algebra. Content of the course cation. PREREQUISITE: MA 3605. varies. Students will be allowed credit for taking the course more than once. PREREQUISITE: MA 3675-3676 THEORY OF FUNCTIONS OF A Consent of Instructor. Graded on Pass/Fail basis COMPLEX VARIABLE I-II (3-0). Selected topics only. from the theory of functions of a real variable; complex functions, power series, laurent series. MA 4610 TOPOLOGY OF DYNAMICAL SYS- Singularities of complex functions; residues and TEMS (3-0). Dynamical systems, trajectories, lim- contour integration; zeros of analytic functions, iting sets, recursive concepts, dispersive concepts, factors of and infinite product representation for stability theory. PREREQUISITES: MA 2121 and analytic functions; maximum modulus theorems either MA 3605 or MA 3610. for analytic and harmonic functions; conformal mapping. PREREQUISITE: Consent of Instructor. MA 4611 CALCULUS OF VARIATIONS (3-0). Bliss differential methods, Euler equations, MA 3730 THEORY OF NUMERICAL COMPU- Weierstrass-maximum principle, Legendre condi- TATION (3-0). Analysis of computational tions. Perturbation techniques, numerical proce- methods used for the solution of problems from the dures for determining solutions, and applications areas of algebraic equations, polynomial approxi- to engineering and control problems. PREREQUI- mation, numerical differentiation and integration, SITE: MA 2121 (programming experience desir- and numerical solution of ordinary differential able).

137 MATHEMATICS

MA 4620 THEORY OF ORDINARY DIFFER- MA 4637 INTRODUCTION TO FUNCTIONAL ENTIAL EQUATIONS (3-0). Introduction to the ANALYSIS (3-0). An introduction to Banach and modern theory of ordinary differential equations. Hilbert spaces, including open mapping-closed Systems of equations. Theoretical and constructive graph theorem, weak and weak star topologies, methods of solutions. PREREQUISITE: Consent spectral theorems for compact Hermitian of Instructor. operators. Hermitian bounded and normal bounded operators. PREREQUISITE: MA 4636. MA 4622-4623 PRINCIPLES AND TECH- MA 4672 INTEGRAL TRANSFORMS (3-0). The NIQUES OF APPLIED MATHEMATICS III Laplace, Fourier and Hankel transforms and their (3-0). Linear operators, generalized functions and inversions. Applications to problems in engineer- Hilbert spaces; solutions of partial differential ing and physics. PREREQUISITE: MA 2172. equations by eigenfunctions; variational tech- niques and their applications to eigenfunctions; in- MA 4693 TOPICS IN ANALYSIS (3-0). A selec- tegral equations, Laplace, Fourier and other trans- tion of topics in analysis. Content of the course forms, including their inversion in the complex varies. Students will be allowed credit for taking plane as applied to partial differential equations; the course more than once. PREREQUISITE: method of characteristics for hyperbolic equation. Consent of Instructor. PREREQUISITES: MA 3132 or equivalent and MA 2172 or equivalent. MA 4872 TOPICS IN CALCULUS OF VARIA- TIONS (3-0). Recent development in the numeri- MA 4635-4636 FUNCTIONS OF REAL VARI- cal solution of problems in the calculus of varia- ABLES I-II (3-0). Axiomatic set theory, develop- tions. Foundations of numerical methods, applica- ment of the real numbers, semi-continuous func- tions to control problems. Differentials, perturba- tions, absolutely continuous functions, functions tions, variational equations, adjoint system, condi- of bounded variation; classical Lebesgue measure tions for optimum. Euler equations, maximum

tfnd integration theory, convergence theorems and principle of Weierstrass and Pontryagin, the Lp spaces. Abstract measure and integration Legendre condition. Methods of solution: spectral theory, signed measures, Radon-Nikodym variations, variation of extremals, dynamic pro- theorem; Lebesgue decomposition and product gramming. Applications in ship routing and mis- measure; Daniell integrals and integral representa- sile control. PREREQUISITES: MA 2121, MA tion of linear functionals. PREREQUISITE: MA 3046 and computer programming or Consent of 3606. Instructor.

138 ,

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

ALLEN EUGENE FUHS, Distinguished ROBERT EUGENE NEWTON, Profes- Professor of Mechanical Engineering; sor of Mechanical Engineering Chairman (1966)*; B.S.M.E., Univ. (1951); B.S.M.E., Washington of New Mexico, 1951; M.S.M.E., Univ., 1938; M.S., 1939; Ph.D., California Institute of Technology, Univ. of Michigan, 1951. 1955; Ph.D., 1958. DONG HUU NGUYEN, Associate Pro- JOHN EDISON BROCK, Professor of fessor of Mechanical Engineering Mechanical Engineering (1954); (1969); B.S.M.E., Purdue Univ., B.S.M.E., Purdue Univ., 1938; 1960; M.S. in Nuc. Eng., 1961; M.S.E., 1941; Ph.D., Univ. of Min- Ph.D., Univ. of California at Berke- nesota, 1950. ley, 1965. GILLES CANTIN, Professor of Me- ROBERT HARRY NUNN, Associate chanical Engineering (1960); B.A. Professor of Mechanical Engineering Sc, Ecole Polytechnique at Mon- (1968); B.S., Univ. of California at treal, 1950; M.Sc, Stanford Univ., Los Angeles, 1955; M.S. M.E., 1964; 1960; Ph.D., Univ. of California at Ph.D., Univ. of California at Davis, Berkeley, 1968. 1967. THOMAS EDWARD COOPER, As- sociate Professor of Mechanical En- ARTHUR JEFFERY PERKINS, As- gineering (1970); B.S., Univ. of sociate Professor of Materials Science California at Berkeley, 1966; (1972); B.S., Drexel Institute of M.S.M.E., 1967; Ph.D., 1970. Technology, 1965; M.S., Case Insti- tute of Technology, 1967; Ph.D. in CLARENCE JIMMY GARRISON, As- Metallurgy, Case Western Reserve sociate Professor of Mechanical En- University, 1969. gineering (1970); B.S.M.E., Univ. of Nebraska, 1960; M.S.M.E., 1962; PAUL FRANCIS PUCCI, Professor of Ph.D., Univ. of Washington, 1968. Mechanical Engineering (1956); B.S. THOMAS MICHAEL HOULIHAN, PurdueUniv., 1949;M.S.M.E., 1950; Ph.D., Stanford Univ., 1955. Associate Professor of Mechanical Engineering (1969); B.M.E., Man- Professor hattan College, 1961; Ph.D., Syra- DAVID SALINAS, Associate cuse Univ., 1968. of Mechanical Engineering (1970); B.S., Univ. of California at Los MATTHEW DENNIS KELLEHER, As- Angeles, 1959; M.S., 1962; Ph.D., sociate Professor of Mechanical En- 1968. gineering (1967); B.S. Univ. of Notre Dame, 1961; M.S.M.E., 1963, TURGUT SARPKAYA, Distinguished Ph.D., 1966. Professor of Mechanical Engineering TERRY ROBERT McNELLEY, Assis- (1967); M.S.M.E., Tech. Univ. of Is- tant Professor of Materials Science tanbul, 1951; Ph.D., Univ. of Iowa, (1976); B.S.M.E., Purdue Univ., 1954. 1967; Ph.D., Stanford Univ., 1973. GARRET NIEL VANDERPLAATS, PAUL JAMES MARTO, Professor of Adjunct Research Professor of Me- Mechanical Engineering (1967); B.S., chanical Engineering (1976); B.S., Univ. of Notre Dame, 1961; M.S., in Arizona State Univ., 1967; M.S., Nuc. Engr., Massachusetts Institute of 1968; Ph.D., Case Western Reserve Technology, 1962; Sc.D., 1965. Univ., 1971.

139 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

EMERITUS FACULTY the Chairman of the Mechanical Engineering De- partment. An advisor will be appointed by the ROY WALTERS PROWELL, Professor Chairman of the Mechanical Engineering Depart- Emeritus (1946); B.S. in I.E., Lehigh ment for consultation in the development of a pro- Univ., 1936; M.S.M.E., Univ. of gram of research. Pittsburgh, 1943. MASTER OF SCIENCE IN *The year of joining the Postgraduate School APPLIED SCIENCE

Faculty is indicated in parentheses. 1. Students with acceptable academic back- DEPARTMENTAL REQUIREMENTS FOR grounds may enter a program leading to the degree DEGREES IN MECHANICAL ENGINEERING of Master of Science in Applied Science. The pro- gram of each student seeking this degree must con- A specific curriculum must be consistent with tain a minimum of 20 quarter hours in mechanical the general minimum requirements for the degree engineering at the graduate level, including work as determined by the Academic Council. at the 4000 level. Additionally, the program must Any program leading to award of a degree must contain a minimum of 12 graduate quarter hours in be approved by the Chairman of the Department of an approved sequence of courses outside the Me-

Mechanical Engineering at least two quarters be- chanical Engineering Department. A total of 12 fore completion. In general, approved programs quarter hours at the 4000 level plus an acceptable will require more than minimum degree require- thesis is required. This program provides depth ments in order to conform to the needs and ob- and diversity through specially arranged course se- jectives of the United States Navy. quences to meet the needs of the Navy and the interests of the individual. The Department Chair- MASTER SCIENCE IN OF man's approval is required for all programs leading MECHANICAL ENGINEERING to this degree.

1. Undergraduate Preparation. A candidate shall have completed work equivalent to the THE PROGRAM LEADING TO THE Bachelor of Science requirements of this depart- DEGREE OF MECHANICAL ENGINEER ment. A graduate student with a superior academic 2. Approved Curriculum. The candidate must record may enter a program leading to the degree take all courses in a curriculum approved by the Mechanical Engineer. A candidate is normally Chairman of the Department of Mechanical En- selected during his second year of residence. gineering. At minimum, approved curriculum The candidate must take all courses in a cur- must satisfy the requirements in paragraphs 3 and riculum approved by the Chairman of the Depart- 4. ment of Mechanical Engineering. At minimum, approved curriculum must satisfy the requirements

3. Required Courses. The Master of Science stated in paragraphs 3 and 4 below. degree in Mechanical Engineering requires at least The Mechanical Engineer degree requires at 32 quarter hours of graduate level credits in Me- least 60 quarter hours of graduate level credits in chanical Engineering and Materials and Science, at Mechanical Engineering and Materials Science, least 10 of which must be at the 4000 level. In and in addition, at least 12 quarter hours of addition, at least 8 quarter hours of graduate credit graduate level credits must be earned outside of must be earned outside of Mechanical Engineering Mechanical Engineering and Materials Science. At and Materials Science. least 30 of the above required graduate level cred-

its must be at the 4000 level.

4. Thesis. An acceptable thesis is required for the An acceptable thesis is required for the Mechan-

Master of Science in Mechanical Engineering de- ical Engineer degree. Approval of the thesis pro- gree. An acceptable thesis for the Mechanical En- gram must be obtained from the Chairman of the gineering degree may also be accepted as meeting Mechanical Engineering Department. An advisor the thesis requirement for the Master's degree. will be appointed by the Chairman of the Mechan-

Approval of the thesis topic must be obtained from ical Engineering Department for consultation in

140 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

the development of a program of study and a pro- MECHANICAL ENGINEERING gram of research. ME/MS 0810 THESIS RESEARCH (0-0). Every THE PROGRAM LEADING TO THE student conducting thesis research will enroll in DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY this course.

Graduate officer students may, upon satisfactory ME 0951 SEMINAR (0-1). Lectures on subjects of completion of eleven quarters of academic work, current interest are presented by NPS faculty and apply for the program leading to the degree of Doc- invited experts from other universities and gov- tor of Philosophy. Normally, this program requires ernment and industrial activities. the equivalent of at least one academic year being spent at the Naval Postgraduate School. A Doc- Upper Division Courses toral Committee is appointed for the student which has the full responsibility for providing a program ME 2101 ENGINEERING THERMODYNAMICS of study suitable to the needs of the student and the (4- 1 ) . A comprehensive coverage of the fundamen- requirements for award of the degree. tal concepts of classical thermodynamics, with in- The Department of Mechanical Engineering is sight toward microscopic phenomena. The laws of authorized to offer doctorate degrees in the areas of thermodynamics. Equations of state. Ther- mechanics and deformable bodies, fluid mechan- modynamic properties of substances. Entropy, ir- ics, and heat transfer. reversibility and availability. Cycle analysis.

A dissertation advisor is appointed by the De- Gas- vapor mixtures. Combustion and dissociation. partment Chairman who, together with the Doc- PREREQUISITE: MA 1 100. toral Committee, is responsible for the develop- ment of a program of study and research. Approval ME 2201 INTRODUCTION TO FLUID ME- of the programs must be obtained from the CHANICS (3-2). Properties of fluids. Fluid stat-

Academic Council. ics, stability of submerged bodies. Mass, momen-

Admission to the Ph.D. program is also avail- tum, and energy considerations in steady flows. able to qualified civilian employees of the United Dynamic similitude and dimensional analysis. States government. Fluid measurement and control. Basic effects of fluid friction. Emphasis on naval engineering ap- plications and problem solving. PREREQUISITE: ME 2502. MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

LABORATORIES ME 2410 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING LAB I (2-3). Fundamentals of mechanical measurement The Mechanical Engineering Laboratories are systems, structured laboratory experiments using designed as complements to the educational mis- resistance strain gages, pressure transducers, tem- sion and research interests of the department. In perature, flow and velocity measurement devices. addition to the extensive facilities for the support PREREQUISITES: ME 2101, ME 2201, and ME of student and faculty research, a variety of general 2601, any of which may be taken concurrently. use equipment is available. This includes ma- Graded on Pass/Fail basis only. chinery for the investigation of dynamic and static problems in engineering mechanics; a completely ME 2501 STATICS (3-0). Forces and moments, equipped materials science laboratory; a scanning particles and rigid bodies in equilibrium. Simple electron microscope; a water tunnel, and a wave structures, friction, first moments and centroids. channel; facilities for experimentation with air PREREQUISITE: MA 1100 (may be concurrent). flows from incompressible through supersonic velocities; equipment for instruction in thermal ME 2502 DYNAMICS (4-0). Kinematics, New- transport phenomena; a laboratory for demonstrat- ton's laws and d'Alembert's principle work and ing nuclear engineering principles; and a fluid energy, impulse and momentum, plane motion of a power control and fluidics laboratory. Experi- rigid body. PREREQUISITE: ME 2501. mentation is further enhanced by a broad selection of analog and digital data acquisition and process- ME 2510 STATICS AND DYNAMICS (5-2). A ing equipment and instrumentation. course combining the content of ME 2501 and ME

141 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

2502. PREREQUISITE: MA 1100 (may be con- liquids and gases. PREREQUISITES: ME 2201 current). and ME 3521.

ME 2601 MECHANICS OF SOLIDS I (3-2). ME 3250 FLUID MACHINERY (3-2). Fundamen- Stress, strain, Hooke's law. Elementary stress and tal characteristics of reciprocating power pumps, deformation analysis for shafts, beams and col- direct-acting steam pumps, pump valves, rotary umns. Supporting laboratory work. PREREQUI- pumps, pistonless pumps, centrifugal and axial SITES: ME 2501, or ME 2510, and MA 1100. pumps, air compressors and compressor acces- sories, turbomachines, and centrifugal and axial Upper Division or Graduate Courses fans. Efficiency of fluid machinery. Application to practical fluid-handling systems and naval opera- ME 3001 SURVEY OF ENGINEERING (3-0). A tions of pumps, compressors, fans, and tur- comprehensive survey of engineering history and bomachinery. Installation, operation, and mainte-

development. This is an elective course for non- nance of fluid machinery. PREREQUISITES: ME M.E. majors. 2101 and ME 2201.

ME 3002 PRINCIPLES OF NAVAL ENGINEER- ME 3301 NUCLEAR POWER SYSTEMS (5-0). ING (3-0). An introduction to the principles of Brief review of atomic, nuclear structures, and engineering machinery and equipment aboard nuclear reactions. Neutron interactions with mat-

ship. Primary emphasis is placed on helping the ter: cross sections, slowing down and diffusion of student acquire an overall view of shipboard en- neutrons. Fundamentals of nuclear reactor gineering plants and an understanding of basic analysis: neutronic and thermal aspects in core de- considerations that underlie the design of ma- sign. Principal reactor types. Naval applications of chinery and equipment. An elective course for nuclear energy. non-M.E. majors. ME 3315 NUCLEAR MEASUREMENTS LAB ME 3003 ENERGY AND THE ENVIRONMENT (1-4). Principles of radiation detection. The use of (3-0). Principles of energy technology. Supply and various health physics instruments and radiation demand. Survey of resources including coal, oil, detectors; gas-filled, scintillation, crystal and foil gas, and uranium fuels. Solar energy utilization. detectors; calibration of detectors. Experiments in Energy conversion schemes. Conservation efforts neutron physics: determination of neutron Fermi in the Navy. Effect of energy utilization upon the age and diffusion length. Neutron fast and thermal environment. This is an elective course for non- fluxes mapping by various detectors. Determina- M.E. majors. tion of flux perturbation by local absorption. Gamma ray spectrometry; pulse height analyzer. ME 3150 HEAT TRANSFER (4-2). Elementary PREREQUISITES: ME 2410, ME 3301 or equiva- treatment of the principles of Heat Transfer appli- lent, ME 3341. cation to problems in Mechanical Engineering. Steady and unsteady conduction. Principles of ME 3430 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING LAB forced and natural convection. Thermal radiation. II (1-3). A project-oriented continuation of me- Boiling. Condensation. Heat exchanger analysis. chanical measurement systems. Application of Use of the thermal circuit analog numerical and measurement techniques using group projects in graphical techniques. Selected laboratory experi- thermodynamics, mechanics of solids, heat trans- ments. PREREQUISITES: ME 2101, ME 2201, fer, fluid flow, vibrations and nuclear radiation MA 3132 (may be taken concurrently). detection. PREREQUISITES: ME 2410, ME 3150, ME 3521, and ME 3611. Graded on Pass/ ME 3201 APPLIED MECHANICS OF NAVAL Fail basis only.

AND OCEAN STRUCTURES I (3-2). Equations of fluid motion. Stream and potential functions. ME 3440 ENGINEERING SYSTEMS

Resistance in unsteady flow. Drag, lift and inertia ANALYSIS (4-0). Classification of engineering coefficients. Water waves. Marine propulsion. problems. Classical and numerical techniques for Propellers and current propulsion devices. Cavita- solving equilibrium, eigenvalue, and propagation tion and cavitation damage. Fundamentals of com- problems for discrete and continuous systems. Ap- pressible flows and effect of compressibility in plications to heat transfer fluids, and solids prob-

142 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

lems. PREREQUISITES: ME 2101, ME 2201, chanical Engineering applications. Black body ME 3521, and ME 3611. radiation; radiation from real surfaces; radiation exchange between finite surfaces. The network ME 3450 THERMODYNAMICS OF MARINE method, radiation through participating media. POWER SYSTEMS (3-2). Current applications of PREREQUISITE: ME 3150. thermodynamic principles applied to marine power systems. Detailed analyses of vapor and gas power ME 4162 CONVECTION HEAT TRANSFER cycles. The characteristics of engines, compres- (4-0). Fundamental principles of forced and free sors, and turbines. Refrigeration, air conditioning convection. Dimensionless correlations. Heat and cryogenic systems. PREREQUISITE: ME transfer during phase changes. Combined conduc- 2101. tion, convection and radiation heat transfer sys- tems. Heat exchanger analysis with Mechanical ME 3521 MECHANICAL VIBRATION (3-2). Engineering applications. PREREQUISITES: ME Free and forced vibration of discrete linear sys- 3150, ME 4220 (may be taken concurrently). tems. Vibration isolation and suppression. Vibra- tion of bars, shafts, and beams. Supporting labora- ME 4211 NAVAL HYDRODYNAMICS (4-0). tory work. PREREQUISITES: ME 2502, or ME Equations of motion. Vorticity and circulation. So- 2510, ME 2601, and MA 2401 (may be concur- lutions to flow about two- and three-dimensional rent) . bodies. Conformal transformations and hydrofoils. Approximate methods of flow analysis. Free sur- ME 3611 MECHANICS OF SOLIDS II (4-0). face hydrodynamics with Naval Engineering ap- Constitutive laws for linear elastic solids. Funda- plications. PREREQUISITE: ME 3201, or consent mentals of the theory of elasticity. Applications to of Instructor. beams. Stability of simple structures. Torsion of members with non-circular cross section. Elements ME 4220 VISCOUS FLOW (4-0). Development of plate and shell behavior. PREREQUISITES: of continuity and Navier-Stokes equations. Exact ME 2502, or ME 2510, ME 2601, and MA 2401 solutions of steady and unsteady viscous flow (may be concurrent). problems. Low Reynolds number flows. Devel- ME 3711 DESIGN OF MACHINE ELEMENTS opment of the boundary layer equations. Similarity variables, numerical and integral techniques. Sep- (3-2). The design of representative machine ele- aration, boundary layer control, compressibility ments with consideration given to materials, toler- effects. Time-dependent boundary layers. Stabil- ances, variable loads and stress concentrations. PREREQUISITE: ME 3611. ity, transition, and turbulence. Nature of turbu- lence, phenomenological theories, calculation of

ME 3712 DESIGN OF MACHINERY (2-4). turbulent flows. PREREQUISITES: ME 2101 and Dynamic analysis and design of machinery with ME 2201. consideration given to manufacturing processes. PREREQUISITES: ME 3711 and ME 3521. ME 4230 ADVANCED TOPICS IN FLUID DYNAMICS AND HEAT TRANSFER (4-0). ME 3801 FLUID POWER CONTROL (3-2). Op- Topics selected in accordance with the research eration and analysis of control valves and ac- interests of students and staff. Advanced and ana- tuators. Hydraulic power elements. Steady state lytical methods. Surveys of current Mechanical and dynamic performance of electro-hydraulic ser- Engineering technologies. Extensions to the vovalves and servomechanisms. Design criteria for theories of fluid flow and heat transfer. PREREQ- fluid power controls. PREREQUISITE: ME 2201 UISITES: ME 4161, ME 4162, and MA 2172 (may be taken concurrently). (may be taken concurrently), or consent of Instruc- tor. Graduate Courses ME 4240 APPLIED MECHANICS OF NAVAL

ME 4161 CONDUCTION AND RADIATION AND OCEAN STRUCTURES II (3-2). Nonlinear HEAT TRANSFER (4-0). Steady-state heat con- surface waves and fluid-structure interactions. duction in multi-dimensions with and without heat Free-streamline analysis of cavities, planing, and sources. Transient conduction. Numerical methods gliding. Hydro-ballistics, water-exit and entry for heat conduction. Variational methods. Me- studies. Quiet torpedo technology. Topics selected

143 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

in accordance with the current interests of the stu- agation of laser beams, pointing and tracking, ac- dents and the Navy. PREREQUISITES: ME 3201, quisition £nd handoff, damage mechanisms, ME 4211, and ME 4220. aero-optics, optical systems for lasers, advantages and limitations of high energy lasers, and military ME 4311-ME 4312 NUCLEAR REACTOR applications. PREREQUISITE: Consent of In- ANALYSIS III (4-0). Neutron cross-sections. structor. (May also be taught as AE 4505) Resonance phenomena and Doppler effect. The fission process. The slowing down and diffusion of ME 4512 ADVANCED DYNAMICS (4-0). neutrons. Criticality analysis of homogenous and Three-dimensional kinematics. The inertia tensor. heterogeneous reactors. Reflected reactors. Mul- Dyadic-vector formulation of dynamical equa- tigroup diffusion method. Fundamentals of neut- tions. Topics of special interest. PREREQUISITE: ron transport theory. Reactor kinetics and control. ME 3521. Change in reactivity during reactor lifetime. Ap- plication of perturbation theory to reactivity calcu- ME 4522 VIBRATION, NOISE, AND SHOCK lations. PREREQUISITE: ME 3301 or equivalent. (4-0). Matrix analysis of many degree of freedom systems. Discrete models of continuous systems.

ME 4321 REACTOR ENGINEERING PRINCI- Transfer matrices. Applications to shipboard vi- PLES AND DESIGN (4-2). Reactor heat genera- bration and noise control. Shock response tion and removal. Thermal stress analysis. Nuclear analysis. PREREQUISITE: ME 3521. fuel cycle. Change in reactivity during core lifetime. Overriding of fission product poisoning. ME 4612 ADVANCED MECHANICS OF SOL- Principal types of reactor systems. The synthesis IDS (4-0). Additional advanced topics. PREREQ- of reactor physics, heat transfer and hydraulics, UISITES: MA 3132 or equivalent and ME 3611. properties of materials and safety requirements in reactor design. Student group design project. ME 4613 FINITE ELEMENT METHODS (4-0). PREREQUISITES: ME 3301 and ME 3150. Systematic construction of line, surface, and vol- ume elements for continuous systems. Applica- ME 4410 MARINE GAS TURBINES (3-2). tions to structural mechanics, heat transfer, fluid Thermodynamic analyses of gas turbine cycle var- flow. PREREQUISITE: ME 3611. iations (e.g., simple, regenerated, combined). Internal aerodynamics of compressor and turbine ME 4620 THEORY OF CONTINUOUS MEDIA design. Combustor design. Lubrication and fuel (4-0). Tensor analysis. Stress and strain tensors. systems. Operational control and instrumentation. Motion of a continuum. Energy and entropy. Con-

Inlet, exhaust, and silencing systems. Repair and stitutive equations. Applications to elasticity and maintenance. Propulsion of hydrofoil, surface ef- fluid dynamics. PREREQUISITES: ME 2201, ME fect, and conventional surface ships. Auxiliary 3611, and MA 2401. power generation. Waste heat utilization. Naval research and development. PREREQUISITE: ME ME 4721 -ME 4722 MARINE VEHICLE DESIGN 3450 or consent of Instructor. I-II (2-4). Various categories of marine vehicles

are described; this includes single hull, multiple

ME 4504 NAVAL WEAPONS I: GUN AND MIS- hull, submarine, surface effect, wing-in-ground SILE ENGINEERING (3-2). Gun internal ballis- effect and hydrofoil vehicles. A category of marine tics: gun propellant combustion; one-dimensional, vehicle is selected to fulfill a stated mission. A time-dependent model of gas flow. External ballis- vehicle configuration and specification of major tics: flat-earth trajectory equations with components which satisfies mission requirements aerodynamic forces and with and without proj- is sought. Consideration is given to all major facets ectile propulsion. Estimation of CEP. Damage ,by of marine vehicle synthesis including structures, blast in both air and water. Hydraulic ram. Missile hull forces, propulsion, electronics, armament,

performance: rocket, aerodynamics, guidance and crew, etc. PREREQUISITE: ME 3711. control. Discussion of guns vs missiles. ME 4902 ADVANCED STUDY IN MECHAN- ME 4505 NAVAL WEAPONS II: LASER ICAL ENGINEERING (2-0 to 6-0). Directed ad- TECHNOLOGY (3-2). Types of lasers according vanced study in mechanical engineering on a sub- to pumping mechanisms, laser performance, prop- ject of mutual interest to student and staff member.

144 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

May be repeated for credit with a different topic. ground material to fully understand the phenomena PREREQUISITE: Permission of Department is then provided in each case. Failures due to Chairman. Graded on Pass/Fail basis only. fatigue, brittle fracture, corrosion, and fabrication deficiencies are among those discussed. Selection MATERIALS of materials and modern methods of materials analysis are treated. PREREQUISITE: MS 2201 or Upper Division Courses equivalent, or permission of Instructor.

MS 2201 ENGINEERING MATERIALS (3-2). MS 3206 IMPERFECTIONS IN CRYSTALLINE Fundamental principles of materials science are SOLIDS (3-0). The effects of crystalline defects presented with particular emphasis on mechanical on the physical and mechanical behavior of solids behavior. The effects of atomic structure, crystal are discussed. This course examines in moderate structure, and microstructure on properties of detail those microstructural features which have a structural materials are emphasized. Crystalline major impact on materials development, fabrica- defects, deformation processes, strengthening tion, and utilization. Example topics are point de- mechanisms, brittle fracture, phase equilibria, heat fects in electronics, materials, strain-aging

treatment, and microstructural control are dis- phenomena, the role of stacking faults in material cussed with reference to practical examples. The failure, and subgrain strengthening. PREREQUI- course aims at providing the Naval Engineering SITE: MS 2201 or equivalent. student with the vocabulary and conceptual under- standing necessary for further study or for com- MS 3304 CORROSION (3-2). Presents the basic municating with materials experts. PREREQUI- chemical, electrochemical, mechanical, and SITE: Elementary courses in physics and chemis- metalurgical factors which influence the corrosion, try. oxidation, and deterioration of materials. Discus- ses standard methods of corrosion control, such as 2218 ELEMENTS OF ENGINEERING MA- MS cathodic protection coatings, cladding, alloy selec- TERIALS (3-2). Prerequisite, course content, and tion, and inhibitors; special problems encountered development parallels MS 2201 with emphasis on in unfamiliar environments. PREREQUISITE: MS Aeronautical and Aerospace applications. 2201 or equivalent.

Upper Division or MS 3401 MICROSCOPY (3-2). Electron mi- Graduate Courses croscopy and other sophisticated techniques are emphasized in a coverage of modern methods of MS 3201 MATERIALS SCIENCE AND EN- microscopic observation. Techniques covered in- GINEERING (3-2). Intended as a first course in clude scanning electron microscopy, transmission materials for students who have had an under- electron microscopy, conventional microprobe graduate survey course in materials (such as MS analysis, field ion microscopy, and polarized light, 2201), or who have a good background in chemis- stereo, interference, phase contrast, and holo- try, thermodynamics, and physics. Fundamental graphic light optical methods. Course and lab will principles of materials science are presented with simultaneously cover both theory and practice, in- particular emphasis on mechanical behavior. Top- cluding specimen preparation, instrument design ics covered include atomic structure, crystal struc- and operation, and applications. PREREQUISITE: ture, microstructure, crystalline defects, deforma- Consent of Instructor. tion processes, strengthening mechanisms, frac- ture, and phase transformations. PREREQUISITE: Graduate Courses Undergraduate course in materials, and/or courses in chemistry, thermodynamics, and physics. MS 4215 PHASE TRANSFORMATION (3-2). Structural changes which commonly occur in ma- MS 3202 PROPERTIES, PROBLEMS, AND terials by various mechanisms are considered. Sol- FAILURES OF STRUCTURAL MATERIALS idification, precipitation, recrystallization, and (3-2). Topics of interest to the Naval, Aero, or martensitic transformations are emphasized, both

Weapons engineer are emphasized through case in principle and in regard to their technological studies of actual failures. The cause(s) of each importance. Principles of nucleation and growth, failure are presented, and the necessary back- diffusion and kinetics are presented and their rele-

145 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

vance.*, to practical heat treating and fabrication MS 4312 ADVANCED MATERIALS (4-0). The processes are considered. PREREQUISITE: MS course is structured to provide a vehicle for the 2201 or equivalent. study of materials pertinent to a specific area of environmental utilization or design. Example categories are marine materials, nuclear materials, MS 4302 SPECIAL TOPICS IN MATERIALS elevated-temperature materials, aircraft alloys, SCIENCE (Hours by arrangement.) Independent materials for energy conversion. Topics discussed study of advanced subjects not regularly offered. may include material failures, materials selection, PREREQUISITE: Consent of Instructor. testing, and new concepts in materials engineer-

ing. Course scope is decided by mutual agreement of students and Instructor. PREREQUISITE: MS MS 4305 MATERIALS FOR ELECTRICAL AND 2201, MS 3202, or equivalent. ELECTRONIC APPLICATIONS (3-0). The mate- rials used in electrical and electronic applications MS 4811 MECHANICAL BEHAVIOR OF EN- are discussed, including ferro-magnetic and GINEERING MATERIALS (3-2). The response of ferri-magnetic materials, semi-conductors, insul- structural materials to mechanical stress is dis- ators, dielectrics, and piezo-electric and ferrolec- cussed with emphasis on plastic deformation in tric crystals. The electronic, crystallographic and metals. Topics include mechanisms of high- thermodynamic principles controlling these mate- temperature deformation, fatigue, and fracture. rials are discussed and the heat treatments, compo- New concepts allowing development of materials sitions, and methods of fabrication of commercial to circumvent these failure mechanisms are materials are emphasized. PREREQUISITE: MS treated. PREREQUISITES: MS 3202 or permis- 2201 or equivalent. sion of Instructor.

146 METEOROLOGY

DEPARTMENT OF METEOROLOGY

GEORGE JOSEPH HALTINER, Distin- B.A., Univ. of Washington, 1935; guished Professor of Meteorology; M.S., 1937; Ph.D., Princeton Univ., Chairman (1946)*; B.S., College of 1940. St. Thomas, 1940; Ph.M., Univ. of FRANK LIONEL MARTIN, Professor Wisconsin, Ph.D., 1948. 1942; Emeritus (1947); B.A., Univ. of CHIH-PEI CHANG, Associate Professor British Columbia, 1936; M.A., 1938; of Meteorology (1972); B.S., National Ph.D., Univ. of Chicago, 1941. Taiwan Univ., 1966; Ph.D., Univ. of Washington, 1972. *The year of joining the Postgraduate School KENNETH LA VERN DAVIDSON, Faculty is indicated in parentheses. Associate Professor of Meteorology (1970); B.S., Univ. of Minnesota, DEPARTMENTAL REQUIREMENTS FOR 1962; M.S., Univ. of Michigan, 1966; DEGREES IN METEOROLOGY OR Ph.D., 1970. METEOROLOGY AND OCEANOGRAPHY RUSSELL LEONARD ELSBERRY, As- sociate Professor of Meteorology MASTER OF SCIENCE IN METEOROLOGY (1968); B.S., Colorado State Univ., 1963; Ph.D., 1968. 1. Entrance to a program leading to a Master of Science degree in Meteorology requires mathema- ROBERT LEE HANEY, Associate Pro- tics through differential and integral calculus and a fessor of Meteorology A.B., (1970); minimum of one year of college physics. George Washington Univ. 1964; Ph.D., Univ. of California at Los 2. The degree of Master of Science in Meteorol- Angeles, 1971. ogy requires completion of: ROBERT JOSEPH RENARD, Professor of Meteorology (1952); M.S., Univ. a. Mathematics courses in vector analysis, of Chicago, 1952; Ph.D., Florida State partial differential equations, and applica- Univ., 1970. tion of numerical methods and computers to the solution of partial differential equa- WILLEM van der BIJL, Associate Pro- tions. fessor of Meteorology (1961); B.Sc, Free Univ. of Amsterdam, 1941; b. Thirty-five quarter hours of graduate M.Sc, 1943; Ph.D., State Univ. Ut- meteorology courses of which 15 hours recht, 1952. must be in the 4000 series. FORREST ROGER WILLIAMS, CDR, U.S. Navy; Assistant Professor of c. The basic sequence of graduate courses in Meteorology (1974); B.S., Naval the fields of dynamical, physical and Academy, 1956; M.S., Naval Post- synoptic meteorology, must be included graduate School, 1962; M.S., Mas- in these 35 hours. sachusetts Institute of Technology, 1972. d. An acceptable thesis. ROGER TERRY WILLIAMS, Professor MASTER OF SCIENCE IN of Meteorology (1968); A.B., Univ. METEOROLOGY AND OCEANOGRAPHY of California at Los Angeles, 1959; M.A., 1961; Ph.D., 1963. 1. Direct entrance to a program leading to the degree Master of Science in Meteorology EMERITUS FACULTY and Oceanography requires a baccalaureate degree in meteorology and/or oceanography or equivalent. WILLIAM DWIGHT DUTHIE, Distin- This normally permits the validation of required guished Professor Emeritus (1945); undergraduate courses such as physics, chemistry,

147 METEOROLOGY differential equations, linear algebra, vector METEOROLOGICAL LABORATORIES analysis and various courses in meteorology and/or oceanography, which are prerequisites to the In addition to the standard synoptic laboratories, graduate program. These prerequisites may be NPS meteorological facilities include most instru- taken at the Naval Postgraduate School; however, ments in present-day use for observing the atmo- in that event the program may be lengthened by sphere as well as equipment for copying weather one or two quarters. data, analyses and forecasts emanating from the

National Weather Service. Similar information is

Indirect entry into the program is possible for per- received from Numerical Weather Central in Mon- sons lacking a baccalaureate degree in meteorolo- terey. Rawinsonde and wiresonde equipment, an gy or oceanography through the oceanography cur- air inversion meter, an APT receiver for readout of riculum (440). Minimal entrance requirements weather satellite data and micrometeorologically here include differential and integral calculus, and instrumented masts on the Research Vessel R/V a year each of college physics and chemistry. ACANIA are utilized by faculty and students in the Meteorology and Oceanography Programs.

2. The degree of Master of Science in Meteorol- ogy and Oceanography requires: METEOROLOGY

a. Completion of 48 quarter hours of MR 01 10 APPLICATIONS SEMINAR (1-0). Pre- graduate courses in meteorology and sentation of D.o.D. related research activities, ap- oceanography including MR/OC 4413, plications to weapons and warfare systems, utiliza- MR 4322, MR 4323 and 10 quarter hours tion of oceanography and meteorology in specific in the 4000 oceanography series. The de- billets, presentations by faculty, staff, selected gree program must be approved by both students and visiting authorities. PREREQUI- the Department of Meteorology and the SITE: Enrollment in an Environmental Sciences Department of Oceanography. curriculum.

b. Completion of an acceptable thesis on a MR 0810 THESIS RESEARCH (0-0). Every stu- topic approved by either department. dent conducting thesis research will enroll in this course. DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY Upper Division Courses

The Ph.D. is offered in the Department of Meteorology in the following areas of study; nu- MR 2200 DESCRIPTIVE METEOROLOGY merical weather prediction, geophysical fluid (4-0). A general course which includes basic in- dynamics, analysis of atmospheric systems, and struments, the physical laws governing atmo- tropical meteorology. spheric processes, the composition and vertical The requirements for the degree are grouped structure of the atmosphere, physical processes, into three categories: course work, research in con- cyclones and anticyclones, air masses, fronts trop- junction with an approved dissertation, examina- ical disturbances, general circulation and observa- tion in both the major and a minor field, and lan- tions from satellites. PREREQUISITE: Depart- guages. The minor field is usually in oceanog- ment approval. raphy, mathematics or physics. The required examinations are described in this MR 2210 MARINE METEOROLOGY (4-3). An catalog in the section Requirements for the Doc- introductory course that treats the composition and tor's Degree. The Department of Meteorology also structure of the atmosphere, thermodynamical pro- requires a preliminary examination in order, to cesses, forces and related small- and large-scale show evidence of acceptability as a doctoral stu- motions, air masses, fronts, severe storms, solar dent. and terrestrial radiation and weather forecasting. Prospective students should consult with the Laboratory periods are devoted to exercises illus- Chairman of the Department of Meteorology for trating lecture material including weather-map further information and guidance regarding doc- analysis over oceanic areas. PREREQUISITE: PH toral programs. 1011 or equivalent; Calculus (concurrently).

148 METEOROLOGY

MR 2413 METEOROLOGY FOR ANTISUB- ture data, including weather satellite observations, MARINE WARFARE (3-0). A general course in with emphasis on the low and middle troposphere. meteorology for the ASW curriculum. Atmo- Synoptic models of extratropical vortices, waves spheric stability and EM wave propagation are re- and frontal systems, with emphasis on three- lated to vertical distributions of temperature and dimensional space structure and time continuity. moisture; precipitation, clouds and wind are re- Introduction to analysis in the high troposphere lated to synoptic systems; boundary fluxes are re- and low stratosphere. PREREQUISITES: MR lated to momentum exchange from the free atmo- 2210 or equivalent; MR 3321 or OC 4321, or con- sphere; changes in the mixed layer depth are re- sent of the Instructor. lated to boundary fluxes. PREREQUISITES: Dif- ferential and integral calculus and OC 2265. MR 3225 METEOROLOGICAL ANALYSIS LABORATORY (0-6). Applications of concepts MR 2416 METEOROLOGY FOR ELECTRONIC considered in MR 3220 with emphasis on the WARFARE (2-0). A survey of environmental fac- analysis of the low and middle troposphere, espe- tors affecting the propagation and attenuation of cially surface and 500 mb charts and associated electromagnetic (EM) and optical (EO) waves in vertical cross sections. PREREQUISITES: MR the atmosphere; vertical distributions of tempera- 3220 concurrently; MR 2210 or equivalent. ture and moisture in standard atmosphere; synoptic conditions associated with anomalous propagation MR 3230 TROPOSPHERIC AND STRATOS- of electromagnetic waves; regions and layers as- PHERIC METEOROLOGY (4-0). An analytic and sociated with high level turbulance intensities af- synoptic interpretation of tropospheric and stratos- fecting optical wave propagation; climatologies of pheric systems with emphasis on the middle and high altitude ionized regions affecting propagation high altitude aspects of extratropical cyclones, jet of EM waves greater than 10 meter wavelength. streams and fronts, and related dynamical prop- PREREQUISITES: MA 3139 or PS 3411. erties. PREREQUISITES: MR 3220, MR 4322 concurrently. MR 2520 CLIMATOLOGY AND STATISTICS (3-1). Discussion of climate classifications, changes and controls. Climates of areas important MR 3235 TROPOSPHERIC AND STRATOS- to the Navy. Basic statistical quantities (mean, PHERIC METEOROLOGY LABORATORY standard deviation, correlation and regression) are (0-8). Practice in synoptic-scale analysis of pa- introduced and their role in climatology demon- rameters considered in MR 3230 with emphasis on strated. PREREQUISITE: MR 2210. objectivity, interrelationships and application to forecast problems. PREREQUISITES: MR 3225, Upper Division or Graduate Courses MR 3230 concurrently.

MR 3150 GEOPHYSICAL RANDOM PRO- MR 3240 OPERATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL CESSES (3-1). Estimation and decision theory. PRODUCTS (3-4). Meteorological and oceanog- Spatial and temporal sampling of geophysical data. raphical products available to the operating fleet Harmonic analysis and orthogonal functions. Time from Fleet Numerical Weather Central/Fleet series analysis. PREREQUISITE: MR 2520. Weather Centrals and other sources are described

and applied to the diagnosis and prognosis of tacti- MR 3212 POLAR METEOROLOGY/OCEAN- cal environmental parameters for both current and OGRAPHY (3-1). Operational aspects of arctic historical situations. PREREQUISITES: MR 2210 and antarctic meteorology. Polar oceanography. andOC 3221. Sea-ice; its seasonal distribution, melting and freezing processes, physical and mechanical prop- erties, drift and predictions. Geology and MR 3250 TROPICAL METEOROLOGY (3-0). geophysics. PREREQUISITES: MR 3230, OC Structure and development of tropical cyclones; 3221. observations of synoptic-scale wave disturbances,

cloud clusters, upper tropospheric systems, the in- MR 3220 METEOROLOGICAL ANALYSIS tertropical convergence zone and monsoon circula- (3-0). Techniques of evaluation, interpretation and tions; tropical scale analysis and energetics. PRE- analysis of pressure, wind temperature and mois- REQUISITES: MR 4322, MR 3220.

149 METEOROLOGY

MR 3252 TROPICAL METEOROLOGY/ MR 3512 HEAT TRANSFER PROCESSES (4-0). LABORATORY (3-4). Same as MR 3250 plus Monochromatic intensity and flux from black laboratory sessions on streamline, isotach and con- bodies; other properties of black bodies. The flux tour (isobaric) analyses and forecasting of tropical of terrestrial radiation crossing an arbitrary level in systems, with emphasis on tropical cyclones and an atmosphere consisting both of water vapor and the use of meteorological satellite observations. carbon dioxide. Terrestrial flux-divergence as a PREREQUISITES: MR 3220/5 and MR 4322. cooling effect in the atmosphere. Solar insolation

at the outer boundary of the atmosphere and at the MR 3260 PROGNOSTIC CHARTS AND FORE- earth; parameterization of solar attenuation pro- CASTING WEATHER ELEMENTS (3-0). Sub- cesses in the atmosphere. The mean heat balance jective and objective methods of atmospheric of the earth and atmosphere. Net radiative energy prognosis and techniques for forecasting as a driving mechanism for the general circulation. operationally-important weather elements from PREREQUISITE: MR 3420 or consent of Instruc- surface to 10 mb. Interpretation, use and systema- tor. tic errors of computer-generated products. PRE- REQUISITES: MR 3230; MR 4323 or consent of MR 3820 PRINCIPLES OF MEASUREMENT Instructor. (3-2). The application of the basic principles of mechanics, heat, electricity, sound and optics to MR 3262 PROGNOSTIC CHARTS AND FORE- meteorological instrumentation employed by the CASTING WEATHER ELEMENTS/LABORA- Navy with special emphasis on upper-air and satel- TORY (3-4). Same as MR 3260 plus laboratory lite developments. Design and operation of sessions on the application of lecture material. oceanographic instruments; recording of oceanog- Also practice in weather briefing, including diag- raphic observations. PREREQUISITE: MA 2121 nosis and forecasting of current weather situations or equivalent. using weather satellite observations and National Meteorological Center and Fleet Numerical Graduate Courses Weather Central products. PREREQUISITES: MR 3230, MR 4323 or consent of Instructor. MR 4241 MESOSCALE METEOROLOGY (3-0). Description and physical understanding of sub- MR 3321 AIR-OCEAN FLUID DYNAMICS synoptic scale weather systems and their relation to (4-0). The hydrodynamical equations for a rotating the synoptic-scale environment. Applications to fluid. Forces, kinematics, simple balanced flows, short-range and local-area forecasting utilizing barotropy, baroclinicity, vertical shear; various satellite and numerical-model products relevant to vertical coordinates. Friction and boundary layers, mesoscale weather phenomena. PREREQUI- introduction to scale analysis. Vorticity and di- SITES: MR 3230/5; MR 4323, or MR 4322 with vergence equations. PREREQUISITES: MA 2048, consent of Instructor. MA 2121 (may be concurrent), or equivalent. MR 4242 ADVANCED TROPICAL METEOR- MR 3420 GEOPHYSICAL THER- OLOGY (3-0). Equatorial wave theory; stratos- MODYNAMICS (4-0). The physical variables; pheric wave motions and quasi-biennial oscilla- properties of gases, water and moist air; equations tions; tropospheric disturbances; energy sources of state and the laws of thermodynamics applied to and instabilities; boundary layer and cumulus con- the atmosphere and oceans, entropy, adiabatic vection parameterization; monsoon circulations processes and potential temperatures; meteorolog- and their interactions with other scales; and ical thermodynamic diagrams; geopotential and selected topics in dynamics and thermodynamics hydrostatic equilibrium, static stability criteria and of tropical flows. PREREQUISITE: Consent of In- phenomena. PREREQUISITES: Calculus, MR structor. 2200 or equivalent, or consent of Instructor. MR 4250 GENERAL CIRCULATION OF THE MR 3421 CLOUD PHYSICS (3-0). Basic princi- ATMOSPHERE AND OCEANS (3-0). Selected ples of cloud and precipitation physics and applica- topics on the general circulation of the atmosphere tion to weather modification. Selected topics in (e.g., heat, momentum and moisture fluxes; atmospheric pollution. PREREQUISITE: MR energetics) and ocean (e.g., linear and nonlinear 3420. theories of the wind-driven ocean circulation, non-

150 METEOROLOGY

linear thermocline theories, mesoscale eddies, MR 4413 AIR/SEA INTERACTION (4-0). Con- mixed-layer theories), coupled ocean-atmosphere sequences of momentum, heat and moisture ex- general circulation models. PREREQUISITE: change between the atmosphere and the ocean. Consent of Instructor. Concepts in turbulence and similarity theory for stationary turbulent regimes adjacent to the air/sea MR 4322 DYNAMIC METEOROLOGY (4-0). interface. The oceanic well-mixed layer. Mutual Scale analysis, perturbation method; solutions of atmosphere and ocean response times and equations of motion for sound, gravity, and synop- synoptic-scale energy exchanges. PREREQUI-

tic waves, filtering; baroclinic and barotropic in- SITE: MR 4322 or consent of Instructor. stability; geostrophic adjustment. PREREQUI- SITES: MR 3420, MR 3321, MA 3132. MR 4415 ATMOSPHERIC TURBULENCE (3-0). Approaches for defining the structure of the turbu- MR 4323 NUMERICAL AIR AND OCEAN lent atmospheric boundary layer. Review of statis- MODELING (4-3). Numerical models of tical descriptions of atmospheric turbulence; av- meteorological and oceanographic phenomena. eraging, moments, joint moments, spectral repre- Finite difference techniques for solving elliptic and sentation. Equations for a turbulent regime in a hyperbolic equations, linear and nonlinear compu- stratified, shear flow. Scaling parameters and simi- tational instability. Filtered and primitive equation larity theories for surface layer profiles, spectra; prediction models. Energetics. Sigma coordinate. Kolmogorov hypotheses, Monin-Obukhov stabil- Objective analysis, initialization and four- ity length. Measurement of atmospheric turbu- dimensional data assimilation as time permits. lence. Examination of observed spectra and scales PREREQUISITES: MR 4322, MA 3232. of atmospheric turbulence. PREREQUISITES: MR 4322 and MR 3150, or consent of Instructor. MR 4324 ADVANCED NUMERICAL WEATHER PREDICTION (3-0). Initialization, MR 4416 ATMOSPHERIC FACTORS IN ELEC- boundary conditions, finite-difference schemes, TROMAGNETIC PROPAGATION (3-0). Princi- stability and convergence; sensible, latent, and ples of radar, laser and sound propagation in the

radiative heat transfer, simulation of sub-grid scale atmosphere. Sensing from satellites, effects of at- processes such as convection and friction; general mosphere on propagation: refraction, scattering,

circulation models, spectral methods. PREREQ- attenuation, superrefraction, ducting, etc. Detec- UISITES: MR 4323 or consent of Instructor. tion of atmospheric phenomena. PREREQUISIT- ES: MR 3230; MR 3512, or consent of Instructor. MR 4331 ADVANCED GEOPHYSICAL FLUID DYNAMICS I (3-0). Advanced topics in the MR 4800 ADVANCED ANALYSIS AND PRE- dynamics of the atmosphere and the oceans includ- DICTION (3-0). Selected topics in geophysical ing scale analysis; geostrophic adjustment; disper- fluid dynamics, advanced diagnostic and prognos- sion, and barotropic and baroclinic instabilities. tic techniques including modeling, remote sensing, PREREQUISITE: Consent of Instructor. etc. The course may be repeated for credit as topics change. PREREQUISITE: Consent of Department MR 4332 ADVANCED GEOPHYSICAL FLUID Chairman. DYNAMICS II (3-0). Energetics of unstable dis- turbances; energy cascade; boundary layer analysis MR 4900 SEMINAR IN METEOROLOGY (2-0). with application to the Ekman layer and to the Students present results of thesis or other approved frictional and the nonlinear ocean boundary cur- research investigation. PREREQUISITE: Concur- rents; finite amplitude effects. PREREQUISITE: rent preparation of thesis or other acceptable re- Consent of Instructor. search paper. Graded on Pass/Fail basis only.

151 ,

NATIONAL SECURITY AFFAIRS

DEPARTMENT OF NATIONAL SECURITY AFFAIRS

PATRICK JOHNSTON PARKER, Pro- Professor of National Security Affairs fessor of Economics; Chairman (1976); A.B., Univ. of California at (1974)*; M.B.A., Univ. of Chicago, Berkeley, 1958; M.A., 1966; Ph.D., 1955. 1971.

JOHN WILLIAM AMOS, II, Assistant WILLIAM REESE, Professor of National Professor of Political Science (1970); Security Affairs and Physics (1963); B.A., Occidental College, 1957; B.A., Reed College, 1958; M.S., M.A., Univ. of California at Berke- Univ. of Illinois, 1960; Ph.D., 1962. ley, 1962; Ph.D., 1972. RONALD GRAHAM SHERWIN, Assis- DAVID PATRICK BURKE, Lt. Col., tant Professor of Political Science USAF, Assistant Professor of Political (1975); B.A., California State Univ. at Science (1976); A.B., Univ. of Long Beach, 1965; M.A., Univ. of California at Berkeley, 1956; M.A., Southern California, 1967; Ph.D., San Francisco State College, 1963; 1972. M.P.A., Harvard Univ., 1969; Ph.D., KAMIL TAHA SAID, Associate Profes- 1975. sor of National Security Affairs CLAUDE ALBERT BUSS, Professor of (1975); B.A., Colorado State College, Political Science and History (1976); 1937; M.A., San Jose State College, B.A., Washington Missionary Col- 1967. lege, 1922; M.A., Susquehanna RUSSEL HENRY STOLFI, Associate Univ., 1924; Ph.D., Univ. of Professor of History (1966); B.S., Pennsylvania, 1927. Stanford Univ., 1954; M.A., 1964; DONALD CHARLES DANIEL, Assis- Ph.D., 1966. tant Professor of Political Science FRANK MICHAEL TETI, Associate (1975); A.B., Holy Cross College, Professor of Political Science (1966); 1966; Ph.D., Georgetown Univ., B.A., Los Angeles State College, 1971. 1960; M.A., 1962; Diploma, Institute BOYD FRANCIS HUFF, Professor of of World Affairs, 1961; M.P.A., Government and History (1958); Syracuse Univ., 1972; Ph.D., 1966. B.A., Univ. of Washington, 1938; JIRI VALENTA, Assistant Professor of M.A., Brown Univ., 1941; Ph.D., National Security Affairs (1976); Ing. Univ. of California at Berkeley, 1955. Pol. E.K., Prague School of Econom-

STEPHEN JURIKA, JR., Adjunct Pro- ics, 1968; Ph.D. , John Hopkins Univ. fessor of Political Science (1975); 1975. B.S., U.S. Naval Academy, 1933; PETER CHENG-CHAO WANG, As- M.A., George Washington Univ., sociate Professor of Mathematics and 1957; Ph.D., Stanford Univ., 1962. National Security Affairs (1970) EDWARD JOHN LAURANCE, Assis- B.A., Pacific Lutheran Univ., 1961 tant Professor of Political Science M.A., Wayne State Univ., 1962 (1972); B.S., U.S. Military Academy, Ph.D., 1966. 1960; M.A., Temple Univ., 197Q; *The year of joining the Postgraduate School Ph.D., Univ. of Pennsylvania, 1973. Faculty is indicated in parentheses. KURT LONDON, Adjunct Professor of DEPARTMENTAL REQUIREMENTS FOR International Affairs (1976); Ph.D., THE DEGREE MASTER OF ARTS IN Univ. of Berlin, Heidelberg, Ger- NATIONAL SECURITY AFFAIRS many, 1928. RALPH HARRY MAGNUS, Assistant 1 . The entrance requirements for this program are

152 .

NATIONAL SECURITY AFFAIRS

a baccalaureate degree earned with above average nars will be phased with the development of the academic performance. Applicants must demon- curriculum.

strate their aptitude for the specific curriculum op- tion concerned, through either the Graduate Rec- NS 0011 SEMINAR IN NATIONAL SECURITY ord Examination or the completion of under- AFFAIRS (0-2). A continuing series of col- graduate courses which meet the prerequisite re- loquium seminars in subjects bearing on National quirements for the courses offered in the option. Security Affairs will be phased with the develop- Such applicants must have the approval of the ment of the curriculum. Chairman, Department of National Security Af-

fairs. NS 0810 THESIS RESEARCH (0-0). Every stu-

dent conducting thesis research will enroll in this

2. Degree Requirements. course.

Area Specialization and Strategic Plan- NS 0811 PREPARATION FOR COMPREHEN- ning Options SIVE EXAMINATION (0-0). Every student pre- paring for comprehensive examination will enroll

a. At least 44 units of approved graduate study in this course. pertinent to the field of National Security Affairs,

of which at least 16 units must be at the 4000 level. Lower Division Course

b. The completion of an approved sequence of courses in one of two areas of concentration; NS 1368 AMERICAN LIFE AND INSTITU- (1) Area Specialization: Completion of TIONS (3-0). American political institutions and graduate courses in the geographic areas of spe- the political, social, economic, and cultural as- cialization, including a 4000 level course. pects of American life. OPEN ONLY TO ALLIED (2) Strategic Planning: Completion of OFFICERS. Graded on Pass/Fail basis only. graduate courses in either a geographic or func- tional area of specialization, including a 4000 level Upper Division Course course.

c. Successful completion of departmental NS 2070 NAVAL WARFARE AND NATIONAL comprehensive examination, or completion of an SECURITY (4-0). This is an introductory course acceptable thesis. specifically designed for students in NPS warfare

d. Certification of a language proficiency in curricula. It focuses on the role of the U.S. Navy the area of specialization (Area Specialization Op- as an instrument of U.S. security policy and on the tion only). Soviet Navy as the primary naval threat to U.S.

interests. It places the use of both navies in the Naval Intelligence Option context of a dynamic naval balance and of a chang- ing international system.

a. A minimum of 44 quarter hours of graduate work, of which at least 12 quarter hours must be at Upper Division or Graduate Courses the 4000 level. At least 20 hours must be in the area of national security affairs. NS 3032 REVOLUTION AND POLITICAL b. Completion of graduate courses in at least TERRORISM IN THE MODERN WORLD (4-0). three different academic disciplines, including a The course covers' the selected insurgencies and 4000 level course in at least two of these disciplin- incidents in detail emphasizing the general histori- es. cal forces operating, e.g., Nationalist, Socialism,

c. Completion of an acceptable thesis in addi- Imperialism, etc. , as well as the particular forms of tion to the 44 quarter hours of course work. development. Emphasis is on accurate description of events in order to derive patterns of insurgency warfare NATIONAL SECURITY AFFAIRS NS 3061 AMERICAN NATIONAL SECURITY NS 0010 SEMINAR IN NAVAL INTELLIGENCE POLICY (4-0). An institutional and functional (0-2). A continuing series of colloquium seminars analysis of the national and international factors

in subjects bearing on Naval Intelligence. Semi- which shape U.S. defense policy. Attention in the

153 NATIONAL SECURITY AFFAIRS

course is focused on two major areas: 1) the NS 3172 PUBLIC POLICY PROCESSES (4-0). A decision-making process, including the presentation of the processes by which resources legislative-executive budgetary process, as well as are allocated to the production of goods in the De- the influence of bureaucratic politics and interest fense sector. Defense budget preparation, Presi- group participation upon defense decisions; 2) the dential policy-making and management, and Con- problems of strategic choice, including threat gressional budget action are considered and placed analysis, net assessment, deterrence theory, and within the context of the theory of public goods. limited war. PREREQUISITES: MN 3140, MN 3161, MN 3105. May be given as MN 3172, or with consent NS 3062 INTELLIGENCE DATA ANALYSIS of the Instructor. AND RESEARCH METHODS (4-2). A survey of methods and techniques for synthesis, analysis, in- NS 3262 THEORY AND PRACTICE OF IN- terpretation, and reporting of data. Topics include TERNATIONAL POLITICS (4-0). A theoretical sampling methods, content analysis, data handling systematic analysis of international relations and a and processing, scaling techniques, and parametric study of the factors, organizational strategies, and and non-parametric tests, with emphasis on appli- techniques of international politics. cation to intelligence. PREREQUISITES: PS 3000 or equivalent, CS 2100. May also be offered as OS NS 3268 PROBLEMS OF GOVERNMENT AND 3062. SECURITY IN CONTEMPORARY EUROPE (4-0). Problems of the European political system

since World War II. Emphasis on the interrelation NS 3078 THE POLITICS OF NATIONAL AND of European states (EEC and CMEA), the polariza- GLOBAL ECONOMIC RELATIONS (4-0). An tion of Europe between two security systems integrated analysis of the economic and political (NATO and the Warsaw Pact) and relations be- factors that together determine national and inter- tween the European states and the Third World. national economic arrangements. The student first addresses the general principles of public finance NS 3272 AMERICAN TRADITIONS AND THE as a prerequisite for the analysis of budgets, and NATIONAL INTEREST (4-0). A study of the policy priorities in specific countries and areas. ideals and values which constitute the essential

The second portion of the course is concerned with qualities of American life. The main purpose of the basic differences, between socialist, capitalist this course is to define the American national in- and market economic systems. The remainder of terest in the international context and the effect of the course is concerned with the changing world national security policy on the realization of na- economic order, to include issues such as trade, tional goals. aid, multi-national corporations, technology and strategic resources. NS 3275 INTERNATIONAL LAW (4-0). An in- troduction to the principles of International Law NS 3164 COMPARATIVE IDEOLOGIES (4-0). including sovereignty, territory, recognition, the Analysis of the major ideological forces in con- Law of the Sea, and the laws of war. Special em- temporary world affairs and their effect upon phasis is on the Law of the Sea, its development, foreign and defense policies. Special emphasis on practice, and prospects. Marxian political and social thought. Analysis and comparison on the concepts of democracy, NS 3276 THE LAW OF WAR (4-0). The course socialism, and fascism. Use of primary source ma- presents and analyzes the law of war as it is to be terial. PREREQUISITE: A course (upper division observed and enforced by the Armed Forces of the or graduate) in the History of Western Philosophy United States. Special attention is paid to the 1949

or Political Theory, or consent of instructor. . Geneva Conventions, the Navy's Law of Naval Warfare and the Army's Law of Land Warfare. NS 3169 COMPARATIVE POLITICAL ANALYSIS AND RESEARCH METHODS (4-0). NS 3280 NUCLEAR WEAPONS AND FOREIGN An analytical and comparative study of the form POLICY (4-0). An interdisciplinary course which and functioning of the major types of contempo- covers both the technology and political influences rary government with emphasis on the policymak- of nuclear weapon systems. The course will em- ing process and research methods. phasize the interaction of nuclear weapon systems

154 NATIONAL SECURITY AFFAIRS

with the foreign policies of the major powers and foreign policy. PREREQUISITES: NS 3300 or NS the political blocs from 1945-present. May also be 3331, or their equivalent. offered as PH 2280. NS 3315 THE MIDDLE EAST: THE MILITARY NS 3300 PROBLEMS OF GOVERNMENT AND DIMENSION (4-0). An examination of the politi- SECURITY IN THE MIDDLE EAST (4-0). An cal, sociological, cultural and strategic roles of the introductory course in Middle Eastern society and miliary in Middle Eastern history and politics. politics designed to provide the maximum amount Among the topics considered are: traditional mili- of broad background area knowledge to be utilized tary patterns, military recruitment, organization, in follow-on courses in Middle Eastern politics. doctrine, and learning experiences.

NS 3310 NORTH AFRICA: GOVERNMENT NS 3316 PROBLEMS OF GOVERNMENT AND AND SECURITY IN THE MAGHRIB (4-0). This SECURITY IN THE NORTHERN TIER: TUR- course is designed to extend the student's knowl- KEY, IRAN, AFGHANISTAN, PAKISTAN edge of selected North African and Red Sea littoral (4-0). An examination of internal and external countries, and to provide some insight into the se- political, economic, and social forces in the major curity problems presented by their domestic poli- non-Arab Middle Eastern states as reflected in tics. In addition, some coverage of central African their internal development and international countries will be included. policies. Cooperation and conflict in the behavior of these nations toward each other will be explored NS 3312 SEMINAR ON MIDDLE EAST OIL in the context of their recent efforts at regional (4-0). An examination of the oil resources of the cooperation and regional organization (the Middle East for their impact upon the internal, re- Sa'dabad Pact, Cento, and RCD). Examination of gional, and international policies of region-states. their relationships to the major outside powers in- The role of international oil companies, consuming terested in the area, i.e., the U.S. and the Soviet states, and organizations of exporting countries is Union. Their relationships both as individual states studied. Differences in oil resources and revenues and as a sub-region with the Arab states of the are examined and related to different devel- Middle East. PREREQUISITES: NS 3300 and NS opmental and international policies. The past and 3320. future use of oil as a political weapon is discussed and evaluated. The use of revenues from oil is NS 3320 INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS AND examined for its impact on levels of development SECURITY PROBLEMS IN THE MIDDLE and the regional military balance. EAST (4-0). The course focuses on selected prob- lems affecting American security interests in the NS 3313 PROBLEMS OF GOVERNMENT AND Middle East: Strategic waterways, including the SECURITY IN SUB-SAHARAN AFRICA (4-0). Suez Canal, the Turkish Straits, and the Indian Emergence of independent African states from a Ocean; the politics and problems of access to the shared colonial heritage and their common prob- area's oil resources; the development of U.S. and lems in developing viable modern nation-states. Soviet policies toward the area. The foregoing Patterns of international cooperation and conflict problems will be set in the context of regional in- among African states, including discussions of Af- ternational politics. rican socialism, negritude, pan-Africanism, neu- tralism, and the continuing problem of South Afri- ca's future. Rival policies of outside powers, in- NS 3330 MILITARY GEOGRAPHY AND HIS- cluding the U.S., the Soviet Union, China and the TORY OF THE MIDDLE EAST (4-0). An inten- former colonial powers. sive course in Middle Eastern history from the viewpoint of geographical and military factors NS 3314 PROBLEMS OF GOVERNMENT AND which have shaped the course of events in the area. SECURITY IN ISRAEL (4-0). Israeli cultural, so- The geographic (including oceanographic) envi- cial, and political patterns: Hebraic traditions, ronment within which military campaigns have Zionism and the creation of Israel, institutional been conducted, and which continues to present and sociological frameworks for Israeli politics, military problems, is examined. Indigenous and elite recruitment, perceptions and strategic orienta- foreign techniques and tactics for dealing with this tions, security issues in Israeli domestic and environment, as well as the historical development

155 NATIONAL SECURITY AFFAIRS

of Middle Eastern military organization are national and domestic factors affecting post- 1953 studied. naval strategy; development of Soviet naval war- fare capabilities; doctrinal and functional analysis NS 3331 20TH CENTURY MIDDLE EASTERN of post- 1953 trends in naval strategy; command MILITARY AND POLITICAL HISTORY (4-0). structure; personnel training; law of the sea posi- A follow-on course to NS 3300 which continues tions; U.S. -Soviet naval interaction. the study of Middle Eastern history from the 19th

through the 20th Century. Emphasis is placed on NS 3430 SOVIET MILITARY STRATEGY (4-0). the political and military factors which shaped the Economic, historical and geographic influences on strategic events. Special attention is given to the Russian military operations and strategies em- genesis and development of nationalist movements phasizing the Soviet era and alternative future in the area and their impact on Middle Eastern Soviet military developments and strategies are politics. PREREQUISITE: NS 3300. examined.

NS 3350 AREA COLLOQUIUM IN MIDDLE NS 3440 COMPARATIVE COMMUNIST EASTERN STUDIES I (2-0). A combined NPS/ POLITICAL SYSTEMS (4-0). An analysis of DLI colloquium covering designated topics. Open structure and policy-making processes of existing to students completing the language portion of communist political systems, of major functions their studies. Cultures; current domestic and performed by them, and significant factors affect- foreign policy; and security problems of selected ing system development. countries in the areas of specialization. Graded on Pass/Fail basis only. NS 3450 AREA COLLOQUIUM IN SOVIET

STUDIES I (2-0). A combined NPS/DLI col- NS 3351 AREA COLLOQUIUM IN MIDDLE loquium covering designated topics. Open to stu- EASTERN STUDIES II (2-0). A combined NPS/ dents completing the language portion of their DLI colloquium covering designated topics. Open studies. Cultures; current domestic and foreign to students completing the language portion of policy; and security problems of selected countries

their studies. Cultures; current domestic and in the areas of specialization. Graded on Pass/Fail foreign policy; and security problems of selected basis only. countries in the areas of specialization. Graded on Pass/Fail basis only. NS 3451 AREA COLLOQUIUM IN SOVIET NS 3400 DOMESTIC DETERMINANTS OF STUDIES II (2-0). A combined NPS/DLI col- SOVIET NATIONAL SECURITY POLICY (4-0). loquium covering designated topics. Open to stu- A study of Russian and Soviet political inheri- dents completing the language portion of their tance, ideology, religion, political and economic studies. Cultures; current domestic and foreign structures, strategic posture, military capabilities, policy; and security problems of selected countries and leadership. in the areas of specialization. Graded on Pass/Fail basis only. NS 3410 SOVIET NATIONAL SECURITY AND FOREIGN POLICY-MAKING PROCESSES NS 3500 PROBLEMS OF GOVERNMENT AND (4-0). A study of the processes which determine SECURITY IN THE CARIBBEAN AREA (4-0). the national security and foreign policy of the A study of the political, economic, social, and cul- Soviet Union. The main focus will be on foreign tural characteristics and the security problems of policy and the dynamics of decision-making in the countries in the Caribbean area. Included are Soviet national security affairs. Mexico, Central America, the Caribbean Island countries, the Guianas, Venezuela, and Colombia. NS 3420 SOVIET NAVAL AND MARITIME STRATEGY (4-0). Examination of the roles NS 3510 PROBLEMS OF GOVERNMENT AND played by the Soviet Navy, Merchant Marine. SECURITY IN SOUTH AMERICA (4-0). A study Fishing Fleet, and Oceanological Establishment in of the political, economic, social, and cultural securing the objectives of the Soviet Government. characteristics and the security problems of the Topics include: geographic factors affecting Soviet countries in South America, excluding the ocean strategies; non-naval strategy trends; inter- Guianas.

156 NATIONAL SECURITY AFFAIRS

NS 3520 PROBLEMS OF DIPLOMACY AND new dynamic position; U.S. and Japanese security SECURITY IN LATIN AMERICA AND THE issues; problems of the two Koreas; Soviet and CARIBBEAN (4-0). A study of the political, eco- American Far Eastern interests and policies; nomic, and military relationships among the Latin analysis of present and future military capabilities American nations, and the role of Latin America in and strategies of East Asian States. world politics. Special emphasis is placed on U.S. relations with Latin America. NS 3611 PROBLEMS OF GOVERNMENT AND SECURITY IN CONTEMPORARY JAPAN (4-0). NS 3605 GEOGRAPHY, HISTORY AND CUL- A study of contemporary Japan since the end of

TURES OF ASIA (4-0). An introduction to Asia, World War II: Occupation policies of the U.S.; the including Japan, China, India, Southeast Asia, new Constitution; revival and nature of Japanese West and Central Asia. The course addresses the party government; parties and their platforms; people and their cultures, civilizations, social or- styles of leadership; Japanese economic policies; ganization, economic and political development access to resources; the energy problem; urbaniza- through four distinct periods: before the coming of tion and breakdown of old value systems. Japan's Europe, the colonial period, the era of national security problems; Korea; the approach of separat- development and modernization, and the period ing politics and economics; the two-China prob- since World War II. lem; relations with the Soviet Union; the nuclear

problem; relations with Europe; the security rela- NS 3606 PROBLEMS OF GOVERNMENT AND tionship of the U.S. and Japanese armed forces. SECURITY IN PENINSULAR SOUTHEAST ASIA (4-0). Problems of modernization, war, and NS 3612 PROBLEMS OF GOVERNMENT AND revolution in the governments and economies of SECURITY IN THE PEOPLE'S REPUBLIC OF the states of Peninsular Southeast Asia: cultural CHINA (4-0). A study and analysis of Communist

determinants; problems of ethnic minorities; role China since the end of World War II: The structure of religions; nationalism, communism, and wars of of government and party; the CCP, history, facts, liberation; the overseas Chinese problem; the ab- legends and leaders; the politics of a communist sorption of South Vietnam into the Democratic system. Population; land reform and the organiza- Republic of Vietnam; the transformation of Cam- tion of the agricultural sector; industrialization and bodia and Laos into Communist States; the Thai expansion of China's resource base; the People's

and Burmese military regimes and their problems Liberation Army, its command structure, political of modernization and security; the strategic inter- role, ground forces, navy, air force, and nuclear ests of the major powers. weapons systems; China's foreign and interna- tional security policies; relations with the Soviet NS 3608 PROBLEMS OF GOVERNMENT AND Union, Japan, Southeast Asia, South Asia, and SECURITY IN INSULAR SOUTHEAST ASIA Third World Countries; the nature and significance (4-0). Problems of modernization, war and revolu- of relations with the United States. tion in the government and economies of the states of Insular Southeast Asia: cultural determinants; NS 3620 PROBLEMS OF GOVERNMENT AND problems of ethnic minorities; roles of religions; SECURITY IN SOUTH ASIA AND THE IN- nationalism, communism, and wars of liberation; DIAN OCEAN (4-0>. Problems of nationalism,

the overseas Chinese problem; communal and modernization, and security in the governments leadership problems in Malaysia, Republic of Sin- and economies of India. Pakistan, Bangladesh,

gapore, Philippines, and Indonesia. Problems of Afghanistan, and Sri Lanka. Indian-Pakistani rela- security; the strategic interests of the major pow- tions; relations with China; the Tibetan and ers. Kashmir problems; strategic interests of the major

powers; Soviet interests and naval expansion in the NS 3610 PROBLEMS OF GOVERNMENT AND Indian Ocean. SECURITY IN EAST ASIA AND THE PACIFIC OCEAN (5-0). Problems of industrialization, revo- NS 3650 AREA COLLOQUIUM IN ASIAN

lution, and conflict in the East Asian States: Chi- STUDIES I (2-0). A combined NPS/DLI col- na's relations with contiguous states; Sino-Soviet loquium covering designated topics. Open to stu- state, party, and ideological differences; Chinese dents completing the language portion of their military and naval command structure; Japan's studies. Cultures; current domestic and foreign

157 NATIONAL SECURITY AFFAIRS

policy; and security problems of selected countries in the areas of specialization. Graded on Pass/Fail in the areas of specialization. Graded on Pass/Fail basis only. basis only. NS 3751 AREA COLLOQUIUM IN EUROPEAN NS 3651 AREA COLLOQUIUM IN ASIAN STUDIES II (2-0). A combined NPS/DLI col-

STUDIES II (2-0). A combined NPS/DLI col- loquium covering designated topics. Open to stu- loquium covering designated topics. Open to stu- dents completing the language portion of their dents completing the language portion of their studies. Cultures; current domestic and foreign studies. Cultures; current domestic and foreign policy; and security problems of selected countries policy; and security problems of selected countries in the areas of specialization. Graded on Pass/Fail

in the areas of specialization. Graded on Pass/Fail basis only. basis only. NS 3800 PROBLEMS OF GOVERNMENT AND NS 3700 STRATEGIC GEOGRAPHY AND THE SECURITY OF THE SCANDINAVIAN-BALTIC HISTORY OF EUROPE (4-0). The course links REGION (4-0). This course analyzes the political, the political and military experiences of the Euro- economic, social, and security problems faced by pean states and political blocs of the 19th and 20th the Scandinavian-Baltic countries. The role they Centuries with the decisive constraints and oppor- play on the northern flank of NATO will be tunities of geography. The advanced elements of examined as well as their position vis-a-vis the geography, which serve as the fundamental growing threat of Soviet military and naval power framework in political and military decision- in the Baltic and Norwegian seas. making, are systemically arranged and examined within Europe. Strategic position, area, physiog- NS 3900 INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION raphy, population, technology and economic re- (4-0). Analysis of the international system, its evo- sources are presented as the basic elements which lution from separatism and alliances to multina- have influenced the political and military events of tional organization and beyond. American goals, the recent past and can be used to help in forecast- objectives, and resources are examined in bilateral ing the future. relationships, regional groupings, functional ap- proaches, and general organization. Collective se- NS 3701 RECENT HISTORY OF EUROPE AND curity and peacekeeping efforts, pacific settle- THE U.S.S.R. (4-0). This course continues the ment, arms control and disarmament, and institu- narrative and analysis began in NS 3700 Strategic tion building. Geography and History of Europe, bringing the student from the Bolshevik Revolution and the NS 3901 OCEAN POLICY (4-0). Examination of

Treaty at Versailles to the present day. policy choices for the United States and other gov- ernments concerning political, military, legal, en- NS 3710 INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS AND vironmental, and economic problems of the sea. SECURITY PROBLEMS OF SOUTHERN EUROPE AND THE MEDITERRANEAN (4-0). NS 3902 SCIENCE, TECHNOLOGY, AND

This course is designed to provide an introduction PUBLIC POLICY (4-0). An inquiry into the role to security problems in and around the Mediterra- of science and technology in the formulation and nean. It will focus on the strategic problems of conduct of national policy. Interactions between access to, and defense of the Mediterranean lit- scientific communities, government, and militarq toral: communication routes in and through the services. Mediterranean; Western and Soviet interests in the Mediterranean; politics and policies of the sur- Graduate Courses rounding states. NS 4000 PERSPECTIVES ON AMERICAN NS 3750 AREA COLLOQUIUM IN EUROPEAN CIVILIZATION (4-0). This course, especially de-

STUDIES I (2-0). A combined NSP/DLI col- signed for the foreign area studies (attach9e) pro-

loquium covering designated topics. Open to stu- gram, is an interdisciplinary study of American dents completing the language portion of their culture, involving the political, economic, social, studies. Cultures; current domestic and foreign philosophical and literary development of the Na- policy; and security problems of selected countries tion from 1789 to the present.

158 NATIONAL SECURITY AFFAIRS

NS 4061 SURVEY OF STRATEGIC STUDIES security issues. Topics covered include nuclear (4-0). An extensive survey of the classical and con- capabilities and doctrine, BMD and air defenses, temporary literature on strategic thinking; national civil defense, combined arms employment NATO objectives and strategic alternatives; deterrence, Warsaw Pact military balance, naval forces, and counterforce, arms control, counter insurgency, trends in the U.S. and Soviet economies especially compellence; components and rules of the interna- as they affect the allocation of resources to de- tional strategic system; arms competitions, nuclear fense. proliferation, terrorism. Student projects on cur- rent strategic problems are a major component of NS 4207 SPECIAL TOPICS IN THE ANALYSIS the course. PREREQUISITES: NS 3061, NS OF INTELLIGENCE PROBLEMS (4-0). An 3262. examination of special intelligence problems and cases with emphasis on problem and project for- NS 4063 NAVAL THREAT ANALYSIS (4-0). In- mulation, structure, and management as well as

troduction to different types of naval threat the interpretation and communication of study re- analyses and to the purposes, problems and proce- sults. The last portion of the course will focus on

dures associated therewith. Attention is paid to student presentation of thesis research. PREREQ- sources of information available to analysts and to UISITES: NS 3062, OS 3207, NS 4063. May also threat analysis products put out by the U.S. Intelli- be offered as OS 4207. gence activities. Students will engage in a class- room simulation of an operational intelligence ac- NS 4273 AMERICAN FOREIGN POLICY AND tivity charged with analyzing a "developing WORLD POLITICS (4-0). An advanced study of threat". SI access required. the underlying assumptions and objectives of

American security and foreign policy. Policy for- NS 4077 STRATEGIC RESOURCES AND U.S. mulation, world politics, alliance and treaty sys- NATIONAL SECURITY POLICY (4-0). Analysis tems; effects on security problems of budgets, of the problems of access to global resources and weapons systems, research and development, in- their utilization: agricultural production; access to ternational economic issues, the functioning of re- critical raw materials; problems and politics of oil; gional security systems in crises; problems of national and international implications of various threat and intelligence determination. Use of pri- strategies of self-sufficiency and interdependency. mary source material. This course is designed to

Emphasis is placed on the security problems aris- develop a capacity for problem analysis or to en- ing from the geographic distribution of interna- courage opportunities for research specialization. tional resources. PREREQUISITES: NS 3061, NS PREREQUISITES: NS 3400, NS 3610. 3262. NS 4279 DIRECTED STUDIES IN NATIONAL NS 4140 PROBLEMS OF SECURITY ASSIST- SECURITY AFFAIRS (Credit Open). Directed ANCE AND ARMS TRANSFERS (4-0). An studies in military technical systems. analysis of the patterns, purposes and effects of cross-national security assistance, including arms NS 4300 SEMINAR IN SECURITY PROBLEMS sales and the transfer of technology. Special topics OF THE MIDDLE EAST (4-0). Advanced Middle include: factors dominating the arms transfer Eastern politics and the security problems they policies of the major powers; the role of the mili- present to U.S. decision-makers. The central tary in recipient nations; the role of the military theme of the course, is U.S. interests in the Middle attache; the design, execution and evaluation of East, how these interests are threatened, and what security assistance programs. PREREQUISITES: policy alternatives have been proposed to secure NS 3061 or NS 3262. them. PREREQUISITE: NS 3300 or NS 3320.

NS 4161 AMERICAN NATIONAL SECURITY NS 4330 SEMINAR IN MIDDLE EASTERN OBJECTIVES AND NET ASSESSMENT (4-0). CIVILIZATIONS (4-0). Description and analysis Comparative analysis of trends in U.S. and Soviet of the four major cultural traditions of the Middle security policy, military forces, manpower, and East: Arabic, Persian, Judaic, and Turkish. Stu- capabilities. Special attention is paid to familiariz- dents read translations of selected classical and ing students with original source material and contemporary writings from each of these tradi- major elements in current controversial national tions, and secondary materials concerning social

159 NATIONAL SECURITY AFFAIRS

and cultural institutions. PREREQUISITES: NS NS 4700 SEMINAR IN SOVIET-EUROPEAN 3300 or NS 3330 or consent of the Instructor. RELATIONS (4-0). A seminar intended to deepen the student's knowledge of current issues in Soviet NS 4400 SEMINAR IN SOVIET SECURITY and European affairs through weekly presentations PROBLEMS (4-0). Course is designed to provide and discussions by visiting scholars and govern- students with an opportunity to engage in advanced ment officials and by the preparation and presenta- study and research in specialized topics relating to tion of the students' own research papers. the USSR. PREREQUISITES: Two 3000 level courses on the Soviet Area. NS 4701 SEMINAR IN POLITICAL AND SE- CURITY PROBLEMS OF EUROPE (4-0). A re- search seminar on political and security issues in NS 4425 ADVANCED TOPICS IN SOVIET contemporary Europe. Students conduct and pre- NAVAL AFFAIRS (4-0). Advanced study and re- sent original research on selected issue, or related search in Soviet naval and maritime affairs. Topics issues, in specific European countries of sub- include: decision-making processes, scenarios, regions. The issue around which the seminar is warfare capabilities and support systems, mis- structured varies from term to term. It is chosen to sions; and U.S. -Soviet naval interactions. meet the research interests of each group of stu- dents enrolled in the course.

NS 4710 SEMINAR IN SINO-SOVIET RELA- NS 4630 INTERNATIONAL SECURITY PROB- TIONS (4-0). Advanced analysis of Sino-Soviet

LEMS OF ASIA AND THE ADJACENT relations. Emphasis is placed on political, eco- OCEANS (4-0). An advanced study of the interna- nomic and military factors which have shaped his- tional security interests and problems of the Asian torical confrontations and contemporary conflicts, states: changing military capabilities and the bal- and which will influence the policies of both na- ance of forces; problems of military and naval tions in the future. The special features of the threats; economic resources for war; alliances, course include consideration of the influence of bases, and security systems; forecasting of interna- Sino-Soviet conflicts upon global military and dip- tional conflict on the continent; assessment of the lomatic problems. Open to Asian and Soviet Asian policies of the U.S. PREREQUISITES: 8 Studies students and to other students with consent units of Asian studies or consent of the Instructor. of the Instructor.

160 ,

OCEANOGRAPHY DEPARTMENT OF OCEANOGRAPHY

DALE FREDERICK LEIPPER, Profes- WARREN CHARLES THOMPSON, sor of Oceanography; Chairman Professor of Oceanography (1953); (1968)*; B.S., Wittenberg Univ., B.A., Univ. of California at Los 1937; M.A., Ohio State Univ., 1939; Angeles, 1943; M.S., Scripps Institu- Ph.D., Scripps Institution of tion of Oceanography, 1948; Ph.D., Oceanography (La Jolla), 1950; Hon. Texas A&M Univ., 1953. D.Sc, Wittenberg Univ., 1968. EDWARD BENNETT THORNTON, ROBERT SANBORN ANDREWS, As- Associate Professor of Oceanography sociate Professor of Oceanography (1969); B.A., Williamette Univ., (1968); B. of Geol. Engr., Univ. of 1962; B.S., Stanford Univ., 1962; Minnesota, 1958; M.S., Univ. of M.S., Oregon State Univ., 1965; Washington, 1965; Ph.D., Texas M.E.C.E., Univ. of Florida, 1966; A&M Univ., 1970. Ph.D., 1970. ROBERT HATHAWAY BOURKE, As- EUGENE DEWEES TRAGANZA, As- sociate Professor of Oceanography sociate Professor of Oceanography (1971); B.S., Naval Academy, 1960; (1970); B.A., Indiana Univ., 1955; M.S., Oregon State Univ., 1969; M.S., Texas A&M Univ., 1959; Ph.D., 1972. Ph.D., Univ. of Miami, 1966. ALDEN BUFFINGTON CHACE, Jr., STEVENS PARRINGTON TUCKER, Lieutenant Commander, U.S. Navy; Assistant Professor of Oceanography Assistant Professor of Oceanography (1968); B.S., Stanford Univ., 1955; (1976); B.S., Naval Academy, 1962; M.S., Oregon State Univ., 1963; M.S., Naval Postgraduate School, Ph.D., 1972. 1969; Ph.D., Univ. of Rhode Island, JOSEPH JOHN VON SCHWIND, As- 1976. sociate Professor of Oceanography WARREN WILSON DENNER, As- (1967); B.S., Univ. of Wisconsin, sociate Professor of Oceanography 1952; M.S., Univ. of Utah at Salt (1964); B.S., Portland State College, Lake City, 1960; Ph.D., Texas A&M 1961; M.S., Oregon State Univ., Univ., 1968. 1963; Ph.D., 1969. JACOB BERTRAM WICKHAM, As- ROLAND WILLIAM GARWOOD, JR., sociate Professor of Oceanography Assistant Professor of Oceanography (1951); B.S., Univ. of California at (1976); B.S. Bucknell Univ., 1967; Berkeley, 1947; M.S., Scripps In- Ph.D., Univ. of Washington, 1976. stitution of Oceanography, 1949. EUGENE CLINTON HADERLIE, Dis- tinguished Professor of Oceanog- *The year of joining the Postgraduate School is in parentheses. raphy (1965); A.B., Univ. of Califor- Faculty indicated nia at Berkeley, 1943; M.A., 1948; Ph.D., 1950. Oceanography is the study of the sea GLENN HAROLD JUNG, Professor of from the points of view of the basic sci- Oceanography B.S., (1958); Mas- ences: physics, biology, chemistry, and sachusetts Institute of Technology, geology. It emphasizes relationships with 1949; M.S., Ph.D., 1952; Texas engineering and meteorology. The De- A&M Univ., 1955. partment of Oceanography is the center ROBERT GEORGE PAQUETTE, Pro- for such studies at the Naval Postgraduate

fessor of Oceanography ( 1 97 ; B . S School. Its functions are to prepare of- 1 ) . Univ. of Washington, 1936, Ph.D., ficers to make best use of the ocean envi- 1941. ronment in the course of their duties, to

161 OCEANOGRAPHY

prepare them to carry out and evaluate ogy or oceanography through the oceanography research in oceanography, and to carry curriculum (440). Minimal entrance requirements out oceanographic research of both basic here include differential and integral calculus, and and/or applied nature. a year each of college physics and chemistry. The curriculum and research vessels are sponsored by the Oceanographer of 2. The degree of Master of Science in Meteorol- the Navy. Research is supported by grants ogy and Oceanography requires: from various government agencies includ- ing the Office of Naval Research. a. Completion of 48 quarter hours of graduate courses in meteorology and DEPARTMENTAL REQUIREMENTS FOR oceanography including MR/OC 4413, DEGREES IN OCEANOGRAPHY MR 4322, MR 4323 and 10 quarter hours in the 4000 oceanography series. The de- MASTER OF SCIENCE IN OCEANOGRAPHY gree program must be approved by both the Department of Meteorology and the

Entrance to a program leading to the degree of Department of Oceanography. Master of Science in Oceanography requires a bac- calaureate degree in a field appropriate to the b. Completion of an acceptable thesis on a oceanography option cposen. Minimal require- topic approved by either department. ments include mathematics through differential and integral calculus, one year of college physics, DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY and one year of college chemistry.

The degree of Master of Science in Oceanog- Department of Oceanography admission re- raphy requires: quirements for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy

a. Completion of thirty-five quarter hours of graduate courses of which fifteen hours a. a Master's degree (or the equivalent) in

must be in the 4000 Oceanography series. science or engineering or The entire sequence of courses for the particular option selected must be ap- b. a Bachelor's degree with a high QPR or proved by the Department of Oceanog- c. a successful first raphy . graduate year on a Mas- b. An acceptable thesis on a topic approved ter's program, with clear evidence of re- by the Department of Oceanography. search ability.

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN A student who desires to undertake doctoral METEOROLOGY AND OCEANOGRAPHY work in oceanography should discuss his program first with the Chairman, Department of Oceanog-

1. Direct entrance to a program leading to the raphy. He should then follow regular guidelines as degree Master of Science in Meteorology and outlined by the Curricular Officer and the Oceanography requires a baccalaureate degree in Academic Associate. meteorology and/or oceanography or equivalent. This normally permits the validation of required LABORATORY FACILITIES undergraduate courses such as physics, chemistry, differential equations, linear algebra, vector The department has two beachfront laboratories, analysis and various courses in meteorology and/or a small biological oceanography laboratory with oceanography, which are prerequisites to the salt water aquaria and filtered salt water circulating graduate program. These prerequisites may be system and a 4,000 square-foot laboratory with taken at the Naval Postgraduate School; however, lecture room and student study areas. Equipment in that event the program may be lengthened by includes a wave tank, drying oven, and high pres- one or two quarters. sure test chamber. Additionally, a small ocean en- gineering laboratory, chemical oceanography labo-

Indirect entry into the program is possible for per- ratory, and geological oceanography laboratory are sons lacking a baccalaureate degree in meteorol- maintained.

162 OCEANOGRAPHY

The School operates the R/V ACANIA, a 126- random functions; harmonic analysis of random foot vessel, for use in oceanographic instruction functions. Time series analysis: covariance, con- and research. volution, energy density spectrum, cross spec- Oceanographic equipment installed in the beach trum. PREREQUISITES: MA 2121, MA 3132, area includes wave and tide gauges for recording OC 3221, OC 4211 concurrently. nearshore wave action and local tide fluctuations. OC 3151 GEOPHYSICAL RANDOM PRO- OCEANOGRAPHY CESSES (3-1). A shorter version of OC 3150 for students who have had prior courses in statistics OC 0110 APPLICATIONS SEMINAR (1-0). Pre- and probability. PREREQUISITE: MR 2520. sentation of D.o.D. related research activities, ap- plications to weapons and warfare systems, utiliza- OC 3212 POLAR METEOROLOGY/OCEAN- tion of oceanography and meteorology in specific OGRAPHY (3-1). Operational aspects of arctic billets, presentations by faculty, staff, selected and antarctic meteorology. Polar oceanography.

students and visiting authorities. PREREQUI- Sea-ice; its seasonal distribution, melting and SITE: Enrollment in an Environmental Sciences freezing processes, physical and mechanical prop- curriculum. erties, drift and predictions. Geology and geophysics. PREREQUISITES: MR 3230, OC OC 0810 THESIS RESEARCH (0-0). Every stu- 3221. dent conducting thesis research will enroll in this course. OC 3220-3221 PHYSICAL OCEANOGRAPHY

I-II (3-0). Beginning physical oceanography; the Upper Division Courses ocean basins, age and origin of oceans, physical properties of sea water, thermal properties of water OC 2110 INTRODUCTION TO OCEANOG- and ice, distribution of variables, physical charac- RAPHY (3-0). An introductory course treating teristics of estuaries. Ocean current systems, water physical and chemical properties of sea water, masses, geostrophic flow, dynamic height compu- submarine geology, and marine biology; the heat tation, upwelling, heat budget, heat distribution budget of the oceans; water masses and general and thermal structure, waves, internal waves and circulation; currents, waves, and tides. PREREQ- tides, selected regional studies in physical UISITE: None. oceanography. For oceanography and air-ocean science majors. OC 2120 SURVEY OF OCEANOGRAPHY (4-0). Beginning physical oceanography, average values OC 3240 OPERATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL of ocean parameters, an integrated view of the PRODUCTS (0-4). Meteorological and oceanog- whole field of oceanography including biological, raphical products available to the operating fleet geological, and chemical. PREREQUISITE: Cal- from Fleet Numerical Weather Central/Fleet culus and college physics, or permission of In- Weather Centrals and other sources and described

structor. and applied to the diagnosis and prognosis of tacti- cal environmental parameters for both current and OC 2430 ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION historical situations. PREREQUISITES: MR 2210 (3-0). A survey of air and water pollution theory and OC 3221. and associated problems with specific case studies. Pertinent basic principles from oceanography and OC 3261 OCEANOGRAPHIC FACTORS IN meteorology will be presented. PREREQUISITE: UNDERWATER SOUND (4-0). This course None. May also be offered as MR 2430. examines the environmental factors which influ-

ence sound propagation in the ocean and the ef-

Upper Division or Graduate Courses fects these factors have in acoustic forecasting. Factors considered include temporal and spatial OC 3150 GEOPHYSICAL RANDOM PRO- variations in sound velocity profiles, ambient CESSES (4-2). Statistical evaluation of mea- noise, biological effects, reflection characteristics surements in random media: ocean, atmosphere, of ocean surface and bottom, signal fluctuations, earth; basic probability, probability distributions, and forecasting ocean thermal and sound speed probability density functions; random variables, structure. The students will review and report on

163 OCEANOGRAPHY

related papers from the current literature. This OC 3420 BIOLOGICAL OCEANOGRAPHY

course is designed for the Engineering Acoustics (3-3). General biological principles; the sea as an Curriculum. PREREQUISITES: PH 3452, OC environment for life; major plant and animal

2120. groups in the sea; plankton and food cycles; pri- mary productivity; boring and fouling organisms; OC 3265 ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS IN bioacoustics, bioluminescence, and deep scatter- ing layers; dangerous marine organisms. Labora- UNDERWATER ACOUSTICS (4-0). This course tory work and field trips dealing with marine or- examines the environmental factors which influ- ganisms. PREREQUISITE: None. ence sound propagation in the ocean. Factors con- sidered include temporal and spatial variations in sound velocity profiles, ambient noise, radiated OC 3520 CHEMICAL OCEANOGRAPHY (3-3). noise, absorption, reflection characteristics of the Basic chemistry of solutions; chemical composi- sea surface and ocean bottom, signal fluctuations, tions of the oceans (dissolved solids, gases, nutri- ents, etc.); distribution and transmission loss models. This course is de- of constituents in the signed for the ASW curriculum. PREREQUI- ocean; analytical methods used in chemical SITES: OC 2120, MR 3413, PH 3471. oceanography; carbonate, nutrient, and other cy- cles in the sea; desalination; corrosion, geochemis- OC 3320 GEOLOGICAL OCEANOGRAPHY try. PREREQUISITES: OC 3221, CH 1001 or CH (3-3). Geological processes, materials, and 2001 or equivalent. methods in marine geology; physiography of the sea floor; sedimentology; marine geophysics sur- OC 3610 OCEAN WAVE FORECASTING (2-2). veys; properties and distribution of recent marine Prediction and observation of wind-generated sediments, especially as relevant to underwater ocean waves in deep water, interpretation of wave acoustics; structure and origin of ocean basins; characteristics in spectral and statistical terms for field trips to local sites and aboard oceanographic operational briefings, and wave-related influences research vessel. PREREQUISITE: 21 10 or OC OC on operations. PREREQUISITES: OC 4211, OC 2120 or OC 3220. 3150.

OC 3617 ACOUSTICAL FORECASTING (2-2). OC 3321 MARINE GEOPHYSICS (3-0). Theory Development of synoptic prediction techniques and methods for marine geophysics surveys, with applied to the upper ocean and other environmental emphasis on gravity, magnetism, seismic and factors affecting underwater sound propagation. acoustic wave propagation, heat flow, and radioac- Current acoustical models, oceanographic input to tivity; geophysical anomalies associated with the models and the tactical and strategic utilization major seafloor features; acoustic reflectivity of the of the output are described. Laboratory exercises sea floor; marine geodesy. PREREQUISITE: OC illustrate principles developed during lectures. 3320 or OC 3323. PREREQUISITE: OC 4260 and SECRET clear-

OC 3322 PRINCIPLES OF GEOLOGY (2-0). Survey of physical geology directed toward pro- OC 3621 REGIONAL MILITARY OCEANOG- cesses, materials, and methods in marine geology; RAPHY (1-4). Application of the full breadth of geologic time, minerals and rocks, structural geol- the oceanography program, including physical ogy, weathering, gradation, and earth physics. phenomena, geology, biology, chemistry, acous- PREREQUISITE: OC 2110 or OC 2120 or OC tics and air/sea interaction in order to objectively 3220 or college introductory oceanography. analyze the significance of the total environment on the various aspects of naval warfare for specific OC 3323 GEOLOGICAL OCEANOGRAPHY oceanic areas of operation. PREREQUISITES: OC (2-0). Physiography of the sea floor; sedimentol- 3221, 3320, 3420, 3520. ogy; marine geophysics surveys; properties and distribution of recent marine sediments, especially OC 3625 ENVIRONMENTAL PREDICTION as relevant to underwater acoustics; structure and FOR UNDERWATER SOUND PROPAGATION origin of ocean basins. PREREQUISITE: OC 3322 (2-1). Development of synoptic prediction tech- or college geology and introductory oceanography. niques applied to environmental factors affecting

164 OCEANOGRAPHY

underwater sound propagation. These factors in- oped during lectures. PREREQUISITES: OC 21 10 clude space and time variation of ocean density or OC 2120, OC3320. structure and associated parameters, behavior of vertical and horizontal temperature gradients, air- Graduate Courses sea interaction, advection and mixing effects on ocean density structure. Current acoustic forecast- OC 4211 WAVES AND TIDES (4-0). Linear ing models will be studied in light of adequacq of theory of surface and internal waves; theory of fi- environmental input data, realism, and computa- nite amplitude waves; windwave spectra; theory of

tional approximations. This course is designed for the astronomical tides; tide analysis and predic- the ASW program. PREREQUISITES: OC 2120, tion; seiches and co-oscillations. PREREQUI- PH 2472, MR 3413. SITE: OC 4321 or MR 4321 or ME 2201.

OC 3709 SCIENTIFIC CRUISE EXPERIENCE OC 4213 COASTAL OCEANOGRAPHY (3-2). (0-4). Laboratory course taught to introduce the Shoal- water wave processes, breakers and surf;

student to oceanographic operations at sea. The nearshore water circulations; beach characteristics;

use of standard oceanographic instruments is littoral drift; coastal hydraulics, storm tides. PRE- stressed in the conduct of a comprehensive REQUISITE: OC4211. oceanographic survey; processing of data and stor- age of data and samples are studied and accom- OC 4260 SOUND IN THE SEA (4-0). Oceanog-

plished. Interpretation of results is introduced. raphic effects on sound propagation, especially on PREREQUISITES: OC 3820 and OC 2110 or OC absorption, reflection, refraction; scattering, am- 2120 or OC 3221. bient noise; operational aspects for Navy use. Synoptic prediction techniques applied to the

OC 3801 OCEAN OPERATIONS I (3-1). This upper ocean involving a practical approach to the course includes a comprehensive coverage of the solution of heat budget, techniques for forecasting present state-of-the-art associated with types of the thermal structure and regional variance of floating platforms; stationary platforms; submersi- oceanic acoustic properties. PREREQUISITES: ble design, operation, and applications; man- PH 3431 or 3432 and SECRET clearance. ipulator design; diving operations; underwater construction and structure; energy sources; pres- OC 4321 INTRODUCTORY GEOPHYSICAL sure vessels and testing programs; unmanned vehi- FLUID DYNAMICS (4-0). Development of the cles and platforms; deep drilling; dynamic posi- hydrodynamical equations, vector and tensor oper- tioning; buoys and deep water buoyancy; in gen- ations, forces acting on fluids (surface forces, eral those operations associated with search, res- body forces); stream function, velocity potential, cue, recovery, and salvage. Field trips made to geostrophic, gradient and inertial flows; baroclinic laboratories deeply involved in oceanographic en- and barotropic fluids, vertical variation of horizon-

gineering work. PREREQUISITES: None. tal velocity; Ekman spiral applied to ocean and atmosphere; geopotential surfaces, level of no mo- p OC 3820 PRINCIPLES OF MEASUREMENT tion; vorticity and divergence equations. PRE- (3-2). The application of the basic principles of REQUISITES: MA 2048 and MA 2121. mechanics, heat, electricity, sound and optics to oceanographic instrumentation employed by the OC 4322 OCEAN DYNAMICS (4-0). The wind- Navy. Upper air and satellite developments; design driven ocean circulation, real fluid boundary con- and operation of oceanographic instruments; re- ditions, steady-state linear theories, steady-state cording of oceanographic observations. PRE- non-linear theories, vorticity arguments; topo- REQUISITE: MA 2121. graphical influence on ocean currents, significance of inertial and frictional terms in an ocean with OC 3901 BASIC HYDROGRAPHY (3-2). An in- bottom topography; time dependent motion, troduction to the techniques used in hydrographic Rossby waves. PREREQUISITE: OC 4321. survey operations and nautical chart construction. Topics include vertical data planes, geodetic sur- OC 4413 AIR-SEA INTERACTION (4-0). Conse- veying, position, fixing methods, echo sounders quences of momentum, heat and moisture ex- and depth corrections, and chart construction. change between atmosphere and ocean; recent Laboratory exercises illustrate principles devel- semiempirical formulae relating air-sea fluxes to

165 OCEANOGRAPHY large-scale meteorological parameters; concepts in OC 4800 SPECIAL TOPICS IN OCEANOG- turbulence and similarity theory for stationary tur- RAPHY (1-0 to 4-0). Independent study of ad- bulent regimes adjacent to the air-sea interface; vanced topics in oceanography not regularly of- turbulence sensors, bulk aerodynamic formulae for fered. PREREQUISITE: Consent of the Depart- estimating air-sea boundary fluxes; mutual atmo- ment Chairman and Instructor. sphere and ocean response times and synoptic scale energy exchanges; investigations of the role OC 4802 OCEAN OPERATIONS II (3-1). Con- of the atmosphere and oceans of global energy bal- siderations of more complex aspects of oceanog- ance and climate formation. PREREQUISITES: raphic engineering operations, including such sub- OC 3150, OC 4322 or MR 4322, MR 2210, or jects as deep mooring techniques; platform and consent of Instructor. ship motions; large object towing forces; heavy

lifts and line dynamics; wave loads on platforms and floating breakwaters; hydrodynamic aspects of OC 4421 MARINE ECOLOGY (1-4). The habits, falling objects; considerations of high pressure classification, development and adaptations of structural design; participation in a laboratory marine animals and plants with particular reference exercise involving conducting an oceanographic to ecology of Monterey Bay. The relationships of engineering operation at sea. PREREQUISITE: physical, chemical, geological, and biological fac- OC3801. tors of the environment to marine organisms. Primarily laboratory investigations and field work OC 4803 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF MARINE dealing with the intertidal areas, harbors, es- SEDIMENTS (2-3). This course involves the tuaries, and the near-shore pelagic and benthic en- elementary study of the physical behavior of vironments of the associated organism. PREREQ- marine sediments including such subjects as types UISITE: OC 3420. of sediments, coring and testing equipment, gen- eral physical characteristics of sediments, methods of detailed physical and chemical analysis, in-situ

OC 4422 MARINE BIODETERIORATION (1-1). testing, pressure effects, scour and fill, turbidity

A study of the organisms involved in the flows. Application is made to penetration and biodeterioration of engineering materials. Subjects breakout of objects and to trafficability. PRE- included are marine fouling, wood and rock bor- REQUISITE: OC 3320. ers, and the effects of biological organisms on the corrosion of metals. PREREQUISITE: OC 3420. OC 4860 PHYSICS OF THE EARTH (3-0). Phys- ical properties and composition of the earth's inte-

rior; review of the theories of the earth's forma- OC 4612 POLAR OCEANOGRAPHY (3-2). tion; study of the crustal structure through gravity, Oceanographic and geophysical structure of the magnetic, seismic, and other geophysical evi- polar regions; sea-ice properties, formation, dence. PREREQUISITE: OC 3320 or consent of growth, deformation and disintegration; sea-ice the Instructor. drift due to wind and currents. The course is fre- quently conducted as a two-week course with field OC 4900 SEMINAR IN OCEANOGRAPHY experience at the Naval Arctic Research Laborato- (2-0). Students in the various oceanography cur- ry, Barrow, Alaska. Laboratory studies of the ricula report results of their own research in pre- physical, chemical, petrographic structure and sentations for group discussion. PREREQUISITE: strength properties of ice are conducted. PRE- Preparation of a thesis or a research paper concur- REQUISITE: OC 3221. rently.

166 OPERATIONS RESEARCH

DEPARTMENT OF OPERATIONS RESEARCH

MICHAEL GRAHAM SOVEREIGN, Operations Research and Statistics Associate Professor of Operations Re- (1970); A.B., Whitman College, search; Chairman (1970)*; B.S., 1948; M.A., Univ. of California at Univ. of Illinois, 1959; M.S., Purdue Berkeley, 1951; Ph.D., 1957. Univ., 1960; Ph.D., 1965. ROBERT NEAGLE FORREST, As- ALVIN FRANCIS ANDRUS, Associate sociate Professor of Operations Re- Professor of Operations Research and search (1964); B.S., Univ. of Oregon, Statistics (1963); B.A., Univ. of 1950; M.S., 1952; M.S., 1954; Florida, 1957; M.A., 1958. Ph.D., 1959. DONALD ROY BARR, Professor of Op- DONALD PAUL GAVER, JR., Profes- erations Research and Statistics sor of Operations Research and Statis- (1966); B.A. Whittier College, 1960; tics (1971); S.B., Massachusetts Insti- M.S. Colorado State Univ., 1962; tute of Technology, 1950; S.M., 1951; Ph.D., 1965. Ph.D., Princeton Univ., 1956. DONALD ROBERT BOUCHOUX, JAMES KERN HARTMAN, Associate Lieutenant, U.S. Navy; Instructor in Professor of Operations Research and Operations Research (1976); B.A., Administrative Sciences (1970); B.S., Boston College, 1968; M.A., Naval Massachusetts Institute of Technol- Postgraduate School, 1976. ogy, 1965; M.S., Univ. of Nebraska, Ph.D., Western Reserve GORDON HOOVER BRADLEY, As- 1967; Case Univ., 1970. sociate Professor of Operations Re- search (1973); B.S., Lehigh Univ., GILBERT THOREAU HOWARD, As- 1962; M.S., 1964; Ph.D., Northwest- sociate Professor of Operations Re- ern Univ., 1967. search (1967); B.S., Northwestern Univ., Ph.D., Johns Hopkins GERALD GERARD BROWN, Associate 1963; Univ., 1967. Professor of Computer Science and Operations Research (1976); B.A., ROBERT LEROY HUBBARD, Visiting California State Univ. at Fullerton, Professor of Operations Research 1968; M.B.A., 1969; Ph.D., Univ. of (1976); B.S., Univ. of North Carolina, California at Los Angeles, 1974. 1954; Ph.D., 1961. RICHARD WESLEY BUTTER- HAROLD JOSEPH LARSON, Professor WORTH, Associate Professor of Op- of Operations Research and Statistics erations Research (1969); B.S., Univ. (1962); B.S., Iowa State Univ., 1956; of California at Berkeley, 1966; M.S., M.S., 1957; Ph.D., 1960. 1967; Ph.D., 1969. PETER ADRIAN WALTER LEWIS, ROBERT JONES CASTLEMAN, JR., Professor of Operations Research and

Lieutenant Colonel, U.S. Army; In- Statistics ( 1 ; B . A , Columbia Col- 97J ) . structor in Operations Research lege, 1954; B.S., Columbia Engineer- (1976); B.S., U.S. Military Academy, ing School, 1955; M.S., 1957; Ph.D., 1960; M.S., Naval Postgraduate Univ. of London, 1964. School, 1970. GLENN FRANK LINDSAY, Associate JOSEPH HENRY CYR, JR., Lieutenant Professor of Operations Research Commander, U.S. Navy; Assistant (1965); B.Sc, Oregon State Univ., Professor of Operations Research 1960; M.Sc, Ohio State Univ., 1962; (1973); B.S., Purdue Univ., 1960; Ph.D., 1966. M.S. Naval Postgraduate School, KNEALE THOMAS MARSHALL, Pro- 1969. fessor of Operations Research (1968); JAMES DANIEL ESARY, Professor of B.Sc, Univ. of London, 1958; M.S.,

167 OPERATIONS RESEARCH

Univ. of California at Berkeley, 1964; Prague, 1964; Ph.D., Stanford Univ., Ph.D., 1966. 1968. ALAN WAYNE McMASTERS, As- REX HAWKINS SHUDDE, Associate sociate Professor of Operations Re- Professor of Operations Research search and Administrative Sciences (1962); B.S., Univ. of California at (1965); B.S., Univ. of California at Los Angeles, 1952; Ph.D., Univ. of Berkeley, 1957; M.S., 1962; Ph.D., California at Berkeley, 1956. 1966. JAMES GROVER TAYLOR, Associate PAUL ROBERT MILCH, Associate Pro- Professor of Operations Research fessor of Operations Research and (1968); B.S., Stanford Univ., 1961; Statistics (1963); B.S., Brown Univ., M.S., 1962; Ph.D., 1966. 1958; Ph.D., Stanford Univ., 1966. MARLIN ULUESS THOMAS, As- DOUGLAS ELMER NEIL, Assistant sociate Professor of Operations Re- Professor of Operations Research search (1971); B.S., Univ. of Michi- (1972); B.A., Univ. of Southern gan, 1967; M.S.E., 1968; Ph.D., California, 1965; M.S., Univ. of 1971. Pacific, 1967; Ph.D., North Carolina JOSEPH BRYCE TYSVER, Associate State Univ., 1971. Professor of Operations Research and SAMUEL HOWARD PARRY, As- Statistics (1966); B.A., Washington sociate Professor of Operations Re- State Univ., 1942; M.A., 1948; search (1973); B.S., Georgia Institute Ph.D., Univ. of Michigan, 1957. of Technology, 1963; M.S., North- LEIS EDWARD WALDEISEN, Com- western Univ., 1964; Ph.D., Ohio mander, U.S. Navy; Assistant Profes- State Univ., 1971. sor of Operations Research (1974) GARY KENT POOCK, Professor of Op- B.S., Univ. of San Francisco, 1960 erations Research and Man-Machine M.A., Univ. of New Mexico, 1965 Systems (1967); B.S., Iowa State Ph.D., Texas Tech Univ., 1974. Univ., 1961; M.S., Univ. of Miami, ALAN ROBERT WASHBURN, As- 1965; Ph.D., Univ. of Michigan, sociate Professor of Operations Re- 1967. search (1970); B.S., Carnegie Institute WILLIAM MICHAEL RAIKE, As- of Technology, 1962; M.S., 1963; sociate Professor of Operations Re- Ph.D., 1965. search (1971); B.A., Northwestern PETER WILLIAM ZEHNA, Professor of Univ., 1964; M.S., 1965; Ph.D., Operations Research and Statistics 1967. (1961); B.A., Colorado State College, ROBERT RICHARD READ, Professor 1950; M.A., 1951; M.A., Univ. of of Operations Research, Probability Kansas, 1956; Ph.D. Stanford Univ., and Statistics (1961); B.S., Ohio State 1959. Univ., 1951; Ph.D., Univ. of Califor- *The year of joining the Postgraduate School nia at Berkeley, 1957. Faculty is indicated in parentheses. FRANCIS RUSSELL RICHARDS, As- DEPARTMENTAL REQUIREMENTS sociate of Operations Re- Professor FOR DEGREES search (1970); B.S. Louisiana Polytechnic Institute, 1965; M.S., Programs leading to degrees must be arranged in Celmson Univ., 1967; Ph.D., 1971. consultation with the Chairman, Department of BRUNO OTTO SHUBERT, Associate Operations Research. Professor of Operations Research, MASTER OF SCIENCE Probability and Statistics (1970); IN APPLIED SCIENCE M.S., Czech. Technical Univ. at Students with acceptable academic backgrounds Prague, 1960; Ph.D. Charles Univ. at may enter a program leading to the degree of Mas-

168 .

OPERATIONS RESEARCH

ter of Science in Applied Science. The program of chairman. Detailed admission procedures may each student seeking this degree must contain a vary depending on the individual's location and minimum of 20 quarter hours in operations re- position. However, in all cases the student must search at the graduate level, including work at the fulfill the schoolwide requirements contained in 4000 level. Additionally, the program must con- the General Information section of this catalogue. tain a minimum of 12 graduate quarter hours in an approved sequence of courses outside the Depart- 3. If the applicant is selected, he must pursue a ment of Operations Research. A total minimum of course of in-depth study in mathematical pro-

12 quarter hours at the 4000 level plus an accept- gramming, stochastic processes and a third area able thesis is required. This program provides approved by his doctoral committee. He must be depth and diversity through specially arranged advanced to candidacy and write an acceptable course sequences to meet the needs of the Navy thesis pertinent to an areas of specialization and the interests of the individual. The Department selected from the following four: stochastic pro-

Chairman's approval is required for all programs cesses, mathematical programming, decision sci- leading to this degree. ences and human factors.

MASTER OF SCIENCE IN OPERATIONS ANALYSIS OPERATIONS RESEARCH OA 0001 SEMINAR FOR OPERATIONS

1 A candidate shall previously have satisfied the RESEARCH/SYSTEMS ANALYSIS STUDENTS requirements for the degree of Bachelor of Science (0-2). Guest lecturers. Review of experience tours. in Operations Research or the equivalent. Thesis and research presentations. PREREQUI- SITE: None.

2. Completion of a minimum of 48 quarter hours of graduate level courses, including at most 8 quar- OA 0810 THESIS RESEARCH FOR OPERA- ter hours for a thesis. TIONS RESEARCH/SYSTEMS ANALYSIS STUDENTS (0-0). Every student conducting a. At least 18 quarter hours of 4000 level thesis research will enroll in this course. operations research/systems analysis courses. Upper Division Courses b. An elective sequence approved by the Department of Operations Research. OA 2600 INTRODUCTION TO OPERATIONS RESEARCH (2-0). A first course in Operations 3. Submission of an acceptable thesis on a subject Research for students in the OA curriculum. Early previously approved by the Department of Opera- origins of Operations Research and development tions Research. This credit shall not count toward through World War II to current practice. Introduc- the requirement stated in 2a. tion to fundamental concepts of the OR approach including the role of analytic models, decision variables, and measures of effectiveness. Model DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY verification and interpretation of study results are discussed. PREREQUISITE: None.

1. Students currently enrolled in the Master of Science program and who wish to be considered OA 2910 SELECTED TOPICS IN OPERATIONS for doctoral work in Operations Research should RESEARCH/SYSTEMS ANALYSIS (2-0 to 5-0). announce their intentions as early as possible, pre- Presentation of a wide selection of topics from the ferably by the fifth quarter. The department chair- current literature. This course may be repeated for man will examine the applicant's qualifications, credit if course content changes. PREREQUISITE: modify his second year program, and monitor his A background in operations research. progress. The schoolwide requirements are con- tained in the General Information section of this Upper Division or Graduate Courses catalogue. OA 3200 COMPUTATIONAL METHODS FOR 2. Students wishing to enter directly into the doc- OPERATIONS RESEARCH (3-2). Application toral program should write to the department programming for OR, Markov models, random

169 OPERATIONS RESEARCH

sample generation, statistical data reduction; in- OA 3656 OPERATIONS RESEARCH PROB- troduction to interactive modeling, CP/CMS, LEMS IN SPECIAL WARFARE (4-0). The comparing interactive and batch methodologies, applicability of operations research to unconven- interactive data analysis. PREREQUISITE: CS tional warfare and counterinsurgency. Normative 2600. and descriptive models. Consideration of special problems with emphasis on problem formulation. OA 3604 LINEAR PROGRAMMING (4-0). PREREQUISITES: OA 3604, PS 3303. Theory of optimization of linear functions subject to linear constraints. The simple algorithm, dual- OA 3657-3658 HUMAN FACTORS IN SYS- ity, dual simplex algorithm, sensitivity analyses, TEMS DESIGN III (4-0 and 3-0). The human parametric linear programming, transportation al- element in man-machine systems. Selected topics gorithm and matrix payoff games. Applications to in human engineering and psychophysics with em- resource allocation, manpower planning, transpor- phasis on their relation to military systems. Man- tation and communications network models, ship machine interface and man's motor and sensory scheduling, and elementary strategic games. Intro- capacities. PREREQUISITES: PS 3303, OA 3604. duction to machine computing and MPS. PRE- REQUISITE: MA 2042. OA 3660 ANALYSIS OF OPERATIONAL DATA (3-1). Analysis of real world operational data. The OA 3605 METHODS OF OPERATIONS processing and interpretation of incomplete opera- RESEARCH/SYSTEMS ANALYSIS (4-0). A first tional data. Problems will be chosen from current course designed to survey the methodology of op- military problems. PREREQUISITES: PS 3303, erations research and systems analysis. Topics in OA 3653 (concurrently). this sequence include: dynamic programming,

PERT and PERT/COST, queueing, reliability, OA 3704 STOCHASTIC MODELS I (4-0). The maintenance, replacement, networks, stochastic primary goal of the course is to gain the theory models, and allocation of search. PREREQUI- necessary for stochastic modeling with Markov SITE: OA 3604. models. Particular topics include the homogenous and inhomogenous Poisson process, filter Poisson

OA 3620 INVENTORY I (4-0). A Study of deter- process, compound Poisson process, stationary ministic and approximate stochastic inventory Markov chains. The theory is augmented by models. Deterministic economic lot size models examination and discussion of actual applications with infinite and finite production rate, con- such as manpower management. PREREQUI- straints, quantity discounts. An approximate lot SITE: Basic probability with calculus as in PS size-reorder point model with stochastic demand. 3302. An approximate stochastic "order up to R" model. Single period stochastic models. PRE- OA 3900 WORKSHOP IN OPERATIONS REQUISITES: MA 2110, PS 3302. RESEARCH/SYSTEMS ANALYSIS (2-0 to 5-0). This course may be repeated for credit if course OA 3653 SYSTEM SIMULATION (4-0). Com- content changes. PREREQUISITE: Departmental puter simulation as a problem solving technique. approval. Graded on Pass/Fail basis only. Subject areas covered include: discrete event digi- tal simulation methodology, Monte Carlo tech- OA 3910 SELECTED TOPICS IN OPERATIONS niques, simulation programming in FORTRAN RESEARCH/SYSTEMS ANALYSIS (2-0 to 5-0). and other available'simulation languages, variance Presentation of wide selection of topics from the reduction techniques, design of simulation exper- current literature. This course may be repeated for iments and analysis of results. PREREQUISITES: credit if course content changes. PREREQUISITE:

CS 2600 or equivalent. PS 3303 or equivalent. • A background of advanced work in operations re- search. OA 3654 WAR GAMING (3-2). Consideration of the problems inherent in the construction and use Graduate Courses of manual and computer war games. Problems in the analysis of results of such games. PREREQUI- OA 4322 SAMPLE INSPECTION AND QUAL- SITES: OA 3653, PS 3302. Graded on Pass/Fail ITY ASSURANCE (4-0). Attribute and variables basis only. sampling plans. MIL.STD. sampling plans with

170 OPERATIONS RESEARCH

modifications. Multi-level continuous sampling OA 4616 DEFENSE EXPENDITURE AND POL- plans and sequential sampling plans. Structure of ICY ANALYSIS (4-0). A presentation of the quality assurance programs and analysis of major components of defense budgeting and policy selected quality assurance problems. PREREQUI- formulation from the standpoint of the three major SITE: PS 3303. institutions involved, the agency, executive and congress. The use of quantitative models of institu- OA 4323 DECISION THEORY (3-0). Basic con- tional behavior is emphasized when examining cepts, Bayes, admissible, minimax, and regret both individual institutions and the interaction be- strategies. Principles of choice. Relation of statis- tween them. PREREQUISITE: MN 3611. tical decision functions to the theory of games. OA 4617 CAMPAIGN ANALYSIS (4-0). Study Applications in the planning of operational evalua- of the development, use, and state of the art of tions trials. PREREQUISITE: PS 3303. Campaign Analysis. Emphasis is placed on the dif- OA 4401 MANPOWER AND PERSONNEL ferent views of problem formulation and alterna- tive approaches to campaign modeling so that the MODELS (4-0). The objective of this course is to graduate will be able to improve campaign enable the student to make use of the major types analyses. The structure of campaign analysis and of manpower and personnel models for estimating the current spectrum of interaction assessment the effects of policy changes on the personnel sys- models used in campaign analysis are investigated. tem. Topics include longitudinal and cross-section The students will study and discuss significant por- models, optimization models, data requirements tions of actual campaign analyses such as SEA- and validation. Applications in the form of current MIX, Navy Fighter Study, etc. The classification military models are included. PREREQUISITE: requirement for the course is SECRET - OS 3212 or OA 3604 and OA 3704. NOFORN. PREREQUISITE: OA 3654. OA 4403 INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING RE- OA 4621 INVENTORY II (4-0). A study of QUIREMENTS DETERMINATION (4-0). The stochastic inventory models. Single period models objective is to enable the student to use some of the with time dependent costs, constrained multiple tools of industrial engineering in the determination item single period models, deterministic and of the quantity and quality of manpower required stochastic dynamic inventory models, the (r,R) in military systems. Techniques include motion periodic review model, the Q = 1 continuous re- and time study, work sampling, predetermined view model, demand forecasting. PREREQUI- time standards, work design and layout, materials SITES: OA 3704, OA 3620. handling, procedures review and process design. Applications for ship and squadron manning doc- OA 4622 SEMINAR IN SUPPLY SYSTEMS uments and SHORESTAMPS are included. PRE- (4-0). A survey of supply systems, not only from REQUISITE: OS 3212 or OA 3604 and OA 3704. an inventory point of view, but also as a critical

area in logistics. Topics for discussion will be selected from the current literature and will be cho- (4-0). OA 4614 COST ESTIMATION Advanced sen according to student's interests. Periodically, study in the methods and practice of systems experts in the supply field will provide guest lec- analysis with emphasis on cost analysis; cost mod- tures on current research areas. PREREQUI- els and methods for total structures and program SITES: OA 4621, OA 3704, or departmental ap- single projects; relationship of effectiveness mod- proval. els and measures to cost analyses; public capital budgeting of interrelated projects; detailed exam- OA 4631 NONLINEAR AND DYNAMIC PRO- ples from current federal practices. PREREQUI- GRAMMING (4-0). Introduction to modern op- SITE: MN 3611. timization techniques and multistate decision pro- cesses. Kuhn-Tucker necessary and sufficient con- OA 4615 ECONOMETRICS (4-0). An introduc- ditions for optimality, quadratic and separable tion to the construction of testing of econometric programming, basic gradient search algorithms. models, analysis of economic time series, and the SUMT penalty function method, dynamic pro- use of multivariate statistical analysis in the study gramming. Applications to weapons assignment, of economic behavior. PREREQUISITES: PS force structuring, parameter estimation for non- 3303, MN 3610. linear or constrained regression, personnel as-

171 .

OPERATIONS RESEARCH signment and resource allocation. PREREQUI- time-sequential decision processes. Modelling and SITE: OA 3604. optimization of dynamic systems with one or more decision makers. Applications of modern optimal OA 4632 MATHEMATICAL PROGRAMMING control theory and differential games to problems (4-0). Advanced topics in linear programming. of military operations research. Typical areas of Large scale systems, the decomposition principle, application are time-sequential combat games additional algorithms, bounded variable tech- (air-war allocation strategies, fire-support alloca- niques, linear fractional programming, probabilis- tion strategies), inventory systems, searching for tic programming, formulation and solution proce- targets, strategic missile allocations, pursuit and dures for problems in integer variables. Applica- evasion, engagement of targets of opportunity. tions to the cutting stock problem, capital budget- PREREQUISITE: OA 463 1 or consent of the In- ing, large scale distribution systems, weapon sys- structor. tems allocations and others. PREREQUISITE: OA 3604. OA 4642 ADVANCED TOPICS IN WAR GAM- ING AND SIMULATION (3-2). A greater-depth OA 4633 NETWORKS FLOWS AND GRAPHS coverage of material introduced in OA 3653 and (4-0). Survey of solution techniques for problems OA 3654. Advanced techniques of model devel- which can be related to problems involving flows opment and simulation experimentation. Discus- in networks. Elements of graph theory, max-flow sion of current research. Actual topics selected mincut theorem, shortest route problems, minimal will depend on interests of students and instructor. cost flows, out-of-kilter algorithm, CPM, PERT/ This course is particularly appropriate for those Cost, and PERT/Time. PREREQUISITE: OA doing theses in this area. PREREQUISITE: OA 3604. 3654 and Departmental approval.

OA 4634 GAMES OF STRATEGY (4-0). Games OA 4651 SEARCH THEORY AND DETECTION as mathematical models of conflict situations. (4-0). Search and detection as stochastic process-

Fundamental concepts; objective and subjective es. Characterization of detection devices, use and basis. The canonical, dynamic, and characteristic interpretation of sweep widths, lateral range function forms, Zero-sum, n-person noncoopera- curves, true range curves. Measures of effective- tive and multistage games. Coalitions and coopera- ness of search-detection systems. Allocation of tive games with and without side payments. Postu- search effort, sequential search. Introduction to the lates of rational behavior, dominance, and stabil- statistical theory of signal detection. Models of ity. Valuation and bargaining models. PREREQ- surveillance fields, barriers, tracking, and trailing. UISITE: MA 3610. PREREQUISITE: PS 3303 or equivalent.

OA 4635 NONLINEAR PROGRAMMING (4-0). OA 4652 OPERATIONS RESEARCH PROB-

Continuation of OA 463 1 . Advanced topics in non- LEMS IN NAVAL WARFARE (3-0). Analyses of linear programming including duality theory, fleet exercises. Changes in tactics and force dispo- further consideration of necessary and sufficient sition arising from the introduction of nuclear conditions for optimality, additional computa- weapons and missiles. Relationship of air defense tional methods and examination of recent literature to strike capability and ASW. Current radar, so- in nonlinear programming. PREREQUISITE: OA nar, communications, and ECM problems. PRE- 4631. REQUISITE: OA4651.

OA 4636 DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING (4-0). A OA 4653 OPERATIONAL TEST AND EVALU- continuation of OA 463 1 . Basic theory of dynamic ATION (3-2). This course relates the theory and programming with numerous optimization and .re- techniques of operations research to the problems source allocation applications in the areas of relia- associated with operational test and evaluation. bility design, target selection, inventory theory, Specific examples of exercise design, reconstruc- project selection, and others. PREREQUISITE: tion, and analysis are examined. PREREQUI-

OA 463 1 SITES: OA 3660, OA 4651 or OA 4654.

OA 4638 OPTIMIZATION OF TIME- OA 4654 COMBAT MODELS (4-0). Introduction SEQUENTIAL PROCESSES (4-0). Study of to the scientific study of warfare. Methodologies

172 OPERATIONS RESEARCH

for the analysis and evaluation of military opera- psychophysiological methods. Review of impor- tions with emphasis on system effectiveness and tant variables affecting human performance and measures of effectiveness. Study of models of criteria, measures of effectiveness, and figures of combat processes (in particular, target acquisition merit as indicants of performance quality. PRE- and destruction). Introduction to Lanchester-type REQUISITE: OA 3657. models of warfare and theory of duels. PREREQ- UISITE: OA 3704 or equivalent. OA 4685 SKILLED OPERATOR PERFORM-

ANCE (3-2). First part of the course is devoted to OA 4655 QUANTITATIVE ANALYSIS OF an examination of the theoretical foundations of TACTICS (4-0). Applications of models of combat skilled performance. The second half of the course processes to the quantitative study of military tac- is devoted to the study of the acquisition, devel- tics. Review of combat modelling theories. Class opment and prediction of skilled operator perform- project of applying some quantitative methodology ance in the operational setting. PREREQUISITE: to a tactical problem of current interest. Advanced OA 3657. topics in Lanchester theory of combat: variable attrition-rate coefficients, heterogeneous forces, OA 4690 EVALUATION OF HUMAN FACTORS breakpoints, secondary effects of casualties, sup- DATA (3-2). The course is primarily concerned persive effects. Mathematical models of tactical with collection, evaluation, and analyses of data allocation. PREREQUISITE: OA 4654 or consent obtained from human subjects. Problem solving of the Instructor. and extraction of results from actual human factors

data is emphasized. Orientation of the course is OA 4656 OPERATIONS RESEARCH OF ARMY toward applied solutions rather than theoretical WEAPONS SYSTEMS (4-0). The study of qual- education. PREREQUISITES: OA 3657, PS 3302, itative and quantitative methods applicalbe to the or equivalent. Army weapons system evaluation process. Topics covered are: The Life Cycle Systems Management OA 4695 OPERATIONS RESEARCH IN MAN- Model, Army Organization for Operations Re- MACHINE SYSTEMS (4-0). The course empha- search, Operations Research in the Budgeting Pro- sizes the application of operations research tech- cess, the Cost and Operational Effectiveness niques to man-machine system design and evalua-

Analysis and the Cost and Training Effectiveness tion problems. Specific methodologies will be in- Analysis. The course includes a critical examina- corporated from mathematical programming, tion of combat models commonly used in systems stochastic processes, decision theory, and other re- effectiveness estimation. Existing analyses are re- lated areas. Quantitative methods for performance viewed through the case study method. PREREQ- will be treated using such concepts as reliability, UISITE: Departmental approval. information theory, and signal detection theory. A portion of the course will be devoted to summariz- OA 4662 RELIABILITY AND WEAPONS SYS- ing approaches to real world problems incorporat- TEM EFFECTIVENESS MEASUREMENT (4-0). ing current methods from the literature. PRE- Component and system reliability functions, and REQUISITES: OA 3657, OA 3604, OA 3704, and other descriptors for the reliability aspect of sys- OA 4705 (may be taken concurrently). tem effectiveness. Relationships between system and component reliability. Point and interval esti- OA 4705-4706 STOCHASTIC MODELS II-III mates of reliability parameters under various life (3-2) and (4-0). Experience in stochastic modeling testing plans. Illustrations of current methods of is gained by performance of a suitable project en- reliability assessment from appropriate MILSTD's tailing data collection and analysis, formulation of and manuals. PREREQUISITE: OA 4705 (may be model assumptions and application of the model to taken concurrently) or equivalent. answer specific questions or help explain a particu-

lar phenomenon; study of non-Markovian systems.

OA 4680 HUMAN PERFORMANCE EVALUA- Queueing theory topics relevant to applications in-

TION (4-0). Experimental considerations, strat- cluding deterministic queues, priority queueing egy, and techniques in evaluation of human per- systems with application such as cm computer time formance characteristics and capabilities. Detailed sharing, inequalities and approximations for gen- examination of special methods to include mul- eral single served queues, multichannel and tan- tivariate designs, psychophysical methods, and dom queue approximations, and heavy traffic

173 OPERATIONS RESEARCH

queues with applications of the diffusion process. OS 3203 SURVEY OF OPERATIONS PREREQUISITE: OA 3704. ANALYSIS/SYSTEMS ANALYSIS (4-0). A sur- vey of the military applications of operations OA 4910 SELECTED TOPICS IN OPERATIONS analysis/systems analysis techniques of particular RESEARCH/SYSTEMS ANALYSIS (2-0 to 5-0). interest to the student. The applications usually

Presentation of a wide selection of topics from the covered are selected from decision, waiting lines, current literature. This course may be repeated for resource allocation, replacement, cost- credit if course content changes. PREREQUISITE: effectiveness, inventory theory, and search mod- A background of advanced work in operations re- els. The techniques needed for these applications search and Departmental approval. are developed as required and usually include top- ics in linear programming (including the simplex OA 4930 READINGS IN OPERATIONS method), probability theory, nonlinear programm- RESEARCH/SYSTEMS ANALYSIS (2-0 to 5-0). ing statistics (including Bayesian and classical), This course may be repeated for credit if course dynamic programming and simulation. PREREQ- content changes. PREREQUISITE: Departmental UISITE: PS 3411 or equivalent. approval. Graded on Pass/Fail basis only. OS 3205 OPERATIONS RESEARCH FOR COM- OTHER SERVICE COURSES PUTER SCIENTISTS (4-0). An introduction to

the methodology and techniques of operations re- Upper Division Courses search, with special emphasis on the computa- tional aspects and on computer-related applica- OS 2201 ELEMENTS OF OPERATIONS tions. Topics include linear programming, queue- RESEARCH/SYSTEMS ANALYSIS (4-0). An in- ing theory, and PERT. Homework assignments in- troductory course. Topics covered include nature, clude writing computer programs for some of the origin, and contemporary status of operations algorithms presented. PREREQUISITES: MA analysis; problem formulation. PREREQUISITE: 2045, PS 3414 and CS 0110. PS 2501 or equivalent. OS 3206 OPERATIONS RESEARCH FOR ME- Upper Division or Graduate Courses CHANICAL ENGINEERS (4-0). A survey of op- erations research techniques of particular interest OS 3062 INTELLIGENCE DATA ANALYSIS to the mechanical engineer. Linear programming, (4-2). A survey of methods and techniques for syn- sequencing and scheduling, integer programming, thesis, analysis, interpretation, and reporting of in- decision theory, geometric programming, net- telligence data. Topics include sampling methods, works, simulation. Probability concepts developed content analysis, data handling and processing as needed. PREREQUISITES: MA 1100 and MA overview, scaling techniques, and parametric and 2045 or equivalent. nonparametric tests with emphasis on application. The student will be exposed to a wide spectrum of OS 3207 OPERATIONAL ANALYSIS FOR data relating to international problems, with par- NAVAL INTELLIGENCE (4-0). An introduction ticular emphasis on international commerce and to the methodology and techniques of operations trade, and national maritime capabilities. PRE- research, with special emphasis on specific areas

REQUISITES: PS 3000 or equivalent, CS 2100. relevant to naval intelligence such as decision- May also be offered as NS 3062. making under risk and uncertainty, forecasting, search, detection, resource allocation, and queues. OS 3201-3202 FUNDAMENTALS OF OPERA- PREREQUISITE: PS 3000 or equivalent. TIONS ANALYSIS/SYSTEMS ANALYSIS III (4-0). Selected operations research techniqu.es, OS 3208 OPERATIONS ANALYSIS FOR primarily the elements of probability and statistics, ELECTRONIC WARFARE (4-0). This course applicable to the prediction of system cost, deals with applications of quantitative models to schedule, and effectiveness. Special topics in operational electronic warfare problems, with the statistics, appropriate to applications in costing, underlying idea being to make decisions by op- quality assurance, and life testing. PREREQUI- timizing some measure of effectiveness (MOE). SITE: Differential and integral calculus. Topics covered include ESM, ECM/ECCM, strike warfare, ASMD, and cost/effectiveness tradeoffs.

174 OPERATIONS RESEARCH

PREREQUISITES: Calculus, PS 3411 and OS testing. Availability, interval reliability, and the 3653. synthesis of reliability, maintainability, and effec- tiveness considerations. PREREQUISITES: OS OS 3210 OPERATIONS RESEARCH FOR 3202, OS 3203 (concurrently). COMPUTER SYSTEMS MANAGERS (4-0). A one-quarter survey of operations research tech- OS 3322 INTRODUCTION TO QUALITY AS- niques of particular interest to students in com- SURANCE (4-0). Characterization of quality re- puter systems management. Model formulation, quirements for materiel inspection procedures. decision theory, linear programming, project man- Acceptance sampling, MilStd plans. Product and agement techniques, inventory models, queueing process quality cost analysis. Statistical control of and simulation, reliability and maintainability. quality. For students in Management. PREREQ- Examples will illustrate the application of these UISITE: PS 3211 or OS 3202 or equivalent. techniques to the management of computer sys- tems. PREREQUISITES: MA 2300, PS 3011. OS 3390 COMPUTATION AND COMPUTER SIMULATION (4-2). Programming in FORTRAN OS 3211 OPERATIONS RESEARCH FOR and specialized simulation languages, with appli- COMMUNICATIONS MANAGERS (4-0). A cations to the solution of ASW problems by simu- one-quarter survey of operations research tech- lation. Designed for students in ASW curriculum. niques of particular interest to students in com- munications management. Model formulation, de- OS 3651 SEARCH, DETECTION, AND LO- cision theory, games, linear programming, net- CALIZATION MODELS (4-0). An introduction work flows, CPM and PERT, reliability and main- to the decision problems associated with Navy de- tainability, queueing theory, and systems simula- tection systems. The relation of detection models tion. PREREQUISITES: MA 2300, PS 3000. to search and localization models, measures of ef- fectiveness of search/detection systems, and the OS 3212 OPERATIONS RESEARCH FOR optimum allocation of search effort are discussed.

MANAGEMENT (4-0). A survey of problem solv- The last week of the course requires participation ing techniques for operations research. Topics in- in an ASW related group project. This course is clude decision theory, linear programming, designed for the ASW curriculum. PREREQUI- analysis of two-person games, Lanchester models SITE: PS 3411 and SECRET clearance. of combat, project scheduling, inventory models, queueing models, and simulation. PREREQUI- OS 3652 INTRODUCTION TO COMBAT MOD- SITES: MA 2300 and PS 3005. ELS AND WEAPONS EFFECTIVENESS (4-1). This course deals with the application of more or OS 3214 OPERATIONS RESEARCH METH- less abstract models to military problems. Topics ODOLOGY (4-0). Survey of Operations Research include Lanchester' s Theory, Game Theory, Re- techniques not covered in OS 3212. Topics may liability Theory, Systems Effectiveness, and War include simulation, search theory, extensions of Gaming. The last week of the course requires par- combat models, network flows, and Markov ticipation in an ASW related group project. This chains. PREREQUISITES: PS 3211 and OS 3212 course is designed for the ASW curriculum. PRE- concurrently. REQUISITES: PS 3411 and MA 2129 and SEC- RET clearance. OS 3215 SELECTED TOPICS IN MANAGE- MENT SCIENCE (2-0 to 5-0). Presentation of a OS 3653 SYSTEM SIMULATION (4-0). Com- wide selection of topics from the current literature. puter simulation as a problem solving technique.

May be repeated for credit if the content changes. Subject areas covered include: Discrete event digi- PREREQUISITE: Departmental approval. tal simulation methodology, Monte Carlo tech- niques, simulation programming in FORTRAN OS 3306 SYSTEMS EFFECTIVENESS CON- and other available simulation languages, variance CEPTS AND METHODS (4-0). An introduction reduction techniques, design of simulation exper- to system reliability, maintainability, and effec- iments and analysis of results. PREREQUISITES: tiveness analysis. Failure (repair) rates and mean CS 01 10 or equivalent, PS 341 1 or equivalent. times to failure (repair). Models for aging and completion. Block diagrams and fault trees. Life OS 3655 SIMULATION AND WAR GAMING

175 OPERATIONS RESEARCH

(2-2). Design, implementation and use of digital 530. It emphasizes quantitative methods for for- simulation models will be covered with special mulating and solving trade-off decisions. Topics emphasis on features common to EW problems. include linear and non-linear optimization, War gaming will be discussed and game using the methods of cost estimation including present value digital computer will be played and critiqued by computations, decisions under uncertainty, game the class. Basic topics are explained including theory, modeling measures of effectiveness, and computer generation of random variates, statistical applications. PREREQUISITES: PS 3414, OS design and monitoring of model progress, machine 3661, MN 2701. representation of dynamic data structures, model verification and validation, special purpose simu- Graduate Courses lation and gaming languages, and estimating the development and computational cost of complex OS 4063 FORECASTING THREAT ANALYSIS software systems. PREREQUISITES: CS 2700, AND NET ASSESSMENT (4-0). A study of the OS 3411, OS 3661 or equivalent. intuitive, exploratory and normative forecasting methods, including brainstorming, Delphi, time OS 3659 HUMAN FACTORS ENGINEERING series, scenario writing, uncertainty, cost benefit, (3-0). An introduction to human factors engineer- input-output approaches. Conflict modelling; in- ing for students in other fields such as engineering. troduction of models of armament races and inter- Designed to give the student an appreciation of national conflict. Implications of such models for man's capacities and limitations and how these can analyzing threats; search procedures for generating affect the optimum design of the man-machine sys- alternatives. Net assessment of such alternatives. tem. Emphasis on integration of human factors PREREQUISITES: OS 3207, GV/OS 3062, GV into the system development cycle considering 3420. May also be offered as GV 4063. such topics as manpower/personnel costs, control and display design, human energy expenditure, OS 4207 SPECIAL TOPICS IN THE ANALYSIS physiological costs, and evaluation systems. OF INTELLIGENCE PROBLEMS (4-0). An PREREQUISITE: A previous course in probability examination of special intelligence problems and

and statistics. cases with emphasis on problem and project for- mulation, structure, and management as well as OS 3661 DECISION ANALYSIS AND DATA the interpretation and communication of study re- ANALYSIS (4-0). This course relates the theory sults. Applications of cost/benefit and input-output and techniques of data analysis and operations re- modelling to intelligence decision problems such

search to ASW analysis problems. It is primarily as collection management, collection system de- for students in the ASW program. Emphasis is sign, data handling and manipulation. The last por- placed upon the analysis of data in the ASW envi- tion of the course will focus on student presenta- ronment. PREREQUISITES: PS 3411 or equiva- tion of thesis research. PREREQUISITES: GV/OS lent. 3062, OS 3207, GV/OS 4063. May also be offered as NS 4207. OS 3665 HUMAN VIGILANCE PERFORM- (3-1). Course involves an examination of ANCE OS 4643 ASW WAR GAMING (3-0). The devel- man's attentiveness and capability in the detection opment and use of war games for the analysis of of changes in stimulus events over prolonged ASW problems. The form and qualities of the var- periods of observation. Topics to be covered in- ious kinds of war games are discussed and a clude theories of vigilance; task, signal, subject manual-machine ASW Campaign model is devel- and environmental influences on performance; oped and used. PREREQUISITE: OS 3661 or physiological and psychological responses and vig- equivalent and SECRET clearance. ilance performance measurement. This course is designed for the ASW curriculum. PREREQUI- OS 4653 OPERATIONAL TEST AND EVALU- SITE: OS 3661. ATION (4-0). This course is designed for systems

technology students. It deals with the problems as- OS 3702 WEAPONS SYSTEMS MODELING sociated with the tests and evaluations of military

AND OPTIMIZATION (4-1). This is the second weapons systems, exercises and tactics. Included Systems course for students in the Weapon Sys- are concepts of the design of experiments; analysis tems Technology (WST) option of Curriculum of operational data; reliability; measures of effec-

176 OPERATIONS RESEARCH

tiveness; and exercise design, reconstruction and ity axioms, independence, moments, derived dis- analysis. Examples and case studies which involve tributions. Bayes Theorem, sampling, sample ASW, EW, and AAW are examined. PREREQUI- statistics. This course is designed primarily for SITE: OS 3661. students in management. PREREQUISITE: MA 2305 or equivalent. OS 4703 RELIABILITY, MAINTAINABILITY, AND SAFETY ANALYSIS OF WEAPONS SYS- PS 3011-3012 PROBABILITY AND STATIS- TEMS (4-0). Modeling and measurement of fac- TICS FOR MANAGEMENT III (5-0) and (4-0). tors contributing to system effectiveness. Reliabil- A treatment of selected topics in probability and

ity. Maintainability. Safety. Life and repair distri- statistics for management applications using butions for components, block diagrams, and fault elementary concepts from calculus; includes prob-

trees. Estimation for components and systems. Op- ability models, discrete and continuous random timal redundancy and repair. PREREQUISITES: variables, some important distributions, sampling PS 3414, OS 3661, MN 2701. theory and an introduction to statistical inference. Includes inference for normal populations, estima- PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS tion procedures, nonparametric procedures and linear models. PREREQUISITE: MA 2300 or Upper Division Courses equivalent.

PS 2350 DATA ANALYSIS (2-0). A survey of PS 3211 STATISTICS (4-0). A survey of manage- practical techniques for the analysis of experi- rial statistics and decision analysis modeling. Top- mental data. Basic probability and mathematical ics include parameter estimation, confidence expectation. Binomial, Poisson, Gaussian and intervals, hypothesis testing, regression analysis. other distributions. Variance and covariance, error PREREQUISITES: MA 2300 and PS 3005 or their propagation and curve fitting. Must be taken con- equivalents. currently with PH 2600. PREREQUISITE: Cal- culus. PS 3301 PROBABILITY (4-0). Probability axioms and event probability. Random variables PS 2501 INTRODUCTION TO PROBABILITY and their probability distributions. Moment AND STATISTICS (4-0). Selected topics from generating functions, moments and other distribu- basic probability and statistics, using some tion characteristics. Distribution families charac- elementary calculus concepts. Topics include terized by parameters. Functions of a random vari- probability axioms, discrete and continuous ran- able. Jointly distributed random variables, inde- dom variables typical distributions, independence pendence and conditional distributions; correla- and independent sampling, and point and interval tion. PREREQUISITE: None. estimation. PREREQUISITES: MA 1115, MA

1 120 or equivalent. PS 3302 PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS (4-1). Random samples. Derived distributions of Upper Division or Graduate Courses functions of several random variables. Order

statistics, the t and F distributions. Limiting distri- PS 3000 PROBABILITY AND STATISTICS FOR butions, the central limit theorem and approxima- COMMUNICATIONS MANAGEMENT (4-0 or tions. Bivariate normal distribution; extension to 5-0). An introductory course in probability and the multivariate normal family. Point estimation; statistics designed for applications to Communica- unbiasedness, maximum likelihood and Bayes. tions Management problems. The topics covered Interval estimation; confidence intervals and will include frequency distributions and descrip- Bayesian intervals. PREREQUISITE: PS 3301. tive measures, rules for computing probabilities, binomial and normal distributions, central limit theorem, sampling distributions, statistical infer- PS 3303 STATISTICS (4-1). Confidence interval ence including regression, and analysis of vari- estimation and hypothesis testing. Regression and ance. PREREQUISITE: College algebra. correlation analysis. Elements of the analysis of variance. Nonparametric inference. Applications PS 3005 PROBABILITY (3-0). one-quarter A to reliability, quality assurance, and operations course in probability. Random variables, probabil- analysis problems. PREREQUISITE: PS 3302.

177 OPERATIONS RESEARCH

PS 3411-3412 APPLIED PROBABILITY probability distributions, parameters of probability THEORY III (4-1) and (4-0). Axiomatic probabil- distributions, characteristic functions and limit ity, random variables, distribution functions, theorems. PREREQUISITE: Advanced calculus or transformation of random variables, limiting dis- consent of Instructor. tribution, stationary and ergodic processes. Stochastic processes, time series, linear mean- PS 4321 DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS (3-1). square estimation; Brownian motion and Markov Theory of the general linear hypotheses. Analysis processes and Poisson processes. PREREQUI- of variance. Planning of experiments. Simple fac- SITES: MA 1121 and PS 2501 or equivalents. torial experiments. Randomized block and Latin squares. PREREQUISITE: OA 3303. PS 3414 APPLIED PROBABILITY AND

STATISTICS (4-0). A first course in applied prob- PS 4431 ADVANCED PROBABILITY (3-0). ability and statistics for students with a back- Convergence almost surely, in probability and in ground in mathematics and engineering. Discrete quadratic mean. Distribution function and charac- and continuous distributions, sampling, estima- teristic functions. Infinitely divisible laws. Strong tion, hypothesis testing, regression analysis, ap- and weak laws of large numbers. Classical central plications to reliability and system effectiveness limit problems moder central limit problems. modeling and measurement. PREREQUISITE: PREREQUISITE: MA 3606 and Departmental ap- Courses in differential and integral calculus. proval.

3419-3420 PS PROBABILITY AND STATIS- PS 4432-4433 STOCHASTIC PROCESSES I-II TICS FOR SYSTEMS TESTING AND EVALU- (4-0). The Kolmogorov theorem; analytic prop- ATION III (4-1) and (3-0). Basic probability erties of sample functions; continuity and differ- laws, discrete and continuous random variables entiability in quadratic mean; stochastic integrals, and their distributions, useful probability distribu- stationary processes. Stationary and non-stationary tions, random samples, sample statistics and their problems; Martingale, limit theorems and the in- distributions, introduction to stochastic processes variance principle. PREREQUISITE: PS 4431. including Markov Chains, stationarity and ergodic- ity. Point and interval estimation of parameter, PS 4440 TIME SERIES ANALYSIS (4-0). Second tests of hypotheses, methods of regression order stationary processes. Harmonic analysis of analysis, basic statistics of control charts and ap- correlation functions. Filters and spectral window. plications to DoD problems. PREREQUISITE: Ergotic properties. Problems of inference in time MA 1100. series analysis. Introduction to the analysis of mul- tivariate processes. Course should be taken con- PS 3421 NONPARAMETRIC STATISTICS (4-0). currently with PS 4432. One-sample tests, two-sample test, tests for inde- pendence, nonparametric analysis of variance and PS 4510 SELECTED TOPICS IN PROBABILITY correlation statistics. PREREQUISITE: Consent of AND STATISTICS (2-0 to 5-0). Topics will be Instructor. selected by instructor to fit the needs and back- ground of the students. The topics may include advanced probability, sampling inspection, quality Graduate Courses assurance, nonparametric methods, and sequential

analysis. The course may be repeated for credit if PS 4001 PROBABILITY THEORY (3-0). the topic changes. PREREQUISITE: Consent of Axiomatic probability, random variables and their Instructor. Graded on Pass/Fail basis only.

178 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY

DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY

KARLHEINZ EDGAR WOEHLER, Pro- OTTO HEINZ, Professor of Physics fessor of Physics; Chairman (1962)* (1962); B.A. Univ. of California at B.S., Univ. of Bonn, 1953; M.S., Berkeley, 1948; Ph.D., 1954. Technical Univ., Aachen, 1955; RAYMOND LEROY KELLY, Professor Ph.D., Univ. of Munich, 1962. of Physics (1960); B.A., Univ. of ROBERT LOUIS ARMSTEAD, As- Wichita, 1947; M.S., Univ. of Wis- sociate Professor of Physics (1964); consin, 1949; Ph.D., 1951. Univ. of Rochester, 1958; B.S., HERMAN MEDWIN, Professor of Ph.D., Univ. of California at Berke- Physics (1955); B.S., Worcester ley, 1964. Polytechnic Institute, 1941; M.S. FRED RAMON BUSKIRK, Professor of Univ. of California at Los Angeles, Physics (I960); B.S., Western Re- 1948; Ph.D., 1953. serve Univ., 1951; Ph.D., Case Insti- EDMUND ALEXANDER MILNE, As- tute of Technology, 1958. sociate Professor of Physics (1954); ALFRED WILLIAM MADISON B.A., Oregon State College, 1949; COOPER, Professor of Physics M.S. California Institute of Technol- (1957); B.A., Univ. of Dublin, 1955; ogy, 1950; Ph.D., 1953. M.A., 1959; Ph.D., The Queen's University of Belfast, 1961. JOHN ROBERT NEIGHBOURS, Pro- fessor of Physics (1959); B.S., Case JOHN NIESSINK COOPER, Professor Institute of Technology, 1949; M.S., of Physics (1956); B.A., Kalamazoo 1951; Ph.D., 1953. College, 1935; Ph.D., Cornell Univ., 1940. RAINER PITTHAN, Assistant Professor of Physics (1973); B.S., Univ. of ALAN BERCHARD COPPENS, As- Marburg, 1962; M.S., Darmstadt In- sociate Professor of Physics (1964); stitute of Technology, 1967, Ph.D., B.Eng.Phys., Cornell Univ., 1959; 1972. M.S. Brown Univ., 1962; Ph.D., 1965. WILLIAM REESE, Professor of Physics EUGENE CASSON CRITTENDEN, (1963); B.A., Reed College, 1958; M.S., Univ. of Illinois, 1960; Ph.D., JR., Distinguished Professor of 1962. Physics (1953); B.A., Cornell Univ., 1934; Ph.D., 1938. RICHARD ALAN REINHARDT, Pro- HARVEY ARNOLD DAHL, Assistant fessor of Chemistry (1954); B.S., Professor of Physics (1964); B.S., Univ. of California at Berkeley, 1943; Stanford Univ., 1951; Ph.D., 1963. Ph.D., 1947. JOHN NORVELL DYER, Professor of GEORGE WAYNE RODEBACK, As- Physics (1961); B.A., Univ. of sociate Professor of Physics (1960); California at Berkeley, 1956; Ph.D., B.S., Univ. of Idaho, 1943; M.S., 1960. Univ. of Illinois, 1947; Ph.D., 1951. HARRY ELIAS HANDLER, Professor CHARLES FREDERICK ROWELL, As- of Physics (1958); B.A., Univ. of sociate Professor of Chemistry (1962); California at Los Angeles, 1949; B.S. Syracuse Univ., 1956; M.S., M.A., 1951; Ph.D., 1955. Iowa State Univ., 1959; Ph.D., Ore- gon State Univ., 1964. (on leave of DON EDWARD HARRISON, JR., Pro- absence) fessor of Physics (1961); B.S., Col- lege of William and Mary, 1949; JAMES VINCENT SANDERS, As- M.S., Yale Univ., 1950; Ph.D., 1953. sociate Professor of Physics (1961);

179 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY

B.S., Kent State Univ., 1954; Ph.D., fessor Emeritus (1947); B.S., Mar- Cornell Univ., 1961. quette Univ., 1934; M.S., 1937. GORDON EVERETT SCHACHER, As- GILBERT FORD KINNEY, Distin- sociate Professor of Physics (1964); guished Professor Emeritus (1942); A.B., Reed College, 1956; Ph.D., A.B., Arkansas College, 1928; M.S., Rutgers, 1961. Univ. of Tennessee, 1930; Ph.D., New York Univ., 1935. JOHN WILFRED SCHULTZ, Associate Professor Chemistry (1958); B.S., GEORGE DANIEL MARSHALL, JR., Oregon State College, 1953; Ph.D., Professor Emeritus (1946); B.S., Yale Brown Univ., 1957. (on leave of ab- Univ., 1930; M.S., 1932. sence) GEORGE HAROLD MCFARLIN, Pro- FRED RICHARD SCHWIRZKE, As- fessor Emeritus (1948); B.A., Indiana sociate Professor of Physics (1967); Univ., 1925; M.A., 1926. B.S., Univ. of Rostock, 1950; M.S., LEONARD OLIVER OLSEN, Professor Univ. of Karlsruhe, 1953; Ph.D., Emeritus (1960); B.A., Iowa State 1959. Teachers College, 1932; M.S., State WILLIAM MARSHALL TOLLES, Pro- Univ. of Iowa, 1934; Ph.D., 1937. fessor of Chemistry (1962); B.A., MELVIN FERGUSON REYNOLDS, Univ. of Connecticut, 1958; Ph.D., Professor Emeritus (1949); B.S. Univ. of California at Berkeley, 1962. Franklin and Marshall College, 1932; OSCAR BRYAN WILSON, JR., Profes- M.S. New York Univ., 1935; Ph.D., sor of Physics (1957); B.S., Univ. of 1937. Texas, 1944; M.A. Univ. of Califor- JOHN DEWITT RIGGIN, Professor nia at Los Angeles, 1948; Ph.D., Emeritus (1946); B.S., Univ. of Mis- 1951. sissippi, 1934; M.S., 1936. WILLIAM BARDWELL ZELENY, As- sociate Professor of Physics (1962); DEGREE REQUIREMENTS

B.S., Univ. of Maryland, 1956; M.S. The Department of Physics and Chemistry offers Univ., Syracuse 1958; Ph.D., 1960. the MS and BS degrees in Physics, in Chemistry

and in Applied Science. In addition, the Ph.D. is EMERITUS FACULTY offered by the Department. Upon approval by the Department, courses taken at other institutions NEWTON WEBER BUERGER, Profes- may be applied towards satisfying degree require- sor Emeritus (1942); B.S., Mas- ments. sachusetts Institute of Technology, 1933; M.S., 1934; Ph.D., 1939. MASTER OF SCIENCE IN PHYSICS WILLIAM PEYTON CUNNINGHAM, 1 . A candidate for the degree Master of Science in Distinguished Professor Emeritus Physics must complete satisfactorily a program of (1946); B.S., Yale Univ., 1928; study which includes a minimum of 30 quarter Ph.D., 1932. hours of physics courses (not including thesis) dis- AUSTIN ROGERS FREY, Distinguished tributed among courses at the graduate level; of Professor Emeritus (1946); B.S., Har- this 30 hours at least 15 hours must be at the 4000 vard Univ., 1920; M.S., 1924; Ph.D., level. Upon approval of the Chairman of the 1929. Physics and Chemistry Department a maximum of 4 hours of courses taken in another department WILLIAM WISNER HAWES, Professor may be applied toward satisfying the above re- Emeritus (1952); B.S., Ch.Eng., Pur- quirements. In lieu of the preceding requirement, due Univ., 1924; Sc.M., Brown students who are qualified to pursue graduate Univ., 1927; Ph.D., 1930. courses in physics when they arrive at the Post- SYDNEY HOBART KALMBACH, Pro- graduate School may complete a minimum of 20

180 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY

hours entirely of 4000 level physics courses. In Requirements for the degree may be grouped

addition, all students must present an acceptable into 3 categories: courses, thesis research and thesis. examinations in major and minor fields and lan- guages.

2. The following specific course requirements The required examinations are described must be successfully completed for a student to elsewhere in this catalogue in the section Require- earn the degree of Master of Science in Physics: ments for the Doctor's Degree. In addition to the school requirements the department requires a pre-

a. Thermodynamics and Statistical Mechan- liminary examination to show evidence of accep- ics — the student must take a two-quarter tability as a doctoral student. sequence or present equivalent prepara- The usual courses to be taken by the candidate tion in this area. include Advanced Mechanics, Classical Elec- b. A course in Advanced Mechanics or trodynamics, Quantum Mechanics and Statistical Quantum Mechanics. Physics. (PH 4171, 4371, 4971, 4972, 4973, c. A course in Electromagnetism at the 4000 4571, 4572). Suitable electives are to be chosen in

level. physics and the minor fields, mainly from the list d. An advanced course in Modern Physics. of graduate level courses. e. Specialization, to include at least two ad- vanced courses in an area of specializa- PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY tion. LABORATORIES

3. Programs leading to the Master of Science de- The physics laboratories are equipped to carry gree in Physics must be approved by the Chairman on instructional and research work in nuclear of the Department of Physics and Chemistry. physics, solid state physics, electro-optics, plasma physics, spectroscopy, and acoustics. MASTER OF SCIENCE IN APPLIED A 100-MeV electron linear accelerator with SCIENCE 5-microamp beam current is used in nuclear physics research as well as radiation effects

studies. Graaff accelerator is A candidate for the degree Master of Science in A 2-MeV Van de also available for atomic physics Applied Science must complete satisfactorily a nuclear and program of study which includes 20 quarter hours work. The electro-optics laboratory uses imaging and of courses in physics and/or chemistry at the detecting systems from the far infrared to the visi- graduate level including work at the 4000 level; a ble range including instrumentation for sea-going departmentally approved sequence containing a experiments in optical propagation. The laser labo- minimum of 12 hours at the graduate level which is taken outside the Department of Physics and ratory contains a giant pulse laser and associated Chemistry; of the above 32 quarter hours of work detection equipment for the visible spectrum as at the graduate level at least 12 must be in 4000 well as a high power laser in the IR region. level courses. The candidate must present an ac- The plasma physics laboratory includes a ceptable thesis on a topic given prior approval by plasma system, diagnostic equipment for studies of the Department of Physics and Chemistry. Final plasma dynamics, and a steady state plasma source with fields to approval of all programs leading to the Master of magnetic 10,000 gauss. Science in Applied Science shall be obtained from The spectroscopy equipment includes a large the Chairman of the Department of Physics and grating spectrography, a large prism spectrograph, Chemistry. and an infrared spectrophotometer. The spectros- copic data center contains a comprehensive compi- lation of the known energy levels and atmoic DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY spectral lines in the vacuum ultraviolet range. The acoustics laboratory equipment includes a The Ph.D. degree is offered in the Department large anechoic chamber, a small reverberation in several areas of specialization which currently chamber, and a multiple-unit acoustics laboratory

include Acoustics, Atomic Physics, Solid State for student experimentation in airborne acoustics.

Physics, Theoretical Physics, Nuclear Physics and Sonar equipment, test and wave tanks, and in- l Plasma Physics. strumentation for investigation in underwater

181 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY

sound comprise the underwater acoustics laborato- PH 0999 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY COL- ry- LOGUIUM (0-1). Discussion of topics of current The chemical laboratories provide facilities for interest and student thesis reports. undergraduate and graduate study and research in chemistry. Supporting these activities are: a Lower Division Courses

molecular spectroscopy laboratory, including in- frared, ultraviolet, and magnetic resonance (ESR The BASIC PHYSICS sequence, PH1011.PH and NMR) spectrometers; a chemical instruments 1012, PH 1013, and PH 1014, comprises a laboratory with infrared and ultraviolet spec- series of courses equivalent to the standard trophotometers, an atmoic absorption spec- university level introductory physics courses trophotometer, gas and liquid chromatographic with calculus. Normally the student is ex- equipment, and a vapor-phase osmometer; and a pected to have adequate preparation in these chemical dynamics laboratory with equipment for areas at the time of matriculation at NPS; investigating photochemistry, rapid reaction kine- however these courses are available upon tics, and chemical synthesis. demand for students with partial or no back- ground in basic physics.

The minicourses PH 1061 through PH 1067 com- PHYSICS prise a Basic Physics sequence available in the self-instructional (PSI) mode for both on-campus PH 0110 REFRESHER PHYSICS (5-3). A six- and off-campus use. Various combinations of week course designed to refresh incoming stu- these minicourses are essentially equivalent to, dents, particularly allied Officers, in selected basic and may be substituted for, the courses PH 1011, concepts of mechanics. The level of presentation PH 1012, PH 1041, and PH 1051, as follows: and choice of material depend upon the back- ground and needs of the students. The laboratory 'classroom" sessions are used to develop problem solving courses equivalent PSI sequence skills. Noncredit PH 1011 PH 1061, PH 1062, PH 1063 PH 0111 REFRESHER PHYSICS AND PH 1012 PH 1064, PH 1065, PH 1066 PH 1041 PH 1061, PH 1062, PH 1064, CHEMISTRY (7-3). A six- week refresher course 1065, PH 1066 of selected topics from elementary mechanics and PH 1051 PH 1061, PH 1062, PH 1063, chemistry for incoming students who are entering PH PH 1067 the more quantitative engineering and science cur- ricula. Typical topics from mechanics are kinema- PHYSICS LABS. Students requiring tics, Newton's laws, the concepts of energy, and BASIC this level should momentum, and simple harmonic motion. Chemis- laboratory experience at examine the course descriptions of PH 1300, try topics will include atomic structure, the chemi- which would normally be taken concurrently cal bond, stoichiometry, and chemical equilibrium with 1400, which would normally and kinetics. The use of calculus and vector PH 1012; PH be taken concurrently with PH 1013; and PH algebra is emphasized. The three one-hour labora- 1600, which would normally be taken concur- tory periods are devoted to guided problem solv- rently with PH 1014. ing. PREREQUISITE: Previous college courses in elementary physics and chemistry and integral cal- culus. PH 1011 BASIC PHYSICS I - MECHANICS (4-0). Vector algebra, particle kinematics in one and two dimensions; Newton's Laws; particle PH 0499 ACOUSTICS COLLOQUIUM (0-1). dynamics; work, kinetic and potential energy, con- Reports on current research and study of recent servation of energy; conservation of linear momen- research literature in conjunction with the student tum; rotational kinematics and dynamics, conser- thesis. PREREQUISITE: A course in acoustics. vation of angular momentum; oscillations; gravita- tion. PREREQUISITE: A course in calculus or PH 0810 THESIS RESEARCH (0-0). Every stu- concurrent registration in a calculus course. dent conducting thesis research will enroll in this course. PH 1012 BASIC PHYSICS II - ELECTRICITY

182 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY

AND MAGNETISM (4-0). Electric charge, A review course of six weeks duration designed for Coulomb's Law, Electric Field and Potential, the Antisubmarine warfare curriculum. The course Gauss's Law, Capacitors and Dielectrics, Current covers the use of coordinate systems and vectors, and Resistance, Simple Circuits, EMF, Magnetic particle kinematics and dynamics, projectile mo- Field, Ampere's and Faraday's Laws, Inductance, tion, work and energy, and the harmonic oscil- Electromagnetic Oscillations and Waves. Max- lator. well's Equations. PREREQUISITE: PH 1011 or equivalent. PH 1300 BASIC ELECTRICITY AND MAG- NETISM LABORATORY (0-2). An introductory

PH 1013 BASIC PHYSICS III - FLUIDS, laboratory for students who have had no previous WAVES AND THERMODYNAMICS (4-0). experience with the fundamental experiments of Fluid states, conservation of matter, fluid electricity and magnetism. PREREQUISITE: Con- dynamics, Bernoulli Equation; waves, sound current registration in PH 1012 desirable. waves, sonar equation; temperature, heat, internal energy, First Law of Thermodynamics; kinetic PH 1400 BASIC FLUIDS AND WAVES LABO- theory; entropy and second law of ther- RATORY (0-2). An introductory laboratory for modynamics. PREREQUISITE: PH 1011, or students who have had no previous experience equivalent. (PH 1012 is not a prerequisite for this with the fundamental experiments of fluid course). dynamics, wave motion, and acoustics. PRE- REQUISITE: Concurrent registration in PH 1013

PH 1014 BASIC PHYSICS IV - OPTICS, desirable. ATOMIC AND NUCLEAR PHYSICS (4-0). Re- flection and refraction; lenses and lens systems; PH 1600 BASIC MODERN PHYSICS LABORA- optical devices; interference, diffraction; special TORY (0-2). An introductory laboratory for stu- relativity; quantum effects of waves and particles; dents who have had no previous experience with structure of the hydrogen atom, introduction to the fundamental experiments of modern physics. wave mechanics, uncertainty principles; nuclear PREREQUISITES: PH 1300, concurrent registra- structure and nuclear reactions. PREREQUISITE: tion in PH 1014 desirable. PH 1011 and PH 1012, or equivalent. PH 1901-1902 THE NATURE AND STRUC- PH 1041 REVIEW OF MECHANICS AND TURE OF PHYSICS III (4-2). The development ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM (5-1). First of ideas and measurement leading from early mod- quarter of a sequence of fundamental physics for els of the heavens through Galileo and Kepler to student in Electrical Engineering and Electronics. Newton and the Theory of Universal gravitation;

(The sequence includes PH 1041, 2241, 2641 and satellites, natural and artificial; the concepts cen-

3741). The subject matter of this course includes: tral to classical mechanics: momentum, kinetic and kinematics, dynamics, conservation laws, elec- potential energies, conservation principles; ques- trostatics, Coulomb's and Gauss's laws, electric tions about the nature of light; wave motion and and magnetic fields, Ampere's and Faraday's wave properties of light. Fundamental concepts of laws, capacitance and inductance. electromagnetism and light as electromagnetic

radiation; experiments with light and the crisis of PH 1051 REVIEW OF VECTOR MECHANICS classical physics; Einstein and Relativity; space AND INTRODUCTION TO FLUIDS (4-2). Basic and time revised, mass-energy equivalence; the concepts of elementary vector mechanics, includ- question of atomic structure and the quantum in- ing; statics, motion in one dimension and in a terpretation; properties of atoms, nuclei, and parti- plane, particle dynamics, energy, momentum, ro- cles. tational dynamics, elementary properties of fluids, qualitative description of drag phenomena; turbu- Upper Division Courses lence and separation. The laboratory sessions are devoted to guided problem-solving. PREREQUI- PH 2121-2122 APPLIED PHYSICS III (4-0). A SITE: Previous courses in general physics and cal- two course sequence, intended for students of Op- culus. erations Analysis, in which physical phenomena are described and illustrated by their application to PH 1119 PHYSICAL SCIENCE REVIEW (2-0). situations of military interest. The first course con-

183 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY

siders vibrating systems, resonance, the nature of PH 2241 WAVE PHENOMENA (4-0). Second sound and light, acoustics terminology and hear- quarter of a sequence of fundamental physics for ing, the eye and vision, the ray approximation, the students in Electrical Engineering and Electronics. ray treatment of propagation of acoustic and elec- This course stresses the generality of wave tromagnetic waves, geometric optics, the phenomena drawing examples from optics, radar,

mathematical description of wave effects including acoustics, etc. Harmonic waves, interference, dif- transmission, reflection, standing waves, interfer- fraction, wave equation, energy flow, boundary ence and diffraction. The second course considers value problems and normal modes, Fourier electromagnetism, sources of electromagnetic analysis, Fourier transform phase and group veloc- radiation, the wave equation, phenomena as- ity, geometrical optics. PREREQUISITES: PH sociated with the interaction of waves and media 1041 or PH 1051. including scattering and absorption, the mathemat- ical description of nonrepetitive waveforms, mod- PH 2251 WAVES AND PARTICLES (4-2). A ulation and bandwidth, noise and noise sources, course designed to provide the fundamental ideas infrared detectors, infrared systems, radar and of wave theory, physical optics, and introductory sonar systems and the associated figure of merit modern physics. The wave equation, interference, equations. diffraction, polarization, Fourier transforms, group and phase velocity. The special theory of PH 2123 BASIC PHYSICS (4-0). A course to pro- relativity. Photoelectric and Compton effects. vide physical background to wave motion, acous- Blackbody radiation. Bohr theory of the hydrogen

tics, electromagnetism, and optics for students in atom, de Broglie hypothesis and an introduction to

the Electronic Warfare curriculum and to provide the Schroedinger equation. This course is available applications of analytical techniques to physical in PSI mode. PREREQUISITES: PH 1051, MA problems. Areas covered are harmonic motion — 2121 or equivalent. differential equations, complex notation, damped vibration and resonance; wave motion — prop- PH 2260 OPTICAL PHYSICS (4-2). Wave and erties of waves, sound waves; electromagnetism ray optics, optical instruments, wave propagation, — electrostatics, magnetostatics, electromagnetic interference, coherence, diffraction, polarization, waves, light; optics — geometrical optics, wave and radiation sources. Laboratory: The laboratory optics. PREREQUISITES: MA 2129, MA 3139 sessions will be devoted to student performance of (may be concurrent). exercises designed to complement class discus- sions and to develop skills with optical instrumen- tation. PREREQUISITES: PH 1051, MA 1100 or PH 2151 MECHANICS 1 (4-0). Kinematics and equivalents. dynamics in two and three dimensions. Projectile motion with drag; oscillations; two-body problem; PH 2261 INTRODUCTORY ELECTROMAG- rotating coordinate systems, Lagrangian mechan- NETIC THEORY AND GEOMETRICAL OP-

ics; and fluid dynamics. PREREQUISITES: PH TICS (4-0). The first of a three course sequence (PH 2261, PH 2251, PH 3361) for students of the 105 1 , calculus, vector algebra, and concurrent reg- istration for differential equations. Weapon Systems Technology Curriculum. The

first portion of the course develops the concepts of PH 2200 PHYSICS LABORATORY (0-4). A lab- electric and magnetic fields and how they are oratory course emphasising measurement, uncer- coupled to charge and current. The basic elec-

tainty and error in experiments on geometrical op- tromagnetic laws, leading to Maxwell's equations

tics and simple mechanical systems. Subjects to be are developed. The influence of, and the effects covered include laboratory procedures, definition on, materials is introduced (e.g. polarization, In the of measurement, random and systematic errors t magnetization, dielectric constant, etc.). propagation of uncertainties, graphical and analyt- second portion of the course reflection, refraction,

ical treatment of data, statistical concepts, focal lenses mirrors and simple optical systems are dis- length of lens and mirror, refractive index of glass, cussed. PREREQUISITES: PH 1051 or equiva- thick lens, optical instruments, optical spectra, the lent, math through differential equations.

prism spectrometer. A laboratory text is required. PREREQUISITES: PH 1051 and ST 1810, PH PH 2265 GEOMETRICAL OPTICS (2-2). The 2265 taken concurrently. first course of a three course sequence emphasizing

184 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY

a system oriented viewpoint for students in the transmission lines; rectangular wave guides. PRE- Weapons Systems Science curriculum. The course REQUISITES: PH 1051 and MA 2161 or equiva- first introduces geometrical optics; reflection and lent. refraction of rays at plane and spherical surfaces; mirrors, plane and spherical; lenses; thick lenses PH 2471 INTRODUCTION TO THE SONAR and lens aberration; matric methods for thick EQUATIONS (3-0). A discussion of each term of lenses and lens systems. The transfer function of the sonar equation with application to the detec- the optical system is then compared and contrasted tion, localization, and classification of underwater with the transfer function and state variable vehicles. This course is intended primarily for the methods of electrical systems analysis. PREREQ- students in the Antisubmarine Warfare curriculum. UISITES: A basic course in mechanics, and PREREQUISITES: Pre-calculus mathematics. mathematics through linear algebra and calculus. Students should be simultaneously registered for PH 2552 INTRODUCTION TO THE THERMAL differential equations. Students must present a AND DYNAMIC PROPERTIES OF GASES AND basic electrical engineering course such as EE LIQUIDS (3-0). Introductory thermodynamics in- 2107, EE2104 and EE 2105. cluding the First and Second Laws, properties of gases and liquids, basic fluid mechanics including equations of motion in both inertial and non- 2270 FUNDAMENTALS OF ELECTRO- PH inertial coordinate systems. This course is de- This course is designed to provide OPTICS (4-0). signed for the ASW curriculum. PREREQUI- specific background material needed for an under- SITES: Courses in vector calculus and differential This material is in the standing of electro-optics. equations (may be taken concurrently). general areas of advanced optics, atomic physics, solid state physics, and lasers. In more detail, the PH 2600 PHYSICS LABORATORY II (0-4). A areas are catadioptric systems, matrix optics, laboratory course emphasizing measurement, un- gaussian profile beams, Fourier optics, resolution, certainty and error in experiments on physical op- atmospheric transmission, atomic and molecular tics and atomic physics. Experiments will be cho- energy states, line shapes, electrons in solids, band sen to illustrate the fundamentals of wave interfer- photoconduction, p-n junction photocells, theory, ence, diffraction, fundamental constants of light emitting diodes, optical materials, stimulated physics, the wave-particle duality, and the quanti- emission, laser pumping, laser types, high energy zation of radiation. PREREQUISITES: PH 2200; lasers. PREREQUISITES: 3139, PH 2123. MA PH 2351; PH 2251 and PS 2350.

PH 2280 NUCLEAR WEAPONS AND FOREIGN PH 2641 ATOMIC PHYSICS (4-2). Third quarter POLICY (4-0). An interdisciplinary course which in the sequence of fundamental physics for stu- covers both the technology and political influences dents in Electrical Engineering and Electronics. of nuclear weapons systems. The course will em- Bohr model. Schroedinger equation, exact solution phasize the interaction of nuclear weapons systems for hydrogen atom, electron spin, periodic table, with the foreign policies of the major powers and atomic spectra, transition probabilities, Einstein political blocs from 1945-present. coefficients and stimulated emission, molecules and molecular spectra. PREREQUISITES: PH PH 2351-2352 ELECTROMAGNETISM III (4-1) 2241 andPH 2251. and (4-0). Properties of electric and magnetic fields and the development of Maxwell's Equa- PH 2810 SURVEY OF NUCLEAR PHYSICS tions (for static fields); electrostatic fields and po- (4-0). A course designed to introduce the student tential in free space and dielectrics, the magnetic to the ideas of nuclear physics, with emphasis on fields and potentials of steady currents in free neutron physics and reactors. Atomic nature of space and permeable materials, electromagnetic matter; wave-particle duality; the nuclear atom. induction, Maxwell's Equations, and Poynting's Basic nuclear properties; reactions; neutrons and Theorem. Faraday's law and the general Maxwell fission. Reactors. equations; properties of electromagnetic waves: wave equations; propagation of plane waves in free PH 2903 PHYSICS AND MODERN DEVICES space, dielectrics, conductors, and plasmas; reflec- (3-2). Development of the physical foundations of tion and refraction of plane waves; two-conductor some recent technological devices of interest to the

185 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY

Naval Officer. The topics will be selected accord- in which the atmosphere transmits will be treated, ing to the interests of the class and instructor and from ultraviolet to the far infrared. In more detail, could include items such as lasers, magnetometers, the material will include thermal blooming, adap- underwater detection, nuclear fission and fusion, tive optics, EO signatures, EO modulators and solid state electronics. PREREQUISITE: PH 1902 shutters, beam steerers, detectors, cooling, imag- or consent of the Instructor. ing detectors for low light level TV and FLIR, CCD's and CID's image storage and display. Upper Division or Graduate Courses PREREQUISITES: PH 2270, MR 2416.

PH 3152 MECHANICS (4-0). This course consists PH 3280 ELECTRO-OPTICS (4-2). Refracting of advanced topics in intermediate mechanics: the systems; atmospheric and underwater transmis- anharmonic oscillator and variational methods; sion, scattering, and scintillation; diffraction and collisions and scattering; rigid body dynamics; Fourier transform methods; coherent optics. coupled oscillators and classical pertubation Fourier plane filters, holography; fiber and film theory. PREREQUISITE: PH 2151. optics; electroptic detectors; infrared techniques; image intensifiers; lasers and applications; non- PH 3154 PHYSICS OF SPACE VEHICLE linear optics. DYNAMICS (3-0). Basic physical principles are applied to study the trajectories of satellites and PH 3281 NON-ACOUSTIC SENSOR SYSTEMS missiles: orbits in the inverse- square force field are (4-0). A course for the ASW curriculum. The pur- developed, including the role of initial (launch) pose is to expose the technology and engineering conditions, followed by rendezvous problems, of various systems important in antisubmarine transfer between orbits, synchronous satellites, warfare operations which involve non-acoustic perturbations to the earth. due oblateness of An sensing methods. Systems to be discussed include introduction to launch and re-entry problems is passive and active electronic warfare. Echo rang- given, including multistage rockets. Advanced ing, field distortion, image systems, communica- propulsion methods. PREREQUISITES: PH 2152 tions and telemetry, proposed systems. The sys- or equivalent mechanics course. tems approach implies a consideration of environ- mental effects. PREREQUISITES: EE 2721, PH 3157 (4-0). PH PHYSICS OF CONTINUA The 3360, EE 3714, SECRET clearance. continuum hypothesis. Cartesian tensors. The con- cept of stress. Deformation. Conservation of mass, PH 3360 ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVE PROP- momentum and energy. Theory of constitutive AGATION (4-1). This condensed one quarter in- equations. Applications to fluid mechanics, solid troduction to electromagnetic theory is designed to mechanics and wave phenomena. PREREQUI- serve specific needs in the engineering acoustics, SITE: PH 2151. weapon systems technology, and ASW curricula. After an analytical introduction to electromagnetic PH 3161 PHYSICS OF UNDERWATER VEHI- field theory, the course concentrates on properties CLES (4-1). Physical properties of liquids. Solu- of electromagnetic wave propagation and the tions to potential flow problems. Viscous flow; the phenomena of radio and radar transmission, in- laminar boundary, turbulence, and separation. cluding special topics on antennas and wave Cavitation. Special topics may include: hydrody- guides. PREREQUISITES: MA 2161, MA 3132, namic noise, resistance of surface ships, and drag and a course in general physics. reduction techniques. PREREQUISITES: Vector calculus (e.g., MA 2161), and mechanics (e.g., PH 1051). PH 3361 ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVE PROP- AGATION (4-0). The third course in the sequence PH 3271 ELECTRO-OPTIC PRINCIPLES AND (PH 2261, PH 2251, PH 3361) for the Weapon

DEVICES (4-0). This course is designed to pro- Systems Technology Curriculum. Propagation of vide the student with an understanding of the prin- electromagnetic waves and pulses, reflection, re- ciples of operation of the components that make up fraction, scattering. Impedance of media, absorb-

electro-optic systems. The general areas to be in- ing media, impedance matching. Coatings and fil-

cluded are atmospheric transmission, nonlinear op- ters. Transmission lines, waveguides. PREREQ-

tics, detectors and displays. All wavelength ranges UISITES: PH 2261, PH 2251.

186 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY

PH 3431 PHYSICS OF SOUND IN THE OCEAN PH 3458 NOISE, SHOCK AND VIBRATION (4-2). A survey of physical acoustics with empha- CONTROL (4-0). The application of the principles

sis on the generation, propagation, and detection of acoustics and mechanics to the problems of con- of sound in the ocean, primarily for students in the trolling noise, vibration and mechanical shock.

Environmental Science and Operations Analysis Topics include: Linear mechanical vibrations, in- Curricula. Topics include: damped and forced troduction to vibrations of non-linear systems; harmonic oscillations; the acoustic wave equation damping mechanisms; vibration and shock isola- and its limitation in fluids; solutions for plane and tion; noise generation and control; effects of noise diverging waves; ray acoustics; radiation of sound; on man; application to problems of Naval interest reflection from boundaries; normal mode propaga- such as ship quieting and industrial noise control. tion in the ocean; effects of inhomogeneities and PREREQUISITE: A course in acoustics. sound absorption; term by term analysis of the SONAR equations emphasizing transmission loss PH 3461 EXPLOSIVE SHOCK WAVES (4-0). models and detection threshold models; properties Generation and propagation of explosive shock of transducers for underwater sound. Laboratory waves in air and water including Rankine- experiments include surface interference, spectral Hugoniot equations, scaling laws, reflection and analysis of noise, normal modes, waveguides, and refraction phenomena, and experimental data. acoustical sources. PREREQUISITES: A course in Damage mechanism and principles of protection general physics and a course in differential equa- against damage. PREREQUISITES: PH 2551 or tions and complex exponential notation. CH 2401, and PH 2151 or PH 3451.

PH 3432 ELEMENTS OF PHYSICS OF SOUND PH 3463 SPECIAL TOPICS IN UNDERWATER IN THE OCEAN (3-0). This course is a shortened ACOUSTICS AND SOUND (3-2). Special topics version of PH 3431 for students of the Curriculum of interest in the areas of underwater sound, trans- 373. PREREQUISITES: A course in general duction, propagation and detection, depending on physics and a course in differential equations and the interests and needs of the students. PREREQ- complex exponential notation. UISITE: A course in acoustics, i.e.: PH 3431, 3451, or 3452. PH 3451 FUNDAMENTAL ACOUSTICS (4-1).

Mechanics of free, forced, and damped simple vi- PH 3472 UNDERWATER ACOUSTICS (4-2). In bratory systems. Mechanical impedance. Devel- this course, the second of a three-course sequence opment of, and solutions to the acoustic wave for students in the ASW curriculum, an analytical equations in extended media. Propagation of plane study is made of the underwater acoustics that af- waves in fluids and between media. Acoustical be- fect the sonar equation. Topics include: the wave havior of sources and arrays. Radiation impe- equation and ray acoustics; acoustic properties of dance. Introduction to transducers. Laboratory ex- fluids; plane, spherical, and cylindrical waves; be- periments on selected topics. PREREQUISITES: havior of sources and arrays; reflection and trans- A course in mechanics (e.g., PH 1051); Different- mission at boundaries; image theory; propagation ial Equations (e.g., MA 2121). in wave guides; and normal mode propagation in

the ocean. This course is taught in coordination PH 3452 UNDERWATER ACOUSTICS (4-2). with OC 3265. PREREQUISITES: PH 3471 and Lumped acoustic elements and propagation in concurrent enrollment in OC 3265. pipes. Steady state response of acoustic waveguides. Group and phase speeds. Normal PH 3551 THERMODYNAMICS (4-1). Funda- modes. Sound absorption and dispersion for clas- mental theory of thermodynamics and applications sical and relaxing fluids. Transmission of sound in to physical systems. First and second laws of the ocean; the eikonal equation and necessary con- thermodynamics; entropy; thermodynamic poten- ditions for ray acoustics, method of images, refrac- tial; applications to gases, liquids, radiation, and tion and ray diagrams, mode propagation in shal- magnetic materials; equilibrium. PREREQUI- low water and refraction channels. Ambient noise SITES: PH 1051 and calculus of several variables. and reverberation. Target strength. The sonar equations for active and passive systems. Labora- PH 3561 INTRODUCTORY STATISTICAL tory experiments on selected concepts. PREREQ- PHYSICS (4-0). Distribution functions, kinetic UISITE: PH 3451. theory, transport processes, introduction to classi-

187 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY cal and quantum distributions. Applications to METALS AND SEMICONDUCTORS (4-2). gases, solids, and radiation. PREREQUISITES: Fourth course in the sequence of fundamental PH 2152, PH 2551, or CH 2401, PH 3651. physics for students in Electrical Engineering and Electronics. (PH 1041, PH 2241, PH 2641) Crys- PH 3600 PHYSICS LABORATORY (0-4). A- lab- tals and lattice properties, X-ray diffraction, free- oratory course emphasizing the measurement and elective mass, holes, intrinsic and impurity data handling techniques of modern physics as semiconductors, diodes, transistors, thermoelec- applied to experiments in the area of atomic tric effects, minority carriers, modern devices. physics. Subjects to be investigated experi- PREREQUISITES: PH 2641 or PH 3651. mentally include: atomic spectroscopy, inter- ferometry, mass spectra, ionization potentials, the PH 3900 ADVANCED PHYSICS LABORA- Zeeman effect, electron diffraction, gas laser and TORY (0-3). This laboratory course provides entry plasma phenomena. The techniques of data into specialty areas of experimental physics. Ex- analysis developed in PH 2200 and PH 2600 will periments will be conducted as projects assigned be applied to the experimental data. A laboratory on an individual basis in such areas as modern text is required. PREREQUISITES: PH 2600, PH optics, electro-optics, electron resonance, plasma 3651 to be taken concurrently. physics, nuclear physics and properties of solids. Modern experimental techniques will be stressed. PREREQUISITES: PH 3600 and PH 3652. PH 3651 ATOMPIC PHYSICS (4-2). Wave me- chanics: free states; barrier penetration; square PH 3951 QUANTUM MECHANICS (4-0). Appli- well; hydrogen atom, energy levels and angular cations of quantum mechanics to phenomena in momentum. Historical material on atomic struc- atomic, molecular, and solid-state physics, angu- ture and spectra. Electron spin. Exclusion princi- lar momentum. Spin states of hydrogen Spin-orbit ples and periodic table. Vector model, sodium coupling and Zeeman effect. Variation methods atom, spectra of selected atoms. Zeeman effect. and perturbation theory. Electronic structure of

X-rays. Transitions, Einstein coefficients, lasers. atoms and molecules. Molecular and chemical la- PREREQUISITES: PH 2251 and MA 2161 or sers. Molecular vibrations and rotations. Raman equivalent. effect. Group theory. PREREQUISITES: PH 3652. PH 3652 ELEMENTS OF MOLECULAR AND SOLID STATE PHYSICS (4-0). Bonds between PH 3998 SPECIAL TOPICS IN INTERMEDIATE atoms, crystals, conduction in solids, band theory, PHYSICS ( 1-0 to 4-0). Study in one of the fields of semiconductors, p-n junctions devices; quantum intermediate physics and related applied areas mechanics in the Schroedinger and Dirac ap- selected to meet the needs of the student. The proaches applied to various problems in solid-state course carries a letter grade and may be repeated in and molecular physics. PREREQUISITES: PH different topics. PREREQUISITE: Consent of the 3651. Department Chairman.

PH3687 PHYSICS OF ELECTRON INTERAC- PH 3999 READING IN INTERMEDIATE TION IN GASES (3-0). This course stresses the PHYSICS (1-0 to 4-0). Supervised reading in one basic electronic processes in gases, fundamental to of the fields of intermediate physics selected by the physics and chemistry of the upper atmosphere students to meet special interests. The course car- and to the operation of electron devices including ries a pass-fail grade. PREREQUISITE: Consent the gas laser. Topics covered include elastic colli- of the Instructor. sions, free and ambipolar diffusion, mobility, ex 7 citation and ionization, charge transfer emission Graduate Courses from surfaces, recombination high frequency d c and laser breakdown, sheaths, the glow and arch PH 4162 FLUID MECHANICS (3-0). An ad- discharges, radiation, application to the gas laser. vanced study of the physical bases of fluid me- PREREQUISITES: PH 2641 or PH 3651 or con- chanics: Fundamental concepts of continuum me- sent of the Instructor. chanics. Fluid mechanical models. Theory of hy- drodynamic stability. Lighthill's theory of aero- PH 3741 ELECTRONIC PROPERTIES OF dynamically produced sound. Effects of compres-

188 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY

sibility. PREREQUISITE: A course in hydrody- tinuous medium. PREREQUISITES: PH 2352, namics (e.g., PH 3161). MA 3132 or similar.

PH 4171 ADVANCED MECHANICS (4-0). PH 4371 CLASSICAL ELECTRODYNAMICS Hamilton's Principle. The equations of motion in (3-0). Tensors in special relativity. Classical re- Lagrangian and Hamiltonian form. The inertia ten- lativistic electromagnetic field theory. Lorentz sor and rigid bodies. Canonical transformations electron theory. PREREQUISITES: PH 4353 and and Poisson brackets. Small oscillations. Addi- familiarity with the special theory of relativity and tional topics as time allows; Hamilton-Jacobi Lagrangian mechanics. theory, perturbation theory. PREREQUISITES: PH 2152, PH 2352. PH 4400 ADVANCED ACOUSTICS LABORA- TORY (0-6). Advanced laboratory projects in PH 4281 ELECTRO-OPTIC DEVICES (4-0). In- acoustics. PREREQUISITE: PH 3452 or equiva- frared, visible and ultraviolet detectors and their lent. limitations; electron optical devices; scanning de- vices; image displays and storage techniques; star- PH 4453 RADIATION AND SCATTERING OF light viewing devices; viewing devices for self- WAVES IN FLUIDS (4-0). An advanced treatment luminous infrared sources; optical tracking; lasers of special topics related to sound propagation in and applications; coherent optical information pro- the ocean, including: multipole radiation fields, cessing and holography; nonlinear optical devices; incoherence and coherence; applications of the optical heterodyning; acoustic-optic devices; fiber Helmholtz integral, probability density functions, and film optical devices; optical signal processing correlations and frequency spectra of sound scat- and switching. PREREQUISITES: PH 3280 and a tered from rough boundaries. PREREQUISITE: corequisite course in solid state physics. PH 3452 or consent of Instructor.

PH 4283 LASER PHYSICS (4-0). The physics of PH 4454 TRANSDUCER THEORY AND DE- lasers and laser radiation. Topics will include: SIGN (3-2). A treatment of the fundamental quantum and semi-classical oscillator model, gain; phenomena basic to the design of transducers for Gaussian beams, stable and unstable resonators; underwater sound and specific examples of their rate equations, output coupling, mode locking, application. Topics include piezoelectric, mag- short pulsing; specifics of solid state, and gas laser netostrictive and hydromechanical effects. Labora- systems; semiconductor lasers; high energy lasers; tory experiments on measurement techniques, amplifiers and laser systems for fusion research; properties of transducer materials and characteris- laser-surface interaction air breakdown, LSC and tic of typical transducer types. PREREQUISITE: LSD waves. PREREQUISITES: PH 3652 or PH 3452. equivalent; or consent of Instructor. PH 4456 SEMINAR IN APPLICATIONS OF

PH 4353 ELECTROMAGNETISM III (4-0). Clas- UNDERWATER SOUND (3-0). A study of cur- sical radiation theory: retarded potentials, rent literature on applications of acoustics to prob- Lienard-Wiechert potentials, fields of a fast elec- lems of Naval Interest. PREREQUISITE: PH 4453 tron, angular distribution and frequency spectrum or consent of Instructor. of radiation from an accelerated point charge. Cherenkov radiation, Hertz potentials and dipole PH 4459 SHOCK WAVES AND HIGH- radiation, and radiation from linear antennas. INTENSITY SOUND (3-0). A study of the PREREQUISITES: PH 2352. physics of shock wave phenomena with emphasis on acoustics, such as sonic booms and underwater PH 4363 THEORY AND APPLICATIONS OF explosions; the development of the nonlinear WAVES IN RANDOM MEDIA (4-0). In this last acoustic wave equation and its application to in- of the three course sequence in Electromagnetism tense sound propagation, such as the parametric (PH 2351, PH 2352, PH 4363) the topics of study generation and detection of sound; and selected are: scattering and absorption of waves by single topics in large amplitude sound of mutual interest particles, multiple scattering and radiation trans- to the students and the instructor. port through medium of random scatterers, propa- gation and scattering of waves in a turbulent con- PH 4473 ADVANCED TOPICS IN UNDERWA-

189 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY

TER ACOUSTICS (4-0). The last in a sequence of mental to various branches of plasma physics are courses in acoustics designed for students in the introduced. Topics covered include single particle ASW curriculum (PH 2471, PH 3472, PH 4473). motions in electromagnetic fields, orbit theory, Topics to be studied, selected on the basis of inter- collision phenomena, breakdown in gases, and dif- ests of the students and the instructor, may include: fusion. The magnetohydrodynamic and the two- transducers for underwater sound, including fluid plasma models are considered. PREREQUI- parametric arrays; physics of realistic transmission SITES: PH 2352, PH 3561, PH 3651, or the loss models, including fluctuations in the prop- equivalent. erties of the medium and boundaries and their ef- fects on reverberation, transmission loss, array PH 4662 PLASMA PHYSICS II (3-0). A continua- gain and signal detectability; reflection from tion of Plasma Physics I. Applications of the hy- visco-elastic boundaries and realistic sea-floor dromagnetic equations to the study of macroscopic models; noise and vibration control aboard ship; motions of plasma. Equilibrium and stability. sound absorption processes. PREREQUISITE: PH Classification of plasma instabilities. Kinetic 3472 or consent of instructor. theory, the Boltzmann equation and the macro- scopic momentum transport equation. Plasma os- PH 4571-4572 STATISTICAL PHYSICS III cillations and Landau damping. Nonlinear effects, (3-0). Kinetic theory and the Boltzmann theorem, shock waves, Radiations from plasma, including configuration and phase space, the Liouville bremsstrahlung and cyclotron radiation. Con- theorem, ensemble theory, microcanonical, canon- trolled fusion and laser produced plasmas. PRE- ical and grand canonical ensembles, quantum REQUISITES: PH 4353, PH 4661 or equivalent. statistics. Applications to molecules, Bose- Einstein gases, Fermi-Dirac liquids, and irreversi- PH 4681 ADVANCED PLASMA PHYSICS (3-0). ble processes. PREREQUISITES: PH 2152, 3651, Selected topics in plasma physics, such as laser- 2551. target interaction, dynamics of a laser-produced plasma, self-generated magnetic fields, light scat- PH 4630 SPACE PHYSICS I-PHYSICS OF THE tering and absorption in plasma, turbulence and UPPER ATMOSPHERE (4-0). Structure of the fluctuations, collisionless shock waves. PRE- upper atmosphere. Atmospheric absorption in the REQUISITES: PH 4662 or consent of the Instruc- infrared, visible and ultraviolet. The ionosphere. tor. Geomagnetic field and the radiation belts. Distur- bances of the upper atmosphere. Magnetic field, PH 4685 ADVANCED ATOMIC PHYSICS (3-0). the magnetopause and solar wind. Experimental Selected topics in atomic spectroscopy and atomic instrumentation in space research. PREREQUI- collisions. Classical and quantum description of SITES: PH 2352 and PH 3652 or consent of the the collision process, transition probabilities and Instructor. line broadening mechanisms. PREREQUISITES: PH 3651 and consent of the Instructor. PH 4631 SPACE PHYSICS II-INTRODUCTION TO ASTROPHYSICS (4-0). Introduction to PH 4750 RADIATION EFFECTS IN SOLIDS theories of stellar interior, energy transport in (4-2). Energy loss of radiations in matters, radia- stars, and stellar evolution. PREREQUISITES: tion dosimetry, energy transfer of radiation to mat- Consent of Instructor. ter, theory and spectra of radiation from nuclear weapons, fireball development, electromagnetic PH 4661 PLASMA PHYSICS I (4-0). This course pulse phenomena, displacements of atoms in sol- constitutes a broad study of the behavior and prop- ids, radiation damage to solid-state devices. PRE- erties of gaseous plasma, the fourth — and most REQUISITE: PH 3652. abundent — state of matter in the universe. Plasma1 physics is a vigorously developing branch of con- temporary physics. Its many applications are in PH 4760 SOLID STATE PHYSICS (4-2). Funda- areas such as astro- and space-physics, atomic mental theory and related laboratory experiments physics, magnetohydrodynamic power generation, dealing with solids: crystals, binding energy, lat- electron beam excited laser, laser isotope enrich- tice vibration, dislocations and mechanical prop- ment, ionospheric communication, and ther- erties, free electron theory, band theory, properties monuclear fusion. The physical concepts funda- of semiconductors and insulators, magnetism.

190 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY

PREREQUISITES: PH 3651 and PH 3561 (the lat- PH 4981-4982 QUANTUM FIELD THEORY III ter may be taken concurrently). (3-0). General principles of quantum field theory; quantization of scalar, spinor, and electromagnetic PH 4790 THEORY OF QUANTUM DEVICES fields. Interacting fields; the S-matrix and renor-

(3-0). Theory of the operation of electronic devices malization; strong, electromagnetic, and weak in- depending on energy states and the quantum nature teractions; introduction to dispersion relations. of radiation; topics in quantum mechanics, spin PREREQUISITE: PH 4973. resonance, rotating coordinates, relaxation times, amplifiers, magnetic instruments. PREREQUI- PH 4991 RELATIVITY AND COSMOLOGY SITE: PH 2641 orPH 3651. (3-0). Einstein's general theory of relativity. The three classical tests. The Schwarzschild singularity PH 4851 NUCLEAR PHYSICS I (4-0). Nuclear and black holes. Cosmological models and their decay schemes and energetics; nuclear forces; the relations with observations. Introduction to mod- deuteron and low energy nucleon-nucleon scatter- ern developments: gravitational waves, Dicke's ing; partial wave and analysis of scattering; theory, problems of quantum cosmology and neutron-induced reactions and the Breit-Wigner superspace. PREREQUISITE: PH 4371. formula; beta and gamma Decay; and Q-value in reactions. PREREQUISITES: PH 3652, PH 3951 PH 4993 PHYSICAL GROUP THEORY (3-0). and PH 2352. Invariance of quantum mechanical systems to cer- tain groups of transformations. Topics are selected PH 4881-4882 ADVANCED NUCLEAR from finite rotation groups and crystal symmetries, PHYSICS I-II (3-0). Relativistic mechanics, scat- the continuous rotation group in three dimensions, tering of electronics from nuclei, nuclear models, transformation groups associated with elementary nuclear potentials. Relativistic treatment of the particle symmetries. PREREQUISITE: PH 4972. electron using the Dirac equation and application to electron scattering to develop the Mott cross- PH 4998 SPECIAL TOPICS IN ADVANCED section; treatment of form-factors arising from PHYSICS (1-0 to 4-0). Study in one of the fields of electron-nucleon and election-nucleus scattering; advanced physics selected to meet special needs of application of electron scattering to study the struc- the students. PREREQUISITE: Consent of the De- ture of nucleon matter and the study of nucleon partment Chairman. models. PREREQUISITE: PH 4851. PH 4999 ADVANCED SEMINAR (1-0 to 3-0). A PH 4885 REACTOR THEORY (3-0). The diffu- seminar or supervised reading in recent devel- sion and slowing down of neutrons. Homogeneous opments in basic and applied physics and related thermal reactors; time behavior; reactor control. areas. May be conducted by faculty members with Multigroup theory. Heterogeneous system. PRE- student participation. PREREQUISITES: Student REQUISITES: PH 4851 or equivalent. should have graduate standing and the consent of the instructor. Graded on Pass/Fail basis only. PH 4900 INTRODUCTION TO EXPERI- MENTAL RESEARCH (0-3). This course is a con- CHEMISTRY tinuation of PH 3900. Attention is normally con- centrated upon instrumentation, techniques and Lower Division Courses analysis appropriate to the student's thesis. PRE- REQUISITE: PH 3900. CH 1001-1002 INTRODUCTORY GENERAL CHEMISTRY I-II (4-2) and (3-2). A two-quarter PH 4971-4972-4973 QUANTUM MECHANICS sequence for students who have not had college I-II-III (3-0). General principles of nonrelativistic chemistry. A study of the principles which govern quantum mechanics; stationary states. Addition of the physical and chemical behavior of matter. angular momenta; time-independent and time- Practical applications of chemical principles. dependent perturbation theory; scattering theory; identical particles and spin. General principles of Upper Division Courses relativistic quantum mechanics; properties and so- lutions of relativistic wave equations. PREREQ- CH 2001 GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF CHEMIS- UISITES: PH 3651,4171. TRY (3-2). A study of the fundamental principles

191 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY

of chemistry governing the physical and chemical kinetics, electrochemical cells, kinetic theory of behavior of matter. Current theories of atomic gases and introductory atomic and molecular struc- structure and chemical bonding are particularly ture. emphasized. Also studied are the states of matter and chemical equilibria. Special attention is given CH 2910 INTERACTION OF NAVAL OPERA- to the compounds of carbon. Elementary physical TIONS AND ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION chemistry experiments are performed in the labora- (4-0). An interdisciplinary course which examines tory. PREREQUISITE: College Chemistry. the impact of environmental pollution on Naval operations by examining current technical status, CH 2010 INORGANIC ANALYSIS (3-3). A con- future plans for abatment, and the resultant limita- tinuation of CH 2001. Computations involving tions placed on Naval facilities, especially ships. acid-base, solubility, and complex ion equilibria. The course will consider air, water, nuclear, and Principles of quantitative analysis. Descriptive in- noise pollution or the potential for pollution as ap- organic chemistry. Laboratory work will consist of propriate. PREREQUISITES: Math through col- gravimetric and volumetric analysis. PREREQUI- lege algebra. Two quarters of physical science or

SITE: CH 2001 or CH 1002. biology within the last two years is desirable.

CH 2102 INORGANIC CHEMISTRY (3-3). Upper Division or Graduate Courses Redox reactions and the electrode potential. Intro- duction to reaction mechanism. Bonding in inor- CH 3101 ADVANCED INORGANIC CHEMIS- ganic species. Acids and bases. Laboratory will TRY (3-3). Coordination compounds and crystal make use of qualitative, semi-quantitative, and in- field theory. Inorganic reaction mechanisms. The strumental methods to study the principles further, laboratory introduces the student to general especially as applied to the solution chemistry of methods for investigating chemical reaction. the metals. PREREQUISITES: CH 2101 and CH PREREQUISITES: CH 2101, CH 2403. 2402. CH 3301 PHYSICAL ORGANIC CHEMISTRY CH 2201 CHEMICAL INSTRUMENTS (3-3). A (3-0). First quarter of a two-quarter sequence. In course designed to familiarize the student with this term the tools available for the study of or- modern instrumental techniques of chemical ganic mechanisms are discussed and appropriate analysis. Emphasis is given to the theoretical basis examples used. PREREQUISITES: CH 2302, CH of the various kinds of measurements made in the 3101. laboratory and the principles involved in the design and construction of analytical instruments. Labora- tory experiments will deal with representative ana- CH 3402 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY IN lytical problems. PREREQUISITES: CH 2101 and ORDNANCE SYSTEMS (4-2). A course in topics CH 2403. of special interest to students in Ordnance En- gineering. Thermochemistry, chemical equilib- CH 2301-2302 ORGANIC CHEMISTRY III (4-3) rium, chemical kinetics, electrochemistry. Appli- and (3-). The chemistry of organic compounds. cations will include problems in explosives and Emphasis in the laboratory on synthetic tech- propellants, corrosion, fuel cells, remote sensors, niques. and environmental effects. The laboratory will amplify the lecture material especially through the CH 2401 CHEMICAL THERMODYNAMICS use and study of chemical instruments. PREREQ- (4-1). The laws of thermodynamics and their ap- UISITES: PH 2551; a previous course in chemis- plications to chemical systems. Use is made of the try. chemical potential in describing multicomponent systems and the conditions for thermodynamic CH 3403 CHEMICAL THERMODYNAMICS equilibrium. PREREQUISITE: Differential Equa- (3-0). Application of thermodynamics to ideal and to real gases, non-electrolyets, electrolytic solu- tions, multicomponent solutions. Calculations of CH 2402-2403 PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY I-II equilibria, estimation of thermodynamic quantities (4-2) and (4-3). A continuation of the subject mat- and brief discussion of calculations of ther- ter of CH 2401 covering chemical equilibrium and modynamic properties from spectroscopic and

192 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY other molecular data. PREREQUISITES: Physical Mechanisms of reactions. PREREQUISITES: CH chemistry, elementary thermodynamics. 2403 and consent of Instructor.

CH 3405 MOLECULAR DYNAMICS (5-0). Di- CH 4505 RADIATION CHEMISTRY (3-0). A rect application of the Schroedinger wave equation study of the theory behind the chemical processes to the hydrogen atom, angular momentum, matrix occurring when ionizing and electromagnetic radi- formulation of quantum mechanics, electron spin, ation interact with matter. Includes electronic the Pauli principle, interaction with electromagne- states of molecules, introduction to photochemis- tic radiation, development of group theory and ap- try, properties of gaseous ions and free radicals, plication in quantum mechanics, and application of chain reactions. PREREQUISITE: CH 2403 or the preceding framework to molecular hydridization, equivalent. molecular orbital theory, ligand field theory, and vibrational spectra. PREREQUISITES: CH 2403, CH 4800 SPECIAL TOPICS (2-0 to 4-0). Pursuit Matrix algebra. of deeper understanding of some topic chosen by the student and the instructor; may involve directed CH 3415 STATISTICAL MECHANICS (4-0). A reading and conference or a lecture pattern. May general treatment of the principles of quantum and be repeated for credit with a different topic. PRE- classical statistical mechanics with applications to REQUISITE: Consent of the Department Chair- chemical systems. Included are distribution laws and the relationships of Fermi-Dirac, Bose- Einstein, and corrected Boltzmann statistics, OTHER COURSES statistical entropy and thermodynamic functions for corrected Boltzmann statistics; applications to SE 2001 through SE 4006 are a series of chemical equilibria, diatomic and polyatomic courses specifically designed for students in molecules including ortho and para hydrogen; ca- the Naval Intelligence Curriculum (825). nonical and grand canonical ensembles; real gases. PREREQUISITES: CH 2403. Upper Division Courses

CH 3761 EXPLOSIVES TECHNOLOGY (4-0). SE 2001 ENVIRONMENT, WAVE PROPAGA-

Characteristics and terminology applied to explo- TION AND OCEAN SYSTEMS (4-0). This is the sives and propellants, manufacture and fabrication first course of a five course sequence designed for of explosives and explosive devices, detonics, the Naval Intelligence Curriculum to introduce the thermochemical, and chemical kinetics of detona- concepts of military technology. In this course, tions. PREREQUISITES: PH 2551, CH 2402, and basic concepts of environmental science are re- MS 2201 or equivalent. viewed and related to environmental data net- works, environmental effects upon the propagation Graduate Courses of acoustic and electromagnetic waves are studied, fundamentals of acoustic surveillance systems are

CH 4302 PHYSICAL ORGANIC CHEMISTRY II developed, and current capabilities are discussed. (3-0). The techniques discussed in CH 3301 are used in the study of organic reaction mechanisms SE 2002-2003 CONCEPTS OF SCIENCE AND as currently understood. PREREQUISITE: CH ENGINEERING III (4-0). A two course sequence 3301. designed to prepare an advanced student with a non-quantitative and non-technical background for CH 4406 QUANTUM CHEMISTRY (3-0). A the study of advanced technology systems. Topics study of molecular spectra and molecular elec- include: linear systems modeling and characteris- tronic structure, emphasizing theory, interpreta- tics, spectral analysis, wave properties and wave tion, and prediction of spectra utilizing the quan- phenomena, and computer systems; photography tum mechanical formulation. PREREQUISITE: and photogrammetry, communication systems, CH 3405. signal processing, and control systems. PRE- REQUISITE: Mathematics including an introduc- CH 4410 CHEMICAL KINETICS (3-0). Experi- tion to differential and integral calculus. mental methods and interpretation of data. Colli- sion theory and activated-complex theory. SE 2279 DIRECTED STUDIES IN SCIENCE

193 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY

AND ENGINEERING (Credit open). Independent SE 3279 DIRECTED STUDIES IN SCIENCE study in science and engineering topics in which AND ENGINEERING (Credit open). (See SE formal course work is not offered. PREREQUI- 2279). SITE: Permission of Department Chairman. (Graduate student register for SE 3279). Graduate Course

Upper Division or Graduate Courses SE 4006 SPECIAL TOPICS IN TECHNOLOGY ASSESSMENT (4-0). Methods by which the SE 3004-3005 SURVEY OF MILITARY technological capabilities of a nation, either cur- TECHNOLOGY: CONCEPTS AND APPLICA- rent of future, will be assessed. Problems in source TIONS I-II (4-0). A two course sequence designed evaluation, cross-impact analysis, and trend ex- to familiarize the student with the conceptual basis trapolation. Delphi studies and their role. As a part of military applications of technology. The first of this seminar, the student will make a detailed course treats communications systems, radar sys- study and report on the methodology and results of tems, electronic surveillance systems and electro- a current technology assessment study. Content optics systems. The second treats strategic sys- will vary, depending upon availability of material tems, satellite systems, missile systems, selected and the current interests of the professor and stu- topics in aeornautical and naval engineering, and dents. PREREQUISITES: SE 3004, SE 3005, and acoustic surveillance systems. PREREQUISITES: SECRET clearance (NORFORN). SE 2003, or equivalent, and SECRET clearance (NOFORN).

194 ,

DEFENSE RESOURCES MANAGEMENT EDUCATION CENTER

DEFENSE RESOURCES MANAGEMENT EDUCATION CENTER

ISHAM WISEMAN UNDER, Rear Ad- sociate Professor (1970); B.A., Univ. miral, U.S. Navy, Director; B.S., of Minnesota, 1956; M.A., 1962; U.S. Naval Academy, 1946; Ph.D., Stanford Univ., 1968. M.S.E.E., Naval Postgraduate JOHN PAUL BRENNAN, Lieutenant School, 1956; Ph.D., Univ. of Commander, U.S. Navy; Assistant California at Berkeley, 1961. Professor (1974); B.S. Univ. of JOHN EDWARD DAWSON, Professor; California at Berkeley, 1961; M.B.A., Executive Director (1966); B.A., The California Lutheran College, 1974. Principia College, 1953; M.P.A., WILLIAM AYERS CAMPBELL, As- Syracuse Univ., 1954; D.P.A., 1971. sociate Professor (1970); B.S., Tus- SHERMAN WESLEY BLANDIN, JR., kegee Institute College, 1937; Associate Professor; Assistant Direc- M.S.I.M., Univ. of Pittsburgh tor, Academic Programs (1968); B.S., Graduate School, 1949. Naval Academy, 1944; B.S., Georgia FRANK ELMER CHILDS, Professor Institute of Technology, 1952; M.S., (1965); B.A. Williamette Univ., 1934; 1953; M.B.A., Univ. of Santa Clara, M.B.A., Univ. of Southern Califor- 1973. nia, 1936; Ph.D., Univ. of Minnesota, WILLIAM ALAN MAUER, Professor, 1956. Assistant Director for Faculty Devel- JOHN MORSE COOK, Commander, opment and Research (1966); A.B., U.S. Navy; Assistant Professor San Jose State College, 1955; M.S., (1973); B.A., Princeton Univ., 1959; Agricultural and Mechanical College M.S., Naval Postgraduate School, of Texas, 1957; Ph.D., Duke Univ., 1968. 1960. EDWIN JOHN DORAN, Adjunct Pro- ALEXANDER WOLFGANG RILLING, fessor (1975); B.A., Univ. of Associate Professor; Assistant Direc- Pennsylvania, 1955; M.S., Naval tor, International Activities (1974); Postgraduate School, 1968; M.B.E., B.S., Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute, Univ. of Santa Clara, 1972. 1951; M.S., Naval Postgraduate WILLIAM FREDERICK DUNBAR, School, 1962; Ph.D., Univ. of South- Major, U.S. Air Force Instructor ern California, 1972. (1975); B.B.A., Univ. of Wisconsin, IVON WILLIAM ULREY, Professor, 1961; M.A., Southern Methodist Assistant Director for Publications and Univ., 1973. Consultations (1966); B.S., Ohio State CHARLES JOSEPH FORSMAN, Com- Univ., 1931; M.B.A., York New mander, U.S. Navy; Instructor (1976);

Univ. , , 1937; Ph.D. Ohio State Univ. B.S. Naval Academy, 1958; M.S., 1953. George Washington Univ., 1967; ROBERT MOFFAT ALLAN, JR., Pro- M.S., Naval Postgraduate School, fessor (1971); B.A., Stanford Univ., 1973. 1941; M.S., Univ. of Californiat at PETER CARL FREDERIKSEN, Assis- Los Angeles, 1942. tant Professor (1974); B.A., Golden JAMES SHERMAN BLANDIN, Assis- Gate College, 1967; M.A., San Fran- tant Professor (1974); B.A., Univ. of cisco State College, 1969; Ph.D., California at Santa Barbara, 1968; Washington State Univ., 1974. M.B.A., Univ. of Oregon, 1972; JOHN WILBUR GILROY, JR., Com- Ph.D., 1974. mander, U.S. Navy; Instructor (1976); ROBERT EDWARD BOYNTON, As- B.A., Naval Postgraduate School,

195 ,

DEFENSE RESOURCES MANAGEMENT EDUCATION CENTER

1972; M.S., 1974. agement systems, with specific emphasis on effective resource CLYDE JOSEPH JOHNSTON, Lieuten- management. The Center currently offers ant Colonel, U.S. Marine Corps, In- a four- week U.S. Defense structor (1976); B.S., Univ. of Col- Management Systems Course eight orado, 1959; M.B.A., Harvard Univ., times each year, a one-week 1970. Flag/General Defense Management Course twice each year, a thirteen-week LOUIS HENRY KNIPLING, JR., Col- International Defense Management onel, U.S. Army; Assistant Professor Course twice each year, a four-week (1976); B.S., Carnegie Tech, 1948; Senior International Defense Manage- M.S. Ohio State Univ., 1956; Ph.D., ment Course one time each year (similar 1973. to the 13- week international course but KATHRYN McKINSTRY KOCHER, contracted). In addition to the DoD pro- Adjunct Professor (1975); B. A., Univ. grams, the Center is currently involved in of California at Berkeley, 1965; M. A. presenting management programs on-site 1966. to the service components and selected governments. NORMAN PLOTKIN, Assistant Profes- Since 1966, the Center has graduated sor (1969); B.S., Univ. of California over 10,000 students. at Los Angeles, 1948; B.F.S., Faculty members of the Center are a Georgetown Univ., 1950; M.S., part of the regular faculty of the Post- Claremont Graduate School, 1966; graduate School. Ph.D., 1969. JOSEPH EDWARD PLUTA, Associate Professor (1974); B.A., Univ. of DEFENSE MANAGEMENT Notre Dame, 1967; M.A., 1968; SYSTEMS COURSE Ph.D., Univ. of Texas, 1972. The Planning-Programming-Budgeting ROBERT von PAGENHARDT, Profes- System as developed since 1961 the sor (1967); A.B., Stanford Univ., by Office of the Secretary of Defense has 1948; M.S., 1954; Ph.D., 1970. provided a framework for examining var- ious force mixes, allocation of resources, *The year of joining the Postgraduate School and relationships to military capabilities. Faculty is indicated in parentheses. The objective of the Defense Manage- ment Course is to provide an appreciation DEFENSE RESOURCES MANAGEMENT of the concepts, principles, and methods EDUCATION CENTER of defense management as they concern planning, programming, budgeting, and The Navy Management Systems Cen- related activities. The course covers force ter, a jointly staffed DoD sponsored activ- planning, Department of Defense pro- ity, was established as a separate Naval gramming, program budgeting, and their

Activity in February 1966. As of 1 July interrelationships with resource manage- 1974 the name was changed to Defense ment systems. Emphasis is placed on the Resources Management Education Cen- analytical aspects of management, includ- ter. It conducts both resident and on-site ing requirement studies, systems analysis defense resource management courses for cost/effectiveness, cost estimating and U.S. and international military personnel analysis. of all services in grades 0-4 and above Students are not expected to become and military-related civilians of equal experts or technicians in the curriculum. grades. The focus of all programs con- The objectives are to provide orientation ducted by the Center is on the develop- on the overall functioning of the defense ment of knowledge and improvement of management process, insights as to what understanding of the concepts, techniques defense management requires in the way and application of modern defense man- of inputs and analyses for decision-

196 DEFENSE RESOURCES MANAGEMENT EDUCATION CENTER making, understanding of the principles, for each lecture. Lecture outlines with methods and techniques used, and aware- additional suggested reading lists are pro- ness of the interfaces between manage- vided. Occasional guest speakers are in- ment and requirements of the Department vited for special topics. of Defense components and the Office of Early in the course, participants are re- the Secretary of Defense quested to give brief presentations (by country) on their particular environmental FLAG/GENERAL DEFENSE situations, including such information as MANAGEMENT COURSE geographic factors, economic factors, so- cial and cultural considerations, govern- The Flag/General officer course mental and defense organizations, and examines Defense Management problems unique management situations and/or of strategy implementation and operations problems. Throughout the course, the with a view towards developing knowl- participants are encouraged to present and edge and understanding of the concepts, discuss information with respect to the principles, processes, applications and defense management systems of their techniques of Defense Management Sys- countries, and to examine how the man- tems (i.e., planning, programming, agement concepts and techniques dis- budgeting and related activities). No spe- cussed by both the Center faculty and the cific attempt is made to further develop participants from other countries may be technical skills required in each of the applied in their own situations. Compara- planning, programming, and budgeting tive study by means of interaction among activities. participants is considered to be an ex- tremely valuable characteristic of the INTERNATIONAL DEFENSE course. MANAGEMENT COURSE During the course, the Center conducts field trips to selected military and com- The course is designed for participants mercial installations in the central in the military grades of 0-4 (Major/ California area. These trips provide an Lieutenant Commander) through 0-6 opportunity for the participants to receive (Colonel/Captain) and defense-related special briefings on management tech- civilians of equivalent rank. Enrollment is niques and problems, and to observe ac- currently limited to a maximum of 50 par- tual practices at the operating level. ticipants. Broad national representation is In the second half of the course the desired for this course, i.e., participa- general concepts of defense management tion by at least eight or ten nations en- are elaborated in detail during the exami- hances the value of the comparative man- nation of actual systems in financial, ma- agement aspects of the curriculum. terial and human resources management, The Course is presented in English. and management information systems. At The course provides a series of lectures the end of the course a general review in three major areas: Environmental Fac- integrates the formal course material, tors; Quantitative and Economic special topics, and field trip experiences. Analysis; and Management Systems in the context of Strategy, Implementation, SENIOR INTERNATIONAL DEFENSE and Operations. The lectures are supple- MANAGEMENT COURSE mented by small group discusssions and workshops which concentrate on the lec- Enrollment is restricted to military flag ture topics and associated readings, prob- and general officers (grades 0-7 and lems, and cases. In the discussion groups, above) and defense-related civilians of faculty members guide the interchange of equivalent rank, except that for countries ideas and are available to answer ques- where the 0-6 grade is comparable to tions. Readings are assigned from within flag/general rank such officials may be texts and supplemental material given to enrolled on a waiver basis. Participation the participants to facilitate preparation in past courses has been as high as 45

197 DEFENSE RESOURCES MANAGEMENT EDUCATION CENTER

individuals from as many as 18 countries; FY 78 Schedule RESIDENT COURSES a maximum of 50 participants can be ac- commodated. 78- 1R 17 Oct 77-11 Nov 77 DMSC 4- week 78-2R 4 Jan 78-27 Jan 78 DMSC 4- week The Course is presented in English. 78-3R 9 Jan 78-7Apr 78 IDMC 13-week The lecture, small discussion group, 78-4R 30 Jan 78-24 Feb 78 DMSC 4- week environmental seminar, case study and 78-5R 27 Feb-23 Mar 78 DMSC 4 -week problem format and content described 78-6R 13 Apr 78-20 Apr 78 F/G 1-week 78-7R 24 Apr 78-19 May 78 DMSC 4- week above for IDMC also applies, but com- 78-8R 5 Jun 78-30 Jun 78 SIDMC 4- week pressed in time. Two or three guest 78-9R 10 Jul 78-4 Aug 78 DMSC 4- week speakers are included and a field trip is 78-10R 7 Aug 78-1 Sep 78 DMSC 4- week conducted. 78-11R 7 Sep 78-14 Sep 78 F/G 1-week 78-12R 18 Sep 78-13 Oct 78 DMSC 4- week 78-13R 18 Sep 78-15 Dec 78 IDMC 13- week

198 GRADUATE STATISTICS

POSTGRADUATE SCHOOL STATISTICS GRADUATES BY YEARS

1946- 1951- 1956- 1961- 1966- 1971- 1950 1955 1960 1965 1970 1975 1976 Total

Bachelor of Arts 180 389 349 1 919 B.S. in Aeronautical Engineering 73 212 212 181 61 15 754 B.S. in Chemistry 3 3 4 9 19 B.S. in Engineering Acoustics 3 3 6 B.S. in Electrical Engineering 156 292 232 520 308 186 14 1,708 B.S. in Engineering Science 141 135 276 B.S. in Environmental Science 12 12 B.S. in Management 53 1 54 B.S. in Mechanical Engineering 43 116 52 82 53 26 5 377 B.S. in Meteorology 16 104 77 108 49 29 383 B.S. in Operations Research 49 63 5 117 B.S. in Physics 15 36 75 35 19 2 182 B.S. in Systems Technology 4 4 Bachelor of Science 56 94 583 259 210 4 1,206

Total Baccalaureate Degrees 288 795 706 1,797 1,349 1,044 38 6,017

A. in National Security Affairs 23 33 56 S. in Aeronautical Engineering 40 115 224 50 429 S. in Applied Science 12 12 S. in Chemistry 16 5 32 16 69 S. in Computer Science 34 139 30 203 S. in Computer Systems Management 22 247 294 38 601 S. in Electrical Engineering 75 154 124 190 318 345 62 1,268 S. in Engineering Acoustics 13 37 11 61 S. in Management 406 633 964 137 2,140 S. in Material Science 5 9 14 S. in Mechanical Engineering 20 36 48 49 99 132 23 407 S. in Meteorology 23 19 40 53 53 126 7 321 S. in Oceanography 119 179 17 315 S. in Meteorology and Oceanography 4 4 S. in Operations Research 63 305 549 67 984 S. in Physics 25 104 135 124 102 16 506 S. in Systems Technology 19 26 45

ster of Science 17 65 102 5G 25 1 266

Total Master's Degrees 118 251 397 1,070 2,157 3,174 534 7,701

Aeronautical Engineer 4 33 45 4 86 Electrical Engineer 40 64 9 113 Mechanical Engineer 6 25 5 36

Doctor of Philosophy 1 14 25 38 6 84

Total Degrees 1,046 1,104 2,885 3,610 1,390 596 14,037

199 '

INDEX

Academic Standards 15 Engineering Electronics 48 Accreditation 15 Engineering Science 56 Admission Procedures 13 Meteorology 57 Aviation Safety Programs 105 National Security Affairs 65 Calendar 2 Naval Engineering 61 Catalogue; how to order \ 13 Naval Intelligence 63 Certificate of Completion 18 Oceanography 60 Civilian Education Program 21 Operations Research /Systems Computer Facilities 23 Analysis 70 Continuing Education Program 22 Systems Acquisition Course Descriptions Management 34 Administrative Science Service 82 Telecommunications Systems 52 Aeronautics 97 Underwater Acoustics 77

Aviation Safety 1 06 Weapons Systems Science 76 Biology 117 Weapons Systems Technology 75 Chemistry 191 Curricular Offices 27 Computer Science 109 Administrative Science 29 Computer Systems Management 84 Aeronautical Engineering 37 Defense Communications 118 Antisubmarine Warfare 41 Electrical Engineering 118 Computer Technology 44 Management 85 Electronics & Communications 48 Materials 145 Environmental Sciences 57

Mathematics 1 33 Naval Engineering 61 Mechanical Engineering 141 Naval Intelligence/National Meteorology 148 Security Affairs 63 National Security Affairs 153 Operations Research/Systems

Oceanography 1 63 Analysis 70 Operations Analysis 169 Weapons Engineering 74 OA Service 174 Defense Resources Management Physics 182 Education Center 195 Probability & Statistics 177 Degree Requirements Science & Engineering 193 General 15 Systems Acquisition Management ... 93 Aeronautics 95 Systems Technology 103, 128 Applied Science Telecommunications Systems 82, 116, 132, 140, 168, 181 Management 84 Computer Science 108 Curricula at Other Universities 79 Computer Systems Management .... 82 Curricula at the Electrical Engineering 116 Postgraduate School 27 Engineering Acoustics 130 Administrative Science Management 82

(Management, Material, Mathematics 1 32 Procurement, Systems Inventory, Mechanical Engineering 140 Financial, Manpower/Personnel, Meteorology 147, 162 Human Resources) 29 National Security Affairs 152 Aeronautical Engineering 37 Oceanography 147, 162 Air-Ocean Science 58 Operations Research 169 Antisubmarine Warfare 41 Physics 180 Command, Control and Systems Technology 103, 128 3 Communications (C ) 43 Departments Communications Engineering 49 Administrative Sciences 80 Computer Science 45 Aeronautics 94 Computer Systems 44 Antisubmarine Warfare Group 103 Electronic Warfare Engineering 49 Computer Science 108 Electronic Warfare Systems 51 Electrical Engineering 114

200 1

Electronic Warfare Group 128 Graduate Statistics 199

Mathematics 131 History of the Postgraduate School ... 1 Mechanical Engineering 139 Honors, Academic 16 Meteorology 147 Information, General 11

National Security Affairs 1 52 Lecture Program 20 Oceanography 161 Libraries 25 Operations Research 1 67 Monterey Peninsula 13 Physics & Chemistry 179 Organization and Functions of the Dependent Information 13 Postgraduate School 11 Distinguished Alumni 5 Preparatory Courses 15 Facilities at the Postgraduate Students and Dependent School 12 Information 13 Foundation, Naval Postgraduate Superintendent's Staff 4 School 19 Textbooks 13 General Information 11 Transfer of Credit 14

*U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 790/517-1977

201